EDUCARE - University of South Africa

EDUCARE
Journal of the Faculty of Education
Editor
ProfWFSoÈhnge
Editorial staff
Prof G D Kamper
Dr L Higgs
Dr C Meier
Dr J D Rossouw
Mr M Sarakinsky
Dr A van Schalkwyk
Dr W A van Schoor
Editorial advisers
Prof P Higgs (University of South Africa)
Prof S Weeks (University of Botswana)
Correspondence:
Prof WF SoÈhnge
EDUCARE
University of South Africa
PO Box 392
Pretoria
2003
Republic of South Africa

(iii)
Educare
Volume 30 (1+2) 2001
(v)
Editor's Page/Redaksioneel
1 Why philosphy for children in South Africa?
P Higgs & L Higgs
14 The globalisation debate and implications for higher education
E Lemmer
33 A survey and appraisal of progressive education in the USA
I A Coetzer
50 Let's revisit competence-based teacher education
WJ Fraser
73 A survey and appraisal of Outcomes-based Education (OBE) in
South Africa
IA Coetzer
94 A Historical-educational perspective of urbanisation and its
contribution to the street child phenomenon in South Africa
C le Roux
115 Preparing South African educators for school-familycommunity
partnerships
NvanWyk
140 Recognition of prior learning - a few words of caution
MM Nieman
165 Die bepaling van 'n realistiese prestasievlak
GBester
185 Sportsielkunde as komponent in die opleidingsprogram van
vakonderwysers
J G le Roux & GE Pienaar

(iv)
208 The Swiss missionaries' educational endeavour as a means for
social transformation in South Africa
BMC Masumbe and IA Coetzer
229 Coping skills for street children
HM Vogel
249 Adolescent substance abuse: perspectives on club drugs
SM Hoberg
272 The issue of perception: some educational implications
ALewis
289 Educational change: is it possible
JA Slabbert
306 The internet as an important instrument in training and learning
in distance education Ð a cursory review
FJ Pretorius
326 Professional portfolio building Ð alternative assessment strategy
in teacher education
PH du Toit
345 Appendix A

(v)
Editor's page
The articles in this number of EDUCARE present a scope of
research which includes philosophical, theoretical as well as
empirical considerations, all of importance to educational theory
and schooling.
Volume 30 of EDUCARE appears against a background of 30
years' existence during which time span some 349 articles were
published. The spectrum of themes covers theoretical and
practical issues indicative of the discipline of education and its
various sub-disciplines. The original intention was explained by
the first editor, Prof JD Vrey, in volume 1, 1972 as follows:
The faculty wishes to provide information for its students about the
content, theories, views and approaches to pedagogics as a particular
form of practising science.
Since 1972 this policy was adhered to according to changes and
developments related to scientific-scholarly endeavours in the
field of education. It should be mentioned that the following
lecturers made valuable contributions as editors to the existence
of EDUCARE: Proff. JD Vrey (1972±1976), CJG Kilian (1977±
1979), TL Verster (1980±1983), PC van Wyk (1984). Since 1985 the
present editor is serving in this capacity.
In 1994 a full democracy was constituted in South Africa. The
following editorial comment from that year's edition of EDU-
CARE is still the basic editorial tenor of the journal:
Critical theoretical self-reflection coupled with differential theoretical
thought processes made possible by a multitheoretical and multi-

(vi)
disciplinary frame of reference, opens up educational vistas and
theoretical discourses.
In a universe of infinity all dimensions of human life, all domains
of society, in fact the universe in its totality and in all its parts,
are displaying the evidence of a fundamental process of change,
development and re-organisation. Educational reflective considerations
are confronted by the development of meta-theoretical
analyses about anthropological and epistemological notions
which are paradigm related and will exert fundamental influence
on educational thought, theory and practice. The status of
knowledge and schooling in view of lifelong learning is reflected
upon. Society is informatised at a tempo which gives an
indication of the influence of information technology.
The journal wishes to provide for a forum where such issues and
serious questions are dealt with in view of scholarship and
schooling within the parameters of the editorial policy.
The editorial policy is to publish research and review articles about
issues relevant to the theory and practice of any field of education.
Contributions are submitted to a review process whereby issues (e.g.
relevancy and formulation of problem), content (e.g. context, discussion,
originality) and presentation (e.g. style, language and technical
editing) are taken into account in accordance with internationally
accepted criteria.

Why philosophy for children in South Africa? 1
Why philosophy
for children in
South Africa?
Philip Higgs
Department of Educational
Studies
Unisa
Leonie Higgs
Department of Secondary
School Teacher Education
Unisa
One of the most immediate challenges confronting education in South Africa at present
is the establishment of a democratic ethos and a culture of human rights supported by
educational programmes and practices conducive to critical discourse and experimental
thinking, cultural tolerance, and a common commitment to a humane, nonracist and
nonsexist social order. With this challenge in mind, we set about exploring in this article
the educational possibilities of the Philosophy for Children programme that was
developed in the United States by Matthew Lipman, and which encourages the
development of critical thinking and social skills.
1 INTRODUCTION
Over the past six years, South African society has been set on the road
to becoming a democratic society. This transformation has far reaching
implications for educational thought and practice, and especially for
educational discourse and the role that it can play in laying the
foundations of a critical civil society. The present ANC led government

2
has advocated an educational discourse conducive to critical thinking
as an integral part of its education programme and of its drive to life
long learning. In this article we reflect on the Philosophy for Children
programme initiated by Matthew Lipman and argue that the philosophy
behind Lipman's programmes could contribute to those attempts
being made to lay the foundations of a critical civil society in postapartheid
South Africa.
2 THE CURRICULUM IN EDUCATION IN SOUTH
AFRICA AND CRITICAL THINKING
There is a plethora of literature that vividly depicts how the Bantu
Education and Department of Education and Training (DET) system
was used by the apartheid government to perpetuate rote learning and
passive acceptance of ``the facts''. There are many examples, both overt
and covert (hidden curriculum), that illustrate ways in which apartheid
education tried to maintain and reinforce the status quo. It would
not be an exaggeration to state that this apartheid education system not
only encouraged the idea of the passive learner, but also actively
discouraged critical thinking.
The call for critical thinking to be centrally integrated into the
curriculum is not a new one. The importance of critical thinking has for
a long time been associated with an alternative curriculum and was
articulated in South Africa as early as 1986 in the demand for ``People's
Education''. Although couched in a different discourse, the youth, then
organised under the Congress of South African Students (COSAS), in
demanding ``People's Education'', were challenging the hegemonic
and oppressive syllabus which characterised the Department of
Education and Training (DET) curriculum. Father Smangaliso
Mkatshwa, in defining people's education, referred to it as an
education ``which prepares people for total human liberation; one
which helps people to be creative, to develop a critical mind, to help
people analyse; one that prepares people for full participation in all
social, political, or cultural spheres''.
In direct contrast to the previous apartheid government, the ANC led
Government has advocated an educational discourse that will be

Why philosophy for children in South Africa? 3
directed at supporting a culture of human rights by educational
programs and practices conducive to critical discourse and experimental
thinking, cultural tolerance, and a common commitment to a
humane, nonracist and nonsexist social order ± (see White Paper on
Higher Education Transformation, 1997:7). It has also incorporated
critical thinking skills as an integral part of its education programme
and of its drive towards lifelong learning. This is clearly articulated in
many policy documents, such as the National Basic Education and
Training Framework (1995:1), which states that ``(a)dult basic education
and training have been successfully used and can be used to help
promote the principles of cooperation, critical thinking, and civic
responsibility and equip people for participation in a high skills
economy and society as a whole''.
It is not only at the level of Adult Basic Education and Training (ABET)
that the developing of critical thinking is taken seriously. At the other
end of the education continuum, the National Qualifications Framework
(NQF) in the White Paper 3 Programme for the Transformation of
Higher Education [August 1997:6], lists as a major goal for higher
education, ``the production of graduates with the skills and competencies
that build the foundations for lifelong learning, including
critical, analytical, problem-solving and communication skills, as well
as the ability to deal with change and diversity and in particular, the
tolerance of different views and ideas. (SAQA Bulletin vol 1, no 1,
May/June 1997, and NSB Regulations, March 1998)
3 WHAT IS THE PHILOSOPHY FOR CHILDREN
PROGRAMME?
The promotion of critical thinking skills in education has been
addressed extensively (see, for example, Peticolas 1998:24±37; Ikuenobe
1998:73±94; Puolimatka 1998:44±60; Ennis 1998:15±33; Hare
1998:38±51; Higgs 1999:121±142; Daniels 1998:79±82). In these instances,
the concern is with getting learners to think critically, which is
perceived to be the primary object of critical thinking in the classroom.
In fact, Hare (1998:39) argues that critical thinking has received far
more attention in the recent past than any other educational aim and is
now widely though not universally viewed as an ideal which should

4
transform the manner of teaching and the learning of learners. Of the
many attempts at promoting critical thinking in the classroom, the
Philosophy for Children programme has over he past few decades
made a significant contribution to the establishment of a critical culture
in the school curriculum worldwide (see, for example, Splitter 2000;
Cam 1999).
Philosophy for Children is a well-known programme created by an
American philosopher, Matthew Lipman who has written extensively
on the subject of critical thinking and social skills in school context
(see, for example, Lipman 1980;1988; 1992; 1996). Philosophy for
Children is an attempt to take the discipline of philosophy and
reconstruct it for children in such a way that they can appropriate the
concepts and methods and come to think for themselves about matters
of importance and care about doing so. With its curriculum that ranges
from day care centre age to 18 years of age, it aims to acquaint children
with the tools that are required to think well about their own thinking
while at the same time discussing philosophical issues that arise in
their own experience. The focus is on the doing of philosophy rather
than learning about philosophical systems or specific philosophers of
the past. One will find most of the ideas of the major philosophers of
the West, and some of the East and African presented in a dialogical
mode that encourages children to think for themselves about the
meaning of these ideas.
Various versions of the Philosophy for Children programme for
different levels, from preschool to secondary school, use group
discussion techniques to help learners consider such philosophical
ideas by means of a process of inquiry, inductive reasoning and the
nature of explanation through stories that are focussed on everyday
events and problems. The programme is also structured to encourage
logical and reasonable thinking as well as probing questions from
ethics, metaphysics, aesthetics and epistemology. In this sense, Cairns
(1994:44) observes that, philosophy practised in Philosophy for
Children programmes, allows children to operate in a complex world,
where the need for discussion, problem solving, making choices,
listening to others, taking initiatives, and understanding their own

Why philosophy for children in South Africa? 5
beliefs, is essential. In the light of this, Lipman (1995:69±70) argues that
philosophy needs to be made an integral part of primary and
secondary school education in order to help children think for
themselves so they can discover the rudiments of their own philosophy
of life and develop a more secure sense of their own identities (in Le
Buis, Schleifer and Caron 1993:77).
Le Buis (1993:77) notes that the Philosophy for Children programme
was developed during the 1970's and 1980's to address the low level of
thinking skills exhibited by university and secondary school learners in
the United States. A programme of studies in Philosophy for Children
from grade one upwards was based on eight novels with accompanying
instructional manuals to assist the teacher in extracting the
philosophical issues from the novels the children choose to read. In so
doing, Laird (1993:39) points out that the Philosophy for Children
programme makes thinking skills explicit in that students are exposed
to numerous philosophical, social and personal problems related to
everyday occurrences in their life world. The object of the exercise,
however, is not to seek for ultimate answers to these problems but
rather, that in being confronted with such everyday problems one
exercises judgement by weighing all the considerations, and then
arriving at an answer based on consensual agreement.
4 THINKING AND PROBLEM SOLVING
In the Philosophy for Children programme, critical thinking is
inextricably linked to problem solving. In short, critical thinking is said
to involve thinking well in the attempt to solve problems. In this
regard, Lipman (1995:22) makes a distinction between thinking and
thinking well and he believes it is the school's role to encourage
children to think better. Sprod (1995:24) argues that good thinking is
holistic and being a good thinker is more than being good at a number
of individual thinking skills.
As for the exercising of holistic thinking, Lipman (1995:64±67)
comments on the trio of modes of applied thinking and judgement as
follows:

6
4.1 Critical thinking
This mode of thinking is mainly rule-governed and is devoted to
problem-finding and problem-solving. It is highly inquisitive thinking
and extremely deliberative, continually examining and weighing
alternatives in the light of explicit standards and criteria. Critical
thinking is often justificatory, devising reasons and arguments for
particular opinions and conclusions. Critical thinking is conducive to
judgement, self-corrective and sensitive to context.
4.2 Creative thinking
Critical thinking is rule-guided and creative thinking need not be ruleguided
but could be rule-defiant. Critical thinking is mainly expressed
in linguistic utterances where language is one media through which
creative thinking can choose to express itself. A person can also think
creatively in any artistic medium i.e. stone, wood, paint, tones words
etc. Critical thinking employs criteria on an individual basis whereas
creative thinking employs contrasting criteria all at once. Creative
thinking is more concerned with the creation of meaning than with the
discovery of truth.
The two major modes of creative thinking are invention and discovery.
If we refer to the works of arts and crafts we have to refer to the various
forms of intelligent discovery of that world, and intelligent discovery
is a form of creative thinking.
Lipman (1995:66) postulate that it would be incorrect to put creative
thinking in the same category as aesthetic criticism, as aesthetic
criticism cannot function effectively without appealing to reasons,
criteria and standards, and therefore it is an enclave to critical
thinking. Creative thinking may employ reasons and criteria without
appealing to them.
4.3 Caring thinking
Lipman (1995:66±67) says there may seem to be a discrepancy between
doing as a mode of active judgement and caring as a mode of thinking.
He also refers to doing and caring on the one hand, and evaluation and

Why philosophy for children in South Africa? 7
cognitive objective thinking on the other hand. It is important to
distinguish evaluative thinking from valuative thinking. Evaluative
thinking involves asking why something is valued and valuative
thinking employs the values in the thinking. As Lipman (1995:67)
claims, valuing is not so much a way of analysing as a way of caring
(Lipman, 1995:67).
Lipman (1995:69) also refers further to active thinking and affective
thinking as ways of caring thinking. By our actions we demonstrate
what it is we care about and to what extent. The movements of our
body, body language, aggressive actions refer to active thinking.
Affective thinking also refers to emotions as forms of judgement.
Nussbaum (in Lipman, 1995:67) says that emotions are a kind of
thought and like any thought they can go wrong. Therefore emotions
are not merely the psychological consequences of human judgements
but they are those judgements themselves.
As regards the practise of judgement, Lipman (1997:70±71) identifies
some of the aspects of the Philosophy for Children programme which
correlates with the following aspects of thinking ie:
. Philosophy for Children is presented in narrative form ± as
novels, short stories and/or comic strips. This fictional
approach with fictional children presented as members of a
community of philosophical inquiry is able to combine
critical, creative and caring thinking by presenting models of
reasoning and feeling, of evaluating and valuing, of inventing
and discovering.
. The skills cultivated by doing philosophy are vital for early
education. These include inquiry skills, reasoning skills,
concept-formation skills and translation skills.
. The pedagogy by which children do philosophy is that of the
community of inquiry. This means that the cognitive
practices outlined in the fictional model can be put into
actual practice in the classroom.

8
. The classroom community of philosophical inquiry can be
preparatory microcosm not only for further stages in formal
education but for one's later life as a participating member of
ademocraticsociety.
The exercise of critical thinking in the solving of problems is, therefore,
seen to be developed in a communitarian context which is encompassed
in the notion of a classroom community on inquiry.
5 PHILOSOPHY FOR CHILDREN AND THE
CLASSROOM COMMUNITY OF INQUIRY
Philosophy for Children employs a pedagogy called a ``community of
inquiry'' which has its roots in the Socratic method and whose title is
borrowed from the American philosopher Charles Peirce. The community
of inquiry involves the claim that deliberative and collaborative
communities are exceptional in their ability to foster critical,
creative and caring thinking leading to sounder reasoning, understanding
and judgement. Participation in a community of inquiry is not
only a journey in self-discovery but in self-creation and world-creation.
Children learn, as Sharp (1994:4) notes, how to ask themselves what
kind of citizens they would like to be or what kind of worlds they
would like to live in before making judgements.
The creation of a community of inquiry, according to Wilks (1994:1),
has dialogue at the centre of its methodology and tolerance of other's
opinions as central aim. At the same time, Wilks identifies the
following skills which are encompassed by this dialogical approach:
. participants view each other as rational and reasoning
persons who value the process of the enquiry
. reasons for views being expected and respected are seen as
part of the dialogical process, and
. participants are expected to be self-critical and self-corrective.
These skills ultimately develop with practice and enrich programmes
which foster philosophical enquiry.

Why philosophy for children in South Africa? 9
Furthermore, children create opportunities to discover values in their
own classroom communities of inquiry. In these communities they can
clarify for themselves concepts such as freedom, rights, personhood,
truth, common good, community, justice. Such a community of inquiry
is, therefore, also a social enterprise that enables children with
different backgrounds to make their voices heard. It is, as Sharp
(1995:48) concludes, pluralistic in nature in that it encourages a
plurality of perspectives and interests instead of a monopoly of one
perspective or point of view. The community of inquiry aims at the
transformation of persons and changing one's perceptions of how one
relates to the world and to other people. In this regard, the aim is
always, Sharp (1994:4) asserts, to create something better ± that is more
just, more reasonable, more beautiful than we had before.
Lipman (1998:277) also stresses the importance of recognizing that the
Philosophy for Children programme and its pedagogy can contribute
to improving the quality of life in a democratic society. Philosophy for
Children programmes produce higher order thinking amongst learners
and it does so by distributed thinking in the community of inquiry
classroom. Distributed thinking and higher order thinking are
characteristic of the citizens in those societies that exhibit a higherquality
democracy. Education for higher order thinking is quality
education for all, and the criteria by means of which it is identified are
critical thinking, creative thinking and caring thinking. According to
Lipman (1998:277), distributed thinking also refers to ``shared cognition''.
For example, a classroom discussion can be an example of
distributed thinking because the learners of the class answer one
another's questions, emulate others' questions, build on one another's
inferences and so on.
6 THE STRENGTHS OF THE PHILOSOPHY FOR
CHILDREN PROGRAMME IN A PEDAGOGICAL
CONTEXT
Sharp (1995:45±46) identifies the following as the strengths of the
Philosophy for Children programme for pedagogical endeavour in that
it promotes:

10
. ethical inquiry: engaging children in investigation of problems
dealing with the role of moral values and norms in
human conduct
. aesthetic inquiry: engaging children in exploring problematic
issues that involve the relationship between artistic creation,
aesthetic appreciation and aesthetic criticism
. metaphysical inquiry: encouraging children to reach for
greater and greater generality in their understanding of the
world and its working
. logical inquiry: engaging children in reflection on the rules of
inquiry and whatever principle are appealed to when
thinking about thinking
. epistemological inquiry: havingchildrentoseektoanswer
questions such as ``What counts for truth?'' and ``What is the
relationship between truth and meaning?''
These forms of inquiry are directed at applied thinking in the
endeavour to exercise sound judgement in the act of thinking well.
Reasoning and judgement are ideally what educational institutions of
an ideal democracy should cultivate. Citizens of a democracy, as
Lipman (1998:277) states, need to acquire the ability to judge the advice
of the expert with regard to information.
Doing philosophy as advocated in the programme for Philosophy for
Children provides children with a rigorous methodology of linguistic
and logical analysis which will stand them in good stead as they
assume more responsibility in society. However, doing philosophy
well involves more than conceptual clarity. It also involves oral
imagination and insight. It requires a sharpened eye to distinguish
what is from what ought to be. Doing philosophy within the context of
a community of inquiry acquaints children with the repertoire of
distinctively philosophical concepts that are important to children, but
not dealt with specifically by other disciplines in the existing school
curriculum. Examples of such concepts are justice, personhood,
freedom, democracy, friendship, self and identity. These concepts are
used over and over again in textbooks, but rarely are children prepared

Why philosophy for children in South Africa? 11
or encouraged to ferret out for themselves the underlying assumptions
of the author with regard to such concepts. In most cases, as Sharp
(1994:10) observes, authorial presence is disregarded in favour of
information for children to memorise.
It is in this sense that the practise of philosophy in the programme of
Philosophy for Children is liberating; it liberates the child from the
possibility of being no more than an unaware pawn in the system of the
written, printed and spoken word. The programme allows children to
recognise when anyone in authority is using an unexamined philosophical
concept and to question assumptions that are being made with
regard to its meaning.
From an educational point of view, the classroom community of
philosophical inquiry is consequently the most efficient way of
bringing about dialogue with others and with the self about matters of
importance while at the same time strengthening reasoning and
fostering collaborative inquiry and good judgement. If philosophy is as
the ancient Greeks claimed `a love of wisdom', and if one thinks of the
doing of philosophy as advocated in the programme of Philosophy for
Children, as a conversation in which all voices ought to be heard, then
such a practice would embody a respect for the dignity of each
individual in the group however diverse, while at the same time serve
the end of liberating children to think for themselves about matters of
importance. In such a context, Philosophy for Children is a social
enterprise that enables children with different backgrounds to make
their voices heard. In a word, it is pluralistic: it encourages a plurality
of perspectives and interests instead of the monopoly of one. But it
does not encourage the view that one opinion is as good as another.
The challenge of the communal inquiry is to embrace a wide range of
disparate and often conflicting views and forge out of them new
perspectives and horizons.
To be a participant in a community of inquiry is to learn to see oneself
in relation to the other and to reflect on thoughts that are other ± to that
which is not oneself. The different, the foreign, the unique is to be
sought out, appraised and understood. This assumes the ability to see

12
the world from the other's point of view. Such collaborative deliberation,
according to Sharp (1994:12) opens the child up to the pull of
ideals which find expression in love, goodness, beauty, freedom and
justice.
7 CONCLUSION
The authors believe that the Philosophy for Children programme can
make a positive contribution to attempts at transforming the education
curriculum in South Africa. This programme will offer an appropriate
framework to foster an authentic reflective educational practice in
South Africa directed at laying the foundations of a critical civil
society. Global change also, challenges us to devise new values and to
reflect on the fundamental issues of how we live. In other words what
are our ultimate values and what do we take as our goals in life? What
kind of society do we wish to establish in order to reflect these values
and goals? If we don't start reflecting seriously on these issues we are
likely to be led by forces of the free market into a direction that will be
individually unsatisfying and collectively self-defeating. Also, the
process of education in a democracy is a process of developing citizens
and this process covers such issues as our ability to think, reason, make
sound judgements and converse, and their relation to each other. In
short, teaching children how to think well and make good judgements
are central to the civic education of children in any democracy. And in
this context, the programme of Philosophy for Children would be seen
as a significant agent in the promotion and development of such
critical thinking and social skills for democratic citizenship.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Cairns, C & Wilks, S. March 1994. ``A PMI on including philosophy in teacher training
and primary curriculum''. Critical and Creative Thinking, Vol 2(1).
Cam, P, Cha, I, Tamthaia, M & Reyes, R (eds) 1999. Philosophy, culture and education. The
Asia-Pacific Philosophy of Education Network for Democracy and Korean
National Commission for UNESCO.
Daniels, L R. 1998. Some critical thinking concepts revisited. Prospero, 4(2).
Department of Education. 1995. National Basic Education and Training Framework.

Why philosophy for children in South Africa? 13
Department of Education. 1997. White Paper on Higher Education Transformation.
Ennis, R H. Is critical thinking culturally biased? Teaching Philosophy, 21(1).
Hare, W. 1998. Critical thinking as an aim of education. Inquiry, 18(2).
Higgs, P. 1999. A reconstruction of South African philosophy of education. Interchange,
30(2).
Ikuenobe, P. 1998. Communtarianism, Liberalism and an epistemic view of critical
thinking. Inquiry, 18(1).
Laird, R. March 1993. ``Philosophy for Children in remote Aboriginal communities''.
Critical and Creative Thinking. Vol 1(1).
Le Buis, P, Schleifer, M, Caron, A & Daniel, M. 1993. ``Learning to think: philosophical
instruction and reflective educational practice''. The Alberta Journal of Educational
Research. Vol 34 (1).
Lipman, M. 1980. Philosophy in the classroom. Philadelphia: Temple University Press.
Lipman, M. 1988. Philosophy goes to school. Philadelphia: Temple University Press.
Lipman, M. 1991. Thinking in education. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Lipman, M. 1996. Natasha: Vygotskian dialogues. New York: Teachers College Press.
Lipman, M. 1998. ``Teaching students to think reasonably: some findings of the
Philosophy for Children Program''. Clearing House, Vol 71 (5).
Lipman, M. 1995. ``Moral education higher-order thinking and philosophy for children''.
Early Child Development and Care, Vol 107.
Peticolas, A P. 1998. The necessity of a critical dialogic framework for teaching. Inquiry,
18(2).
Puolimatka, T. 1998. Democracy, critical citizens and manipulation. Inquiry, 18(1).
South African Qualification Authority Bulletin, 1997. 1(1).
Sharp, A M. 1994. ``The religious dimension of Philosophy for Children''. Critical and
Creative Thinking, Vol 2 (1).
Sharp, A M. 1995. ``Philosophy for Children and the development of ethical values''.
Early Child Development and Care, Vol 107.
Splitter, LJ. 2000. `Philosophy for Children: perspectives on children's thinking' in, M
Robertson and R Reyes (eds.) The child's world: triggers to learning. Melbourne:
ACER Press.
Sprod, T. 1995. ``Cognitive development, philosophy and children's literature''. Early
Child Development and Care, Vol 107.
Wilks, S. 1994. ``Encouraging pupil participation: practical ways of establishing a
community of enquiry''. Critical and Creative Thinking, Vol 2(2).

14
The globalisation debate
and implications for
higher education
Eleanor Lemmer
Department of Further Teacher
Education
Unisa
Globalisation has become the buzz word of the new millennium. It is frequently
presented as an inevitable economic process which is beneficial for most with little
interrogation of the construct. However, globalisation is a highly contested concept with
not only economic but far-reaching social and cultural dimensions as well. This article
outlines the debate surrounding globalisation and its possible effect in domains such as
the economy, the political domain, communication and cultural forms, issues of equality
and the world order. Furthermore the implications of globalisation as a driver of change in
education are discussed with reference to higher education. Globalisation has been
linked to the performative role of higher education, new modes of knowledge production
to suit a global economy and the impact of information technologies on learning and
research. Finally conclusions are drawn about the current and future demand for higher
education worldwide.
1 INTRODUCTION
Globalisation has been touted as a major driver of change in the
development of education in general and higher education in
particular. The contemporary university reflects radical shifts in form
and function in a global environment (Barnett 2000:114). Some
observers of change in higher education have described the university

The globalisation debate and implications for higher education 15
as a contested institution threatened by globalising forces; other
maintain that the university remains a robust institution in spite of dire
predictions as to its future in a global environment (Scott 2000:1). This
article points out the complexity of the concept of globalisation and
identifies, characterises and clarifies some of the debates surrounding
the phenomenon. Against this background, the implications of the
multiple effects of globalisation on higher education are discussed in
terms of the role of the university in a global economy; new modes of
knowledge production and the impact of information technology on
learning and research. These developments are important influences on
the demand for higher education in future.
2 GLOBALISATION AS A DRIVER OF CHANGE
The term globalisation has quickly assumed its place in our current
vocabulary (Robertson 1992:8), however, no single universally agreed
upon definition of globalisation exists. Moreover, the practice and
significance of globalising processes differ widely. Globalisation does
not represent the even and inevitable experience for all parts of the
world and all communities as is commonly presented by the media
(Popkewitz 2000:4). What appears a globalising process for some, is a
localising process for others (Bauman 1998:2). To some it is even a
perceived set of changes, a construct manipulated by state policy
makers to inspire support for or negate opposition to other changes
(Burbules & Torres 2000:2). Similarly various authors have quite
different views on how globalisation is affecting educational policy in
all parts of the world. Thus globalisation as a concept as well as in its
relation to education is a widely contested domain and conflicting
schools of thought should inevitably mark any discussion of globalisation.
2.1 The problem of conceptualising globalisation
A crude version of the complex debate surrounding globalisation,
would involve the globalists who regard globalisation as a dramatic
new interrogation of established paradigms, and the sceptics who
dismiss its significance (Held & McGrew 2000:2). In practice a variety
of positions on the sceptic-globalist continuum occur and this, together

16
with insights emanating from different disciplinary strands, adds to
the richness of the debate. The main areas of discussion with regard to
global processes can broadly be seen in terms of reconfigurations of the
economy, the political domain, communication and cultural forms,
issues of equality and the world order. With reference to these
domains, globalists argue that the globalising process is marked by
interconnectedness and the consequent displacement of time and
space; global informational capitalism and a transnational economy;
the erosion of the nation-state; an emerging global popular culture
facilitated by a global communications network; growing inequality
between nations and mutilayered global governance. Conversely the
sceptics interrogate these positions as is illustrated in the ensuing
sections. However, the brevity of the following description of the
debate runs the risk of an over-simplified dichotomous account of
globalisation. Notwithstanding the literature shows that the polemic is
extremely extensive, complex, ambiguous and shifting (Burbules &
Torres 2000:13).
2.2 Globalisation and the economy
Globalisation is most popularly associated with the economy. Economic
globalisation is usually seen to be the core of globalising
processes in general with the economic factor construed as the main
driver of globalisation (Edwards & Usher 2000:17). Certainly certain
world economic trends are unmistakable, irrespective of the significance
given to them by different observers. Global economic restructuring
since the late seventies demonstrates the following features (cf
Burbules & Torres 2000:6):
1 An international division of labour and economic integration
which is marked by new exchange relations and arrangements.
2 Greater importance of the production of information and
services, especially in developed countries, over that of
manufacturing functions.
3 The replacement of the hourly wage by piecework remuneration
and short term contract work; a weakening of the power
of unions and the waning of capital labour conflict.

The globalisation debate and implications for higher education 17
4 A shift from the Fordist model of production to one marked by
increased flexibility and the speedy movement of goods and
information from one place to another.
5 The growing importance of capital-intensive production
leading to the redundancy and de-skilling of large sections of
the workforce and an increase of part-time and home-based
workers.
6 An ever-increasing gap developing between more developed
and less developed countries.
The debate around economic restructuring focuses on four basic issues:
the extent to which economic activity is being globalised; the new form
of capitalism which is sweeping the globe; the extent to which
economic globalisation is subject to proper national and international
controls and the threat posed by global competition to national
economic strategy and the welfare state. The globalists maintain that
contemporary global economic interaction has assumed a historically
unprecedented scale and size. Global production by multi-nationals
(currently about 600 corporations) controls 25% of the world's
economy and 80% of the world's trade (Burbules & Torres 2000:7).
Migration of labour is increasingly globalised and national economies
are deeply enmeshed in global systems of production and exchange.
Global financial integration produces a convergence in interest rates
and economic crises with the result that national economies no longer
operate as autonomous systems of wealth creation as the importance of
global economic activity supersedes the latter. The global economy has
become a capitalist global economy that is organised on the basis of
market principles and production for profit. This has brought about a
new global division of labour in which multinationals out-source
manufacturing production to newly industrialised and transition
economies, thus reorganising developing countries into winners and
losers. As global competition increases, governments are unable to
maintain existing levels of social protection or welfare state programmes.
In contrast, the sceptical school holds a more cautious interpretation of
the contemporary global economic trends mentioned above. The latter,

18
it is argued, only reflect a limited degree of economic and financial
integration (Held & McGrew 2000:18). The integration of the global
economy is seen as mainly between the major Organisation for
Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD) countries to the
exclusion of most of the rest of the world. Far from a globalisation of
the economy the sceptics see a growing regionalisation of economic
activity around three blocs: Europe, Asia-Pacific and the Americas.
They deny the prevalence of a global capitalism and argue that even
the activity of multinationals is rooted in and dependent on local and
national economic conditions.
2.3 Globalisation and the political domain
The emergence and importance of globalising economic processes have
led to the questioning of the competence of the nation state to govern
and the definition of what constitutes a civil society (Popkewitz
2000:8). Globalists argue that the nation state in late modernity is no
longer a unitary phenomenon with a set of singular purposes (Claassen
2000:28). Instead due to the pressure exercised by transnational
networks, such as the United Nations (UN) and its specialised
agencies, international lobbies and social movements (eg the Green
movement), the state has become a splintered policy-making arena.
Sovereignty has become a shared exercise on many levels due to the
power of intergovernmental organisations which displace national
interests and boundaries. The most common example of the latter is the
European Union (EU) which represents a novel system of governance
where sovereignty over a number of common issues is pooled. In other
parts of the world, particularly in the Asia-Pacific, interregional
groupings are also emerging. Military arrangements, the manufacture
of military hardware, the fight against organised crime and the fluid
movement of goods and services and private capital across borders is
one of the areas which creates the opportunity for greater international
cooperation. According to the globalists, these factors strengthen
global interconnectedness and lead to a weakening of the nation state.
Consequently, the sovereignty of states is displaced by regional and

The globalisation debate and implications for higher education 19
global power systems. Moreover, states cannot supply goods and
services to their own citizens without international cooperation. This,
according to the globalist position, is strong evidence of a reconfiguration
of political power (Held & Mc Grew 2000:11±14).
Adherents of a sceptical stance towards globalisation refer instead to
the powerful and omniscient position assumed by the nation-state
during the late twentieth century. According to them, at the onset of
the new millennium the modern national state system has reached a
climax and is supported by international organisations like the UN.
The modern national state characterised by a democratic-representation
democracy has become the dominant political form and is still
recognised as the basic unit of world order. Moreover, even the OECD
states rigorously exercise their sovereignty ± the entitlement to rule ±
and their autonomy ± their capacity to choose appropriate forms of
political, economic and social development. Against this background,
the sceptics contest any alleged weakening of the nation state
(Baumann 1998:73).
2.4 Globalisation, communication and cultural forms
The consolidation of the modern nation state which evolved during the
past centuries is linked to governments' endeavours to create a
national identity that legitimises state power and consolidates policy
(Popkewitz 2000:9). Among others, this was effected by the creation of
a mass education system, an effective communication system able to
disperse common ideas necessary for the development of a common
culture and the creation of an economy which allowed mobility within
a bounded system (Held & McGrew 2000:17).
In the view of the sceptics, the aspiration for national identity and
nationalism which spread from Western Europe around the world in
the last century is so powerful that it is not likely to be eroded by
transnational forces and the development of a global mass culture.
New forms of information technology only reinforce forms of national
life and intensify their impact. New flows of information may narrow
distance, but bolster difference and the awareness of ``the other''. Thus,
local and national culture remains robust. As can be expected, the

20
globalists take issue with this argument. While they acknowledge the
continued existence of national identity and cultural nationalism, they
contend that the scale, intensity, speed and volume of global cultural
communications is unprecedented and cannot be controlled by
national governments (Held & McGrew 2000:18). An outcome is a
rapid global diffusion of ideas and cultures through the linguistic
infrastructure provided by English. This embraces a range of activities,
such as a global lifestyle, global sports, increased presence of world
religions, global gambling and the global distribution of entertainment
products, to mention but a few. The diffusion of commercial culture is
driven by companies (eg McDonald, Nike, Benneton) not countries
(Burbules & Torres 2000:11). A geographic situation is less important to
workers who may seek and obtain employment virtually anywhere.
This has led to what Capella (2000:227) terms a fading citizenship.
Moreover, national identities are displaced from their rootedness in
specific localities through expanded travel and tourism. Cultural flows
together with commitment to global or regional objectives such as the
protection of the environment or human rights create an emerging
global consciousness and incipient global civil society (Held &
McGrew 2000:18, 19).
2.5 Globalisation and equality
Current economic globalisation is linked to an accelerating gap
between rich and poor nation states as well as between peoples in a
single country, within the global economy, thus shaping new global
patterns of hierarchy and inequality. This clearly signals significant
implications for the world order and global security. Here the debate is
extremely complex, even within the globalist school. Thinkers of a neoliberal
persuasion regard the creation of a single global market through
the organisation of free trade, capital mobility and global competition
as the forerunner of eventual modernisation and the development of
impoverished regions and communities. Thus, globalisation heralds a
more positive condition for a more stable world. Others regard
economic globalisation as responsible for the globalisation of poverty,
both among rich and poor nations as well as within societies.
Affluence, whether on macro or micro level, is thus determined by the

The globalisation debate and implications for higher education 21
capacity to benefit from global markets. If this argument is followed,
cosmic globalisation polarises and could create conditions for world
conflict. To avoid this, a new global agreement is needed among
nations to tame the negative forces of economic globalisation (Baghadi
2000:1).
To the sceptics who are oriented to a traditional Marxist position, the
prospect of a global solution to inequality is unrealistic. They recognise
a new deepening of global inequality due to the marginalisation of
economies who fail to match the demands of global competition. In this
world of poverty and deprivation, the affluent West through mechanisms
such as the World Bank and International Monetary Fund (IMF)
exercise inordinate control over national destinies. This process can
only be reversed by a socialist international order. Once again, other
proponents of this school reject the idea of a socialist panacea to global
inequality. Furthermore, they discount the idea of globalisation alone
as the cause of world poverty. They recognise a complexity of national
factors and global factors as contributory constituents to poverty and
consequently regard its solution to lie, albeit partially, in national
welfare systems and the pursuit of national wealth and power (Held &
McGrew 2000:20).
2.6 Globalisation and the world order
Throughout the modern period, the political good of the nation-state
has been at the centre of political relations. This view rests on the
assumption that a political community is constituted and bounded
when: its members share a common socio-cultural identity; the
members share the notion that they are a people who should govern
themselves; an institutional structure exists on the behalf of the
community; congruence exists between the governed and the government
and; members enjoy a certain kind of equitable treatment.
Globalists contest all the last-mentioned points. According to the
globalist position, the political good is no longer found in a territorial
polity but is entrenched in overlapping communities and in an
emergent transnational civil society and global polity. They point out
that individuals increasingly have complex loyalties and multi
dimensional identities as a result of the globalisation of economic and

22
cultural factors and the reconfiguration of political power. Movement
of resources and interconnectedness of political communities create an
idea of overlapping fortunes which require collective answers.
Individual communities no longer can rely only on local and national
support but also require multinational backing if they are to be
sustained and promoted. Complex economic, social and environmental
processes and international agencies affect and even alter what a
national community can ask or expect from its government. Even the
rights and duties of individuals entrenched in national constitutions
need to be underwritten by global laws and institutions (McGrew &
Held 2000:22).
2.7 Crucial characteristics of globalisation
The brief discussion serves to illustrate that globalisation is no
entrenched given as is often touted in lay circles, and the debate is
lively. Burbules & Torres (2000:2) mention that the claims of global
change may be exaggerated and more limited than argued. Yet
common ground held by protagonists on both sides of the polemic can
provide some description of a concept which is both paradoxical and
complex. Such a description could read as follows: Recent decades
have seen the growth of entrenched and persistent patterns of
worldwide interconnectedness, which have enmeshed states and
societies in worldwide systems and networks of interaction. Hence
there appears an embedding, but not displacement, of local, regional
and national orders of life in more expansive sets of interregional
relations and networks of power. Time and space have been
reconfigured since they no longer impose fixed barriers to many forms
of social interaction and organisation (Edwards & Usher 2000:19). In
addition, the process in which global and local transformations may
take place is dialectic by nature, affecting the local and global
reciprocally (Giddens 2000:92). The changing nature of communication,
the speedy diffusion of technical change and the spread of
capitalist economic development have created new interregional and
global competition in the political, economic and cultural domains
which are challenging old hierarchies and generating new inequalities
of wealthy, power privilege and knowledge. Furthermore, transna-

The globalisation debate and implications for higher education 23
tional issues call into question the traditional role, functions and
accountability of national governments. While the process does not
imply the existence of a new and harmonious world order, the
expansion of international governance at regional and global level is to
be observed. Finally, the process should not be seen as universal: it is
experienced unevenly by different communities and countries and
significant segments of the world's population are largely untouched
by its workings (Held & McGrew 2000:4; Edwards & Usher 2000:19).
3 IMPLICATIONS OF GLOBALISATION FOR HIGHER
EDUCATION
The globalisation debate has certain implications for higher education
and particularly the university. Alarmist circles have predicted the
demise of the university, the diminishing importance of scholars and
the corporatisation of research. However, at the very least, it creates
the environment in which universities must operate in the twenty first
century. Many trends in the organisational, pedagogical and technological
delivery of higher education are underway as a result of
globalisation. This section examines the impact of globalisation on
higher education institutions, primarily focusing on the changing role
of the university and of scholars who work in higher education with
particular attention to the latter's role in knowledge production. It also
considers the impact of information technology and communications
(ITC)onlearningandresearch.
3.1 Performativity and higher education
The question of how the university, in its role as producer and
transmitter of knowledge is affected by globalising processes was
highlighted as early as 1984 by Lyotard in The postmodern condition.
Among others, the processes focussed on by Lyotard were the impact
of information technology and computer-mediated communication
and their link to the idea of performativity. Lyotard regarded the
modernist paradigm as reconstructed in terms of what can contribute
best to the efficiency and effectiveness of the socio-economic system.
The task of the university is thus redefined as producing the knowledge
specifically needed by people skilled in those capacities that are

24
indispensable to the contemporary globalised system. This means
particularly the knowledge and skills needed for maintaining a
competitive edge in a cutthroat world market in conditions of
globalised capital (Lyotard 1984:xxiii).
According to Lyotard (1984:xxiii), higher education is faced with a
scepticism towards the metanarratives or foundational theories
developed during the Enlightenment. As the global economy moves
from Fordist reproduction to a consumption society focussed on
information and services, the grand functions of the university, that is,
the metanarratives of speculative unity and of emancipatory humanism
lose ground (Lyotard 1984:33). The metanarrative of speculative unity
sought to unify scientific knowledge by the master discourse of
metaphysical philosophy. This lent knowledge a legitimacy found in
itself, not in a principle of usefulness, either to the State or civil society
(Lyotard 1984:34). The metanarrative of emancipatory humanism
refers to individual freedom through knowledge, which, in turn leads
to progress (Lyotard 1984:32). But in the postmodern world of the late
twentieth and early twenty first century, these metanarratives have
become epistemologically bankrupt and thus they can no longer
legitimise science or higher education institutions.
This displacement of metanarratives permits a redefinition of knowledge:
knowledge becomes ``technically useful knowledge''. Knowledge
is exteriorised with respect to the knower while the educational
processes between learner and teacher are reconstituted as a market
relationship between producer and consumer. Knowledge is exchanged
on the basis of the value it has for the consumer, it becomes `value
added' (Lyotard 1984:4±5). The world of international relations is read
as a place where competitive advantage is based on knowledge and its
applications in the economy (Lyotard 1984:48). Consequently certain
knowledge is more important than other. Technoscience is prominent
because of economic usefulness, the creation of competitive advantage
and its translatability into information (computer) knowledge (Lyotard
1984:48).
Lyotard's observations are even more incisive than a mere concern

The globalisation debate and implications for higher education 25
about the advantages of access to certain disciplines over others. By
removing the traditional basis for legitimising knowledge, the
subjugation of science and the university to a new ideological legitimation
is possible. In this climate, the primary goal of higher education
(and of knowledge) becomes the optimal contribution to the best, the
most efficient performance of the social system. Lyotard calls this
criterion for legitimation, performativity, aptly described by Bloland
(1995:536) as ``... the capacity to deliver outputs at the lowest cost, [a
principle] which replaces truth as the yardstick of knowledge''.
Subsequently, performativity supplants the agreed upon, rational
criteria for merit and instead efficiency and effectiveness become the
exclusive criteria for judging knowledge, behaviour and social
systems. In particular, the university becomes subject to a postmodern
condition in which its historic claim to have special knowledge, to be
creating special knowledge and to be testing truth, is undermined:
``The question now asked by the professionalist student, the State or
institutions of higher education is no longer `Is it true?' but `What use
is it?' In the context of the mercantilisation of knowledge, more often
than not this question is equivalent to: `Is it saleable?' ... `Is it
efficient?' '' (Lyotard 1984:51). In effect, this removes from the
university its traditional defence against cooption by the state with
regard to its key practices: for example, the decisions affecting the
exclusion or inclusion of certain knowledge in the curriculum; the
privileging of certain fields of study; the introduction of new
management practices or new and external definitions of excellence.
Instead of competence measured by the criteria: true/false, just/
unjust, a technical game of efficiency and inefficiency is played in
which the key questions during university decision-making are: ``Is it
sellable? Is it translatable into information?''
Against this background, Lyotard (1984:xxv) predicts a bleak future for
the university which now should ``... create skills, and no longer
ideals'' (Lyotard 1984:48). The university loses its monopoly in the
production of knowledge. Instead of the acme of higher education
system, it becomes a mere component of the market made up of
innumerable competitors ± the technikon (polytechnic) which looms
supreme, private research institutes, think tanks, industrial and

26
government laboratories and corporate classrooms, to mention only a
few. Hence universities are forced increasingly to reconstruct themselves
as commercial enterprises competing in the knowledge business
(Edwards & Usher 1994:175). In this context the scholar's role shifts
from a calling requiring a cultural outlook to one which requires mere
technical expertise (Lyotard 1984:53).
3.2 Higher education's performative role in a global
economy
The traditional role of the university, namely the disinterested pursuit
of knowledge has been replaced by a view of higher education in which
universities are meant to serve society foremostly by supporting the
economy in the provision of qualified manpower and the production of
knowledge (Gibbons 1998:1). Thus governments frequently cast the
need for higher education reform in economic terms, particularly in
relation to the preparation of a workforce capable of participating in
the knowledge industry within a competitive global market. Education,
and particularly higher education, is described as the key
component of a country's ability to improve or even to maintain their
economic welfare. This is also true of South Africa which is
endeavouring to achieve national economic growth, improve employment
and alleviate poverty while establishing a position within the
southern African region and the global economy. Sharp criticism of the
higher education sector by government, business and industry has
been framed by the need to produce sufficient numbers of higher level
graduates with the cognitive and social skills and competencies needed
to make South Africa globally competitive (Council for Higher
Education 2000). As the distinction between knowledge and commodity
are collapsed, the outcomes are visible in shifts of government
funding. An analysis of higher education in four established industrial
countries (the USA, UK, Canada and Australia) shows that higher
education has indeed been directed towards national wealth creation
and away from its traditional concern with the liberal education of
undergraduates (Slaughter 1988:56).

The globalisation debate and implications for higher education 27
3.3 New modes of knowledge production
New ideas affecting teaching and learning and which type of
institution are best suited to provide education are impacting
universities worldwide, which are no longer able to determine
internally what and how students should learn. In this regard, Gibbons
(1999:4) has effectively elaborated the new knowledge paradigm and
the dilemmas that it presents to the work of higher education. In what
Gibbons has termed Mode One, knowledge production has traditionally
been based on the disciplines, which have provided the guidelines
for what counts as good science and what students need to know if
they are to become good scientists. According to the emergence of a
new Mode Two, the new mode of knowledge production and
distribution, knowledge is produced and disseminated in the context
of application. Knowledge production is multi-disciplinary and
characterised by a heterogeneity of skills. Mode Two is more socially
accountable and reflexive and requires an expanded system of quality
which is no longer dependent primarily on peer review but on a wider,
more temporary and heterogeneous set of practitioners, collaborating
on a problem defined in a specific and localised context (Gibbons
1998:5). This constitutes the major challenge to the core business of
universities ± teaching and learning and the way research is done. It
also creates the opportunity of other knowledge providers to enter the
market for students and brings into question the need for a traditional
professoriate. Similarly South African higher education has not
escaped the implications of Mode Two. The monopoly held by the
traditional higher education system is increasingly challenged by
private provision of higher education. Business and industry provide
new areas for research and the academic disciplines have been
challenged by a new outcomes based programmatic approach to
learning and teaching.
3.4 Information technology and communication and
learning
A new factor only partially realised by Lyotard in the early eighties is
the proliferation and increasing dominance of information technology
and communication in the role of knowledge production and

28
dissemination. Information technology and communication have
served to accelerate the trend towards individualised learning but not
in the traditional paradigm of liberal education (Burbules 2000:384).
Individualised learning through the transmission of electronic texts
renders the involvement of the learner more active and complex. The
authority of texts are undermined as texts become hyper texts in which
the learner becomes an author who can access information, interact
with it and with other learners without attending a traditional
institution through the use of the Internet, E-mail, CD ROMS and
hypertext. What learners require is not only disciplinary content as
prior but the ability to use and work with information technology and
communication. This goes far beyond mere technical skills such as the
ability to gather discrete bits of information but the ability to arrange
them in new ways to produce knowledge and not merely information.
This calls for the skills and competences of symbolic analysis and
creates a kind of transdisciplinary in which hitherto compartemenalised
and separate knowledge is brought together and reconfigured as
new knowledge (Edwards & Usher 2000:80). Moreover, the range of
new technologies allow academic practitioners to move from centre
stage to a ``guide on the side'' as learners increase their ability to
acquire and utilise knowledge. Synchronous and asynchronous learning
activities become possible. Synchronous activities include learning
opportunities with the lecturer present in the same or another location
to the learner. Asynchronous activities can involve accessing archived
learning material anytime and anyplace, thus breaking boundaries of
time and space (Cogburn 2000:3).
3.5 Information technology and communication and
research
The effect of information technology and communication in a
globalising environment has impacted in various ways on one of the
primary functions of the university, that is research. This has created
virtual communities of researchers placed far distant, yet marked by
some measure of collegiality and collaboration (Burbules 2000:337).
Increased collaboration has been demonstrated in the fields of
mathematics, physics, biology and chemistry. Experiments, in particular
in physics, have been conducted among large groups across the

The globalisation debate and implications for higher education 29
Internet. The speed whereby research outputs can be disseminated by
means of information technology and communications has allowed
research outputs to impact more swiftly on curriculum and pedagogy,
especially in the forms of flexible, open and distance learning (Mason
1998:27). Electronic publishing has affected the market for scholarship
in various ways. Interestingly there has been an expansion of paper
based academic and professional journals due to the cuts in production
and distribution made possible by globalising technologies. In addition,
research is distributed by means of terrestrial and satellite
television, videos, CD ROMs etc. Research conferences are more easily
attended in a globalising world of cheaper travel and more permeable
national borders. The World Wide Web has made the distribution of
papers and conference proceedings possible. Nor is this use restricted
to organisers or institutions but individual academics are creating their
own home pages where interested ``surfers'' may access their research.
Chat rooms, electronic conferencing and bulletin boards make
academic exchange almost instant in a world where time and space are
displaced (Edwards & Usher 2000:82). Finally, new methods of
collaboration result in changes in status and hierarchy among
researchers. Electronic communication affords fewer clues to status,
rank and gender than face-to-face-communication. Consequently,
discussions made by virtual groups are influenced less by the status of
the proposer of a decision or an idea; cooperation between more junior
academics and more experienced academics stimulates research and
leads to fruitful joint publications and the rates of publication are being
seen to increase (Zlatuska 1999:3).
4 CONCLUSION
While the debate surrounding globalisation should not be ignored, it is
a process that enhances the importance of knowledge and information.
Thus, it has concomitant implications for knowledge, education and
training. According to an earlier appraisal of globalisation, the
dominance of performativity as criterion for assessing higher education
endeavours and the dual impact of both the latter on higher
education tended to be pessimistic (Margarth 1999:2). However,
educationists in the late 90s have begun to see globalisation, not only

30
as a tool of destablisation, but also as an incentive to change and even
re-enchant the university, thereby restoring to it new creativity and
vigour (Davies 1999:1). In this vein, Margrath (1999:22) predicts that
the international push for mass higher education will continue well
into the twenty-first century, strengthened by the increasing availability
of virtual campuses, offshore campuses and the demand for
international education. This is corroborated by Blight, Davis &
Olsen's (2000:96) analysis of the current demand for higher education
in OECD countries. It is argued that all economies require persons who
are knowledgeable and skilled in the use of technology and that a welleducated
population is indispensable for economic growth. Secondly,
the economic value of higher education is increasingly important to
national governments which reckon it to be determining factor in
global competitiveness. Thirdly, the concept of lifelong learning is
linked to social and economic well-being. Higher education cannot
disregard the demand for lifelong learning; failure to do so is to lose its
market position. Subsequently, in a global economy higher education
institutions must market themselves as necessary elements for the
well-being of the economy in order to secure scarce funding and
resources from government, business and non-governmental agencies.
Finally under conditions of performativity, higher education appears
to be set for survival even though its scholars are considered
knowledge workers in the business of producing relevant knowledge
valorised as a tradable commodity in a global economy.
REFERENCES
Bauman, Z 1998. Globalization: The human consequences. Oxford. Polity press.
Baghadi, A 2000. Globalisation: The new invasion of the Third World. www.fav.net/
special issue on globalization.htm. Accessed on 30 May 2001.
Blight, D Davies, B & Olsen, A. 2000. The globalization of higher education. In Higher
education reformed, edited by Scott, P. London: New Millennium.
Bloland, H G 1995. Postmodernism and higher education. Journal of higher education,
66(5):521±559.
Brown, R H & Schubert, J H (eds) 2000. Knowledge and power in higher education. New
York: Teachers College, Columbia University.

The globalisation debate and implications for higher education 31
Burbules, N C 2000. Does the Internet constitute a community? In Globalisation and
education: critical perspectives, edited by Burbules, N C & Torres, C A New York:
Routledge.
Burbules, N C & Torres, C A 2000. Globalisation and education: An introduction. In
Globalization and education: critical perspectives, edited by Burbules, NC & Torres,
CA. New York: Routledge.
Capella, J 2000. Globalization, a fading citizenship. In Globalization and education: critical
perspectives, edited by Burbules, N C & Torres, C A. New York: Routledge.
Claassen, C 2000. The state, globalisation and education. In Contemporary issues in modern
education, editedbyLemmer,EM.Sandton:Johannesburg.
Cogburn, D L 2001. Globalization, knowledge, education and training in the information
age. Www.unesco.org/webworld/infoethics 2/eng/papers/paper-23.htm. Accessed
29 May 2001.
Council on Higher Education (CHE). 2000. CHE Annual Report 1998/00, Pretoria: Council
on Higher Education.
Davies, P 1999. Globalisation and the local university: some implications for strategy and
management. Paper delivered at the Salzburg Seminar, Universities project,
Salzburg Austria, 23±27 January 1999.
Edwards, & Usher, R 1994. Postmodernism and education. New York: Routledge.
Edwards, R & Usher, R 2000. Globalization and pedagogy: space, place and identity. London:
Routledge.
Gibbons, M 1998. Higher education relevance in the 21st century. Paper delivered at the
UNESCO World Conference on higher Education, Paris, France on October 5±9,
1998.
Held, D & Mc Grew, A (ed) 2000. The global transformations reader. Malden: Oxford Press.
Lyotard, J F 1984. The postmodern condition: A report on knowledge. Manchester: University
Press.
Mason, R 1998. Globalizing education: trends and applications. London: Routledge.
Margarth, P 1999. Globalization in national and state systems.
Popkewitz, T S 2000. Rethinking decentralization and the state/civil society distinctions:
The state as a problematic of governing. In Educational knowledge: changing
relationships between the state, civil society and the educational community, editedby
Popkewitz, T S. Albany: SUNY.
Popkewitz, T S 2000. Globalization/regionalization, knowledge, and the educational
practices: some notes on comparative strategies for educational research. In
Popkewitz, T S (ed). Educational knowledge: changing relationships between the state,
civil society and the educational community. Albany: SUNY.
Robertson, R 1992. Globalization: social theory and global culture. London: Sage.

32
Scott, P (ed) 2000. Introduction. In Higher Education re-formed, editedbyScott,P.London
& New York: Falmer Press.
Slaughter, S 1988. National higher education policies in a global economy. In Universities
and globalisation: Critical perspectives, edited by Currie, J & Newson, J (eds).
Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Zlatuska, J 1999. Globalisation and the academic disciplines. Paper delivered at the
Salzburg Seminar, Universities project, Salzburg Austria, 23±27 January 1999.

A survey and appraisal of progressive education in the USA 33
A survey and appraisal of
progressive education in
the USA
IACoetzer
Department of Educational
Studies
Unisa
The aim of this research article is to present a survey and to appraise the principles and
practices of progressive education in America since its inception around 1890 to its
demise in 1957. The rationale behind this approach was to enable the researcher to
investigate the corresponding principles and practices of progressive education in the
USA with that of outcomes-based education in South African Schools and to establish
the anticipated success and/or failures of the proposed education transformation in the
RSA in a follow-up research article, titled A survey and appraisal of Outcomes-Based
Education (OBE) in South Africa with reference to progressive education in America.
1 INTRODUCTION AND HISTORICAL CONTEXT
Progressive education, also sometimes called ``modern'' or ``new''
education, is the name given to the broad educational reform movement
that sprung up in America around 1890.
Francis W Parker (1837±1902) who was called ``the father of
progressive education'' (Cremin 1961:129) published his ``Talks on

34
Pedagogics'' in 1894 in which his ideas about the ``new'' education
were explained. His progressive school called the Cook County School
which was established around 1890 was organised as ``a model home, a
complete community and embryonic democracy'' (Cremin 1961:132).
Progressivism in American society was part of a larger response in the
Western world to the massive forces of industrialism, urbanism,
migration and modernism which were shaking the roots of traditional
society since the late nineteenth century. The basic claims by
supporters of progressive education are inherent in Western education:
improvement of education and vocational training as recruiting
elements in public life and a democratic society (Ro È hrs & Lenhart
1995:11; Cremin 1961:viii; Dewey 1939:4, 115).
During the period 1890 until World War I the progressivists
represented themselves as a resistance or contra-movement against the
so-called essentialists or proponents of traditional education who
according to them only educated the young generation for the status
quo. The criticism of the progressivists were mainly targeted against
certain tenets of traditional education (Kandel 1958:177):
... the daily and hourly routine, the fixed time-schedules, the strict
discipline, rote learning, a curriculum planned in advance, imposition
and examinations on what had been memorized, and, in general,
authoritarianism dominating teachers and pupils alike.
The educational practices of the so-called traditional school in the USA
were also observable elsewhere. During 1926±1927, shortly after World
War I, a prominent supporter of progressive education, the eminent
American educationalist William Heard Kilpatrick (1871±1965) took a
trip around the world, visiting schools and universities on several
continents. According to Tenenbaum, his biographer, Kilpatrick was
struck by the fact that ``the schools did not prepare students for life in
their immediate environment. They were formal, bookish, dominated
by rigid examinations'' (Tenenbaum 1951:253, 257). Kilpatrick's own
approach to education is discussed in his essay ``The Project Method''
of 1918, a genuine product of the American progressive education

A survey and appraisal of progressive education in the USA 35
movement. The project method is generally considered a means of
developing independence and responsibilities in school pupils, and to
instil social and democratic modes of behaviour (Ro È hrs & Lenhart
1995:307). To achieve these means Kilpatrick made the motivation of
the pupil the crucial feature of the project method. Whatever the
learner undertook, so long as it was done ``purposefully'', this was a
project. The projects had four phases: purposing, planning, executing
and judging (Ro È hrs & Lenhart 1995:312).
Kilpatrick's project method had a huge impact on progressive
educational reform movements in America. The ``comprehensive
school'' movement, the movement for ``community education'', ``open
curriculum'' and ``practical learning'' make reference to the project
method where implementation of their programmes is concerned
(Ro È hrs & Lenhart 1995:307). These movements and eminent progressivists
like Francis Wayland Parker and John Dewey who was the
world's best known progressive educator, scorned the rote learning
and rigid subject-centred instruction of the traditional schools. The
``joyless'' education, so they argued, had to be replaced by the
expressiveness and spontaneity of the child. J R Squire (1972:328) who
researched progressive education in-depth contends that the discourse
of the progressivists can be expressed in a number of phrases; namely
the school as a miniature community, learning by doing, project method,
units of study, education as development, creativity, growth, activity,
self-expression, experience, play, interest, freedom, meeting the needs and
interests of the student, educating the whole child, development of
personality, social and emotional adjustment and lifelong learning or
continuing education (Squire 1972:328).
In order to be able to accomplish the aim of a proper survey and
appraisal of the progressivists in America the author deems it essential
to discuss the principles of the so-called Progressive Education
Association (PEA) which was founded in 1919 and dissolved in 1955 ±
the last issue of its periodical ``Progressive Education'' was published
in 1957 ± and on which the philosophy and educational practices of the
progressivists were based.

36
2 THE PRINCIPLES OF THE PROGRESSIVE
EDUCATION ASSOCIATION (1919±1957) IN
AMERICA
2.1 Freedom versus control
Progressive educators fought against direct interference and formal
control by teachers in the classroom. Through their child-centred
approach they instead valued freedom of activity and expression by
the child to replace the passive question and answer method of
traditional education.
Pupils were allowed to move around freely in the classroom to
communicate with fellow learners because the progressivists believed
(Rugg & Shumaker 1969:55±56):
Free the legs, the arms, the larynx of a child and you have taken the first
step towards freeing his mind and spirit.
Progressive educators believed in satisfying individual differences ±
no more than twenty pupils were allowed in the classroom ± and they
would mostly agree that one important test of a successful classroom is
its effectiveness in eliciting a variety of responses from different
children.
2.2 Child-centred versus teacher-centred initiative
In the progressive schools the educator-teacher relinquishes the role of
instructor and becomes instead an initiator, observer and adviser of the
activities of the pupils.
Nine years after the Progressive Education Association (PEA) was
formed two eminent American progressivists, H Rugg & A Shumaker
published The Child-Centred School (1928) in which the modus
operandi of these schools is explained as follows (Rugg & Shumaker
1969:57)
In the child-centred school ... pupils are alive, active, working hard,
inventing, organising, contributing original ideas, assembling materials,

A survey and appraisal of progressive education in the USA 37
carrying out enterprises ... boys and girls ... share in their own
government, in the planning of the program, in the administering of the
curriculum, in conducting the life of the school.
William Heard Kilpatrick who was an active participant in the group of
``reconstructionist'' educators who represented the reformist stand of
progressivists during the 1930's arrived at the conclusion reached by
other American educationalists that innovative, progressive studentcentred
education can survive only in a democratic environment and
school structure, and that ultimately the political context must be
consistent with and support innovative classroom practice (Iversen:
chapter 9). Rugg & Shumaker (1969:2) also emphasised the importance
of democracy because the new school so they contended ``is a child's
world in a child-size environment. Here he lives in a democracy of
youth. His needs, his interests as well as adult insight concerning his
future life, determine what goes on in this school''.
2.3 The activity school
John Dewey (1859±1952) was the world's best-known progressive
educator. His Laboratory School at the University of Chicago (1896±
1903) remains the most-studied experimental school in history, and his
classic Democracy and Education (1916) is one of the most important
books on education. Dewey equipped his activity or practice school at
the University of Chicago with the materials and implements of real
life. By means of activities such as conversation, inquiry, construction,
artistic expression, and a harmonious group life Dewey sought to
promote the child's mental growth ± to enable the pupils to carry over
their school experience into the life of the community (Cremin
1961:120±135; Noble 1961:485±6).
In the progressive schools, also sometimes typified as activity or play
schools, the learner is active, growing and competence-directed.
Learning which allows the individual to interact continually in a
purposeful and active way with subject-matter, teachers, peers, and
surroundings, so the progressivists argued, ``seems likely to produce

38
greater growth and more lasting effect than learning which focuses on
the isolated skill or discrete subject. Cognitive thinking cannot be
separated from affective response; intellectual, emotional, social and
physical growth are interrelated''(Squire 1972:376).
The progressive educators valued freedom of activity, involvement,
independence of learning and problem solving by way of the project
method because this approach would foster more spontaneity and
independence and more favourable attitudes towards learning.
A former student of Dewey's school at the University of Chicago
reported about the success of the activity school (Mayhew & Edwards
1964:407):
The Dewey school gave us the opportunity to form practical, livable
behaviour patterns. As I consider in contrast the average students
passing out of school into social and economic conditions, we were armed
for the battle, they were maimed.
2.4 The interest of the learner forms the basis of the
``new'' curriculum
Since the inception of progressive education there is a move away from
adherence to a stipulated canon of learning material codified in a rigid
curriculum and towards a preoccupation with the pressing and
unanswered questions posed by the child's own world. For this reason
the progressive schools followed a school program which reflected the
life-world and interest of the learner (Rugg & Shumaker 1969:61):
It starts from his needs and interests ... Hence the new school organizes
its program around the centres of interest rather than around academic
subjects.
The so-called broad fields curriculum of progressive schools grouped
curriculum experiences under general headings such as home life,
citizenship, production, communication and transportation. The
practice was to concentrate study around certain large centres of
interests. Courses were organized in general mathematics, general

A survey and appraisal of progressive education in the USA 39
science, general language, general social science, general home
economics, and general art. The progressivists countered subject
isolation through the introduction of, as Noble (1961:482) calls it
``integration'', ``orientation'' and ``unit study''.
In the extreme form of the ``experience curriculum'' the formal subjects
were replaced by informal group activities in response to pupil needs
and the urgency of the moment. Noble states that this development
was ``met with criticism from the general public on the ground that it
neglects the moral discipline of the pupils'' (Noble 1961:461).
2.5 Creative self-expression
In the progressive schools teachers moved away from the traditional
school or institution with its barrack-like uniformity and towards a
stimulating setting. The authors of The Child-Centred School, Rugg &
Shumaker (1969:62±64), paint a vivid picture of the school proceedings
to enhance creative self-expression in these schools :
Some will create with words, others with light. Some will express
themselves through the body in dance; others will model, carve, shape
their ideas in plastic materials. Still others will find expression through
oral language, and some through an integrated physical, emotional and
dramatic gesture.
2.6 Personality and social adaptability
The educational endeavours of the progressive teachers were oriented
less towards successful performance in examinations and more
towards the formation of a responsible personality. In this regard the
education of the ``whole'' person in a social context is central in the
progressive education programme. Accordingly there is a strong
emphasis on social and emotional education to supplement the
traditional cultivation of intellect. The dimensions of social intelligence,
empathy with one's fellows, compassion with social hardship
and a propensity for tactful help were fathomed and encouraged in
progressive schools (Squire 1972:122; Ro È hrs & Lenhart 1995:11±13).

40
These schools were not only child-centred but also at the same time
strongly community-centred because the progressives aspired to
prepare the youth for future social life, and this could be achieved by
making the school a cooperative society on a small scale.
The differences of approach to enhance personality development and
the social formation of children of the traditional schools when
compared with that of the progressive schools is clearly illustrated in
the following excerpt (Rugg & Shumaker 1969:66):
... where the old school maintained a noisy silence as the ideal schoolroom
atmosphere, the new removes the ban from speech, encourages communication
as a vehicle for social understanding and personal development.
2.7 Equality and democracy
An important objective of the PEA was the creation of a global
educational approach that would link people via education in spite of
political and racial differences separating them. In this regard GS
Counts regarded himself and the American people constantly being
confronted with the age-old ``problems of human liberty and equality
in the age of science and technology'' (Counts 1971:164). Equality, so
the progressivists believed, can only be achieved in a democratic
society.
3 THE DEMISE AND LEGACY OF THE EARLIER
PROGRESSIVISTS AND THE PROGRESSIVE
EDUCATION ASSOCIATION
Some time between the inception of progressive education around 1890
and the demise of the PEA on 25 June 1955 in Urbana, Illinois, and its
periodical, Progressive Education in 1957, the phrase ``progressive
education'' shifted from a term of praise to one of scorn. To the
American public of shortly after World War I, progressive education
seemed to be the solution for what was wrong in education; thirty-five
years later most of the ills in American education were blamed on it
(Graham 1967:143±145).

A survey and appraisal of progressive education in the USA 41
The survey of progressive education in America indicates that the
legacy of the progressivists can be typified as a success in certain
instances and a failure in other respects. The following positive
endeavours and practices to reform and improve education in America
in the era around 1890 to 1957 can be highlighted :
. The rigid subject-centred instruction by way of the passive
question and answer method of teaching and rote learning
prevalent in the traditional public schools were replaced by
the innovative project method which challenged the children's
skills of inquiry and problem solving. It also promoted
the independence of learning of the pupils.
. Whereas the older schools were formal and bookish, the
teachers in the new progressive schools humanised education
and fostered a positive attitude towards learning. They
valued the importance to instill inventiveness, originality,
spontaneity and creative self-expression in the learners. This
could be achieved because the class groups were small in
numbers and the school programme reflected the life-world
andtheneedsandinterestsofthelearnersinsteadofbeing
centred around academic subjects. Learning became a
meaningful experience for the pupils in these schools.
. Co-operative learning and the new ``learning-by-doing''
approach of the progressive educators resulted in more
energised and enlivened responses from their students so
that the young ones were questioning, debating and socialising
in an atmosphere of democracy and a milieu reflecting
community life. The progressive schools encouraged activity
andfreeconversationwiththeirteachersandpeersinorder
to grant the pupils the opportunity to interact with and to
show empathy and understanding for their fellow human
beings. Communication in groups was also encouraged to
enhance the social understanding and personality development
of the pupils.
. The progressivists accepted the need for continuing education
or life-long learning to empower individuals to cope
with the vastly altered educational needs dictated by an

42
increasingly complex society, the knowledge explosion and
galloping technological changes. They acknowledged the
essential role of continuing education in preventing human
obsolescence and preserving and furthering the development
of American society.
. The humanitarian effort of the progressivists to promote
human dignity through the establishment of equality and
fairness in their schools in order to fulfill the promise of
American democracy, must be commended. Boulding
(1988:188), a spokesperson for globalization and equality
shared this dream of progressive educators when in 1988,
about 30 years after the demise of progressive education, he
stated
As we enter the next millennium we must add the reminder that
education is now only progressive which has a planetary
perspective ± which prepares students for life in an interdependent
global village, and which acknowledges that our
interdependence includes all species with which we share this
endangered planet.
The end of an era of progressive education in America late in the 1950's
can be ascribed mainly to the following educational failures:
. Freedom has come to have many dimensions for progressive
education. Essentially it has been a freedom from externally
imposed standards and authority and a freedom toward selfdirection
and self-discipline.
Critics interpreted the freedom of the child or non-interference
of the teacher even in the form of guidance and
direction in many of the progressive ``schools'' as a call to
chaos and anarchy (Squire 1972:7). Even one of the most
eminent prophets of ``balanced'' progressive education, John
Dewey, criticized certain progressive schools who allowed
pupils unrestrained freedom. Dewey (1930:205) declared:
... some of these schools indulge pupils in unrestrained

A survey and appraisal of progressive education in the USA 43
freedom of action and speech, of manners and lack of
manners. Schools farthest to the left ... carry the thing they
call freedom nearly to the point of anarchy.
It can thus be stated that the moral discipline of the young
generation suffered in these laissez-faire circumstances.
. Progressive educators were reacting against the use of books
as texts and a prescribed curriculum that isolated subject
from subject. Instead they advocated the so-called broad
fields curriculum where courses were organized around
study units or large centres of interests such as general
science and general mathematics. The de-emphasis by the
progressivists of the traditional curriculum and against the
traditional intellectualized forms of schooling left its mark on
American education. To ask teachers, especially teachers of
average endowments, to discard both their traditional
method of teaching and their subject matter in textbooks
could lead to only one result ± uninspired and uninformed
progressive teaching.
The anti-intellectualism of certain extremes of the PEA led
AE Bestor (1953:6) to warn the American people in his book,
Educational Wastelands published in 1953, against the legacy
of these progressivists:
If we take education seriously, we can no more afford to
gamble our safety upon inferior intellectual training in our
schools than upon inferior weapons in our armoury.
The dramatic launching of the Russian Sputnik I on 4 October
1957 shook the USA as leader of the Western world. The
authorities and general public in America were brought to
the realisation by this Sputnik shock that the country's best
brain power had been shamefully neglected up to that stage.
Various investigations were undertaken to find ways and
means of identifying deficiencies in the American education

44
system. An education mission was delegated to study the
RussianeducationsysteminRussiatodeterminewhythe
Russians won the ``race in space''. The investigating team's
findings were published in 1959 in a report titled Soviet
Commitment to Education, Report of the First Official US
Education Mission to the USSR. From this report it appears
that Russian education placed the emphasis on intellectual
formation far more than was the case in the USA up to 1957.
Before pupils could complete their school career at a Russian
secondary school, they had to take Physics, Biology and a
foreign language for five years, devote their attention to
Astronomy for a year and have a grounding in Mathematics
for as long as ten years. Everything indicated that the
curricula followed in the progressive secondary schools of
America left a great deal to be desired, especially as concerned
instruction in Mathematics and the natural sciences (Coetzer
& Van Zyl 1989:124).
The fear of continued technological domination by the
Russians generated a strong national insistence on new
curriculum programmes by which the learners could benefit.
In the late 1950's JB Conant put into words the sentiment of
the post-Sputnik shock in a report titled The American High
School Today which appeared in 1959. In it Conant presents a
21-point plan in which he propagates a new approach in the
secondary schools of his country. The nucleus of his plea is
that challenging intellectual content should feature in the
curricula of American schools (Coetzer & Van Zyl 1989:125).
Wirth (1967:268) also refers to a ``post-Sputnik hangover''
that took root in America after 1957. He succinctly summarises
(1967:263) the major educational evils of progressive
education as follows:
... soft pedagogy, unruly behaviour of children ± and
perhaps even a vague subversive-ism.

A survey and appraisal of progressive education in the USA 45
Finally in a report to the American nation and the Secretary
of Education, United States Department of Education by the
National Commission on Excellence in Education, published
in April 1983 and entitled A nation at risk: The imperative for
educational reform, failures are also documented that could
at least partly be blamed on progressive education up to the
late 1950s.
Firstly, the report claims that the nation are raising a new
generation of Americans that is scientifically and technologically
illiterate. It is pointed out that many 17-year-olds do
not possess the ``higher order'' intellectual skills expected of
them. Only one-third of this group can solve a mathematics
problem requiring several steps and there was a steady
decline in science achievement scores of US 17-year-olds as
measured by national assessments of science in 1969, 1973
and 1977 (United States National Commission on Excellence
in Education 1983:8±10).
Secondly, the banning of textbooks and of learning through
reading by progressive schools could have impacted on the
literacy levels of pupils. In the report it is stated that some 23
million American adults are functionally illiterate by the
simplest tests of everyday reading, writing and comprehension
and that only one-fifth of the 17-year-olds can write a
persuasive essay (United States National Commission on
Excellence in Education 1983:8±9).
Lastly the practice of the progressivists that the performance
of learners should be assessed by themselves, their peers and
by teachers, and their credo that school marks and competitive
examinations should be abolished, fall in the framework
of criticism in the report where the necessity for
examinations requiring students to demonstrate their mastery
of content and skill is stated. Regarding the importance
of content the report states the following:

46
Textbooks and other tools of learning and teaching should be
upgraded and updated to assure more rigorous content ... as they
did in the post-Sputnik era (United States National Commission
on Excellence in Education 1983:19, 28).
4 CLOSING COMMENTS
In conclusion the legacy of about seventy years of progressive
education in America can be appraised both positively and negatively
as outlined in the article. On the positive side a number of educational
contributions can be highlighted:
. The formal and bookish instruction through rote learning
and rigid subject-centred instruction of traditional schools
was replaced by a school program in progressive schools that
reflected the life-world and interest of scholars and which
was organised around units of interest rather than detached
academic subjects. Learning became a meaningful experience
in these schools.
. The focus of progressive educators on freedom of activity,
independence of learning, inquiry and problem solving by
way of the project-method in progressive schools instilled
spontaneity, creativity and self-expression and more favourable
attitudes of scholars towards learning. These
educators realised that a successful learning environment or
classroom is based on its effectiveness in eliciting a variety of
responses from different scholars and accommodating their
individual differences (a maximum of twenty scholars were
allowed in the classroom).
. American progressive educators came to the conclusion that
innovative, progressive, learner-centred education can only
be achieved in a democratic, community-centred and cooperative
school environment. Progressive teachers thus
placed a strong emphasis on social and emotional education
to supplement the traditional cultivation of intellect to
prepare the youth for future community life.
. Their global education approach to link people via education
and democracy in spite of political and racial differences

A survey and appraisal of progressive education in the USA 47
must also be commended. In their own country American
progressivists aspired to foster human dignity and fairness in
their schools in order to fulfil the promise of establishing a
truly American society.
On the negative side criticism can be raised against a number
of educational practices in progressive schools, inter alia:
± The laissez-fair approach to discipline where scholars were
allowed a freedom from externally imposed standards and
authority, a freedom that depended on self-direction and
self-discipline impacted negatively on the conduct of
scholars. The non-interference on the part of the progressive
educator-teacher who relinquished the role of instructor
who guided and directed learning and instead
became an initiator and facilitator of learners' activities
led to unruly behaviour of scholars in many progressive
schools.
± The progressivists' de-emphasis of the traditional curriculum
as a reaction against the traditional intellectualised
forms of schooling left its mark on American education.
The launching of the Russian Sputnik 1 in 1957 was mainly
ascribed to the inferior intellectual training being provided
in progressive schools. Americans realised that the
country's best brain power was being greatly neglected,
especially as regards instruction in mathematics and the
natural sciences. The nation realised their schools were in
fact raising a new generation of Americans that was
scientifically and technologically illiterate.
± Finally progressive schools' banning of textbooks and of
learning through reading impacted negatively on the
literacy levels of pupils in terms of their reading, writing
and comprehension ability. This matter is documented in a
report to the American nation and the Secretary of
Education under the title A nation at risk: The imperative
for educational reform.

48
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Bestor, A E 1953. Educational Wastelands. Urbana: The University of Illinois Press.
Boulding, E 1988. Building a global civic culture; Education for an Independant World.
New York: Teachers College Press.
Counts, G S 1971. A humble autobiography, In: Hariqhurst, RJ (Ed): Leaders in American
Education, Part II. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Brehoney, K 1984. Conflict and change in education, a sociological introduction. Block
four, Progressive education. Milton Keynes: Open University Press.
Coetzer, I A & Van Zyl, A E 1989. History of Education: A few contemporary educational
issues. Pretoria: University of South Africa.
Conant, J B 1959. The Revolutionary Transformation of the American High School.
Massachusetts: Cambridge Press.
Counts, G S. 1932. Dare progressive education be progressive? Progressive Education
Vol IX, December.
Cremin, L 1961. The Transformation of the School: Progressivism in American Education.
NewYork:Knopf.
Dewey, J. 1930. How much freedom in new schools? The New Republic, 9July.
Dewey, J 1939. Experience and education. New York: The Macmillan Company.
Graham, P A 1967. Progressive education from Arcady to academe: a history of the
Progressive Education Association, 1919±1955. New York: Teachers College Press.
Iversen, R W 1959. The Communists and the Schools. NewYork:Harcourt,Brace.
Jervis, K 1991. Progressive education for the 1990s: transforming practice. New York:
Teachers College Press.
Kandel, I L 1958. A controversy ended. Educational Forum Vol 22, January.
Mayhew, K C & Edwards, A C 1964. The Dewey School: The Laboratory School of the
University of Chicago 186±1903. New York: Atherton Press.
Noble, S G 1961. A history of American education. NewYork:Holt,Rinehartand
Winston.
Ro È hrs, H & Lenhart, V 1995. Progressive education across the continents: a handbook.
NewYork:P.Lang.
Rugg, H & Shumaker, A 1969. The Child-Centred School. New York: Arno Press.
Squire, J R (Chairman and Editor: ASCD 1972 Yearbook Committee) 1972. A new look at
progressive education. Washington: Association for Supervision and Curriculum
Development.
Tenenbaum, S 1951. William Heard Kilpatrick: Trail blazer in education. New York:
Harper and Brothers.

A survey and appraisal of progressive education in the USA 49
United States. National Commission on Excellence in Education. 1983. A nation at risk:
the imperative for educational reform: a report to the Nation and the Secretary of
Education, United States Department of Education. Washington, DC: The
Commission.
Welter, R 1962. Popular Education and Democratic Thought in America. New York:
Columbia University Press.
Winick, M P 1978. The progressive education movement: an annotated bibliography.
NewYork:Garland.
Wirth, AG, 1967. The Deweyan tradition revisited: Any relevance for our time? Teachers
College Record vol 69, December.

50
Let's revisit
competence-based
teacher education
Prof W J Fraser
Department of Teaching and
Training Studies
University of Pretoria
It is said that a competence-based teacher training (education) model is based upon the
outcomes-based philosophy and that teacher education has to be outcomes-based to
meet the demands of the profession. However, the teaching and training policies of many
teacher training institutions still vest within the positivist or naturalist paradigm of
thinking, arguing the fact that the professional training (education) of teachers requires
teaching and assessment models in support of the tasks and functions of such
practitioners.
This article exposes and describes competence in terms of its behavioural foundations
and functional tasks. It qualifies the necessity of authentic and performance-based
teacher education, and calls for the design and development of teacher education
learning programmes by which means the teaching competences and skills can be
achieved.
Competence-based education (CBE) relies heavily upon the qualification and quantification
of performance. It is within the definition of CBE that the author validates existing
educational (training) and evidence gathering strategies and related assessment
practices that are linked to teaching and teacher education. The concepts ``instructional
and assessment gaps'' will be raised, illustrating a decline in both teaching and
assessment reliability when teaching and assessment requirements are not met.

Let's revisit competence-based teacher education 51
1 INTRODUCTION
In 1996 the author argued that the Competence-based Teacher
Education (CBTE) paradigm was then regarded as a fairly new
inclusion and newcomer to the South African teacher education
scenario (Fraser 1996:74±75). With the emphasis then on the development
of skills and competences, it replaced the classical product
oriented teacher education model that served society for many years.
The Department of Education (2000:10) writes in ``Norms and
Standards for Educators'' that ``(t)he cornerstone ... is the notion of
applied competence'' and that competence is the ``overarching term
for ... practical competence, ... foundational competence and ... reflexive
competence''. These competences can be achieved through
competence-based or proficiency-based education and training by
taking the following five important basic aspects into consideration:
the nature (extent) of the task to be performed; the realistic
manifestation of the teaching experiences (hands-on operation during
training); the possibilities and limitations of the education delivery
system; the capability of learners to master the tasks (minimum level of
understanding and performance), and the ability of a test task to assess
whether the skills have been mastered and correctly executed (Fraser
1996:75). The following assumptions were then made (Fraser 1996:75):
a
b
c
d
e
Minimum levels of competence (exist performance) should be
linked to the nature and expectations of a specific task;
Association between the execution of a task and expected
human behaviour should be taken into consideration during
the planning phase of an operation;
The delivery systems (tuition modes) should be assessed and
adapted in terms of outcomes, subject characteristics and
human potential (capabilities);
Education and training should be operationalised in terms of
human abilities and performance criteria; and
Accountability should be assessed in terms of the association
between the nature of the task to be performed, human ability
and appropriateness of the measuring instrument.

52
2 THE FOUNDATIONS OF COMPETENCE-BASED
TRAINING MODELS
2.1 The behaviourist prescription and functional
analysis approaches towards competencebased
education (CBE)
The competence-based model that will be illustrated in this discussion,
is a deviation from behaviourist psychology that assumes that all
action can be precisely defined and explained (Morgan 1984:198).
According to Short (1985:3) competencies were called behavioural
objectives a generation ago, while the industrial age has also left a
prominent mark on teaching and training. The increasing product
orientation of our technological society has resulted in the creation of
schools patterned after factories, with accompanying priorities of
efficiency, marketable skills, measurable inputs and outputs, system
models, and social and educational engineering (Morgan 1984:198).
The point of departure of this specific CBE model lies vested in the
observation that knowledge and understanding underpin performance,
and where possible, are to be tested through it. The system
incorporates aspects of logical positivism in assuming that reality is
external to the individual and objective in nature (Hodkinson 1992:31).
Such a model could be regarded as ``behaviouristic'' because it
combines the positivist ontology with a view of learning partly based
on behaviourism. It focuses on the elements of competence and the
statements that define them (Hodkinson 1992:31). The model rests on a
description of behaviour (also called performance) in a mode or form
that can be observed and demonstrated (Norris 1991:332). It is based on
a linear scientific-technological frame of mind (Short 1985:3). Hyland
(1993:123) criticizes this specific approach towards CBE as follows:
Generally speaking, there is a tendency for behaviourist strategies to
stifle creativity and imaginative learning, gloss over individual
differences between learners and, through the reduction of learning
objectives to measurable outcomes and prespecified ends, to encourage a
mechanical ``teaching to the test'' approach.
In 1986 Popham (1986:381) wrote that authors saw the competence-

Let's revisit competence-based teacher education 53
based (teacher) education approach no longer as the sole outcome of
some philosophical preference, but actually as a system ``... imposed
on teacher educators by a disenchanted citizenry ... that doubts
whether today's teachers know their stuff''. What is more is that
competence specification, and the adoption of a competence-based
education (CBE) model, is a matter of ``functional analysis'', and not
necessarily ``behaviour prescription'' (Tomlinson 1995:181). The success
of such model depends on a careful ``analysis'' of the ``functions''
of the occupational roles in order to determine what the ``correct''
elements of competence are (Hodkinson 1992:31). Figure 1 illustrates
the functional analysis approach to be followed in the description of
performance. It illustrates how a task analysis has to be performed and
how assessment has to confirm the acquisition of required levels of
performance. Van der Wagen and Ridley (1997:24) are in resonance
with such point of departure and point to the specification of
workplace performance according to function, outcomes and performance
criteria. Such an approach coincided with the opinion that
competence has to match the rational economic evaluation of social
and organisational action (Norris 1991:339). A very clear distinction
should be drawn between what one can achieve, and how this could be
done. If the emphasis falls on the specification of the actions required
in order to achieve the outcomes in question, then the model would
surely take on a behaviourist model. Competence is then regarded as a
prescribed behavioural procedure. Competence focuses on the purpose
or outcome, with the emphasis falling on the nature of the achievement
in question ± it would then describe the specific features of the sort of
outcome a competent person would be capable of achieving. Competence
is then described as outcome achievement capacity (Tomlinson
1995:182). However, one could argue that ``competence'' is not
necessarily ``outcome''. Competence can be taught and mastered ±
outcomes that can be observed and demonstrated as final products, are
not. A designed learning programme is an outcome, but designing the

54
FIGURE 1
Profiling an educator's/teacher's functions by setting standards against the
functional expectations
Task analysis
Identify `best' teachers
!
List ten best attributes
and cluster
competences
!
Decide on validity of attributes
Teaching for competence
!
Test construction and
clustering of competences
according to attributes
"
Defining attributes as competences
and setting of standards
!
!
Test application
Curriculum development
!
Design learning programmes
! !
Assessment of competence
3 "
Assessment of performance

Let's revisit competence-based teacher education 55
learning programme is a competence to be achieved. A well-managed
school is an outcome, but managing the school to excellence also
requires a competent manager. Outcomes cannot always be equated to
competences. Outcomes are products and competences are the abilities
to perform certain functions at standards of efficiency. High quality
outcomes will very seldom be the product of incompetent behaviour.
This has lead to the argument that the competence-based approach has
no epistemological basis, implying that the model is only concerned
with what can be done and understood, rather than how skills are
developed and knowledge acquired (Whitty & Willmott 1991:314).
One should take into consideration that teaching methods are likely to
be influenced by the particular definition of the competences adopted,
and by the actual competences being encouraged (Whitty & Willmott
1991:314). For example, the competences adopted by the reflexive
teacher will require different methods of teaching and learning than
those of the industrial instructor. What has become clear is that the
traditional competence-based education (CBE) approach appears to
have adopted both approaches (functional analysis and behaviour
prescriptive), mainly because it failed to keep the distinction between
them clear (Tomlinson 1995:182). Tomlinson (1995:183) and Van der
Horst and McDonald (1998:19) remind us that we need to make this
distinction, because purposeful action always both involves action
(processes) and purpose (content). The same purpose may be achieved
through different actions.
3 DEFINING COMPETENCE
3.1 The meaning of competence
Although the competence-based teacher education (CBTE) model has
been incorporated by a variety of institutions the past decade, little
consensus was then reached regarding the meaning of ``competences''
(Short 1985:4; Whitty & Willmott 1991:309). The authors (p 310) see
competence-based education still as ``a bandwagon in search of
definition''. What is true is that we have entered an era of technical
precision with CBTE. This implies that competences should be easy to
understand, be straightforward and flexible, permit direct observation,

56
be expressed as outcomes, be transferable from setting to setting, and
meet national as opposed to local standards (Norris 1991:331). A
number of critical issues have to be raised when competence driven
instructional strategies are discussed. They are the following (Short
1985:2): (a) The different forms competence takes in particular
contexts; (b) The question whether competence can be taught; (c)
Arguments whether competence can be detected; (d) The dilemma
whether the public has the right to hold schools (and therefore also
teacher training institutions) accountable for developing competences
in student teachers and pupils; (e) The question whether legislative
mandates can guarantee minimum levels of competence; (f) The
relationship between teacher competence and student competence, and
therefore also student performance.
There is a direct link between occupational competence and the
functions that are associated with an occupation. Occupational
competence can be defined more specifically as the ability to perform
the activities within an occupation or function to the standards
expected in employment (Fraser 1996:76; Saunders 2000:37). This
coincides with the assumption that competency refers to an individual's
demonstrated knowledge, skills and abilities (KSAs) performed
to a specific standard (Association Educator 2000:1). Spady (1994:55)
adds another dimension ± that of confidence. Functional competence is
something a person is or should be able to do and is therefore the
expression of competence in reality (Fraser 1995:7). Many see
competence as something describing an action, behaviour or outcome
in the form that is capable of demonstration, observation and
assessment (Norris 1991:332). Tomlinson (1995:181) expresses himself
more explicitly when he writes that competence or skill signifies a
more or less consistent ability to realise particular sorts of purposes, to
achieve desired outcomes. The occupational standards referred to in
the opening paragraph, are the expressions of competence in reality.
They express what is expected of people in a job or work role and also
describe the performance expected of people (Fraser 1995:7). They
describe what competence means in a particular occupational area and

Let's revisit competence-based teacher education 57
do so in a manner that allows an individual's competence to be
assessed (Stuart 1990:16). A competent person is capable of certain
sorts of action: such person is capable of the actions required to achieve
the kind of intended outcome in question (Tomlinson 1995:181).
One should take cognizance of Spady's (1994:54) illustration of the
``content'', ``competence'' and ``confidence'' triangle. Spady (p 55)
explains that content or knowledge should be seen as so-called
``enabling instructional objectives'' while competence is defined as
``outcome'' in its own right. But a misinterpretation of the OBE
paradigm has created an influential fallacy in the sense that ``content''
and ``knowledge'' acquisition have often been ridiculed as less
important learning activities. Various authors substantiate and illustrate
OBE's justification for the inclusion of ``less'' content in school
curricula (Jacobs, Gawe & Vakalisa 2000:183±185; Kruger & Adams
1998:4±5; Ristau 1995:43). However, Everwijn, Bomers & Knubben
(1993:426±427) have illustrated the necessary link between knowledge
and competence. To them it is important to bridge the gap between
knowledge acquisition and the ability to apply (functional performance).
They come to the following conclusions: Firstly, the range of
functional and disciplinary knowledge and skills is limited and that
real life tasks and problems differ from the questions and problems
that are dealt with in the classroom (p 427). Secondly, generic
knowledge and skills are sufficiently effective when one deals with
function-specific issues and problems (p 427). Thirdly, knowledge
acquisition without practice and application is insufficient and
students need training and exercise to learn how to apply such
knowledge (p 427). Fourthly, students lacking sufficient domainspecific
knowledge often do not know how to use general skills and
underlying heuristics (De Corte, as quoted by Everwijn, et al.
1993:428). The essence of this argument is that subject-specific
knowledge and skills does not imply knowledge and skills beyond that
very subject and that the possession of general knowledge and skills
will not imply mastery over specific subject areas (Everwijn, et al.
1993:435).
Talking the above-mentioned into consideration, it becomes reasonable

58
to assume that a specific competence/competency could now be
regarded as an outcome (competence as product of the learning
experience) or an ability, skill or technique to achieve the desired
outcome (competence as function, process or action). It is also logical to
conclude that specific knowledge and ways of knowing are necessary
and a prerequisite for the acquisition of competence. Liddell and
Baumgarten (1995:34) support the observation by arguing that it
remains important to have hands-on experience in conjunction with
theory-based learning. As far as teacher education is concerned, it
appears to be important that disciplines or professions with clearly
identified bodies of knowledge, have distinct advantages in the
validation of their training programmes (Stedman 1985:208).
Where do standards now fit in? Standards are usually thought of as
levels of achievement or performance (Norris 1991:335) and do not
consider the underlying abilities or traits of the individual, but
describe the expectations the individual is required to meet. Standards
in themselves will not ensure effective instruction or learning, and if
inadequate and irrelevant performance objectives are used as a focus
for teaching, then these objectives will adversely affect the value of
teaching, education and learning (Developing Standards by Reference
to Functions: 1989:2). Standards are therefore competence-based,
criterion referenced, explicit and transparent statements which define
the expected achievement or learning outcome (Fraser 1995:10). The
key elements of competence are reflected by standards. What is more
important however, is that new meaning is now given to the concept of
``standard''. It is no longer an illusive controversy, but a standard can
now be operationalised in terms of concrete qualities and assessable
levels of expectation. A given standard is expressed in two parts: the
element of competence, and its associated performance criteria (Fraser
1996:80)
There are also a number of factors to be taken into consideration when
setting and applying standards to any branch of teaching, training and
education. They are the following (University of Pretoria & National
Education Group 2000:1±6):

Let's revisit competence-based teacher education 59
a
b
c
d
e
f
Standards are not meant to represent absolute prescriptions to
the teacher or to the teacher educator
Standards provide a clearly defined framework for the
knowledge, skills and experiences that are essential for the
teacher and teacher educator
Standards provide significant guidance for the development
and revision of teacher programs
Standards provide criteria for the qualifications necessary to
be appointed as teacher and teacher educator
Standards are meant to focus on the skills, knowledge and
experiences necessary to teach, and
Standards are meant to specify minimum competences of wellqualified
teachers in the first place, and also specify the
minimum competences required to teach.
3.2 Knowledge-based and Performance-based
Competences
Competence or competent behaviour is not restricted to the effective
performanceofcertainskillsonly.Twoapproacheshavetobetaken
into consideration in the definition of competence, namely competence
in the execution of a specific task and competence in knowing. Shores
and Nelson, interviewed by Gable (1991:178) distinguish between
knowledge-based competenc(i)es and performance-based competenc(i)es.
Evans (1993:145), referring to the predicament that has emerged
between the professions and society, writes that one should become
aware of the crisis of confidence in professional knowledge and a
parallel crisis of confidence in professional education. It has become
acceptable to believe that knowledge related to a specific profession,
wouldbeaguaranteeforcompetentperformanceinthatspecificfield
of interest. Hence the comment of Norris (1991:336) that ``knowledge is
evidenced in action''. According to Stodolsky (1984:14), subject matter
is regarded as the overriding factor influencing variation in instruction,
and therefore also in assessment. The same opinion is maintained
by Messick (1984:217) who writes that the nature and power of the
student's organised structure of knowledge are key aspects of
educational achievement because it either facilitates or hinders what he
or she can do in a subject area. It includes a variety of area-specific and

60
broader cognitive skills or abilities. However, one should take note of
Stedman's (1985:202) remark that an analysis of failures to meet
standards of medical performance, revealed that a lack of knowledge
was rarely a primary or even a major contributing reason for such
failures. Situational factors played a more prominent role. Golden, in
Stedman (1985:202) came to a more alarming conclusion that no
relationship exists between professional performance and formal
certification status for licensed pathologists. Licensed professionals
performed no better than those not licensed. Stedman (1985:208)
reminds us that the qualities of the faculty, competent professional
trainers and valid testing practices, are valuable attributes that will
eventually ensure competence in the professions.
4 ASSESSING COMPETENCE OF STUDENT
TEACHERS IN PRACTICE
Teacher education institutions in South Africa have much to learn from
the various professions when the assessments of student teachers or
practising teachers are at stake.
When we assess and evaluate we compare or match a candidate's
(student teacher's) performance and knowledge against the specified
descriptions of acceptable evidence or expectations that are expressed
explicitly in terms of the performance criteria (Mitchell 1990:34;
Foyster 1990:21; Sims 1991:144). A learner's performance is therefore
measured against assessment criteria or assessment indicators specifying
how the task has to be done or executed. I wrote in 1996 that the
dimensions and specifications of the final product could be used as
comparative standard of excellence, and also suggested that the
assessment could be done indirectly by weighing the candidate's
performance against the written standards the final product has to
meet (Fraser 1996:82). Assessment is in the first place about developing
measuring instruments, generating evidence and making judgements of an
individual's competence against specified descriptions of acceptable evidence
(performance and assessment criteria) (Fraser 1996:82). The assessor will
specify and lay down performance criteria (standards), and through
the use of a test (measuring instrument) gather evidence to determine
whether a candidate's behaviour meets the criteria (Fraser 1995:12).

Let's revisit competence-based teacher education 61
Assessment will be effective when the teaching has been designed in
relation to criteria that are attainable, observable and measurable, and
which arise directly from performance competences (Christian-Carter,
in Saunders and Race 1992:68).
The issue of assessing the identified competences, is framed by Hollins
(1993:97) by means of the following question: ``How can teachers
demonstrate their ability to make sense of the complex and divergent
experiences, and the social and cultural milieu, of the diverse students
they teach in ways that support teaching and learning in the
classroom?'' The assessment issue is further complicated by Norris
(1991:336) who argues that ``there is a massive mismatch between the
appealing language of precision that surrounds competency or
performance-based programmes and the imprecise, approximate and
often arbitrary character of testing when applied to human capabilities''.
4.1 Generating evidence
What is the most fundamental and crucial aspect of the assessment and
evaluation process? Many scholars see it as the selection of a suitable
measuring instrument or device that will eventually be used to
generate evidence in support of competent or incompetent behaviour
(Fraser 1995:12; Fraser 1996:82). The evidence required might be of
practical or functional origin meaning that a learner should be able to
demonstrate how well a given task has to be performed. We therefore
call for the actual physical demonstration of competence. On the other
hand, competence could also have a cognitive attribute. In such case
we could refer to a mental representation of the competence and we
could request the candidate to write or talk about what they would do
in a particular situation (Mitchell 1990:35). The reliability of evidence
supplied (assessment results) and the content or construct validity of
the measuring instrument or assessment process, will therefore be
determined by the congruency or association between the task and
function to be performed, and the measuring device selected to assess
the outcomes of performance. Assessment has to be authentic and be
tied closely to potential performance on-the-job (Foyster 1990:48). If
this is not done, a difference between the evidence that we can

62
reasonably and reliably collect from performance and the evidence
needed to make inferences of competence, the so-called ``assessment
gap'' could develop (Understanding Knowledge 1990:2). This implies
that we as assessors should ensure at all times that the conditions
required as proof of performance (task to be performed) are closely
linked or associated with the authenticity of the assessment method
(evidence gathering strategy) (Fraser 1995:12; Fraser 1996:82). For
example, the ability to manage a learning environment will best be
assessed by giving the learner the opportunity to demonstrate such
competence in practice. Assessment now becomes authentic. The lack
of evidence to support a strong relationship between scores obtained
on a test and the actual teacher performance, has become one of the
major attacks against teacher competency testing (Lehr 1986:246).
Two questions remain to be answered: does the maintenance of
standards depend on reading and writing skills only, and how could
assessment procedures bypass such requirements? Fennell's (1990a:42)
argumentisquitesimplewhenhecommentsthat``workprovidesa
natural source of evidence'' . Our basic point of departure should be
that ``different methods of assessment provide different types of
evidence about candidates' capabilities'' (Assessment of Competence
1989:5). The argument raised in the previous paragraph has already
indicated that the direct observation of work activities and the taking
of competency tests should be regarded as two important evidencegathering
methods in the assessment of competence (see Fennell
1990a:42). Numerous assessment techniques are suitable for continuous
assessment in the learning site and all education and training
practitioners should have a sound knowledge of what each technique
offers. Continuous and formative assessment would include using the
following assessment techniques: Diagnostic assessment; Achievement-based
assessment; Self-assessment; Peer assessment; Portfolio
assessment; Performance assessment; Observation sheets; Journals;
Education and training practitioner-made tests; Recognition of Prior
Learning (RPL); Project work assessment (self/peer/publicly defended
and assessed).

Let's revisit competence-based teacher education 63
4.2 Merits and disadvantages of the direct
observation of a performance
Many strategies can be applied during the assessment of performance.
However, the direct observation of a worker on a given task is
regarded by many professions as one of the most effective and relevant
performance-based assessment procedures (Stedman 1985:201). Classroom
observation scales, as quoted by Brophy, et al (1975:880±881), are
reliable instruments for measuring classroom process behaviours, and
for obtaining descriptive measures of these classroom processes. These
observations could involve checklists of behaviours assessed as
present or absent during the observation period, summary ratings
based on the observation, and/or noting the extent to which the
teacher displays or possesses certain personal attributes (Stodolsky
1984:11). Note here the emphasis on ``behaviours absent or present
during the observation period''. The fact that a specific and required
behaviour has not been observed does not necessarily imply that a
candidate is not in possession of the required knowledge and skills to
demonstrate the competence. It is a matter of ``competence'' and
``performance'' as Norris (1991:333) puts it. Competence is about
potential, while performance reflects the actual behaviour of a
candidate. Conklin (1985:13) has already indicated that demonstration
of competency in actual teaching situations while under observation
may also be required of all teachers. It has the advantage that both the
outcomes and products of an activity, as well as the processes involved
in the delivery of the final products, may be appraised. Such model of
assessment rests on the assumption that the characteristics of ``good''
or effective teaching are known and recognizable (Stodolsky
1984:11).Where the correct command of a language is not necessarily a
requirement for the correct execution of a task, the observation of an
activity allows for a fairly accurate assessment of such procedure.
Peers, administrators, and principals subject advisors and students
could conduct assessment of this nature. The role students could play
in the assessment of teachers' performance in the classroom remains a
valuable source of information to be explored by classical and distance

64
education practitioners. Not only does it apply to pre-service teacher
education but also to in-service training programmes. Killen, et al
(1996) has indicated that student observation of ``teachers in action'' is
a feasible evidence generating technique' of teacher competence.
This technique (direct observation) requires from candidates to use real
materials and equipment in representative conditions and environments
(Fraser 1995:13). The assessment is usually process orientated,
for example, when candidates are assessed on their ability to execute a
given task, such as the assembly or dismantling of a given piece of
equipment, or the application of the science process skills as scientific
competence. The design of the measuring instrument (test) should
draw on similar performances to those required in work. This implies
that the measuring instrument has to accommodate or include the
activities or characteristics of a task. For example, should we decide to
use an observational checklist to assess whether a candidate has
performed a given task accurately, then this measuring instrument (the
checklist) should contain all elements of the ``best'' or ``correct''
performance. Observations also provide information about a candidate's
knowledge and understanding, especially when it is supplemented
by questioning from the assessor (Assessment of Competence
1989:5). Unfortunately, research in contemporary testing provides no
evidence that the desired relationship exists with teacher on-the-job
success. Reliable estimates of teacher success are almost impossible to
determine (Conklin 1985:15). This means that high scores in certain
fields of competences (basic skills, subject area matter, professional
knowledge or actual teaching performance) will not necessarily
guarantee good teaching, while low scores in the same fields will
almost certainly lead to poor teaching. This phenomenon reiterates the
opinion expressed by Ryan and Kuhs (1993:75) that we as educationists
often recognize good teaching when it occurs, but find it difficult to
arrive at a consensus about what constitutes good teaching.
According to Kagan, in Ryan and Kuhs (1993:78) classroom observations
play an important role in the screening of pre-service teachers,
but has limited potential for predicting future effectiveness because it
focuses only on the lowest level of professional development of the

Let's revisit competence-based teacher education 65
teacher. Whitty and Willmott (1991:314) remind us that such approach
has become inappropriate in the assessment of high-level professional
skills, and that the knowledge and understanding essential to
performance and skills, cannot always be assessed through direct
observation in the workplace only. One has to take into consideration
that it is also much easier to assess teachers' knowledge about content,
pedagogy, and specific learners than to assess teachers' performance in
delivering instruction that will generate the desired learning outcomes
and personal responses (Hollins 1993:97). Stodolsky (1984) questions
the stability, and therefore the reliability of observation as measurement
technique in the assessment of student teachers. She requires
information on the number of observations to be performed to ensure
reliable estimates of teacher behaviours, but immediately reminds us
that the sheer number of observations will not improve reliability
(internal consistency) estimates unless the observations are taken
under instructional conditions (on-the-job performance) requiring a
similar repertoire of teaching behaviour (Stodolsky 1984:13). It will
therefore be inappropriate to assume that a representative picture of a
teacher's competence can be obtained from a small number of
observations, especially when their observations are done across
different subjects (p 17).
4.3 Main criticism against so-called minimal
competence
It has been argued that assessors who base criterion scores on a concept
of minimal competence, fail for two reasons, namely that the model has
no foundation in psychology, and that judges disagree on the
arbitrariness of the values when minimal competence has to be
specified (Glass 1978:251). She reaches even further (p 251) by claiming
that the idea of minimal competence is bad logic and even worse when
assessed from a psychological point of view. Even in the opening
paragraphs of the well-documented article ``Standards and Criteria'',
Glass (1978:237±238) writes that mastery or competence cannot be
determined in statistical or psychological ways, and that ``criterion
levels'' or standards cannot be determined other than arbitrarily. This

66
supports Outcomes-based Education's move away from the setting of
cut-scores as levels of minimum competence (Spady 1994:32 & 44) but
does little to resolve the problem of distinguishing between excellence
and inadequacy in teaching and teacher education.
Therearetwoargumentsoneshouldtakenoteofwhenstandardsare
being set. The relationship between standards and good practice or
best practice is not at all straightforward. This often causes standards
to be empirically under-determined. They are very often also the
product of conventional thought, and not that of a precise empirical
calculation. Economic and social changes also cause standards that are
set, to become obsolete (Norris 1991:336).
4.4 Why should we test for competence?
According to Lehr (1986:244) and Short (1985:3) the public had been
brought under the impression for many years that students planning
careers in education (teaching), were far from the best and brightest.
Bracey (1996:330) supports this view and goes even further claiming
that people who go into teaching are dumber than people going into
other professions. Lehr (1986:244) stressed the fact that those students
planning to major in education had lower achievement scores and
lower grade point averages than students majoring in other subjects
(University of Pretoria and National Education Group 2000:5±8). The
same argument was also often raised in South Africa in the past. Many
factors (with specific reference to social-political establishment) had an
influence on a renewed interest in competence-based education and
competence-based assessment. Dissatisfaction with pupil performance
led to dissatisfaction with teacher performance that in turn resulted in
reduced confidence in educators and institutions that prepared
teachers (Stedman 1985:204). The poor performance of teachers in
practice, brought along a number of performance-assessing strategies.
Three levels of competency testing were then identified. They were
(1) the selection tests taken by candidates before entering a teacher
education programme, (2) the testing of teachers at the end of the

Let's revisit competence-based teacher education 67
teacher education programme, and (3) the assessment of practicing
teachersforcertificationpurposesasmandatedbystatesforexperienced
teachers (University of Pretoria & National Education Group
2000:5±8).
One of the main reasons for renewed interest into competence-based
assessment originates from the passing of competence legislation for
teacher certification in many states in the USA (Wiersma & Gibney
1985:59). The fact that public played an important role in enhancing the
quest toward effective competence-based assessment by questioning
the profession's inability to come up with a systematic and widelyaccepted
approach to measure teacher competence, should be noted
(Wiersma & Gibney 1985:59). To use Conklin's (1985:15) comments:
``competency tests made the public feel good'' (University of Pretoria
& National Education Group 2000:5±8). But the problems with CBTE
have not gone unnoticed.
There is however, another factor to be taken into consideration ± that of
the relationship between competency testing and on-the-job success
(University of Pretoria & National Education Group 2000:5±8). Conklin
(1985:14) claims that reliability estimates of teacher success are almost
impossible to determine, and that passing a competency test does not
guarantee that the candidate will be a successful teacher, only less
likely to be incompetent. What is the value of high performance scores
in certain fields of specialization? Are high scores for teaching practice,
the underpinning theory supporting pedagogy, learning mediation or
classroom management guarantees for teaching success? There are
indications that high scores in mathematics, reading and writing will
not necessarily guarantee good teaching, but that low performance
scores will almost certainly lead to poor teaching (Conklin 1985:15). If
low performance scores can be regarded as sure predictors of poor
performance, then the establishment of a cut-score as a measure of
elimination is surely justifiable.
To counteract the view that student teachers have to be assessed
mainly in the workplace, and then through the direct observation of
demonstrated competences, a number of principles have been devel-

68
oped to manage assessment (Whitty & Willmott 1991:315). According
to the authors, assessment should (a) meet national standards, and be
based upon criterion-referenced processes and explicit criteria;
(b) employ a wide and appropriate array of methods; (c) include
work-based evaluation of candidates' performance; (d) involve collaboration
between candidates, course providers, employers and assessors
(e) be independent of the pathway to assessment, and (f) be
available to individual candidates as well as to a cohort of students.
5 CONCLUSION
Teacher education and the training/education of individuals towards
excellence in a profession, finds its point of departure within the tasks
and functions required to perform within certain levels of expectation.
Standards specify these requirements and prescribe how they should
be outlined within the boundaries of the performance indicators/
criteria and the qualifying and quantifying range statements.
However, the distinction between an outcomes-based and competencebased
education model remains vague and avoiding. The justifications
and arguments that support both philosophies or approaches and their
underpinning paradigms of logic, easily become highly politicized,
often neglecting their true values and educational merits.
Occupational functions and accompanying performances require
competent practitioners whose skills and expertise are vested within
the defined tasks and functions of a profession. Tasks (jobs) and
functions have to be reassessed on a regular basis, and the appropriate
functional analysis will eventually pave the way towards relevant job
descriptions and accompanying appropriate training. A re-analysis of
teacher education is long overdue and a rejuvenation of the profession
will be beneficial to the profession.
Although the CBE-model linked to a behaviourist learning theory is
often criticized, it contains valuable elements that apply well to the
present outcomes-based paradigm of thinking. The measure of
association between the teaching profession, the instructional strategies
selected to achieve the desired levels of performance and

Let's revisit competence-based teacher education 69
competence, as well as the assessment strategies selected to measure
the acquired levels of performance, call for explicit and task-related
learning opportunities. A dilation and divorce between these three
variables contribute to an increase in the so-called ``assessment gap''
and the error of measurement. A high error of measurement will
eventually lead to a decrease in the instructional and assessment
reliability, contributing to a false perception of occupational excellence.
Authenticity in teaching, learning and assessment is an approach often
called for when competence and performance are required as measures
of excellence. We are already experiencing a return towards classroombased
teacher education and such modification should be interpreted
in terms of the requirement put to the profession to achieve the desired
job-related outcomes.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Assessment of Competence. 1989. Development of Assessable Standards for National
Certification. Guidance Note 5. Sheffield: Training Agency.
Association Educator. 2000. Competency-Based Education: What, Why, and How. 1
January 2000. http://www.asaenet.org/newsletters/display/
Bracey, G W. 1996. The Smarts of Teachers. Phi Delta Kappan, 78(4):330±331.
Brophy, J E, Coulter, C L, Crawford, W J, Evertson, C M & King, C E. 1975. Classroom
Observation Scales: Stability Across Time and Context and Relationships with
Student Learning Gains. Journal of Educational Psychology, 67(6):873±881.
Conklin, R C. 1985. Teacher Competency Testing: The Present Situation and Some
Concerns on How Teachers are Tested. Education Canada, Spring 1985, 25:12±15.
Department of Education. 2000. Norms and Standards for Educators. Government Gazette,
415(20844):9±34.
Developing Standards by Reference to Functions. 1989. Development of Assessable
Standards for National Certification. Guidance Note 2. Sheffield: Training Agency.
Evans, H C. 1993. Teacher Competence: panacea, rhetoric or professional challenge?
Journal of Education for Teaching, 19(4±5):145±162.
Everwijn, S E M Bomers, G B J & Knubben, J A. 1993. Ability- or competence-based
education: bridging the gap between knowledge acquisition and ability to apply.
Higher Education, 25(4):425±438.

70
Fennell, E (Ed). 1991. Development of Assessable Standards for National Certification. The
Training Agency (TA).
Fennell, E. 1990a. T A G Guidance Note Number 5: Assessment of Competence.
Competence & Assessment, Compendium No 1:42±43.
Fennell, E. 1990b. The Assessment and Accreditation of Prior Learning ± Weighing up the
Lessons of Experience. Assessment of Competence. Competence & Assessment,
Compendium No 1:49±50.
Foyster, J. 1990. Getting to grips with competency-based training and assessment. Leabrook:
TAFE National Centre for Research and Development Ltd.
Feuer, M J & Fulton, D C K. 1993. The many faces of performance assessment. Phi Delta
Kappan, 74(6):478.
Fraser, B. 1995. Teaching and Assessment of Competencies and Skills. Personeel Bulletin,
19(2):7±17.
Fraser, W J. 1996. Competence-based teacher education and the dilemma of the distance
education practitioner. Progressio, 18(1):74±90.
Gable, R A. 1991. Competency-Based Teacher Education Revisited. A Conversation with
Drs. Richard E. Shores and C. Michael Nelson. Teacher Education and Special
Education, 14(3):177±182.
Gibney, T & Wiersma, W. 1986. Using Profile Analysis for Student Teacher Evaluation.
Journal of Teacher Education, 37:41±45.
Glass, G V. 1978. Standards and Criteria. Journal of Educational Measurement, 15(4):237±
261.
Hodkinson, P. 1992. Alternative Models of Competence in Vocational Education and
Training. Journal of Further and Higher Education, 16(2):30±39.
Hollins, E R. 1993. Assessing Teacher Competence for Diverse Populations. Theory into
Practice, 32(2):93±99.
Hyland, T. 1993. Professional Development and Competence-based Education. Educational
Studies, 19(1):123±132.
Jacobs, M, Gawe, N & Vakalisa, N. (Eds.). 2000. Teaching-Learning Dynamics ± A
participative approach for OBE. Second edition. Johannesburg: Heinemann Higher
and Further Education (Pty), Ltd.
Killen, R, Meade, R, Yli-Renko, K & Fraser, W. 1996. A cross-cultural pilot study of
teacher clarity in the natural sciences (Giving students a feeling that they have
somesayinthewaytheyaretaught).Spectrum, 34(1):2±7.
Kruger, N & Adams, H. 1998. Psychology for Teaching and Learning. What teachers need to
know. Sandton: Heinemann Higher & Further Education (Pty) Ltd.
Lehr, F. 1986. ERIC/RCS Report: Teacher Competency Testing ± The State of the Art.
English Education, 18(4):244±249.

Let's revisit competence-based teacher education 71
Liddell, M & Baumgarten, T L. 1995. Preparing the Workforce 2000 through
transformational Outcome-based Education. Journal of Studies in Technical Careers,
XV(1):31±37.
Mackintosh, W G. 1993. Students' ratings of teacher effectiveness profiles: a formative
evaluation strategy for INSET. Paper read at the Annual Conference of the Southern
African Society for Education, Vaal Triangle Technikon, 1±2 October 1993.
McCollum, S & Tindal, G. 1996. Supporting Students in Content Area Classes Using an
Outcome-Based System of Collaboration. Special Services in the Schools, 12(1/2):1±17.
Mitchell, L. 1990. Assessing occupational competence: what does it mean in practice?
Competence & Assessment, Compendium No 1:34±36.
Morgan, S R. 1984. ``A Nation at risk!'' Performance-based Teacher Education did not
work. College Student Journal, 18:198±203.
Norris, N. 1991. The Trouble with Competence. Cambridge Journal of Education, 21(3):331±
341.
Popham, W J. 1986. Teacher Competency Testing: The Devil's Dilemma. JournalofNegro
Education, 55 (3):379±385.
Ristau, K. 1995. Beating the outcome-based blues. Momentum, April/May:42±45.
Ryan, J M & Kuhs, T M. 1993. Assessment of Preservice Teachers and the Use of
Portfolios. Theory into Practice, 32(2):75±81.
Saunders, D & Race, P. (Eds.). 1992. Developing and Measuring Competence. Aspects of
Educational and Training Technology, Volume XXV. London: Kogan Page.
Saunders, E. 2000. Assessing Human Competence. Practical Guidelines for South African
Managers. Randburg: Knowledge Resources (Pty) Ltd.
Short, E C. 1985. The Concept of Competence: Its Use and Misuse in Education. Journal of
Teacher Education, 36(2):2±6.
Sims, D. 1991. The Competence Approach. Adult Learning, 2(5):142±144.
Spady, W G. 1994. Outcome-Based Education: Critical Issues and Answers. Arlington:
American Association of School Administrators.
Stedman, C H. 1985. Testing for Competence: Lessons from Health Professions. The
Educational Forum, 49(2):199±210.
Stodolsky, S S. 1984. Teacher Evaluation: The Limits of Looking. Educational Researcher,
13(9):11±18.
Stuart, D. 1990. The Concept of Occupational Competence. Competence & Assessment,
Compendium No 1:16.
Tomlinson, P. 1995. Can Competence Profiling Work for Effective Teacher Preparation?
Part 1: General issues. Oxford Review of Education, 21(2):179±194.
Understanding Knowledge. 1990. The Final Report of the Identifying and Accrediting
Relevant Knowledge in the Building Society Sector Project. Briefing Series Number 3.
Barbara Shelborn Developments Ltd.

72
University of Pretoria & National Education Group. 2000. Teaching and Training Studies
710. Study Guide for the BEd Degree, Education Management, Faculty of
Education, University of Pretoria. Johannesburg: National Education Group (Pty)
Ltd.
Van der Horst, H & McDonald, R. 1998. Outcomes-Based Education: an illustrative
orientation. Educare, 27(1&2):19.
Van der Wagen, L & Ridley, B. 1997. Your guide to Training and Assessment in the
National Qualifications Framework. Pretoria: Kagiso Publishers EBA (Pty) Ltd.
Whitty, G & Willmott, E. 1991. Competence-based Teacher Education: approaches and
issues: Cambridge Journal of Education, 21(3):309±318.
Wiersma, W & Gibney, T. 1985. Observation as an Approach to Measuring Teacher
Competency. Action in Teacher Education, 7:59±67.
Wood, R 1990. Assessing Occupational Competence: Key Operational Precepts Gained
from work on the ground. Competence & Assessment, Compendium No 1:37±38.

A survey and appraisal of Outcomes-based Education (OBE) in South Africa 73
A survey and appraisal of
Outcomes-based
Education (OBE) in South
Africa with reference to
progressive education in
America
IACoetzer
Department of Educational
Studies
Unisa
The aims of this research article are to:
. indicate the differences between the traditional and the new outcomes-based
education (Curriculum 2005) approaches in the RSA
. reflect on the demise of C2005 and the introduction of Curriculum
21 (C21)
. identify and discuss the corresponding principles and practices of
outcomes-based education (OBE) in South Africa, and of progressive
education in America
. analyse the anticipated success and/or shortcomings of the transformed
education system in the RSA
1 INTRODUCTION
The new constitution implemented after the ANC government came
into power in 1994 enshrined respect for the rights of all South Africa's
citizens, with particular emphasis on the recognition of diversity. The
new curriculum with its outcomes-based approach is also well-suited

74
for the principle of inclusion and redress, and for being focused on
learners who did not receive adequate education and training in the
previous era as can be seen from national education policy developments
since 1994 (Constas 1997:682).
The important issue of the right to education in South Africa is
enunciated in the following statement by Niehaus (2000:19) as follows:
Everyone has the right to a basic education, including adult basic
education and to further education. Everyone has the right to receive
education in the official language of their choice. The state must respect,
protect, promote and fulfil these rights and should thus take reasonable
legislative and other measures within its available resources to achieve
their progressive realisation.
The following legislative measures contributed towards the progressive
realisation of the right of access to education.
. National Education Policy Act (Act 27 of 1996):
The preamble to this act states that it is necessary to adopt legislation
to facilitate the democratic transformation of the national system of
education into one that serves the needs and interests of all the people
of South Africa and upholds their fundamental rights.
. South African Schools Act (Act 84 of 1996):
The preamble to this act states that:
``this country requires a new national system for schools which will
redress past injustices in educational provision, provide an education of
progressively high quality for all learners and in so doing lay a strong
foundation for the development of all our people's talents and capabilities,
advance the democratic transformation of society, combat racism and
sexism and all other forms of unfair discrimination and intolerance,
contribute to the eradication of poverty and the economic well-being of
society, protect and advance our diverse cultures and languages, uphold
the rights of learners, parents and educators ...''

A survey and appraisal of Outcomes-based Education (OBE) in South Africa 75
The OBE educational approach is usually attractive to politicians,
policymakers and administrators during times of educational reform
that follow in the wake of sociopolitical reform, as was the case in the
RSA after the installation of the new government in 1994. According to
Van der Horst and McDonald (1997:6) this is typical of a socialreconstructivistic
view of schooling, where education is regarded as a
way to change and improve society.
The present Minister of Education, Prof Kader Asmal, has asserted the
necessity of a transformed system of education for South Africa instead
of the segregational system of the previous government:
The worst effects of apartheid were on education, particularly since
education has so many purposes ± education for citizenship, education for
culture, education for freedom and education for economic development
(The Teacher, March 2000:19)
Subsequently Prof Asmal (Pretoria News, 7 June 2000:11) observed that
Curriculum 2005 was an attempt to transform education to be ``humanrights
inspired, lively, activity-based, colourful and learner-centred ...
with the new outcomes-based curriculum, we are combining rather than
separating the acquisition by all learners of the knowledge, skills, values
and attitudes that reflect more closely life outside and after school.''
The differences between the old and the new approaches to education
in South Africa can be illustrated as follows:
Traditional education approach New education approach (2005)
. Passive learners . Active learners
. Exam-driven . Learners are assessed on an
on-going basis
. Rote learning . Critical thinking, reasoning,
reflection and action

76
Traditional education approach New education approach (2005)
. Syllabusiscontent-basedand
broken down in subjects.
. Textbook/worksheet-bound
and teacher centred.
. Syllabusisseenasrigidand
non-negotiable.
. Teachers are responsible for
learning; motivation depends
on teacher's personality.
. Emphasis is on what the
teacher hopes to achieve.
. Content placed in rigid timeframes.
. Curriculum development processnotopentopubliccomment.
. Integration of knowledge;
learning is relevant and connected
to real-life situations.
. Learner-centred; teacher is facilitator
and constantly uses
group and teamwork to consolidate
the new approach.
. Learning programmes are seen
as guides that allow teachers
to be innovative and creative.
. Learners take responsibility
for their learning and are motivated
by constant feedback
and affirmation of their sense
of self-worth.
. Emphasis is on outcomes ±
what the learner becomes and
understands.
. Flexible time-frames allow
learners to work at their own
pace.
. Comment and input from the
wider community is encouraged.
(SA National Department of Education 1997:6±7; Burke 1995:58±59)
C2005 in its original format was however reviewed on a number of
occasions to meet the expectations of the learners, teachers and other
stakeholders in education and to streamline outcomes-based education
in South Africa. This important matter is discussed in the next section of
the article.

A survey and appraisal of Outcomes-based Education (OBE) in South Africa 77
2 THE DEMISE OF C2005 AND THE INTRODUCTION
OF CURRICULUM 21 (C21)
Curriculum 2005 has been revised four times since its inception in 1995
when it was introduced by the former Minister of Education, Professor
Sibusiso Bengu, and although it was supposed to have been phased in
for all grades by the year 2005, it was actually phased out in its existing
form in June 2000. The present Minister of Education, Professor Kader
Asmal, then set up a committee to review the curriculum yet again. The
committee, headed by the University of Natal's Professor Linda
Chisholm, proposed that the revised curriculum, to be called Curriculum
21 (C21) after the present century, take the place of Curriculum
2005 (C2005). Although C2005 has effectively been discarded, lifelong
learning and outcomes-based education remain at the centre of the new
streamlined curriculum approach. The vision is to create an education
system that liberates human potential and enables South Africa's
citizens to take their rightful place in all spheres of life, particularly the
economic, social and political so that a highly educated population can
participate in all spheres of life with the confidence derived from a
complete education (Pretoria News, 7 June 2000:11; Sunday Times,
2 August 2000:01; The Teacher/Mail & Guardian, 3 August 2000:3).
Various reasons for the failure of C2005 are reported in the printed media:
. Assumption of the principles of OBE meant a unanimous
rejection of the apartheid education principles of Christian
Natural Education (CNE), but in retrospect it seems that the
ANC government may have been too hasty in its adoption of
policies to eradicate racism and sexism from the syllabus,
and may not have fully considered the consequences of these
policies (Sunday Times, 4 June 2000:22). The time framework
laid down for implementation in all grades by the year 2005
was unrealistic because curriculum reform is a slow process,
even in well-resourced and established education systems.
. The obtuse and sometimes impenetrable curriculum terminology
used by C2005 confused a lot of teachers. They could

78
not display any depth of understanding of what the new
curriculum framework was all about, and they had little
understanding of how it was supposed to be implemented
(Pretoria News, 7 June 2000:11; Business Day, 2 August 2000:2)
. A significant proportion of teachers were insufficiently qualified
for, and some even insufficiently knowledgeable about the
subject matter they were supposed to teach. These teachers were
not only expected to change the content and methodology of
their teaching, but even to develop their own learning
programmes and teaching materials. More attention had to be
given to teacher orientation, training and support as essential
ingredients of curriculum change (The Teacher, March 2000:19).
. The important matter of proper management of the transformed
curriculum was neglected. In this regard preparatory training
for C2005 mainly focused on teachers and neglected the district
and school managers who had to provide teachers with both
support and supervision (Business Day, 2 August 2000:2).
. Assessment proved to be a major stumbling block for teachers,
as became evident at inter alia parent-teacher meetings where
they had to present parents with the new report cards that had
been devised to reflect OBE practice at their school. Resources
were also constrained, and there was a high staff turnover in
government departments and schools. Textbooks and/or
learning support materials were in short supply in many parts
of the country, and the 1995 school register of needs showed that
only 30% of SA schools had libraries (Business Day, 2August
2000:2). Yet C2005 expected pupils to develop into independent
learners who ask questions, find and analyse information and
solve problems.
. Curriculum designers have tried to avoid prescribing learning
outcomes (including knowledge, skills, values and attitudes) on
a grade-by-grade basis, with the result that teachers were poorly
(if at all) informed about the specific teaching content required
for specific grades (Pretoria News, 25 June 2000:9).
The main differences between the new Curriculum 21 and the former
C2005 can be summed up as follows:

A survey and appraisal of Outcomes-based Education (OBE) in South Africa 79
Curriculum 21 Curriculum 2005
IN
. A streamlined, revised Curriculum
21
. ANationalCurriculumStatement
is expected in June 2001
that will clearly explain `what
is to be learnt and at what level
it is to be tested'
OUT
. Curriculum 2005 in its current
form
. Existing policy documents on
Curriculum 2005
. Plain English . Complex jargon
. SixlearningareasforGrades4
to 9: language, mathematics,
natural sciences, social
sciences, arts and culture and
life orientation
. History and geography, previously
neglected, will be reinstated
as a key part of the
social sciences
. There will be a strong focus on
the teaching of maths and
science with 70% of classroom
time to be spent on maths and
language teaching in Grades 1
to 3, and 50% from Grade 4
onwards
. There will be learning area
statements that will pin down
what a pupil should know and
be able to do in each of the six
learning areas
. Eight learning areas
. Technology and economic and
management sciences are to be
dropped for now in view of the
current shortage of teachers
and other resources
. The myth that reading and
maths should not be specifically
taught
. The 66 specific outcomes (targets)
against which learners
had to be tested in each grade

80
Curriculum 21 Curriculum 2005
IN
. Learning outcomes or targets
will explain what concepts,
content and skills pupils should
learnineachofthesixlearning
programmes in each grade
. Assessment standards will describe
in detail what a pupil
should be able to do and know
in each grade
. There will be a reasonable
time-frame
. Teachers will be trained in the
selection and use of textbooks
. Flexibility and teacher discretion
will be allowed in the
classroom
. There will be grade-by-grade
benchmarks or targets
. Curriculum 21 will be introduced
in the intermediate and
the foundation phase when
appropriate and will be done
by phase (Grades 1 to 3 and
Grades 4 to 6) and in the senior
phase by each grade
OUT
. Assessment criteria, range
statements, performance indicators,
expected levels of performance
and phase organisers
. Programme organisers or
themes, for example transport,
included by teachers under
language and maths, lead to
boredom among pupils
. Rushed implementation
. Macro-planning ± the practice
whereby schools choose the
same topics to teach different
learning areas
. Group work as the only learning
method
. Evaluation by phase, for example
testing a pupil at the
end of Grade 3 rather than
each year from Grades 1 to 3
. A General Education and
Training Certificate in 2002

A survey and appraisal of Outcomes-based Education (OBE) in South Africa 81
Curriculum 21 Curriculum 2005
IN
OUT
. Subject to negotiation, as from
2006 a General Education and
Training Certificate will be
awarded to pupils when they
complete Grade 9
Myths
. Curriculum 2005 has nothing
to do with content.
. In Curriculum 2005 anything
goes
. Curriculum 2005 will not involve
the use of textbooks
. Group work is compulsory for
the implementation of Curriculum
2005
Stays
. The principle of outcomesbased
education
. Learning is child-centred and
is accomplished through activities
. The same three learning programmes
for Grades 1 to 3:
literacy, numeracy and life
skills
. Critical outcomes or learning
goals that state what a pupil
should be able to learn in every
grade, including maths and
language skills, problem solving
and critical thinking
(Sunday Times, 4 June 2000:6; The Teacher/Mail & Guardian, 12 September 2000:1±4;
Beeld, 1 June 2000:1).
It needs to be noted that Cabinet on 25 July 2000 decided that since the
recommendations of the C2005 Review Committee amount to a
strengthening and streamlining of C2005 and not its phasing out, and
therefore do not depart from the original underpinning principles, and
since they maintain the thrust of the original educational and societal
goals, there is no need to change the name of the curriculum to
Curriculum 21.

82
3 COMPARATIVE PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICES OF
OBE IN SOUTH AFRICA, AND OF PROGRESSIVE
EDUCATION IN AMERICA
Before the limitations and/or successes of OBE in South Africa and
references to Progressive Education in America can be appraised, it is
deemed necessary to discuss the corresponding educational principles
and practices underpinning the educational approaches in both
countries.
In South African OBE and American progressive schools:
. rote learning and subject-centred instruction are replaced by
instruction that challenges learners' skills relating to inquiry
and problem solving. These educators value independence of
learning and problem solving because this approach fosters
more spontaneity and independence and more favourable
attitudes towards learning. Both education approaches aim
at producing thinking, competent future citizens (Burke
1995:58±59; Conradie 1997:8±11; Spady 1993:1±2; Squire
1972:328).
. learners are active, inventing and contributing original ideas;
they interact continually in a purposeful and active way with
subject matter, teachers and peers, and they identify and
solve problems by applying creative and critical thinking.
The principle of activity ensures that learners become active
participants in the learning process and have to take more
responsibility for their own learning (Ruben & Spady
1984:37±44; University of South Africa: 6; Cremin 1961:120±
135).
. learning is child- or learner-centred and the emphasis is not
on what the teacher wants to achieve but rather on what the
learner should be able to know, understand, do and become.
The educator-teacher relinquishes the role of formal and
prescriptive instructor and instead becomes an initiator,
observer and facilitator of pupils' activities. The teachers in
these schools humanise education and foster a positive
attitude towards learning. In the South African context

A survey and appraisal of Outcomes-based Education (OBE) in South Africa 83
teachers have the freedom to develop their own learning
programmes based on guidelines provided by the education
department, instead of just implementing centrally designed
curricula (SA National Department of Education 1998:5, 15;
SA National Department of Education 1997:28±29; Rugg &
Shumaker 1969:57).
. the individual needs and interests of the student are of
central importance. In both the American and South African
approaches learners are recognised as separate, unique
persons with capabilities and a background of their own that
are not necessarily shared with others. Learners are also
assisted to progress at their own pace, and learners are
exposed to real-life experiences with a view to accommodating
their individual needs and interests (Rugg & Shumaker
1996:61; University of South Africa 1997:4). In OBE in
South Africa learning outcomes are also determined by
relevant real-life needs. But whereas individual attention to
each learner was ensured in America's progressive schools
by allowing no more than 20 learners in the classroom, South
African classrooms, especially in rural areas, on average
accommodate in excess of 30 learners. The latest statistics
indicate that in the Eastern Cape the teacher/learner ratio is
1:36 and in Gauteng 29:1 (Beeld, 3 November 2000:6).
. themoveisawayfromadherencetoaprescribedcanonof
learning material as was the case in the so-called traditional
schools in both the USA and South Africa. In American
progressive schools as well as South African schools where
the OBE approach to teaching prevails, school programmes
are organised around large centres of interest rather than
around academic subjects. In American progressive schools
the progressivists advocated the so-called broad-fields
curriculum where courses are organised around study units
as a reaction against the traditional intellectualised forms of
schooling (Noble 1961:482). Similarly, in South African
schools where OBE is practised, rather than focusing mainly
on content, learning programmes consist of courses or units
of learning through which learners can achieve the expected

84
learning outcomes. The object of both these education
approaches is to equip all learners with the knowledge,
competencies and orientations needed to be successful in the
world of work once they have completed their studies (South
Africa 1998:5±7; Spady 1982:126).
. cooperative learning results in more vigorous and lively
responses from learners so that they question, debate and
socialise in a democratic atmosphere and an environment
that reflects community life. Progressive schools and schools
where the principles of OBE are applied are not only learnercentred,
but also strongly community centred because
schools aspire to prepare the youth for future social life. This
ideal is achieved by making the school a cooperative society
on a small scale. The modus operandi of offering learners the
opportunity to be exposed to a harmonious group life ± they
participate effectively with others in a team, group, organisation
or community ± also serves to empower the young
generation with social and emotional skills and internalised
personality traits (King & Evans 1991:74; Spady & Marshall
1991:68; Van der Horst & McDonald 1997:127±137).
. it is realised that innovative, progressive learner- and
community-centred education can only be achieved in a
democratic environment and school structure, and that it
must be supported by a democratic political dispensation. An
important objective of both education approaches is the
creation of a global approach that would link people together
through education in spite of political and racial differences
that separate them. Human liberty and equality are the
principles to be honoured. In this regard the humanitarian
effort of the progressive educators in America was focused
on the promotion of human dignity through the establishment
of equality and fairness in their schools in order to fulfil
the promise of American democracy. In South Africa and in
OBE schools in this country it is accepted that equality can
only be achieved in a democratic society that accommodates
a culture of human rights, multi-lingualism, gender equality
and sensitivity to the values of reconciliation and nation

A survey and appraisal of Outcomes-based Education (OBE) in South Africa 85
building. The present South African government therefore
shows awareness of the importance of effective learning
strategies, responsible citizenship, cultural sensitivity, education
and career opportunities (Samoff, Rensburg, Groener
1994:04; Technical Committee 1997:10±12; Counts 1971:164).
. recognition is given to the essential role of continuing
education or lifelong learning outside the school to eradicate
literacy, prevent human obsolence and preserve and further
the development of democracy in the RSA and the USA. The
ideal is to empower individuals to cope with vastly altered
education needs dictated by a complex society, the knowledge
explosion and ever increasing technological changes
(Cremin 1961:120±135). In South Africa the principle of
redress ensures that the education needs of previously
disadvantaged groups are specifically addressed. In July
1999 the newly appointed Education Minister, Prof Kader
Asmal, outlined the government's blueprint for overhauling
South Africa's dysfunctional educational system to ensure
that learning and teaching prepare our citizens for the 21 st
century. Prof Asmal has intimated that the government will
promote lifelong learning and eradicate illiteracy within five
years (presently in rural South Africa illiteracy runs as high
as 60%) (Pretoria News, 28 July 1999:5,12). Niehaus (2000:21)
also refers to the government's plan issued in February 1998
that the provision of Adult Basic Education and Training
(ABET) be expanded from 37 000 in 1997 to 691 875 by 2001.
. educators are oriented less towards successful performance
in examinations and more towards values and the formation
of a balanced personality. In America the progressivists
followed the practice of allowing learners, their peers and
teachers to assess learners' performance and they pronounced
that school marks and competitive examinations
should be abolished (Tenenbaum 1951:253, 257). According
to South Africa's OBE approach to learning, assessment is on
an ongoing basis and is used to determine the progress of
learners and the attainment of learning outcomes. A variety
of learner activities are assessed by applying different

86
strategies, including project work, presentations, demonstrations,
oral work, group work, interviews, learner journals,
written reports, learner portfolios, and so on
(University of South Africa 1997:19; SA National Department
of Education 1997:19; SA National Department of Education
s.a: 33±44). It also includes self-assessment and peer assessment.
It is clear from the discussion that the education principles and
practices of the OBE approach in South Africa and of Progressive
Education in America are markedly similar regarding the core tenets of
both education approaches to be appraised in the final section of the
article.
4 AN EVALUATION OF THE LIMITATIONS AND/OR
SUCCESSES OF OBE IN SOUTH AFRICA WITH
REFERENCE TO PROGRESSIVE EDUCATION IN
AMERICA
A serious limitation of C2005 was that not much specific content was
prescribed. Instead the strongest focus fell on the learning outcomes to
be achieved. A sound content base is naturally always a prerequisite
for critical thinking and problem-solving which have since the
inception of C2005 been at the heart of OBE teaching and learning. All
the learning outcomes to be attained should focus on core academic
content.
Since the launching of C2005 it was accepted that teachers, learners and
the community would be able to participate in the selection of
appropriate learning content. The reality was ignored that all teachers
do not have the skills, the resources or the time to develop their own
curricula. Curriculum development is a specialised activity and there
is a need to inform teachers about what they should be teaching in each
learning programme in each grade. It is recommended that teachers be
provided with a core curriculum for each grade in each learning
programme. A curriculum with a sound knowledge base will enhance
the learning of content by learners and assessment by teachers will be
made easier.

A survey and appraisal of Outcomes-based Education (OBE) in South Africa 87
The government's decision to remedy the situation by appointing Prof
Linda Chisholm to lead a task team to write a National Curriculum
Statement to be completed by the middle of 2001 must be applauded.
This Statement will include learning outcomes that specify the
sequence of core concepts, content and skills to be taught and learnt in
each learning programme at each grade level. The review committee
chaired by Chisholm has proposed that the said Statement be
developed to replace the specific outcomes, assessment criteria, range
statements, phase organisers and programme organisers (Pretoria
News, 5 June 2000:9).
Another concern about the curriculum is the poor performance of
South African learners in mathematics and science. A recent study
claimed that the current school curriculum failed to encourage literacy
in these subjects. University of the Witwatersrand education researcher
Shireen Motala says when the performance in biology, mathematics
and physical science is compared, maths, at 43% had the lowest pass
rate. The national pass rate for maths was 49,5% in 1996, dropping in
1997 to 46,3%, and to 42,1% in 1998 (Pretoria News, 11 July 2000:6).
A South African study commissioned by the national Department of
Education found that Grade 4 learners in South Africa have among the
worst numeracy skills in Africa when compared to 12 other countries
on the African Continent. More than 10 000 Grade 4 learners
participated in the SA study and scored an average of only 30% for
numeracy ± compared with 51% for Botswana, 49% for Uganda and
36% for Zambia. A large proportion of our Grade 4 learners scored
below 25% for the numeracy task, while only about 2% obtained scores
in the 75±100% range (Sunday Times, 16 July 2000:1).
It is interesting to note that the curriculum followed in the progressive
schools of America (similar to our C2005) showed the same results,
especially as regards instruction and results in mathematics and the
natural sciences. In a report to the American nation and the Secretary
of Education, published in 1983 under the title Anationatrisk:TheA imperative for educational reform, it is claimed that failures to excel in
subjects like mathematics and science could be blamed at least partly

88
on the lack of strong content in progressive schools up to the late 1950s.
The report claims that the nation is raising a new generation of
Americans that is scientifically and technologically illiterate (United
States National Commission on Excellence in Education, 1983:8±10).
The solution to the American scenario, also to be considered in South
Africa, was to include challenging intellectual content in their schools.
The Americans realised that the progressive schools' banning of
textbooks and of learning through reading may have contributed to the
low literacy levels of their pupils. The Report stated that 23 million
American adults are functionally illiterate by the simplest tests of
everyday reading, writing and comprehension (United States National
Commission on Excellence in Education, 1983:8±9). Regarding the
importance of content, the report (United States National Commission
on Excellence in Education, 1983:19, 28) states the following:
Textbooks and other tools of learning and teaching should be upgraded
and updated to assure more rigorous content ... as they did in the post-
Sputnik era.
In the South African context R80 million was budgeted for textbooks
for the period 1997/1998, compared to R895 million in 1995/96. This
severe budget cut may have contributed to the low literacy rate
mentioned in two studies completed this year. These studies, which
examined 12 countries on the Continent, found that at 48,1% Grade 4
learners in South Africa have among the worst literacy skills in Africa
(Beeld, 12 July 2000:8; Sunday Times, 16 July 2000). Prof Kader Asmal,
Minister of Education, offered a glimmer of hope when in July 2000 he
released a statement setting out his vision for education during his
term of office. To ensure the success of active learning through
outcomes-based education the Minister has established as a target
performance indicator that all learners must achieve competence in
reading, writing and numeracy by age 9, or at the end of Grade 3. Prof
Asmal also stated his intention to provide more resources for all the
critical learning materials, and especially textbooks (Education Policy
Unit, October 1999:02). As regards teachers, it is recommended that
they need much greater depth of content knowledge in all the learning

A survey and appraisal of Outcomes-based Education (OBE) in South Africa 89
areas. They also need to be trained to evaluate and select appropriate
learning support materials and to design effective worksheets. The
government's decision to implement a curriculum based on the tenets
of outcomes-based education will therefore only be successful if
teachers are adequately prepared and equipped for this challenge at
both the pre-service and in-service level.
In South Africa there is a lack of responsibility, dedication and
commitment on the part of many teachers and learners (Van der Horst
and McDonald, 1997:5). Absenteeism on the part of both teachers and
learners is also rife in South African schools. To alleviate this problem
it is recommended that a code of conduct ± to be adhered to by both
educators and learners ± be drawn up to ensure that schools function in
an organised manner, and that discipline prevails in our learning
institutions. The new vision should be especially focused on the
importance of community ``ownership'' of schools, and on factors that
contribute to the establishment of a culture of learning and teaching.
It is heartening to note that all schools in South Africa will undergo
rigorous external evaluations from 2001 in a major drive to be
undertaken by the National Department of Education to restore
parents' confidence in the public education system. Two hundred
specially trained officials will visit each of South Africa's estimated 28
000 schools, but will prioritise poorly performing institutions. Schools
will be awarded report cards based on their performance. These
government officials will evaluate the public schools according to a
checklist that lists questions under the following topics:
. The basic functionality of the school
. Leadership, management and communication
. The quality of teaching and teacher development
. Curriculum provision and resources such as textbooks
. Learners' achievements
. Safety and discipline
. Governance and relationships
. Infrastructure
(Sunday Times, 1 October 2000:04).

90
The author is in agreement with Van der Horst and McDonald
(1997:18) that there is a general concern about standards. The concern
revolves around the matter that schools using an OBE approach to
learning will need to lower their standards to accommodate the slower
learners since not all learners have the same potential to learn to the
same high standards. The reverse agreement to this is that OBE will
hold back the gifted, and slower learners will retard class progress.
Based on the principles of freedom, tolerance, caring and democratic
participation, as was the case in the era of the progressivists in
America, there is general agreement that OBE in South Africa is strong
on the important issue of human rights. The reason for this is that OBE
is aimed at establishing in learners the skills, values, attitudes and
knowledge that will help them to become adults who can participate
freely and widely in the culturally diverse and rapidly changing
society they live in (Ggobe 1997:319). It is also realised, however, that
the legacy of so many years of apartheid in South Africa makes these
aims more difficult to achieve than it may seem because educators are
grappling with multicultural, multiracial, multi-ethnic and multi-faith
classrooms. But there may be a solution at hand. In partnership with
the Electoral Institute of South Africa, Kagiso Television and the
Human Rights Commission, the magazine The Teacher is launching a
project called ``Celebrating Diversity''. With this project schools will
receive teaching materials through The Teacher that will empower
teachers to tackle issues of diversity in the classroom in a constructive
way. Several training workshops will also be held for teachers
throughout the duration of the 18-month project. Furthermore the
National Centre for Human Rights Education and Training (Nachret)
aims to respond to the demand for human-rights education by
producing both materials and training programmes. Tolerance of
racial, religious, cultural and gender differences are issues that need to
be addressed in regard to teaching and schools. Accordingly, teachers
are targeted as an important group for training by Nachret in humanrights
education (The Teacher/ Mail & Guardian, 30 August 2000:1±3).
Kok (2000:2) adds to this that changes in values should take place to
resolve the issue of human rights. He rightly suggests that Africa

A survey and appraisal of Outcomes-based Education (OBE) in South Africa 91
should take its destiny in its own hands and stop blaming the past and
external powers for its position. Individuality and personal responsibility
should have precedence over collectivity. South Africa should
realise that its own visions and expectations for the future will
determineitsdestinyandposition±andnotitsexcessiveconcernwith
the past.
5 FINAL COMMENTS
It is recommended that government and education strategists should
focus on the following significant matters concerning C2005.
It should be realised that a strong content base is fundamental for
critical thinking and problem-solving, both of which are at the heart of
OBE. Government and education strategists should also note that
curriculum development is a specialised activity which requires
teachers to be fully informed concerning the content they should be
teaching in every learning programme in each grade.
The poor performance of South African learners in mathematics and
science needs to be addressed urgently. It is important to note that the
curriculum which was followed in the progressive schools of America
(similar to our C2005) showed the same results, especially as regards
instruction and results pertaining to mathematics and the natural
sciences. The solution to the American scenario, also to be considered
in South Africa, was to include challenging intellectual content in these
schools. As regards teachers, it is recommended that their dire need of
greater depth of knowledge, not only in mathematics and science but in
all learning areas be met. OBE will only be successful if teachers are
adequately prepared and equipped for the challenges outlined above at
both pre-service and in-service level.
Finally it is recommended that a strict code of conduct to be adhered to
by both teachers and learners be established to ensure that discipline
and commitment are restored in our learning institutions.

92
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Burke, J (ed) 1995. Outcomes, learning and the curriculum: implications for NVQ's, GNVQ's
and other qualifications. London:FalmerPress.
Beeld, 12 July 2000.
Business Day, 2 August 2000.
Conradie, D 1997. Outcomes based education OBE: What is it? EE Bulletin, April:8±11.
Constas, M A 1997. Apartheid and the socio-political context of education in South Africa: A
narrative account. Teachers College Record 98(4):682±720.
Counts, G S 1971. A humble autobiography, In: Hariqhurst, RJ (Ed): Leaders in American
Education, Part II. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Cremin, l 1961. The Transformation of the School: Progressivism in American Education. New
York: Knopf.
Education Policy Unit (UNISA). Communique No 2 October 1999:02.
Kgobe, M 1997. The National Qualifications Framework in South Africa and ``out of school
youth'': Problems and possibilities. International Review of Education 43(4):317±330.
King, J A & Evans, K M 1991. Can we achieve outcome-based education? Educational
Leadership 51(6):73±75.
Kok, J C 2000. Africa Renaissance: A wakening to other values. Unpublished paper delivered
at the EASA Conference, Jan 2000; Bloemfontein.
National Education Policy Act, Act no 27 of 1996.
Niehaus, L 2000. Education in Post-apartheid South Africa (Key-note presentation delivered at
Quality Learning 2000. Inaugural International Symposium Calgary Board of
Education in Calgary, Canada:1±4 March 2000).
Noble, SG 1961. A History of American education. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston.
Pretoria News, 7 June 2000.
Pretoria News, 25 June 2000.
Ruben, S E & Spady, W G 1984. Achieving excellence through outcome-based instructional
delivery. Educational Leadership 41(8):37±44.
Rugg, H & Shumaker, A 1969. The Child-Centred School. New York: Arno Press.
SA National Department of Education 1998. Curriculum 2005 report. Pretoria: SA National
Department of Education.
Samoff, J, Rensburg, I, Groener, Z 1994. From critique to consultation to curriculum:
Education policy in post-apartheid South Africa. Toronto: African Studies Association.
SA National Department of Education 1997. Curriculum 2005: Lifelong learning for the 21 st
century. Pretoria: Department of Education.

A survey and appraisal of Outcomes-based Education (OBE) in South Africa 93
SA National Department of Education. Draft policy on an assessment and examinations
framework for general and further education and training in South Africa. Pretoria: SA
National Department of Education.
South African Schools Act, Act no 84 of 1996.
South Africa 1998. Green Paper for Further Education and Training: Preparing for the twentyfirst
century through education, training and work. Pretoria: Government Printer.
Spady, W G 1982. Outcome-based instructional management: A sociological perspective.
Australian Journal of Education, 26(2):123±142.
Spady, W G 1993. Outcome-based education. Australian Curriculum Studies Association:
New-South Wales.
Spady, W G & Marshall, K J 1991. Beyond traditional outcome-based education. Educational
Leadership, 49(2):67±72.
Squire, J R (Chairman and Editor; ASCD 1972 Yearbook Committee) 1972. Anewlookat
progressive education. Washington: Association for Supervision and Curriculum
Development.
Sunday Times, 4 June 2000.
Sunday Times, 16 July 2000.
Sunday Times, 1 October 2000.
Technical Committee for the development of an Outcomes-based Curriculum, Department
of Education 1997. Curriculum 2005: specific outcomes, assessment criteria, range
statements. Grades 1 to 9: Pretoria: National Department of Education.
Tenenbaum, S 1951. William Heard Kilpatrick: Trail blazer in education. New York: Harper
and Brothers.
The Teacher, March 2000.
The Teacher/Mail & Guardian, 3 August 2000.
The Teacher/Mail & Guardian, 30 August 2000.
The Teacher/Mail & Guardian, 12 September 2000.
United States. National Commission on excellence in education. 1983. A nation at risk: the
imperative for educational reform: a report to the Nation and the Secretary of Education,
United States Department of Education. Washington, DC: The Commission.
University of South Africa. Faculty of Education 1997. Curriculum 2005: Tutorial Letter
301/1997 for EDUFAC±N. Pretoria.
Van der Horst, H & McDonald, R 1997. OBE Outcomes-based education: A Teacher's manual.
Pretoria: Kagiso.

94
A Historical-educational
perspective of
urbanisation and its
contribution to the street
child phenomenon in
South Africa 1
Dr Cheryl le Roux
Department of Secondary
School Teacher Education
Unisa
The street child phenomenon as a social-educational problem is experienced both
locally and internationally. Presently in South Africa, there are an estimated 12 000 street
or vagrant children who are predominantly black and male. The question that arises is
why is this the case? What is the etiology of the problem and why is it predominantly
limited to one specific population group and gender? Furthermore, one cannot but
wonder what the educational implications for these under-age children are.
The origin of this predicament is possibly to be found in the history of urbanisation in this
country. Urbanisation as a boon to some, has been the downfall of others and the
intention of this article is to provide a South African perspective on the course and impact
of urbanisation on children and their education: the focus however, on the plight of the
street child. The effect of the legislation which has guided and controlled urbanisation
and has resulted in generations of street children among the black population group is
ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ
1 Financial assistance of International Science Liaison is acknowledged.

A Historical-educational perspective of urbanisation 95
briefly reviewed. In addition, the HIV/AIDS pandemic which is currently devastating the
country, is contributing towards the escalation of the number of street children as these
children, orphaned and destitute, turn to the streets for their livelihood ± which most
frequently includes prostitution which exposes them to the risk of HIV infection. The
article goes on to investigate the educational situation of these children who are the
product of urbanisation, to highlight the dilemmas faced on a daily basis and to sketch
the educational and career prospects which they have.
The research in preparation for this article relies not only on a review of literature on the
issue, but also draws on the results of interviews conducted with street children to
determine their opinions on those matters which are of concern to their welfare. From an
analysis of the interviews it is possible to sketch profiles of street children's
backgrounds, lifestyles, experiences, and also their future prospects. One could ask
whether to these children, cities as products of urbanisation, are a light and beacon or
merely a lure promising survival?
1 INTRODUCTION
Despite the publication during the 20th century of a variety of
protocols, charters and international conventions that recognise and
aim to protect the rights and welfare of children, the street child
phenomenon as a social-educational problem remains a global
dilemma. Even in South Africa which could be said to be a country
traditionally renowned for robust family ties and parental warmth
especially among the predominant black cultural groups, there are an
estimated 12 000 street or vagrant children. Most of these children are
black and male.
Worldwide, the two primary causes to which the street child
phenomenon tends to be attributed, are poverty and dysfunctional
family contexts. In South Africa however, it appears that the problem
has been and continues to be exacerbated by two additional causal
factors: the one factor has historical roots, namely a distinctive
urbanisation process unique to South Africa, and the other is a
contemporary crisis, namely the HIV/AIDS pandemic. Furthermore, it
could be hypothesized that the spread of HIV/AIDS is also linked to
the urbanisation process.

96
It is the purpose of this article to outline the legislation that guided and
controlled early urbanisation in South Africa and to examine how the
lure of the city has adversely impacted on certain children and has
contributed to the street child dilemma. Adjacently, the social
intervention programmes and educational prospects for these children
for whom urbanisation has contributed to their undoing, are succinctly
reviewed.
2 AN OVERVIEW OF THE URBANISATION PROCESS
IN SOUTH AFRICA
Urbanisation is by no means unique to South Africa. What is unique,
however, are the principles underlying the urbanisation process and
the way in which these principles controlled the movement of black
people. The migrant labour system, influx control and the Group Areas
Act profiled the urbanisation process and it is nowadays conceded that
this politically inspired legislation exacerbated poverty and unemployment
among large sectors of the black population. It is further
argued that this legal framework and its consequences have contributed
directly to the proliferation of street children in the country
(Donald & Swart-Kruger 1994:111). If an understanding of the
urbanisation process is to be gained, it is necessary to view the concept
within its historical legal framework.
2.1 The migrant labour system
Over the years, migrant labour has played a significant role in meeting
the labour needs in inter alia agriculture and the mining industry in
South Africa. During the mid-1800s, Western Cape farmers solved the
perennial problem of labour shortage ± which in previous centuries
had been alleviated through the importation of slaves ± by recruiting
temporary workers. Agents were tasked to secure labourers ± most of
whom worked on a contract basis ± to work in the vineyards and
wheatfields. Upon completion of their contract, labourers returned to
their homes and families. In Natal a similar situation in relation to the
sugar cane plantations existed and for years the major source of labour
was indentured help from India. However, these migrant labourers
were allowed to bring their families with them for the duration of the

A Historical-educational perspective of urbanisation 97
contract. Although they were allowed to return to India once their
contracts had expired, many choose to settle in the country. Another
example of the migrant labour system during the early years is that of
the teams of migrant sheep shearers who moved through the farms of
the Eastern Cape during the early spring months. It is believed that as
sheep farming expanded to the Orange Free State, these teams of
shearers who offered their skill and labour for a price, followed
(Wilson 1972:1±2).
Within the mining context, the discovery of diamonds in 1866 in
Hopetown and in 1874 in Kimberley, provided work for over 10 000
black migrant diggers who offered their service to the industry. Soon
after the opening of the diamond fields, control of the diggings became
centralised as employers evolved a system of closed compounds to
prevent illicit diamond buying. This meant that workers were
effectively sealed off from all contact with the outside world during
their period of service. In effect, a unique migrant labour pattern was
being established whereby men continued to live in the rural areas, but
left their families for several months at a time whilst they went to earn
money on the mines. It is significant to note that at the time, criticism
was levelled at the closed compound system on the grounds that the
family life of the 'natives' ± however different from that of the
`civilised' white man ± ought to be treated with consideration and
respect. It was argued that it would be unfortunate to break up a tribal
organisation and the free movement of blacks in search of work and to
create a large mass of men without local or family ties (South African
Native Races Committee 1901:220). Notwithstanding this criticism, the
migrant labour system survived and prevailed as a precedent to be
introduced on the goldfields a decade later.
When gold was discovered on the Witwatersrand in 1886 and sparked
the economic boom that was to change the face of the country, the
migrant labour system to work the goldfields was the obvious choice.
Thirteen years after the discovery of gold, the mines employed some
100 000 blacks recruited by the Chamber of Mines through their Native
Recruiting Corporation from all over sub-Saharan Africa. This same
organisation organised migrant labour for the coal mines of the

98
Transvaal. Other sectors of the economy also patterned their employment
practices on the gold mines' example and the Johannesburg
Municipality, for example, took over one of the old mine compounds in
1931 and used it to house some 1 800 electricity department workers.
Similarly, some private firms also built their own compounds to house
their migrant workers (Wilson 1972:5).
Despite the efforts to regulate migrant labour and to provide for the
basic accommodation of migrant labourers, the 1920s and 1930s are
characterised by the development of black slums in the western (eg
Vrededorp), central (eg Doornfontein) and eastern (eg Jeppe) suburbs
of Johannesburg due to the inability of the local municipality to
provide sufficient housing for black migrant labourers. Many of these
people had brought their entire families with them and the whole
family, children included, were subjected to these abject conditions. It
was under these circumstances that the first generation of street
children, as products of urbanisation, made their appearance. Boys
from the various slum areas formed themselves into gangs of laaities ±
thosewiseinthewaysofthecity±andjealouslyprotectedtheir`beats'.
In Sophiatown, these laaities monopolised the caddying jobs at a golf
course in Auckland Park and together with gangs from Vrededorp
controlled the begging and pickpocketing activities at the market
(Koch in Swart 1990:49).
It could be conjectured that the reality of the development of these
slums, instigated the drive to pass legislation that would further
control the process of black urbanisation.
2.2 Legislation leading up to and controlling black
urbanisation and influx control
Three years after the establishment of the Union of South Africa in
1910, the Land Act of 1913 that restricted black access to land in the
rural areas was passed. Large numbers of blacks were removed from
`black spots' in white rural areas and resettled in rural, high density
villages which had little economic vitality of their own. With no land to
farm and no alternative economic opportunities, the breadwinners had
little choice but to seek work in the urban areas. Black migrant

A Historical-educational perspective of urbanisation 99
labourers were obliged to relocate to these centres without their
families due to the restrictions placed on access to the towns by the
Black Urban Areas Act passed in 1923. This Act similarly enforced the
principle of racial segregation in the urban areas and prevented blacks
from obtaining land in urban areas on a freehold title basis. It further
determined the conditions of entry and residence rights in urban areas
and in effect, permanently institutionalised the migrant labour system
(Nattrass 1983:13±14).
Amendments in 1937 to the Black Urban Areas Act gave municipalities
the power to deal with the redundancy problem and the system of
control was further rationalised in 1945 when the Native (Urban Areas)
Consolidation Act was passed. In conjunction with the 1942 Bantu Laws
Amendment Act, thisAct defined the system of labour control and laid
the foundations for what became known as influx control. Blacks were
prevented from remaining in a prescribed area ± all urban areas ± for
more than seventy-two hours unless they had an exemption. Exemptions
were granted to people born in the area; those who had worked
for one employer continuously for ten years or who had resided
lawfully in an area for fifteen years; the wife or child of such a person;
or a person given permission to remain by an officer managing a labour
bureau. Migrants fell into the last category. The system was
administered by means of Pass Laws that demanded that blacks carry
with them at all times passes defining their status and confirming
permission to be in a particular area. It needs to be noted that those
who had this required permission while they sought employment,
were prohibited from bringing their families with them (Whiteside
1988:9).
Influx control was designed specifically to regulate the process of black
urbanisation i.e. the movement of rural and homeland black persons
together with their families into the towns and cities. The justification
for this regulatory system was the claim that if the urbanisation
process were left unchecked, urban dwellers and new black urban
entrants would suffer lower levels of welfare ± unemployment, lack of
facilities, lower wages due to an oversupply et cetera. Moreover, the
strategy was designed to justify resettlement of black communities in

100
homeland towns thereby redirecting black urbanisation into the
independent homeland areas ± giving effect to the geo-political
ideology underpinning separate development (the apartheid ideology)
(Bekker & Humphries 1985:67; Leistner 1968:5).
In 1986, recognising that black urbanisation was inevitable, the
Abolition of Influx Control Act was passed that repealed all past laws
relating to influx control.
It was not only legislation regulating the process of black urbanisation,
but also legislation that regulated the settlement of blacks who
urbanised, that determined the urbanisation plan.
2.3 The Group Areas Act
Further legislation entrenching racial segregation and placing confines
on the ability to acquire immovable property and to occupy land in
areas other than that specifically designated for the different racial
groups, was the Group Areas Act of 1950. Separate residential and
business areas for distinct racial groups ± whites, natives and coloureds
± were mandated through this legislation. This legal enforcement
of racial segregation made South Africa anomalous in international
terms.
The Act implied a particular urban planning framework since
consolidated areas for the different racial groups were, wherever
possible, to be separated by strong natural (eg rivers, valleys) or manmade
(eg railways, highways) barriers. Movement to and from the
work zone was not to cross the residential area of another group. This
model was not consistent with the actual patterns of settlement that
existed in cities at the time of the passage of the Act and consequently
significant numbers of black people had to be moved. The relocation of
blacks occurred in all the major cities, but in Johannesburg, this
displacement resulted in an appearance, again, of significant numbers
of street children because children were unwilling to leave their
neighbourhoods and friends (Swart 1990:49-50; The Urban Foundation
1991:3±4).

A Historical-educational perspective of urbanisation 101
It was only in 1994 with the drafting of the Constitution of South Africa
and the inclusion of a Bill of Rights that all forms of racial
discrimination were prohibited and that settlement was prescribed by
economics and not politics.
3 A CURSORY COMMENTARY ON THE
URBANISATION PROCESS
Recognising that currently of the approximately 44.3 million strong
population, 45% finds itself in urban areas, it goes without saying that
urbanisation became a reality for a significant proportion of South
African citizens. However, in terms of blacks ± since this article focuses
on blacks due to the fact that the overwhelming majority of street
children are black ± was the impetus for migration to the cities a
response to the lure of a better future or was it the search for survival?
3.1 Urbanisation: response to the lure of a better
future or in search of a livelihood?
Generally, urbanisation occurs because people believe that the city can
provide opportunities which simply do not exist in rural areas: a
variety of employment opportunities; competitive salaries; prospects
of a higher standard of living; entertainment and recreation opportunities
and the opportunity to reach higher levels of independence and
self-actualisation. There are also the prospects of better schooling and
further education opportunities for one's children. Certainly the
obvious gains cannot be logically contested, but where they the main
force driving black urbanisation?
Whiteside (1988:3) indicates that the perception that blacks were keen
to seek employment on the mines and the cities needs to be challenged.
It is argued that western values and incentives of acquiring material
wealth and economic opportunity were foreign to most blacks at that
time. A reexamination of the period evidences that pressure was put on
blacks to sell their labour. Simplistically stated, blacks were forced to
earn hard currency. Taxes were introduced by the various authorities
in terms of the Native Taxation and Development Act of 1925: a hut tax on
each hut owned, a poll tax on each male older than 18 years ± and all

102
these taxes had to be paid in cash. In addition, deprived of their land ±
and the capacity to be self-sustaining ± through the re-settlement
drives, blacks had little alternative but to seek employment on the
mines or elsewhere: not for the luxuries that money in their pockets
would bring them, but for their and their families' basic survival.
3.2 The reality and outcome of the urbanisation
process for many black South African families
The migrant labour system obliged men to be separated from wives
and children for the duration of their contracts and consequently, the
traditional authority system within the family ± and also the
community ± was undermined and disrupted. Women who traditionally
lacked authority were left to single-handedly carry the family
responsibilities. Instability within the family and extended family ± the
latter being an essential component of the family in black culture ±
ensued. Family ties weakened due to the forced separation and, bereft
of rural community norms, many of the men adopted urban values and
a general disintegration of traditional value systems ensued. Some of
these migrant labourers entered into second marriages with urban
women and started a second family which too, had to be supported.
When such a man returned home, it was most often not viable for him
to take along his second wife and their children. The result was that a
fatherless and poverty-stricken family was left behind in the city
(Richter 1988:13).
It becomes evident that the migrant labour system not only disrupted
the constitution of the family unit in the rural area from whence the
labourer came, but also led to a disintegration of the congruity of his
secondary family in the urban area where he was temporarily located.
Apart from the economic depravation that ensued in both situations, it
can also be concluded that it was furthermore difficult to establish a
stable moral and emotional framework imperative for congenial family
functioning and the creation of an environment supporting authentic
childrearing in either of the families.

A Historical-educational perspective of urbanisation 103
The detrimental influence of urbanisation as applied in the South
African situation in relation to blacks and their social life is significant.
In summary, some of the consequences are listed below.
. Traditional social support systems were broken down as a
result of resettlement and migrant labour regulations.
. Family life was seriously disrupted since wives and children
were disallowed by law to follow their husbands or fathers to
the cities and contact between families was consequently
restricted to a limited number of weeks a year.
. Family ties were weakened because of the absence of the
household head.
. Authority structures within the family were undermined.
. Children lacked a father-figure and male role model.
. Migrants spent more on themselves than what was sent back
to their dependents and in many cases where the man entered
into a second (urban) marriage, the limited income had to be
shared between the two families.
. Migrants' interests became urban-oriented to the detriment
of the rural family system. This change in focus included an
unveiled challenging of traditional value systems.
. Economic insecurity resulted from the fear that mine/
industrial contracts would not be renewed.
. Physical insecurity ± in the case of `illegals' ± resulted from
living in fear of pass-law raids and of eviction in terms of the
Illegal Squatting Amendment Act (Dewar, Todes & Watson
1982:39±40).
Urbanisation had a price. The prevalence of large, needy and fatherless
black families ± both urban or rural ± can be attributed to the South
African urbanisation process. This fact also offers an explanation for
the fact that most street children are black. The observation is
supported by the hypothesis that the higher the number of children a
single woman must support, the greater the possibility of the children
ending up on the street (Independent Commission on International
Humanitarian Issues 1986:50). It will be recalled that street children

104
tend to be products of poverty and disrupted parent-child relationships
± these conditions as they have arisen in the South African
situation have a clear link with an uniquely South African urbanisation
process.
3.3 The struggle for black empowerment: an urban
issue?
An issue which was, in many respects, the outflow of urbanisation was
the struggle for black liberation from white dominance. This struggle
was given impetus by the regulations and legislation outlined above.
Duringthelate1970swhenthestrugglereacheditspeak,black
townships and informal settlements were characterised by violence as
people who mobilised to challenge existing separatist legislation were
kept in check by the authorities. A unique community culture came
into being as a generation of youth who lacked discipline (due to the
absence of parents who, either both worked or were non-existent), had
no respect for their elders (since they perceived them to lack the
courage to stand up for their rights and to challenge an oppressive
system) and who had little regard for authority (since this was viewed
as being illegitimate) took control of the townships. A review of the
living conditions of many of these children reveals that these children
lacked a congruous family structure and lived in poverty. Due to the
ensuring violence, life in these townships was hazardous and many
fled and sought safer abodes. It is found that many of these township
children turned to the streets as an alternative ± and safer ± home.
3.4 The impact and implications of the HIV/AIDS
pandemic: an urban concern?
Apart from the consequences of the urbanisation process as outlined
above and the struggle for black liberation which have given rise to the
current generation of street children, the HIV/AIDS pandemic which is
currently devastating the country, is also contributing towards the
escalation of the number of street children.
SeveralreasonsarecitedforthespreadofHIV/AIDSwhichis
currently viewed rather as a social than a health issue: overcrowding as

A Historical-educational perspective of urbanisation 105
experienced in squatter settlements which have mushroomed as people
flock to the cities in search of employment; poverty; lack of education,
and the inferior status of women all seem to play a part in the rapid
spread of HIV/AIDS. It is estimated that by 2015 ± the year in which
HIV/AIDS is expected to reach its peak ± between 9±12% of the
population will be AIDS orphans. In real terms, this interprets to
between 3.6 and 4.8 million children under the age of 15 years who will
be without a parent or guardian. UNICEF estimates that there are
currently approximately 700 000 AIDS orphans in South Africa. The
country simply does not have the infrastructure to care for these
children ± either through institutionalisation or through foster care
programmes ± and it is projected that as children become orphaned
and destitute through HIV/AIDS, many will turn to the streets for their
livelihood. One of the sources of sure income for street children is
prostitution which, under prevailing circumstances exposes them to
the risk of HIV infection and consequently contributes to the further
spread of the disease (Van Greunen 2001:40±41).
A review of the factors which have contributed and which continue to
contribute to the escalation of the number of children on the streets of
South African cities have been outlined and it now becomes necessary
to provide a sketch of who these South African street children indeed
are.
4 A PROFILE OF STREET CHILDREN IN SOUTH
AFRICA
South African street children are known by various names which
describe their circumstances and characteristics. In Cape Town, they
are known as strollers ± a term that describes their loitering and
ambling along the streets, their `free spiritedness' and being an
authority unto themselves. In Johannesburg and elsewhere they are
called twilight children ± children of and active in the dark; malunde ±
those that sleep on the streets; and malalapayipi ± those who sleep in the
stormwater pipes. Inherent to these terms, is a portrayal of who and
what street children are ± they are children for whom the street offers

106
the opportunity to undertake to manage their own lives and to meet
their own needs; they are children who lack parental or responsible
adult care, the provision of basic needs and guidance and who are
consequently vulnerable to exploitation ± including sexual abuse.
The majority of street children are black, although Cape Town has a
significant number of coloured street children. As has been argued, the
circumstances that have arisen due to the process of urbanisation as it
occurred in South Africa, have resulted in black children being more
vulnerable to poverty and poor parent-child relationships than other
population groups. Children as young as 7 years of age are to be found
on the streets. However, the majority of children seem to start life on
the streets from about the age of 10. Furthermore, the street child
phenomenon in South Africa appears to be confined to boys with very
few vagrant girls visible on the streets. Unfortunately, this fact
represents the shadowy side of the street child culture. It seems that
most of the girls who turn to the streets for their livelihood turn to
prostitution and illicit drug dealing as a means of income. They are
managed by pimps who effectively ensnare them very soon after their
arrival in the city. These children live in hotel rooms and in brothels
from whence they apply their trade (Du Plessis 1999).
4.1 A classification and etiology of street children
and the link between the urbanisation process in
South Africa and the street child phenomenon
In the practical research undertaken to investigate the current profile
of the street child in South Africa, students enrolled for a History of
Education module in the Honours Bachelor of Education, Faculty of
Education, UNISA between 1998±2000, conducted structured interviews
with street children in various provinces in South Africa as part
of an assignment on the street child phenomenon. The focus of the
interview was to establish what the circumstances were that had led to
the child taking to the streets, how life on the streets was experienced,
whether the child still had ties with family members, and how the child
viewed his or her educational and career prospects. The interview was
transcribed and submitted for review.

A Historical-educational perspective of urbanisation 107
An analysis of the results of the interviews revealed that, in the South
African situation, street children can be grouped either as children who
have ties with their families and return home at regular intervals or as
children to whom the street is their only home since they have no
families to return to ± or have consciously chosen not to return to their
families and have broken all ties with the family. In the case of the
former group, the streets provide additional income which is used to
support themselves or the family back home. However, to the latter
group, the street is their only known home: they have no other home
and no family ties. They have either by necessity or voluntarily decided
to permanently leave their families and a group of children in similar
circumstances forms a substitute family. These findings support
conclusions drawn from other researchers' studies. Previous research
gave rise to a classification of these children as children on the street
(i.e. those who can and do return home) and children of the street
(those who have no families to return to and for whom the street is
their home) (Le Roux 1992:92±93).
The reasons that the children who were interviewed gave for taking to
the streets can be grouped as follows:
. poverty and the inability of parents to provide in the basic
needs for food, clothing, shelter and education
. family dysfunction which generally manifests in some form
of pedagogic or physical abuse/neglect
. being orphaned and having no extended family to take care
of them (as in the case of HIV/AIDS orphans)
. rebellion against authority and an attempt to live a life of
freedom devoid of rules and acquiescence to authority (Le
Roux 2001)
From the reasons cited above, an alternative categorisation of street
children appears. One could distinguish between runaways and
castaways: runaways being described as children who voluntarily leave
home without parental/substitute parent permission and castaways
who leave home because their parents or caregivers have either
abandoned them or subjected them to intolerable levels of abuse and

108
neglect (Le Roux 2001). It is argued that it is possible to trace most of
these identified causes for children taking to the streets to inter alia the
process and consequences of urbanisation as it took place in this
country. The consequences include
. the disruption of the traditionally stable family and community
structures brought about by the migrant labour
system, urban `influx control' and the shortage of housing for
blacks in urban areas designated for their abode
. the disruption of traditional family ties and consequently
respect for elders which is fundamental to black culture
. the impoverishment of rural black families reliant on the
income generated by a household head who invariably took a
second wife and started a second family in the city and
. a generation of black youth who grew up in an atmosphere of
violence during the years of the struggle against apartheid
Although street children appear to be self-sufficient, one should not
overlook the fact that they are indeed children. This fact challenges one
to acknowledge that as children, they are entitled to education. What
expectations ± if any ± do street children hold of education?
4.2 The educational prospects of street children
Since children's attitudes towards learning are influenced by the
attitudes of significant others in their immediate environments, it
stands to reason that the home environment would be a determining
factor in forming perceptions about learning (Scott 1994:24). In the
street child's situation, the lack of a nurturing parent-child relationship
confounds successful educative intervention activities. Material,
affective and normative support ± essential for pedagogic development
± is absent and it can thus be contested that street children's motivation
to learn will thus be significantly different from that of children cared
for in 'normal' households. In the case of street children the `parentchild'
emotional void is filled by peers on the street who themselves
lack motivation, educational expectations and direction in life. These
`role models' manifest negative attitudes towards knowledge acquisition,
citizen duties, training and work and these contrary attitudes

A Historical-educational perspective of urbanisation 109
become entrenched. Furthermore, life on the streets is characterised by
insecurity, violence and abuse ± invariably at the hands of the very
adults to whom they should look up. Success ± in street child terms ±
implies basic survival skills, not academic prowess (Le Roux 2001).
Still, school learning is not aimed only at providing learners with skills
to equip them to support themselves in some form of enterprise, but
also to develop the social skills necessary to function effectively within
society. The street child finds himself in a situation where opportunity
for becoming acceptably socialised is minimal. The socialisation
process to which he is exposed is anti-societal and does nothing to
improve his situation. In essence, societal factors and features typical
of life on the street, impede the socialisation process of the street child,
prohibit the transmitting of values and true societal norms and also
inhibit the formation of a positive learning culture (Scott 1994:27).
To summarise, the milieu of and conditions under which the street
child is expected to realise his educational opportunities could be
described as follows:
. street children live in a negative and disorderly environment
. adults with whom the street child comes into contact are
more often abusive and abrupt than caring and consequently,
adults tend to be distrusted
. street children prefer to control and manage their own lives
and futures and feel no moral obligation to conform to the
cultural and social values and norms of society
. street children lack acceptable role models and a supportive
milieu
. street children have a poor attention span ± a condition
aggravated by substance abuse
. due to inadequate nutrition, their physical ± and mental ±
development is retarded
. they are academically handicapped due to their disrupted
schooling careers

110
. street children focus on the here and now and have little
motivation to learn skills that will help them to realize their
long-term academic potential.
. should these children indeed have the opportunity to attend
school, the fact that they are street children is to their
disadvantage since their peers and teachers tend to discriminate
against them. This discrimination is based on their
appearance, poverty, life-style and inability to cope in the
learning environment (Le Roux 2001; Scott 1994:27)
Street children's `educational' goals are directed at acquiring the skills
that enable them to survive and gain the respect and recognition of the
peer group. Needs satisfaction for street children differs from that of
children growing up in 'normal' households. Their achievements,
competence and recognition are not measured in academic terms, but
in survival and life skills. What they are motivated to know, understand
and master bear no relationship to book learning, but to life
experience. Consequently, the value they attach to school learning and
their expectancy of successfully mastering academic endeavours, are
low (Scott 1994:28). Educational programmes aimed at meeting the
needs of street children should thus seek to turn each of the above
challenges into opportunities.
4.3 Social intervention options
Many organisations and NGO's have done much to alleviate the plight
of street children. They have set up institutions to meet these children's
immediate need for shelter and food and many have provided
alternative educational opportunities. However, despite the commendable
work done by these organisations, there are those who
believe that institutions are not the answer. It is argued that children
can never identify themselves with an institution; staff members
cannot replace a parent, and consequently, the relationship between
the child and the staff is untrue and foreign to normal life. Children are
possessive and exclusive in their love and need to be loved in an
exclusive way ± something which is not possible in an institution.
Alternatively, some organisations and groups are committed to

A Historical-educational perspective of urbanisation 111
facilitating the re-integration of these children into their families and
communities. In cases where re-integration is not possible, children's
homes, but preferably foster homes, are considered as options.
However, re-integration into a dysfunctional family is not the ideal
and it would be irresponsible to suggest that these children should be
returned to their family environments unless the family is rehabilitated
and the environment transformed to ensure that it constitutes a
pedagogically appropriate and accountable setting (Van Niekerk
1990:98).
With the increasing number of AIDS orphans on the streets, the ideal of
re-integration with the family or community is often impossible to
achieve since whole families are being wiped out by the pandemic. It is
also difficult to find foster care for children who are victims of the
AIDS crisis due to the social stigma attached to these children ±
regardless of whether they are themselves HIV positive or not.
5 THE WAY FORWARD
Finding a way to address the street child phenomenon is indeed an
awkward dilemma. For many, the street is home and although life is
harsh, it is no worse than that from which they have come. One could
consequently ask whether these children should be taught competencies
and skills that will enable them to fend more adequately for
themselves on the street, or should they be encouraged to reclaim their
childhood?
In South Africa today, as in the past, the notion that a child's place in
society is in his or her family home, is still strong ± a point attested to
by the fact that in 1983 [when] the South African Children's Act was
renamed the Child Care Act. This was done to reflect the general
principle that the family is the typical social and biological structure
within which the child must grow and develop (Robinson 1993:175).
Some argue that this idea of the `otherness' of children and childhood
is typically western and that it carries with it not only an assumption
about the relative competence of children, but also an assumption
about their inferior status (Butler & Williamson 1994:3). In black
culture, it could be argued, a contrasting view exists. Children tend to

112
be treated as active and resilient contributors to their families and their
society. It is not uncommon to find that children are expected to
undertake basic subsistence work and to take on parental responsibilities
of younger siblings (Swart-Kruger 1996:233±234). Thus, in this
context, making a living on the streets or contributing to the family
incomethroughworkingthestreets,couldbeviewedasalegitimate
assignment.
However, most people when confronted with the street child situation,
view the dilemma with concern and feel obliged to do something about
the predicament within which these children find themselves. Some
say that the street children phenomenon serves as a barometer of the
caring, concern and social consciousness towards the most vulnerable
of our society. In the short term, the most that can be done is to help
those street children who want to be helped and attempt to minimise
the dangers to those who do not want to be helped. The long term
solution is far more complicated and has very little to do with the
children themselves. The society from which they come needs to be
restructured:theiniquitiesofthepasthavetoberedressed(Houghton
1996:79), violence has to be restrained; strong family values need to be
rebuilt; unemployment has to be dealt with; AIDS has to be arrested.
These are longterm challenges.
Possibly Ubuntu ± a term which at the political `turn' in South Africa
was unfortunately exploited as the panacea of all social ills and which
consequently, it can be argued, lacks credibility due to the perpetuation
of many of the unfortunate situations that it was supposed to
ameliorate ± does indeed remain the cornerstone for the betterment of
the plight of these children. Perhaps one should augment the Ubuntu
concept by including the Christian concept of compassion, agape,
Christian charity or the Humanist synonyms of altruism, humanitarianism
or philanthropism. Surely, in one of these expressions each
human individual will feel the compulsion to reach out ± either directly
or indirectly ± to these children who need care and understanding.

A Historical-educational perspective of urbanisation 113
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Bekker, S & Humphries, R. 1985. From control to confusion. Pietermaritzburg: Shuter &
Schooter.
Butler, I & Williamson, H. 1994. Children speak: children, trauma and social work. London:
Longman.
Dewar, D, Todes, A & Watson, V. 1982. Theories of urbanisation and national settlement
strategy in South Africa. Cape Town: University of Cape Town.
Donald, D & Swart-Kruger, J. 1994. Children of the South African streets, in A. Dawes &
D. Donald (eds.) Childhood and adversity: psychological perspectives from South African
research. Cape Town: David Philip: 111.
Du Plessis, J. 1999. A brief discussion of CCSE with particular reference to the
Johannesburg scenario. http://www.acapa.org.za/A/brief1.htm accessed on 18±
01±1999.
Houghton, S. 1996. Feral children, in African panorama 41(2): 73±79.
Leistner, G M E. 1968. Influx control: economic and social aspects of physical control over
rural-urban population movements in South Africa and elsewhere. Pretoria: Africa
Institute of South Africa.
Le Roux, C S. 2001. Observations of and personal interviews with street children
throughout South Africa conducted by B Ed Honours students registered between
1998±2000.
Le Roux, J. 1992. Street children as manifestation of an anti-child culture in South Africa
in Pedagogiek Joernaal 13(2): 87±98.
Nattrass, J. 1983. The dynamics of urbanisation in South Africa. Durban: University of Natal.
Richter, L M. 1988. Street children: the nature and scope of the problem in South Africa.
Pretoria: Institute for Behavioural Sciences, University of South Africa.
Robinson, J A. 1993. Children, in WA Joubert (ed) The law of South Africa. Durban:
Butterworths.
Scott, M. 1994. The motivation to learn with special reference to squattter and street
children, in Paidonomia 18(2): 24±33.
South African Native Races Committee. 1901. The natives of South Africa. London:
McGraw.
Swart, J. 1990. Malunde: the street children of Hillbrow. Johannesburg: Witwatersrand
University Press.
Swart-Kruger, J. 1996. An imperfect fit ± street children and state intervention: the South
African Case, in Africa Insight 26(3): 231±236.
The Urban Foundation. 1991. Policies for a new urban future: urban debate 2010±6. Tackling
Group Areas. Braamfontein: The Urban Foundation.

114
Van Greunen, A. 2001. Wie gaan na die kinders kyk? in De Kat April 2001: 39±41.
Van Niekerk, P A. 1990. An educational perspective on street children in, Journal of
Pedagogics 11(2): 90±103.
Whiteside, A. 1988. Labour migration in Southern Africa. Braamfontein: The South African
Institute of International Affairs.
Wilson, F. 1972. Migrant labour. Johannesburg: SACC.

Preparing South African educators for school-family-community partnerships 115
Preparing South African
educators for Schoolfamily-community
partnerships
Dr Noleen van Wyk
Department of Educational
Studies
Unisa
There is compelling evidence that school-family-community partnerships benefit
learners, parents and schools. However, little is done to prepare educators to work with
families and members of the community. In view of this, research was undertaken to
determine educators' understanding and practices of family-community partnerships in
South Africa. The findings indicate that educators are poorly equipped to deal with this
important aspect of their work. The Harvard Graduate School of Education (USA) has
developed a framework for educator preparation in family involvement which highlights
content areas and promising training methods. This framework could be used to inform
pre-service and in-service training of educators in South Africa. However, it is necessary
to adapt the framework according to the approach to family-community partnership
followed by the particular institution. In this regard a functionalist, parent empowerment,
cultural competence and social capital approach are briefly discussed.
1 INTRODUCTION
Widespread support for family involvement in education is due in part
to compelling evidence that family involvement has a positive effect on
learners' academic achievement. The highly acclaimed book, Anew

116
generation of evidence: the family is critical to student achievement, opens
by stating, ``The evidence is now beyond dispute. When schools work
with families to support learning, children tend to succeed not just in
school, but throughout life'' (Henderson & Bela 1994:1). In other major
studies, the link between parent involvement and learner achievement
has also been established (Dauber & Epstein 1993:53; Chavkin 1993:2;
Bastiani 1988:38). Other benefits to learners include: decreased
truancy; improved attitudes of learners to their studies; improved
behaviour and a decrease in the drop-out rate (Hamby 1992; Epstein
1990; Swap 1993). Many studies stress that these benefits occur
irrespective of the socio-economic class to which the family belongs
(Haberman 1992:33).
The literature also emphasises the positive effects on parents of
improved family-school relations, such as increased confidence of the
parents (Bastiani & Wolfendale 1996:74); better understanding of what
is happening in school (Swap 1993:10) and a feeling of empowerment,
especially evident in disadvantaged communities (Allen & Martin
1992:49). Swap (1993:10) adds that educators also benefit when familyschool
relationships improve because they experience ...'' support and
appreciation from parents and a rekindling of their own enthusiasm for
problem solving''.
In view of the above, most policy makers and educators endorse the
need for school-family-community partnerships to improve education.
In spite of this little is being done to prepare educators to work with
parents or members of the community in South African schools. The
purpose of this research article is, therefore, to report on research
findings on South African educators' perceptions and practices of
family-school-community partnerships and propose a framework for
educator preparation which highlights content areas and promising
training methods.

Preparing South African educators for school-family-community partnerships 117
2 THE SOUTH AFRICAN CONTEXT
Relations between the family and schools in South Africa have been
fundamentally affected over the last few years by numerous changes in
legislation and government initiatives. These changes have created a
new legal environment for school-family-community partnerships.
In the first place, the changing realities of South African society have
been taken into account by the South African Schools Act (Republic of
South Africa (RSA) 1996:4), which allows considerable latitude in the
definition of `parent'. Thus this term now also includes any person who
is the learner's guardian, or who is legally entitled to custody of the
learner, or who has undertaken to fulfil the obligations of a parent or
guardian towards the learner's education. This broader definition
encourages schools to acknowledge a variety of family types and
household structures and thus, to develop a versatile range of practices
of family-school linkages.
The South African Schools Act (RSA 1996:14) also acknowledges the
rights of parents to be involved in school governance. Governing
bodies are a significant feature of democracy in society and represent a
major move towards empowering parents in schools (Alexander,
Bastiani & Beresford 1995:88). The functions of school governing
bodies (SGBs) in South Africa include developing the mission
statement of the school, adopting a code of conduct for learners,
determining the language and admission policies of the school (within
certain limits set by the South African Schools Act) and making
recommendations on the appointment of teaching and administrative
staff. Allocated functions of governing bodies include maintaining and
improving school property, determining curriculum and subject
choice, and purchasing textbooks. The Act was amended in 2000 (RSA
2000a) to ensure that the racial composition of the school population is
better represented on school governing bodies. This includes co-opting
members to the SGB who represent the racial and linguistic composition
of the learners and giving these members full voting powers (RSA
2000a).
In July 1999 the Minister of Education announced a national

118
mobilisation plan for education and training in South Africa under the
slogan ``Tirisano'', that is, working together (Department of Education
(DE) 1999:6). Priority three of the nine-point programme set out by the
Minister is titled: Schools must become centres of community life. Under
this heading various aspects are discussed, including the role to school
governing bodies. The Minister acknowledges that this is a new
concept for most communities in this country, thus warning that we
must, ...'' put great effort into ensuring that governing bodies,
especially in poor communities, are given the support they need to
become strong and viable'' (DE 1999:9). However, the Minister also
includes the community in the government's plans for the future of
education in the country.
There is a role in community schools for religious bodies, businesses,
cultural groups, sports clubs and civic associations, both to serve their
own requirements and to contribute to the school's learning programme
both in and out of school hours.
In another move, the Department of Education has published the
Norms and Standards for Educators, in which seven roles for educators
have been set out (RSA 2000b:12±25). The role entitled: Community,
citizenship and pastoral role, includes the following: ``... the educator
will develop supportive relations with parents and other key persons
and organisations based on a critical understanding of community and
environmental issues'' (RSA 2000:14).
This brief exposition of recent changes in South African education
indicates that the government is committed to improving schoolfamily-community
partnerships and wants educators to be fully
equipped to deal with this aspect of their work. This should include the
development of suitable pre-service and in-service training programmes.
With this in mind research was undertaken to determine
how educators understand partnerships with families and the community
and whether prior teacher education has equipped them to deal
with this aspect of their work.

Preparing South African educators for school-family-community partnerships 119
3 RESEARCH DESIGN
The primary aim of the research was to understand and describe
educators' perceptions and practices of family-school-community
partnerships. The research was designed to be exploratory and
descriptiveandthusnoattemptsweremadetoestablishcauseand
effect relationships under experimental conditions. The research was
conducted over a period of four years and included primary and
secondary school educators in independent and public schools.
3.1 Data collection strategies
In 1996 and again in 1999 focus group interviews with educators were
conducted in a number of township schools in Gauteng and the Free
State provinces. During these periods a total of 25 educators was
included in five focus group interviews. This methodology was
considered appropriate as it provides educators the opportunity to
define their own problems, reducing the risk of the researcher
``exporting ready-made solutions to other people's problems'' (quoted
in Lemmer 1992:294). Interviews were audio taped and later transcribed.
Moreover, two questionnaires for educators were used to obtain
further information on school-family-community partnerships in
individual schools. The first survey, answered by 50 educators, was
distributed in selected Pretoria schools during April-May 1997; the
second, answered by 152 educators, was distributed in independent
schools in Johannesburg during March 2000. In general both questionnaires
ask for professional judgements about family and community
involvement, the practices educators are currently using, and the
partnership programmes educators would like to see developed or
improved in their schools and classrooms. Both questionnaires
included a number of open-ended questions.
3.2 Data analysis
Analysis of data obtained from the focus group interviews and
responses to open-ended questions in the questionnaires was done

120
through content analysis, which entailed identifying, coding, and
categorising the primary patterns in the data (Miles & Huberman 1994;
Strauss & Corbin 1990). Initially the participants' responses were read
and reread in order to gain familiarity with them. At this stage the aim
was to use the data `to think with' (Newport 1994:229). In this way
categories and sub-categories started to emerge. Literature, observation,
and experience assisted the researcher in identifying the final
categories.
The ``raw data'' of the questionnaires was coded and percentages listed
in each response category for each item. The basic descriptive statistics
produced ``profiles'' of teachers' practices and perspectives of schoolfamily-community
partnerships in their respective schools.
4 FINDINGS OF RESEARCH
The most important findings concerning educators' understanding and
practices of partnerships with families and the communities in South
Africa include the following.
4.1 Educators have a limited understanding of what
constitutes school-family-community
partnerships.
Forty seven percent of educators answering the questionnaires felt that
there was a common understanding of what was intended by schools
regarding partnership initiatives. In addition, educators interviewed
stated that their schools did not have a written policy on school-familycommunity
partnerships. Likewise, most schools had never discussed
family and community involvement as a way of improving schooling.
Generally the educators mentioned using the more conventional ways
of involving families such as open-house days, fundraising activities,
volunteer programmes, parent-teacher conferences, et cetera. Many
parents, especially single and dual income parents, are not able to
participate in such activities, yet they want to help their children
succeed in school. However, it does not seem as if educators make

Preparing South African educators for school-family-community partnerships 121
specific arrangements for such parents to become involved in their
children's education. As Chrispeels (1991:371) notes: ``Most efforts
have been directed at `fixing' parents rather than at altering school
structures and practices.''
The absence of a school policy on partnerships with families and the
community, and a lack of understanding of ways in which families may
be involved is unfortunate as research shows that school programmes
and educator practices are the strongest and most consistent predictors
of partnerships between the school and the family (Dauber & Epstein
1993:61; Wanat 1994:644).
4.2 Educators are not convinced that family-school
partnerships are important for learner success.
In spite of overwhelming evidence to the contrary, many educators do
not believe that parent involvement is important for learner success. In
the investigation carried out in 1997 only a third of the educators felt
that parent involvement would have a positive effect on learner
achievement. This means, among others, that teachers do not readily
discuss learners' progress with their parents. In secondary schools only
42% of teachers did so, adding, however, that they only contact parents
of weaker students, or in cases where there are ``serious concerns''. A
way of convincing educators of the importance of family and
community partnerships is to teach them the benefits of such
partnerships.
4.3 Educators do not involve families in home-work
activities.
Good homework habits of learners and the support of parents in these
activities prove beneficial to learners. However, involving parents in
homework activities does not seem common practice, particularly in
secondary schools. 74% of primary school educators stated that they
had a policy of involving parents in learning activities at home, in
contrast with 24% of educators in secondary schools. One educator

122
defended the view of secondary school educators: ``In high school
homework is for students to do on their own.'' This view is, however,
incorrect as a positive homework policy which involves parents is in
fact aimed at preventing parents doing homework for the learner.
In low socioeconomic school communities, educators argue that
parents are uncooperative when it comes to homework activities. As
one explained: ``The literate parents are the ones that look at a book,
but the illiterate ones don't care.'' An educator at the same school
elaborates:
When I give them homework, I usually tell them where parents should
sign, but you know not all the parents sign. You find that the child would
come and say, `Oh my mother was busy and my father was not at home.'
However, when questioned, all participants admitted that they had
never taught parents how to play a positive role regarding their
children's school work. They also admitted to not knowing how to do
so. This is consistent with the findings of Epstein and Dauber
(1991:290) that most parents need help on how to become involved in
their children's education at each grade level.
4.4 Educators do not actively support parents in their
role as educators.
Besides supporting homework activities, families and communities
should provide the rich ``social capital'' learners need to succeed in
life. This, according to Coleman (1987:37), means providing the
`'norms, the social networks, and the relationships between adults and
children that are of value for the child's growing up''. A number of
primary school educators indicated that they encouraged parents to
read to their children or to join a library. In contrast, only 32% of
secondary school educators said that they endorse learning at home,
stating that this should mainly involve supporting the work learners
do at school. An educator explained: ``... we try to insist on parents
being parents and teachers handling the problems''. Another added:
``The question seems silly to me. In what respect are the parents
qualified ± meaningfully ± to be educators?''

Preparing South African educators for school-family-community partnerships 123
Most educators seem to agree that parents should teach children
``values, attitudes and behaviour'' at home. Educators working in
deprived communities state that this is often difficult to achieve. As
one explained:
They are all sleeping in one room with their children. It is difficult for
them to be like parents to their children. Whatever they talk, they say this
in front of the children. Whatever they do, they do this in front of the
children.
The family is a major socialising agent in society assisting individuals
as they move from childhood to adolescence and eventually adulthood.
No one can adequately take over this role. Moreover, parents benefit by
being alerted to different and more effective ways of creating or
developing learning opportunities and stimulating experiences for
their children by parenting programmes (Wolfendale 1992:9). However,
if educators have not been adequately trained they are unlikely to
be able to fulfil this task.
4.5 Educators seem unwilling to include parents in
classroom activities.
Although educators include parent volunteers in fundraising activities,
or to accompany learners on trips away from the school, most seem
unwilling to use volunteers to support learning in the classroom. Only
27% respondents to the questionnaires had ever invited parents into
their classrooms. However, even when invited, parents were not asked
to play an active role. An educator explained: ``When they (parents) are
invitedtoaclassitisonlyasaudience,nevertoparticipateortohelp.''
In the light of the high learner : educator ratio in most South African
schools, this attitude seems counter productive. Moreover, in multicultural
and multilingual classes, the use of parents volunteers which
reflect the ethnic and language diversity of the class has been found to
benefit all concerned (Swap 1992:62).

124
4.6 Educators seem satisfied with a one-way flow of
communication.
Most participants in this research indicated that they communicate
with parents by means of written communication, school meetings,
parent conferences and by messages passed on through learners.
However, limited opportunities seem to exist for parents to communicate
with the school on their own initiative. Although educators
maintain that parents are free to contact the school if they have a
problem, they do not seem willing to meet parents at a time which is
convenient for both parents and educators. Most argue that parents
should not be given educators' home telephone numbers.
A number of educators admitted that parents are mostly contacted
about negative issues, which does not promote a good relationship
between the school and the home. Another educator felt that schools
often view parents as ``difficult'' and that this negatively affects on
their interpersonal relationships and communication. This teacher
continues: ``If teachers could look beyond this label, the communication
would benefit.''
More than half the respondents to the questionnaires indicated that
they needed training in conducting parent-educator conferences.
4.7 Educators often believe that the parents' role in
decision making should be limited.
Ingeneral,educatorsfeelthatparents'roleindecisionmakingshould
be limited to voting for, or serving on, the school governing body. In
spite of this 38% of educators admitted that parents were not being
consulted about decisions which directly affect them. In addition,
educators also remarked that ``only a handful'' of the members of the
school governing structures were willing to get involved in the
concerns of the parents and that little is done to address these concerns.
On the other hand, many educators feel that recent legislation has
given the school governing body too much decision making power and

Preparing South African educators for school-family-community partnerships 125
that educators as ``enlightened professional people who know about
children'' should not be placed in a position where they can be
outvoted by parents. Another educator added that it was inconceivable
that ``illiterates'' should be telling educators what to do.
4.8 Educators have limited knowledge and
experience of involving the community.
At times some schools included in this research invite members of the
community to address either learners or parents. For example, traffic
inspectors to speak on road safety; nurses on health issues and police
on crime and crime prevention. Likewise, various agencies inform
parents and learners on AIDS, drugs and other related issues. Often the
people invited to speak are also parents at the school. Some school
premises are also used by outside agencies for Adult Basic Education and
Training courses, or for other extra-mural activities such as sewing
classes, computer courses and English lessons.
Schools should also, however, realise that community must be defined
to include all groups affected by the quality of education, not just
people living near the school (Epstein 1995:702). Greater awareness of
community resources which could be used by the parents and children
should also receive attention and this information passed on to those
needing help. The problem is serious for all educators, particularly
those who teach in economically disadvantaged communities. Little, if
any, attention has been paid to the need to prepare educators to work
with the community or to link community resources to the goals of
learners, families and schools.
4.9 Educators tend to blame parents for the lack of
effective school-family-community partnerships.
Most educators list a number of barriers to effective partnerships
relating to the role of parents. These include:
Limited time: This is true where both parents work, but particularly so
in the case of single working mothers. As one educator said, ``They are
not involved because of lack of time and a feeling that they have

126
enough on their hands anyway.'' In township schools an additional
problem is the fact that parents only get back from work very late and
all meetings have to be scheduled during weekends. This is difficult as
one educator pointed out, ``On weekends, parents have also got
weddings, funerals, all these things.''
Problematic life situations: Many families living in South Africa are
experiencing stress which affects the way they relate to their children
and the school. As one educator put it: ``Many parents are in extremely
traumatic life situations and are struggling to survive.'' This often
leads to parents avoiding the school for ``fear of being forced into
positions of authority and responsibility''. In the townships schools the
situation is worse as many parents are unemployed and are grappling
with urgent problems of survival, leaving little time or energy for
school involvement.
Uncooperative parents: The general apathy of parents to the school was
mentioned by many educators. One stated that on the whole parents
just ``dump children at school'' and then expect the ``job to be done''.
Educators in township schools agree, adding ``Parents don't care. They
feel that everything at school is the teacher's responsibility.'' Another
educator gave a similar explanation: ``Parents don't want to contribute
or get involved. They just put their children in school and forget about
their needs. It is like the school is babysitting for them.''
Parents' lack of education: In South Africa it is estimated that 37% of the
population is unable to read or write (Shindler & Bot 1999:1). This,
according to educators, seriously affects their involvement in school
activities. One explained:
Now the problem of the teacher, we are trying to call parents sometimes,
but it seems most of our parents think they are not educated ± they thus
run away from teachers, and that brings a problem.
Another educator is willing to accept part of the blame: ``Maybe
parents think when they come to me, I am going to ignore them,
because they are not educated or on my level. The blame is maybe with

Preparing South African educators for school-family-community partnerships 127
the teacher.''Although the above barriers as mentioned by educators
are valid, parents should certainly be helped so that they can meet the
challenge of providing the support their children need to succeed in
life (Carrasquillo & London 1993:109). In this they need guidance from
educators or similarly trained people. In reality, most educators
interviewed felt that many parents were hard to reach and attributed
this to the parents themselves or to their communities and cultures.
4.10 Educators are not trained to initiate or improve
school-family-community partnerships.
Many respondents to the questionnaires mentioned that they had not
been adequately equipped to involve families and the community in
their schools. As one educator explained:
We are only taught how to manage a class, controlling the books. The part
of where the parent comes in, is not there ... So the parents are not part of
the package of management. I think we basically need workshops.
Likewise, an educator in an independent school admitted that staff are
often intimidated by parents and needed assistance in dealing with
them. Another educator stated that the lack of willingness of educators
to involve parents is that they had never been taught the benefits of
parent involvement. It also seems as if not all educators are aware of
the different aspects of parent involvement as illustrated by this
comment: ``I don't understand what you mean by parent involvement.
In what spheres would they be involved?''
A survey of educators in the state of Maryland in the United States of
America revealed that few educators attributed their practices of
parent involvement to knowledge gained in their formal training
(Epstein, Sanders & Clark 1999:1). Moreover, it was reported that
although students in undergraduate training programmes had positive
attitudes about all types of involvement, most felt minimally prepared
to conduct partnerships with families and the community (Epstein et al
1999:2). Judging by the responses of educators in this research which
was conducted over a period of four years, educators in this country
are, likewise, in need of training.

128
5 PREPARING EDUCATORS FOR SCHOOL-FAMILY-
COMMUNITY PARTNERSHIPS
Schools cannot work successfully in isolation from learners' families
and communities. This requires higher education institutions involved
in pre-service training of educators and institutions and agencies
involved in their in-service training to reexamine the skills, knowledge
and attitudes that educators will need to work effectively in the schools
of the future. Shartrand, Weiss, Kreider and Lopez (1997:21) of the
Harvard School of Education developed a framework of content areas
for educator preparation. This framework illustrates the range of
training for family involvement and focusses on the attitudes, skills and
knowledge that educators need to work effectively with families and the
community. As such it differs from other typologies of family
involvement, which consists of actual types of involvement activities
carried out in schools. By providing a range of types of training, the
framework overcomes the fragmentation in the way in which educators
generally learn about family involvement. The framework for educator
training includes the following areas of content which, it is argued, all
educators need to master in order to work effectively with families and
the community.
5.1 General family involvement
Family involvement efforts are most successful when educators and
schools assume that all parents want what is best for their children and
can make important contributions to their children's education. Thus,
educators need to understand the benefits and barriers to family
involvement. Educator preparation will, therefore, include knowledge
of, skills in, and positive attitudes towards involving parents
(Shartrand et al 1997:23).
5.2 General family knowledge
In this regard, Shartrand et al (1997:26) suggest improving the
educator's (or student educator's) knowledge of different families'
cultural beliefs, child rearing practices, family structures and living
environments. In a country which was, until recently, racially divided,
this is important. An objective of this `learning area' is to promote an

Preparing South African educators for school-family-community partnerships 129
awareness and understanding of different backgrounds and lifestyles
of families. This preparation can provide knowledge and understanding
and offer educators a learning experience that can bridge the
world of home and school.
5.3 Home-school communication
The objective of this area of training is to provide various techniques
and strategies to improve two-way communication between home and
school (and/or parent and teacher). This is necessary as effective
communication between the home and the school can strengthen
family involvement in a child's education. Through open and honest
communication, parents and educators begin to understand one
another's ideas about learning, discipline, and other topics. Such
communication helps parents and educators to work together to
improve an individual child's performance and to contribute to school
wide policies which benefit all students in the school. Educator
preparation can equip educators with the skills to improve two-way
communication between home and school, especially when difficult
and sensitive issues have to be discussed (Shartrand et al 1997:30).
5.4 Family involvement in learning activities
Educator preparation can equip educators with the skills to develop
two-way learning between the home and school. Educators can
promote family involvement in children's learning and development
by acting as facilitators rather than experts. They can recommend
activities that help parents promote their children's learning, including
reading to their children, creating a physical setting conducive to
study, and showing an interest in their children's schoolwork. Equally
important, educators can learn from parents ± about child rearing
practices and family skills and resources ± and tailor suggestions for
involvement activities to meet the individual circumstances of each
family (Shartrand et al 1997:33).
5.5 Families supporting schools
Here the student-educator gains knowledge on ways to involve parents

130
in helping the school, both within and outside the classroom. This is
important, for when families and the community as a whole support
schools, schools gain a vast network of resources. Preparing educators
to involve families in their children's schooling can help teachers
understand families, communicate with them, negotiate distances, and
build a consensus. This training enables educators to participate in
forums for parents, educators and other citizens to establish collective
support for learning and student achievement. Educators also develop
the skills to involve parents and other family and community members
as resources for the school (Shartrand et al 1997:37).
5.6 Schools supporting families
Schools support families by providing opportunities to strengthen
parenting skills, enhance parent networks, and minimise the stresses of
parenting. Increasingly, educators deal with learners and families
challenged by poverty. Such stressful circumstances can inhibit
effective parenting practices, and as a result, have negative effects on
children's development and school achievement. Although educators
should not be held responsible for meeting the needs of such families
directly, they can learn to understand the connections between
poverty, family functioning, and child rearing. They can also learn to
support families through parent education programmes, parent centres
and referrals to other community or social services. In short, educators
can be trained to work in ``full-service schools'' that provide families
additional support services such as health and mental care, adult
education and social services (Shartrand et al 1997:40).
5.7 Families as change agents
Schools and educators can promote informed decision making among
families by treating them with care and respect, and by offering them
opportunities for critical reflection and participation. The range of
decision making is broad and includes such diverse activities as
promoting an individual child's learning, improving school facilities
and programmes and implementing school reform. Educators can be
prepared to support and involve parents and families in various types
of decision making. Such preparation should focus on helping

Preparing South African educators for school-family-community partnerships 131
educators develop and understand the principles of an empowerment
approach. It should also involve their acquiring skills in managing
group dynamics, problem solving, and conflict resolution (Shartrand et
al 1997:43).
In conclusion: The above framework provides the content studenteducators
need to master in order to work effectively with families and
communities. Should someone have acquired the knowledge, skills and
attitudes set out in the seven areas identified above, the problems
described by the South African educators participating in the research
could be addressed. In other words, educators trained in the seven
areas would understand the benefits of and barriers to family and
community involvement, sympathise and communicate effectively
with all types of families, involve families in a variety of school-based
activities, teach families to support learning at home, and support and
involve families in decision making, advocacy and school policy
development.
6 APPROACHES TO SCHOOL-HOME-COMMUNITY
PARTNERSHIPS
The framework as set out by Shartrand et al (1997) does not advocate a
specific approach to school-family-community partnerships. The
framework recognises that there are a number of approaches to family
involvement and acknowledges that the seven areas of content will be
presented in a different manner, depending on the approach of the
institution to family and community partnerships in education.
Shartrand et al (1997:20) list four approaches:
6.1 A functional approach
This approach emphasises the different roles and responsibilities of
educators and parents in promoting learner achievement. An example
of a functional approach is that of Epstein (1996). Epstein (1996:214)
developed a theoretical perspective called overlapping spheres of
influence. This is based on a social organisational perspective that
posits that the most effective families and schools have overlapping
shared goals and missions concerning children and conduct some work

132
collaboratively. In other words, the model assumes that there are
mutual interests and influences of families and schools that can be
more or less successfully promoted by the policies and programmes of
the organisation and the actions of the individuals in the organisation.
The Epstein model illustrates that anytime, in any school, and in any
family, parent involvement is a variable that can be increased or
decreased by the practices of educators, parents and learners.
Initially a framework of five major types of involvement that fall
within the areas of overlap in the spheres of influence was identified
(Davis 1991:377). These include: Basic obligations of families, communication
between school and home and home and school, volunteers,
learning activities at home, and decision making. A sixth type of
partnership was added later: collaborating with the community
(Epstein 1995:704).
6.2 A parent empowerment approach
This approach emphasises the strengths of disenfranchised families.
One example of such an approach is the work of Cochran and Dean
(1991). The empowerment approach is based on the belief that schools
are key institutions in local communities and thus are in a special
position to enhance or retard the empowerment process. Initially the
programme targeted families with children in the age-group 3±6 years.
By means of home visits, schools encourage mothers in particular to
believe in and care for themselves. The second step is encouraging
mothers to become involved in social action in the community by
joining other parents in neighbourhood support clusters, aimed at
getting to know each other, share impressions of family life in the
community and later to progress to neighbourhood improvement. The
thirdstepisbecomingactiveintheschoolstheirchildrenare
attending. Thus the programme includes several different aspects of
empowerment, beginning with an individual's view of herself and
progressing through relations with nearby others to interactions with
more distant organizations and institutions (Cochran & Dean
1991:262). The empowerment approach is built on the assumption that
all families have strengths and the most useful knowledge about
rearing children can be found in the community itself ± in the older

Preparing South African educators for school-family-community partnerships 133
generations, in social networks, and in ethnic and cultural traditions.
Educators who are to be trained in the empowerment approach must be
taught how to empathise with parents and recognise their strengths,
make the most of parent-teacher conferences, and find creative ways to
involve parents in school activities (Cochran & Dean 1991:264).
6.3 A cultural competence approach
This approach is based on the belief that the school is an inclusive,
respectful setting where diversity is welcomed. This approach is
described in the work of Moll, Amanti, Neff and Gonzalez (1992) and is
based on a research model that shows how classroom practice can be
developed, transformed and enriched by drawing on existing ``funds of
knowledge'' in minority learners' households. The term ``funds of
knowledge'' is used to refer to those historically accumulated and
culturally developed bodies of knowledge and skills essential for
household or individual functioning and well-being (Moll et al
1992:133). The community component of the approach involves
teachers entering households for the purpose of discerning the
household's socio political and economic context, and social and
labour histories. The result is that teachers are more likely to view the
households as repositories of funds of knowledge capable of providing
opportunities for learning rather than seeing the homes of minority
children as a hindrance to academic progress. Consequently, teachers
view learners coming from these households with more respect and
understanding, and are better able to tie the academic content to the
formerly hidden talents and abilities they have discovered in these
learners. Parent volunteers are also used to enrich the lessons planned
as a result of these home visits.
6.4 A social capital approach
This approach is built on the concept of community support for
education. An example of this approach is the work of Coleman.
Coleman (1987) proposed that the home and school provide different
inputs for the socialisation process of children. One category of inputs,
namely, opportunity, demands and reward comes from schools. The

134
second category of inputs comes from the child's closer, more intimate
and more persistent environment. These inputs can be loosely
described as attitudes, effort and conception of self, which are instilled
mainly by the social environment of the household. Education
outcomes result from the reciprocal interaction between the qualities
the child brings from the home and the qualities of the school.
Coleman (1987:37) argues that families provide the social capital needed
by schools to optimise learners' outcomes. However, the social capital of
the home is declining as reflected by the absence of parents in the home
and a decrease of exchange between parents and children about
academic, social, economic and personal matters. The social capital that
exists in the community should, therefore, also be used to support
learners and schools.
It is also suggested that parents' uncertainty, anxiety and fear increase
as the child progresses in school, since they feel unable to respond to
their child's linguistic and social capital needs (Clark 1988:95). This
anxiety is more profound among parents in the low socioeconomic
strata. To help parents, schools need to include ways for teachers to
share information that empowers parents to function as effective
mentors in the family.
Should an institution wish to teach a specific approach or programme
of school-family-community partnerships to its students (or to
educators receiving in-service training), the attitudes, knowledge and
skills as identified by Shartrand et al (1997) will need to be adapted to
the specific programme or approach. Two approaches will be used to
illustrate this (set out in Table 1).

Preparing South African educators for school-family-community partnerships 135
TABLE 1
Attitudes, knowledge and skills for educator training programmes
(Adapted from Shartrand et al 1997:21±45)
Framework
for training
General
family in-
volvement
General
family
knowledge
Home-
school
communi-
cation
A functional approach (ie
the Epstein approach)
Knowledge of the goals,
benefits and barriers to
school-home-community
partnerships.
Skills in involving parents
of all backgrounds.
Knowledge of different
cultural beliefs, lifestyles,
child rearing practices,
family structures and
living environments.
Attitude of respect for
different backgrounds
and lifestyles is included.
Skills in effective interpersonal
communication.
Skills in using active listening
and effective
communication to understand
families and to
build trust and cooperation.
A social capital approach
(ie the Coleman
approach)
Knowledge of the idea of
social capital and parental
investment in their
children's learning.
Knowledge that schools
and homes have different
valuesandthatsuchdifferences
influence partnerships
between the
home and schools.
Skills in communicating
expectations and values
in order to build a sense
of trust among members
of the community.

136
Framework
for training
Family in-
volvement
in learning
activities
Families
supporting
schools
Schools
supporting
families
Families as
change
agents
A functional approach (ie
the Epstein approach)
Skills in involving parents
in their children's
learning outside schools.
Skills in sharing teaching
skills with parents
Skills in involving
parents in the school and
classroom.
Knowledge of how
schools can support
families' social and
educational needs.
Skills in referral
procedures.
Skills in supporting and
involving parents as
decision makers.
Skills in sharing leadership
with and transferring
it to parents
A social capital approach
(ie the Coleman
approach)
Skills in motivating
family involvement in
home learning activities.
Skills in home-visits.
Skills in fostering community
participation in
education activities.
Skills in fostering parent
investment in their children
in school, through
volunteering, attendance
at school events and
fundraising.
Skills in utilising
resources for other
community groups.
Skills in identifying the
expectations and goals of
families.
Knowledge of how school
social events can create
social capital.
Attitudes that shared
decision making is an
essential ingredient to
establish and maintain a
common set of core
values.

Preparing South African educators for school-family-community partnerships 137
If educators are to link learning in the classroom and in the home, how
are they being prepared to accomplish this task? What knowledge and
skills do they need? How should these be taught and learned?
Although the above does not provide all the answers, having a
framework of content areas, which can be adapted to a specific
approach is a good starting point for anyone developing pre-service
and in-service programmes in South Africa.
7 CONCLUSION
Theresultsoftheinterviewsandthequestionnairesincludedinthe
empirical investigation indicate that educators have a limited understanding
of school-family-community partnerships, of the benefits of
such partnerships, and of strategies which may be used to involve
families and the community in the school. Educators also tend to blame
families, particularly those in poor socioeconomic environments, for
any lack of involvement. This is to be expected as educators in South
Africa get little help in developing their skills and knowledge of
collaborating with families and the community. Likewise, few receive
training in this field during their pre-service training. This lack of
initial training is not compensated for by in-service training, except in
the rare school districts. Thus, most educators must rely on their
accumulated experiences in dealing with families. Hamby (1992:61)
points out that this lack of training by educators is serious as parents
are unlikely to become involved without intervention from the school.
By taking cognisance of the areas of content set out in the above
framework, and adapting it to the particular approach to schoolfamily-community
partnership advocated by the institution, effective
programmes for educators can be developed to address this need.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Alexander, T, Bastiani J & Beresford 1995. Home-school policies: a practical guide.
Nottingham: JET.
Allen, M & Martin, I 1992. Education and community: the politics of practice. London: Cassel.
Bastiani, J 1988. Parents and teachers: from policy to practice. Berkshire: Nfer-Nelson.

138
Bastiani, J & Wolfendale, S 1996. Home-school work in Britain: review, reflection and
development. London: David Fulton.
Carrosquillo, A L & London, CBG 1993. Parents and schools: a source book. New York:
Garland.
Chavkin, N F 1993. Families and schools in a pluralistic society. Albany: State University of
New York.
Chrispeels, J H 1991. Effective schools and home-school-community partnership roles: a
framework for parent involvement. Madison: Occasional paper, National Centre for
Effective Schools' Research and Development, University of Wisconsin.
Clark, R M 1988. Parents as providers of linguistic and social capital. Educational
Horizons, Winter: 83±93.
Cochran, M & Dean, C 1991. Home-school relations and the empowerment process. The
Elementary School Journal, 91 (3):261±269.
Coleman, J S 1987. Families and schools. Educational Researchers, August±September: 32±
38.
Dauber, S L & Epstein, J L 1993. Parents' attitudes and practices of involvement in innercity
elementary and middle schools, in Chavkin NF (ed) Families and schools in a
pluralistic society. Albany: State University of New York.
Davies, D 1991. Schools reaching out. Family, school and community partnerships for
student success. Phi Delta Kappan, January: 376±382.
Department of Education (DE) 1999. Call to Action! Mobilising citizens to build a South
African education and trying system for the 21 st century. Pretoria: Department of
Education.
Epstein, J L 1990. Schools and family connections: theory, research and implications for
integrating sociologies of education and family, in Unger DG and Sussman MB
(eds) Families in community settings: interdisciplinary perspectives. New York:
Haworth.
Epstein, J L 1995. School/family/community partnerships: caring for the children we
share. Phi Delta Kappan, May: 701±712.
Epstein, J L 1996. Perspectives and previews on research and policy for school, family and
community partnerships, in Booth A & Dunn J (eds) Family-school links: how do they
affect educational outcomes? Hillside: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Epstein, J L & Dauber, SL 1991. School programmes and teacher practices of parent
involvement in inner-city elementary and middle schools. The Elementary School
Journal, 9(3):289±305.
Epstein,JL,Saunders,MG&Clark,LA1999.Preparing educators for school-familycommunity
partnerships. Baltimore: CRESPAR.
Haberman, M 1992. Creating community contexts that educate: an agenda for improving
education in inner cities, in Kaplan, L (ed) Education and the family. Massachusetts:
Allyn & Bacon.

Preparing South African educators for school-family-community partnerships 139
Hamby, J V 1992. The school-family link: a key to drop-out prevention, in Kaplan, L (ed)
Education and the family. Massachusetts: Allyn & Bacon.
Henderson, A & Berla, N (eds) 1994. A new generation of evidence: The family is critical to
student achievement. Columbia: National Committee for Citizens in Education.
Lemmer, E M 1992. Qualitative research methods in education. SA Journal of Education, 12
(3):292±295.
Miles, M B & Huberman, A M 1994. Qualitative data analysis: an expanded source book.
Thousand Oaks: Sage.
Moles, O C 1993. Collaboration between schools and disadvantaged parents: obstacles
and openings, in Chavkin NF (ed) Families and schools in a pluralistic society.
Albany: State University of New York.
Moll, L C, Amanti, C, Neff, D & Gonzalez, N 1992. Funds of knowledge for teaching:
using a qualitative approach to connect homes and classrooms. Theory into practice,
XXXI (2): 132±141.
Newport, P 1994. Construction of teacher beliefs and practice: parent participation in the
primary school and classroom. PhD thesis. Sydney: University of Sydney.
RSA (Republic of South Africa) 1996. South African Schools Act, no 84 of 1996,
Government Gazette, vol 377, no 17579. Cape Town: Office of the President.
RSA (Republic of South Africa) 2000 a. Education laws Amendment Bill. Government
Gazette no 21052. Cape Town: Office of the President.
RSA (Republic of South Africa) 2000 b. National Education Policy Act (1996): Norms and
Standards for Educators, vol 415, no 20844. Pretoria: Government Printers.
Shartrand, A M, Weiss, H B, Kreider, H M & Lopez, M E 1997. New skills for new schools:
preparing teachers in family involvement. Cambridge: Harvard Graduate School of
Education.
Shindler, J & Bot, M 1999. Literacy in South Africa ± an update. EduSource, 24:1±3.
Straus A & Corbin J 1990. Basics of qualitative research: grounded theory, procedures and
techniques. Newbury Park: Sage.
Swap, S M 1992. Parent involvement and success for all children: what we now know, in
Christenson, SL & Conoley (eds) Home-school collaboration: enhancing children's
academic and social competence. Maryland: The National Association of School
Psychologists.
Swap, S M 1993. Developing home-school partnerships: from concepts to practice. New York:
Teachers College Press.
Wanat, C L 1994. Effects of family structure on parental involvement: perspectives of
principals and traditional, dual-income and single parents. Journal of School
Leadership, November: 631±648.
Wolfendale, S 1992. Empowering parents and teachers: working for children. London: Castell.

140
Recognition of prior
learning Ð a few words
of caution
M M Nieman
Department of Educational
Studies
Unisa
Recognition of prior learning (RPL) enables individuals to receive formal recognition for
skills and knowledge they already possess. The rationale for the recognition of prior
learning is based on the premise that learning experientially may be as valuable as
learning through theory. Implementing a prior learning assessment programme has many
advantages, however, it is a complex process that does not come without its share of
impediments. When an institution of higher learning intends to implement RPL, then there
are a number of factors that should be considered to obviate any impediment to
successful implementation. In this article these factors are discussed.
1 INTRODUCTION
The recognition and accreditation of prior learning (RPL) has been
introduced successfully since the seventies in the United States; since
the eighties in the United Kingdom and Canada and currently it is
being implemented in Australia, New Zealand and several other
countries. However, it is only recently, with the establishment of the
South African Qualifications Authority (SAQA) and the National
Qualifications Framework (NQF) that this practice has been addressed,
formally, in South African educational documentation. On account of
these initiatives and changes in the area of education and training (eg

Recognition of prior learning ± a few words of caution 141
outcomes-based education), there will have to be accreditation of
learners' achievements in all areas and at all levels (irrespective of the
routetheyfollowedinordertoreachtherequiredoutcomes),the
institution where the outcomes were reached, as well as the pace at
which this was accomplished. Focus thus needs to be shifted to the
learner and the learning that took place, the way in which learning
took place, how long this took, and where it happened.
Whereas the debate about recognition and accreditation of prior
learning has abated in many countries, in South Africa it is still the
topic of much discussion. The benefit that may be gained by
institutions of higher education in South Africa, from what has taken
place in other countries, is that there is no need to reinvent the wheel.
Local institutions may build on other countries' findings, and in this
way pitfalls and misconceptions may be averted. This article is
informed directly by these findings, since the main objective is to point
out some of the misconceptions and problems that one should guard
against in order not to jeopardise the successful implementation of
RPL. Furthermore, this article aims to highlight certain aspects that
should be kept in mind when RPL is implemented. One of the most
important requirements for successful implementation of RPL is the
actual informing of all stakeholders. In this way a further objective is
reached with this article, as information about RPL is disseminated to a
potential group of RPL candidates, (ie the current readers of this
article).
2 WHAT DOES RECOGNITION AND ACCREDITATION
OF PRIOR LEARNING COMPRISE?
Recognition and accreditation of prior learning are generic terms that
are used for the process in which persons of all ages and backgrounds
are offered the opportunity to receive formal recognition (usually
academic credits) for the competency and knowledge they have
already obtained. Steenholdt (1998:1) clarifies this process by stating
simply: ``RPL involves matching what an individual already knows
and can do (their competencies) with learning outcomes of modules in
an accredited course.'' From an analysis of a number of website pages
(Stannard 1999; University of Ballarat TAFE Division1999; Steenholdt

142
1998; Universities and Colleges Admissions Service for the UK 1999)
and from other sources (Harris & Saddington 1995:7; Sansregret
1985:17; New Zealand Qualifications Authority 1993:7), it appears that
the knowledge and competencies could have resulted from:
. Teaching Ð That is any certified learning that took place by
studying a course at a recognised educational institution, or
work performed at a non-governmental organisation (NGO),
as well as any other course that has been done overseas, this
all makes up this category of teaching.
. Job experience Ð This includes paid work, for instance work
in an office as well as unpaid work in an office or, for
example, helping in a family business.
. Life experience Ð This includes all recreation activities,
hobbies, uncertified learning by study for self-enrichment;
free-will work in the community or in welfare organisations,
the running of a household, the taking care of others,
etcetera.
The last two categories are often grouped with ``Prior Experiential
Learning'' (cf Section 4 below, for the necessity of this distinction).
Accreditation of prior learning may be in the nature of admission to a
study programme, or it may be study for an advanced standing within
a study programme, or merely to obtain the recognition of credits for
the achievement of a qualification. This amounts to the idea that a
candidate's knowledge and competencies which had been obtained
elsewhere and that are relevant for a particular course, may accrue for
exemption from certain components for a course since these are
equivalent to certain credits. The credits that are awarded in this way
are of equal value to credits that the learners obtain by following a
more traditional route, for instance by means of either contact or
distance teaching (Universities and Colleges Admissions Service for
the UK 1999:3).
3 BENEFITS OF ASSESSMENT AND ACCREDITATION
OF PRIOR LEARNING
The acknowledgement and accreditation of prior learning are espe-

Recognition of prior learning ± a few words of caution 143
cially of importance to adult learners who want to make a re-entry into
education, or who want to shorten the period of time for their
curriculum (Universities and Colleges Admissions Service for the UK
1999:5, 6). Adults are usually averse to the duplicating of learning.
Therefore they are often unwilling to register and pay for a course in
which they will hear things they already know. To be forced to repeat
the same learning activities is the main stumbling block in the way of
lifelong learning and it is in any case expensive for the individual, for
the business sector and for broader society. An important benefit of
RPL in South Africa is that it can redress the unjustices of the past,
since it is one of the most effective ways to provide opportunities of
access to individuals who did not have the opportunity to enter higher
education previously. These individuals who have been estranged
from traditional learning systems, either on account of time, finances,
phase of life, distance or other factors, were just not able to obtain
access to higher education. They now set their hope on the accreditation
of their experience. This, in turn, can lead to the provision of
additional opportunities of access to job opportunities.
The acknowledgement of learning and the process of reflection that is
necessary to compile an RPL application often leads to heightened selfconfidence.
The recognition of learning by experience Ð often against
all expectations Ð influences the learners' motivation in a positive
way. Students obtain confidence in their capabilities as learners and
they develop a greater understanding of the value of lifelong learning.
Moreover, the preparation of an application for RPL facilitates the
development of independent self-study skills. Reflection on learning
by experience heightens the relationship between theory and practice,
and this leads to the heightened concept of reciprocal flow between
academic learning and practice (Universities and Colleges Admissions
Service for the UK 1999:8; Toop & Burleigh 1993:14±16).
Thus, RPL has the potential to broaden the potential for access, to
ensure a supple curriculum and to inculcate a positive value for
learning outside the sphere of academic learning. It may be seen as a
means whereby learners can integrate and appreciate theory and
practice, and whereby reflective practice can be enhanced. By

144
identifying learning by means of experience and then in turn applying
this learning in changing practice reflection on learning is encouraged.
However, RPL is not only beneficial for the individual: it also contains
benefits for higher education institutions, businesses, society and the
State. According to a number of researchers (Toop & Burleigh 1993:14±
16; Sansregret 1985; Universities and Colleges Admissions Service for
the UK 1999:8; Steenholdt 1998:2, and Unisa 2000:2), it is beneficial to
employers and managers of RPL candidates, since RPL leads to a
higher level of interest in all aspects of practice and motivation of
employees when previously acquired skills are graded. RPL can lead to
an acceleration in the obtaining of a qualification, and this in turn,
means that employees need to spend less time away from work while
trying to obtain an additional qualification. In this way, RPL is a
mechanism to overcome the shortage of trained human resources and a
way of improving multi-skilling. RPL is cost-effective, since it
eliminates unnecessary ``lockstep'' re-training and duplication. Moreover,
the process of reflection on practice often leads to new ideas and
developments in the work place and the ties between industry
(practice) and education (theory) are strengthened. RPL can also
identify unused or underutilised skills in the workforce.
A number of sources point out that higher education personnel can
benefit in their support of learners who submit RPL applications (see
Toop & Burleigh1993:14±16; Sansregret 1985; Universities and Colleges
Admissions Service for the UK 1999:9; Steenholdt 1998:4 and Unisa
2000:2). These benefits include:
. The learning outcomes approach encourages curriculum
development, in the sense that a student's RPL application
may suggest ideas for new modules and the updating and
development of existing modules, or new techniques for
assessment.
. The importance of issues in the work or recreation environment
is stressed, and faculties could utilise learners' existing
knowledge in their programmes.
. The process encourages study to be relevant to professional
and personal development, and this ensures a stronger link

Recognition of prior learning ± a few words of caution 145
between classroom learning and real world experiences. The
mechanisms for assessment of prior learning often demand
that faculties should reflect on the changing of their
established assumptions about teaching and learning. This
reflection often encourages changing of course content and
assessment, in order to produce learning outcomes that are
more meaningful.
. RPL applications are often based on recent experiences, and
therefore represent up-to-date and dynamic interaction with
the world of work, and yield material for discussion and
research.
. Learning and teaching partnerships with employers are
encouraged, in that the learning outcomes that are connected
with the current work practice can be negotiated. Sansregret
(1985:24) views this as ``dialogue between the academic and
business worlds''.
. Students are inclined to study at institutions where their
prior learning is recognised, rather than to study at institutions
where this is not the case. They often return to the same
institution where this recognition took place, to upgrade
knowledge still further.
. Recognition of prior learning not only frees students from
having to unnecessarily study required modules or courses,
but since the demand for higher education is universally at a
premium,RPLalsoallowsinstitutionstooffermoretraining
opportunities to other students, who do have to study
required modules or courses. Thus those to whom prior
learning recognition had been granted, do not take up space
unnecessarily at training institutions.
4 THE DISTINCTION BETWEEN CERTIFIED
LEARNING AND LEARNING BY EXPERIENCE
One factor concerning recognition and accreditation that could
possibly cause confusion, is the series of acronyms which has been
amassed, and the fact that various countries and institutions use
various acronyms for the same concepts. So for instance the term
``prior learning assessment'' (PLA) is used in the USA and Canada,

146
whilethisconceptisknowninAustralia,NewZealandasthe
``recognition of prior learning'' (RPL). In the UK the ``accreditation of
prior learning'' (APL) is used as an umbrella term, which both includes
former certified learning as well as learning by experience (Universities
and Colleges Admissions Service for the UK 1999:6). Thus in the
accreditation of prior learning, two categories are used, namely:
. APCL Ð The accreditation of prior certified learning; that is
learning for which a certificate, a diploma or a degree has
been awarded by other educational institutions or by other
teaching or training providers.
. APEL Ð The accreditation of prior learning by experience.
This refers to the uncertified learning that has been obtained
by means of experience. Sometimes there is reference to
APEL as RPEL (``recognition of prior experiential learning'').
The distinction between these two types of recognition and accreditation
of prior learning is made by Nyatanga, Forman and Fox (1998:7).
They explain that the accreditation of prior learning was initially
associated with certified prior learning:
APL, therefore, relates to such prior learning as may be gained
through organised courses, modules, workshops, seminars and
similar activities. Thus, in the broad sense, APL covers two aspects
of prior learning, namely (a) prior learning intentionally organised
for which certification marks successful completion, and (b)
organised prior learning such as seminars where certification is not
necessarily issued.
APEL, however, is associated with former incidental learning: ``APEL
therefore relates to such prior learning as may be gained through
leisure pursuits, family experiences, and unstructured work experience.''
Since such learning is seldom awarded with a certificate,
reference is made to ``uncertified prior learning'' (Nyatanga et al
1998:7).
Although both forms of prior learning focus on learning as experience,

Recognition of prior learning ± a few words of caution 147
and on the outcome process, rather than on the experience itself, the
distinction between the two concepts is important, since the way in
which the candidates gather and present proof of their competencies
will differ considerably. APCL candidates will be enabled to submit
relevant certificates as well as syllabi or cardinal points of modules, in
order to support their applications. The candidate can also submit a
concise portfolio which only contains the main points of that which has
been learned. The main points will then be used as a basis for further
elaboration during the assessment interview, or to write a summary in
which it is explained how the learning actually took place, and how
this concurs with the actual outcomes. This type of recognition is not
usually problematic and institutions of higher learning are usually in
possession of clear guidelines in this connection. In contrast to this
APEL is often problematic. It usually depends on various methods of
assessment, such as the presentation of complete portfolios which
should concur with the envisaged learning outcomes and a given
programme or a module (Nyatanga et al 1998:8); a written or oral test;
examples of completed work; an interview; an enactment; a demonstration,
etcetera. Since learning needs to be accredited, and not
experience as such, it is often very difficult to prove whether learning
actually took place, and whether the actual outcomes were achieved.
5 THE RPL PROCESS
Although every institution has its own policy and procedures that need
to be followed when a candidate applies for RPL, it appears from the
various sources (Nyatanga et al 1998:7, 8; Fawcett 1998; Steenholdt
1998:2±4; New Zealand Qualifications Authority 1993:4,13), that the
process that is followed, comprises seven main steps:
. Data gathering: The applicant obtains the necessary information
about RPL and the outcomes that are to be associated. It
is essential that during this phase the candidate receives the
necessary support and guidance.
. Application: The applicant compares his/her own competencies
with the learning outcomes that are expected, and then
completes the institution's prescribed RPL application form.
. Gathering and the presentation of proof: The candidate gathers

148
together proof of his/her knowledge and competencies in
order to support his/her application. The kinds of proof
often used are examples of completed work, certificates of
completed courses, portfolios and demonstrations. The
candidate should ensure in this instance that the competencies
and knowledge are current; only current competence is
relevant and valid.
. Assessment: The proof is assessed, and if necessary, the
candidate may be asked for an interview. The assessors make
recommendations for recognition of credits, or they recommend
refusal. The institute or the professional body verifies
the recommendations.
. Post-assessment support: The candidate receives feedback
regarding his/her application. If necessary, a learning or
development plan is recommended.
. Recording: Reports are compiled by an assessor, and the
results are recorded and made available to the applicant, in
writing.
. Appeal: If the candidate is of the opinion that the decision
taken is disputable, then he/she may appeal for reconsideration.
6 CONSIDERATIONS IN THE IMPLEMENTATION OF
RPL
The recognition of prior learning is a complex matter, which does not
come without its share of impediments. When an institution of higher
learning intends to implement RPL, there are a number of factors to
which consideration has to be given, to obviate any impediment to
successful implementation. These factors will now be discussed.
6.1 General misconceptions and malpractices to be
avoided
There are a number of misconceptions and malpractices concerning
RPL that can jeopardise the entire process. Quality assurance is
partcularly important to maintain sound RPL practice, as well as good
administrative standards. Points to guard against include:

Recognition of prior learning ± a few words of caution 149
. The awarding of credits on the bases of ``time served'' or experience
One of the misconceptions regarding RPL is, that experience can be
accredited. Experience merely implies that a task has been completed;
in no way does it imply that learning had actually taken place. Thus it
is important that credits are awarded for learning that can be
demonstrated, and not for the experience itself or for the duration of
experience (Universities and Colleges Admissions Service for the UK
1999:3; Fawcett 1998:1; Evans 1983:9). Sansregret (1991:3) makes this
clear: ``This is because the number of years of experience especially
today, does not necessarily mean competence, since people must learn
constantly to adjust. A routine job could prove to be the opposite.'' She
explains further that
[t]o merely record that an individual worked as a purchasing agent
or as a small business owner for three years documents only the
time. The intention of prior learning assessment is to take the
process a step further and to explore what the person learned from
the experience about purchasing, business ownership or management.
What skills and knowledge were acquired? Are the competencies
equivalent to competencies achieved in courses offered at
colleges and universities?
. Basing assessment fees on the number of credits awarded
RPL is a service to students, and the purpose is to maximise potential
for an individual. It also acknowledges the right to equal admission
opportunities. For this reason it is important that the fees levied should
correlate to the service provided, and not the number of credits that are
awarded. The fees that are levied should be standardised and should
be known before the time, so that students can decide whether they can
afford such an assessment. Nyatanga et al (1998:39) warn that if fees
are levied according to credits awarded, it can give rise to the
following problems: ``In being charged fees per credit, students are
unlikely to know the cost until their portfolio has actually been
submitted and assessed. The dilemma this creates is that ability to pay
and indeed withholding information on credits after a lot of effort has
gone into producing a portfolio.''

150
. Making no distinction between the roles of the RPL advisor and that of the
assessor
Personnel who help students to prepare their proof, should not play a
direct role in the final academic assessment of the evidence. This
distinction is of cardinal importance to ensure objectivity (Evans
1988:7; Nyatanga et al 1998:39). Evans (1988:7) explains that ``[t]he
simple point here is to avoid confusion between advocate and judge.''
. Promises of RPL service without regard for resources, personnel development
and expertise in the area
It is often accepted that one only needs sound judgement to implement
RPL, and that coordinated service and quality assurance mechanisms
are not really necessary. No RPL programme can be implemented
successfully if all the personnel that should be involved have not been
trained very well (Nyatanga et al 1998:39). Evans (1988:23) stresses that
``[c]learly it is irresponsible to launch any APEL scheme without being
assured that the academic colleagues who will be asked to assess the
prior learning are fully briefed on the nature of the undertaking and
support in it.'' The crucial necessity of continuous training and
development of personnel regarding RPL policy, principles and
procedures is also accentuated by the New Zealand Qualifications
Authority (1993:14): ``Positive and appropriate strategies to respond to
all types of inquiries are needed. Sensitivity to diverse cultures and
abilities, gender and age of the candidates is essential. There must be
sufficient numbers available to communicate in languages preferred by
the candidates.''
. No strategy in place to monitor inconsistencies and RPL malpractices, and
offering only uncoordinated and invalid services
When an institution is committed to RPL, then the RPL service should
comply with the same standards and quality requirements as all their
other services. There should be mechanisms in place to disclose
malpractice (Nyatanga et al 1998:38).

Recognition of prior learning ± a few words of caution 151
. Neglect to disclose rules, regulations and criteria for RPL assessment
beforehand
The requirements that need to be complied with, and the type of proof
that needs to be submitted, need to be spelled out very clearly,
beforehand. For example, if a portfolio needs to be submitted, then
students should receive very clear criteria for the composition of this
submission. Transparency regarding all aspects is important, at all
times.
. Neglect of feedback to applicants
Feedback to students regarding the outcome of their assessment is an
important aspect of RPL service. Students should know why they were
successful or unsuccessful, and it should be possible to appeal. For this
process too there should be clear guidelines (Nyatanga et al 1998:40).
6.2 The risk factor involved in RPL
Changing circumstances and revolutionary approaches, such as RPL,
demand that institutions should thoroughly scrutinise and reconsider
existing assessment and evaluative methods. Conventional assessment
and evaluation, at best, reflect a number of serious shortcomings and
are far from perfect. This is also the case with prior learning. Windham
(1981:2) makes a valid point when he voices his concern about the
``ability of any examination or other evaluative instruments to
substitute for the learning experiences of the classroom''. According to
Toop and Burleigh (1993:17), there is often the perception that RPL
involves a ``second class'' or inferior assessment. However, they
ascribe this to the fact that ``the critic has set up in his/her mind an
idealised assessment situation which is rarely met in reality.''
During conventional assessment, the full spectrum of knowledge and
competencies that are covered in a course, are seldom tested fully; only
a sample is tested during a limited number of assessment sessions, for
instance in one or two assignments, in a multiple choice test on theory,
or in a practical test. Such previous experiences of assessment often
cause RPL candidates to underestimate their own competencies, with
the result that they apply for less recognition than they would have

152
been awarded. This can partially be ascribed to the fear of failure and
the conviction that they are inadequate in a critical facet of the work.
There is an additional factor: Many students are convinced that if they
receive exemption, then they will not be able to cope with more
important aspects when they are in a formal test situation (Toop &
Burleigh 1993:18). The criteria of objectivity, validity and reliability
should thus be in place at all times during assessment of prior learning.
Over and above the fact that the criteria of objectivity, validity and
reliability might be lacking during assessment of prior learning, there
is also another risk factor linked to RPL. In Figure 1, which has been
adapted from Toop & Burleigh (1993:18), this risk factor is indicated.
When a student requires recognition for an entire module, or when he/
she applies to be declared competent in the performance of high risk or
complex competence, then there is a high risk involved. If full
recognition is obtained in such a case, then there is no further training
or assessment involved, and then there is no safety net in place to
compensate for a lack of knowledge, or for wrong assessment. A lower
levelofriskisinvolvedwhenonlypartialrecognitionisrequiredfora
single study unit, module or even units of competencies, since this will
result in further training and assessment, during which it can be
assured that a candidate reaches the outcomes of a qualification. Since
there is a risk involved, there need to be a few safety nets in place.
These safety nets are in the form of the capacity that the assessors have
to
. specify further training and/or experience that the candidate
has to obtain.
. reserve the right to reassess the candidate at a later stage
regarding further training or experience, as has been
stipulated.
. to withdraw the provisional recognition.
The risk factor implies that an increasing measure of meticulousness needs
to be applied, as the level of risk increases. This can take place in two ways,
namely the required amount and quality of evidence that should be
presented, and the involvement of more than one assessor, to assess the

Recognition of prior learning ± a few words of caution 153
evidence, and to take the final decision (Toop & Burleigh 1993:18). A high
risk application can for instance include a variety of evidence such as:
observation in the work place; a challenge test; a trade test; confirmation of
competence by a supervisor or an employer; assignments; a portfolio of
completed work (for example of real objects) and further oral interviews.
The implementation of a panel of judges to assess the evidence, brings
more expertise and more viewpoints into play in the assessment situation,
and could lead to a more balanced decision.
The risk factor also entails that it should be taken into consideration
that some competencies or modules are more important, or more
critical than others. ``The person may only be applying for recognition
of 10 per cent of the course, but it may be the most critical 10 per cent of
the whole course and deserving of rigorous assessment'' (Toop &
Burleigh 1993:19). In a low risk situation where fewer crucial modules
are involved, the assessment outcome can, however, be taken by an
expert and the evidence provided need not be so comprehensive.
6.3 Personnel involvement in the implementation of
RPL
According to Evans (1988:23), workloads and attitudes are the most
important factors that need to be considered regarding personnel
involved in RPL. She warns regarding workload that ``[w]ork with
APEL can lead some students into enormous amounts of work as they
delve into their experiences. They get fascinated by it. This can result in
some wanting to make disproportionate demands on tutors' time.''
This problem can be solved to some extent, when clear objectives are
set for the required evidence, and for transparent assessment. The
latter implies that students should understand why and according to
which criteria they are going to be assessed, and how the marks are to
be interpreted. If they are unsuccessful, then reasons should be
provided (Wood 1990:39).
Evans (1988:23) as well as Cohen and Whitaker (1994:52) point out that
personal and academic inclinations can influence the assessment
process. According to Cohen and Whitaker (1994:52), there are
institutions that regard RPL as an external activity, or regard it to be

154
k
SKILLS/COMPETENCY DEVELOPMENT
INCREASING EXTENT OF RECOGNITION SOUGHT
FIGURE 1
Risk management of recognition of prior learning
FULL COMPETENCE Ð FULL RECOGNITION
. High risk/limited ``safety-net''
. Skills to be assessed are very complex and
possibly multi-disciplinary
. Full interview panel
. Self-assessment is an essential part of the
student's learning approach
. Moderate risk/further opportunity
for assessment
. Skills to be assessed are confined to a
limited field eg finance or engineering
. Self-assessment is still part of the
learning acquisition process
. Low risk/considerable future
assessment opportunity
. Skills to be assessed are confined
to a single domain eg
organic chemistry
. Single interviewer
k
MORE EVIDENCE OF COMPETENCE REQUIRED
MORE RIGOUROUS ASSESSMENT REQUIRED AND
MORE ASSESSORS INVOLVED
LIMITED SKILLS Ð NO RECOGNITION
(Adapted from: Toop & Burleigh 1993:18.)

Recognition of prior learning ± a few words of caution 155
similar to traditional admission procedures. Some academics are of the
opinion that RPL lowers academic standards and it is a soft option;
while others just cannot accept that there can be authentic learning
outside the lecture hall, without the aid of a lecturer.
Academyics who fear that RPL could lead to a lowering of academic
standards are especially concerned about the assessment of outcomes,
when the learning process, and other academic thought processes such
as reasoning, debating and logic, cannot be assessed. In their summary
of papers read at the 1994 International Experiential Learning
Conference, Cohen and Whitaker (1994:51) quote from Hindmarsh's
paper:
Perhaps the most common concern raised by university staff new to
RPL is the fear that RPL, especially if for credit, would decrease the
quality and the nature of learning as valued by `the liberal
university'. For example, in our study at Victoria University of
Wellington some staff, including those in more vocationally
oriented programs feared that RPL could require professional
competence to be defined so that it served narrow, technicist
vocational interests and thus de-emphasized capacities to develop
critical analyses of social and economic injustices and the holistic
nature of learning Ð as valued by the university.
This fear is linked to an assumption that RPL is inevitably rooted in
a technicist, industry-led and conservative ideology of education
with an emphasis on minimal standards and finite course outcomes
which are only valid if capable of reduction into `objective'
measurable and observable behaviours. Such an education model is
in direct opposition to features valued by western liberal and/or
humanist views of the purpose of education Ð excellence, integrative
and holistic learning, the extension of human potential to
realms still unknown and the importance of learning processes as
much as learning outcomes. Debate, analysis and critical thinking
are highly valued in such universities, which it is contended can not
be reduced and packaged in small, finite unit outcomes.

156
6.4 The necessity of quality control
In order to obviate a lowering of standards, thorough quality assurance
is a very important prerequisite for successful RPL implementation.
Students, employers and taxpayers expect that institutions of higher
learning will maintain high standards, and that quality graduands will
be produced for society. Thus these stakeholders become more and
more critical of graduates who are not able to perform the tasks
required or expected of them. Most students also prefer that the
qualification that they obtain from a university or an institution of
higher learning attracts the necessary respect from their employers
(Sansregret 1985:40). Thus there remains a need for quality, quality
assurance and quality control. According to Coetzee (2000:1) quality
can be regarded as the ``degree of excellence'', while assurance should
be understood as the ``formal guarantee or positive declaration''.
According to her, quality assurance, therefore, means ``a formal
guarantee of a degree of excellence''.
Quality assurance is absolutely essential for the success of any RPL
programme. Quality may be seen as the degree of confidence that
students or others of a particular institution have in those who are
involved in the RPL procedures. According to Nyatanga et al (1998:30)
quality assurance regarding RPL includes total quality management
(TQM) as well as continuous quality improvement (CQI). These
concepts may be described as ``doing the right thing the first time, on
time and to strive always for improvement and customer satisfaction.''
Doing things correctly within RPL terms means that there will be an
infrastructure and processes in place for the maintenance and for the
continual improvement of RPL practice. Nyatanga et al (1998:30)
observe in this connection that RPL can only complement the quality
and the commensurate student experiences if it is based on a clear
policy, sound commitment and critical judgement by the users.
Sansregret (1985:40) quotes Sachs (1980), who warns institutions
against the temptation to give away credits, he furthermore ``deplores
`the lack of standards' with the easy assurance that comes from

Recognition of prior learning ± a few words of caution 157
superficial knowledge''. In an attempt to draw students, institutions
can also easily recognise learning where that registration is not entirely
justified. According to Sachs there are four key areas that can assure
quality control:
. that the learning be at college level;
. that it falls within the kind of creditable work congruent with
the mission and goals of the collegiate institution;
. that the awards result from technically sound assessment,
heeding concerns of both validity and reliability, and
. that institutional integrity be maintained in the advertising
of the learning and crediting options, in the reporting and
labelling of the assessment findings and in the fiscal
procedures developed to support the assessment service.
It is very important to keep in mind when prior learning is assessed
that, firstly, the learning that has taken place should be measurable.
Assessors should focus on knowledge and competencies that can be
demonstrated, since there is no other way in which the value of
experience can be measured. Secondly, it is important that the learning
should contain both a theoretical as well as a practical component.
Many adults are adept when it comes to the application of knowledge,
but often they do not have the theoretical substructure. Thirdly, the
learning that took place should be at a higher education level. A person
may only receive credit for that which can be compared to what is
taught at institutions of higher education. The learning should,
fourthly, be applicable outside of the specific context in which it was
learned, in order to serve as foundation for further learning. The
learnershouldthusbeabletoapplyhis/herknowledgeand
competencies in more than one situation. Lastly, the learning should be
of a recent nature. A person cannot expect to receive academic credits
for knowledge and experience that had been obtained long ago and has
probably already become obsolete, or is no longer current (Sansregret
1985:41). There need to be mechanisms in place that prevent a person
from being accredited more than once for the same prior learning.

158
In order to ensure sound practice and quality in RPL, it is necessary
that institutions see to it that the following are in place (Nyatanga et al
1998:32):
. a clear policy on RPL, and admission to it;
. regulations and guidelines to train both personnel and
potential applicants;
. specific offices or persons that are responsible for the making
operational RPL and quality control;
. specific roles that the institution and the personnel need to
fulfil regarding RPL issues, which may emerge on a day-today
basis;
. how an institution and its programmes will be seen by those
outside, such as relevant professional bodies, and
. how an institution will obtain the opinions and experiences
of students and others involved in the RPL process, and how
to assimilate these.
An important quality assurance mechanism is the continuous evaluation
and revision of RPL procedures. The New Zealand Qualification
Authority (1993:19) mentions that ``[t]hose who have been piloting RPL
practices in New Zealand affirm that RPL systems evolve and are in
constant need of modification. RPL systems that have been in place in
overseas for 20 years continue to be revised''.
6.5 Costs involved in RPL
The financial implications of RPL should never be left out of the
equation. It is logical that RPL could influence registration numbers of
students, and this implies a potential gain or loss for institutions. RPL
could imply the possibility of subsidisation of students by the state.
On the one hand, it may be argued that RPL programmes provide an
opportunity for students who would otherwise not have registered for
a qualification. Most RPL programmes are also aimed to draw nontraditional
students: adults, wives and working individuals who
cannot afford the time and the cost of the usual registration for courses.
Thus, this can lead to a rise in student numbers. Wagner (1981:2),

Recognition of prior learning ± a few words of caution 159
however, investigated the situation at various institutions, and points
out that this assumption cannot be accepted merely as a datum, since
``[t]aken together, these findings provide little evidence to indicate an
increase in enrollments, particularly from groups not traditionally
served by higher education, as a result of RPL programs''. Nyatanga et
al (1998:43), on the other hand, do not agree, and aver that RPL has the
potential to generate income, since it can raise the numbers of parttime
students in particular.
On the other hand it may be reasoned that RPL creates the possibility
that students may complete a qualification in a shorter time, and that
this could influence the registration numbers for courses, since it
precludes students who would have had to follow the usual route of
preliminary courses on account of RPL. Cohen and Whitaker (1994:51),
however, observe in a conclusion in papers that were read at the 1994
International Experiential Learning Conference, that very few of the
speakers complained about the financial implications, and only one
person referred to the ``loss of business'' on account of RPL. According
to them, RPL supports growth in academic courses rather than
impeding it.
However, it cannot be denied that RPL programmes involve direct
costs for institutions of higher learning where RPL is implemented.
Development of tests and validation, portfolio assessment, the
conducting of interviews, often on a one-to-one basis, etcetera, can be
very costly. Even when standardised tests are used, the costs involved
in the marking, frequent standardising and evaluation studies, test
administration, keeping of records and the personnel that are involved,
can accrue to a considerable amount (Wagner 1981:7, Windham
1981:11). According to Toop and Burleigh (1993:22), there are also the
initial costs that are involved. This includes the time that is spent on
the development of an RPL policy for a particular institution,
determining the assessment criteria and the development of assessment
methods and instruments such as for instance the use of
checklists for self-assessment, or for the use by assessors, key questions
for interviews, practical or challenge tests, computer-based tests,
etcetera. This also includes the costs involved in the time that is spent

160
in the development of advertising materials (brochures, pamphlets,
posters, etc.) And the process materials (application forms, pro forms
for the recording of assessment outcomes) and the keeping of records
(eg data bases, portfolios, passports of competencies, etc). A great
expense associated with RPL is the cost involved in the training of
personnel for the assessment process.
Apart from initial costs, there are also certain maintenance costs that
can amount to considerable sums. The time that is spent in the
management of the system, and in the marketing and the advertising,
the handling of general inquiries and the dissemination of documentation,
the time that is spent in the deliberation (``counselling'') with
applicants, before and after assessment, the actual assessment and the
making available of suitable space for offices and other assessment
activities, especially if the assessment does not take place at the
candidate's place of work, the upgrading of RPL advisors, are all
aspects that contribute to the maintenance costs.
Although students need to pay for the opportunity to be considered for
RPL, it is uncertain whether the real costs of RPL assessment could be
reimbursed from the students' payment of fees, later on. In Section 6.1,
it was pointed out that the assessment fees cannot be based on the
number of credits that will be awarded. The reimbursement of costs
from the student gives rise to another problem. Applying for RPL can
be very intensive and demands so much time, inputs and monies from
students that it may appear cheaper instead, to register for the course
for which they are trying to obtain exemption. This is why Cohen and
Whitaker (1994:53) remark that ``[t]he challenge is to develop
procedures which are rigorous without being unduly onerous or
intrusive and economical for all concerned.''
7 CONCLUSION
The acknowledgement and accreditation of prior learning have become
a reality in South Africa, and for this reason both academics as well as

Recognition of prior learning ± a few words of caution 161
learners should be prepared for its implementation. Misconceptions
and malpractices need to be pointed out early, so that the process will
not be impeded, or retarded, or implemented in such a way that the
standards are lowered.
It seems clear that recognition of prior learning requires a change of
attitude for academics. It needs to be realised that institutions of higher
learning do not hold a monopoly over learning, and that they are not
the only providers of teaching. Businesses, individuals, voluntary
organisations, churches and other institutions have also ventured into
the teaching arena, and learning that has taken place there is as valid as
that which has been initiated by academic institutions. Moreover,
adults acquire valuable knowledge and competencies, through their
experiences (outside the academic milieu), which equates academic
learning. Sansregret (1987:4) points out that there are two possible
styles of learning: theoretical and practical experience. Some persons
learn better after they have experienced something first, they then
apply what they have learned by experience, and after the learning task
has been completed, they understand the general concepts and
principles better. Others first learn the general principles and concepts,
and then apply these to a specific situation. The latter is the traditional
way of learning, and unfortunately some academics accept this as the
only valid way of learning. In order to bring the credibility of RPL
home to academics, and to convince the ``unbelievers'' of the merits of
RPL, one should begin, well in time, to inform personnel, and obviate
misconceptions about the practice of RPL.
Thorough training of personnel involved with RPL is a prerequisite for
its implementation. It is important to distinguish between those who
have to help the candidate with his/her application and those who are
going to assess that application. Provision should also be made for
moderators and external examiners who are to verify the assessment. It
is absolutely essential that the assessors and the moderators should be
subject specialists. However, it is not only personnel that need to be
trained ± the students will also need to be trained in order to prepare
their RPL applications.

162
Since there are risks involved in the implementation of RPL, there
should be built-in safety precautions, and it should be ensured that the
assessing that takes place, complies with the requirements of
objectivity, validity and reliability. Teaching institutions should
formulate their policy regarding RPL in such a fashion, that the
assessor will be empowered to grant provisional recognition, to
propose further training and to reserve the right to reassess the
candidate later on regarding the proposed training. The more, the more
difficult and more important and the higher the risk the courses or
modules pose, for which the candidates have applied to obtain
recognition, the more comprehensive the safety nets should be. These
`'nets'' could for instance consist of a larger panel of assessors, or there
could be more stringent implementation of various kinds of assessments.
In order to ensure that standards are not compromised on account of
recognition of prior learning, it is essential that there should be
rigorous quality control during the entire process. To ensure quality,
certain academic and administrative standards need to be set. Among
others this includes transparency, clear policy, supportive infrastructure,
adequate and consistent training of personnel and accountable
assessing practices. The RPL procedures need to be revised
continually.
It will benefit institutions to consider very thoroughly the financial
implications connected with RPL, before the process is implemented.
Factors such as the cost involved in the training of personnel, the initial
cost, maintenance cost and administrative cost (eg keeping of records)
of RPL, need to be considered, against the potential increase in student
numbers. Other factors to be considered are the costs that students
incur by submitting an RPL application. It could for instance be
expensive and time consuming to prepare a complete portfolio. The
cost involved should therefore be communicated clearly to students.
8 CONCLUDING REMARKS
RPL offers individuals, academic institutions, and the professional

Recognition of prior learning ± a few words of caution 163
world, the opportunity to adapt to changing circumstances in work
and life. However, how to implement RPL accountably, without risk,
quickly, economically and with the necessary quality control remains
the key question to be answered by each respective discipline.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Coetzee, M 2000. Quality assurance. Paper read at the Workshop for the Advanced
Programme for Trainers. July. Pretoria: Unisa.
Cohen, R & Whitaker, U 1994. Assessing learning from experience. Perspectives on
Experiential learning. The 1994 International Experiential Learning Conference.
9±12 November 1997. Washington, DC.
Evans, N 1983. Curriculum opportunity. A map of experiential learning in entry requirements
to higher and further education in award bearing courses. A project report. London:
Further Education Unit.
Evans, N 1988. The assessment of prior experiential learning. Report of a CNAA
Development Fund Project conducted at the Learning form Experience Trust. London:
Council for National Academic Awards.
Fawcett, B 1998. AOQ (SA) Recognition of prior learning (RPL) policy. http://
www.aoq.asn.au/rpl.html. (Accessed on 1999/09/20).
Harris,J&Saddington,T1995. The recognition of prior learning (RPL): International models
of assessment and their impact on the South African education and training practice.
Cape Town: University of Cape Town.
Nayatanga, L, Forman, D & Fox, J 1998. Good practice in the accreditation of prior learning.
London: Cassell.
New Zealand Qualifications Authority. 1993. The recognition of prior learning. Quality
assurance in education and training. Wellington: New Zealand Qualifications
Authority.
Sansregret, M 1985. Recognition of prior learning. Administrator's guide. Quebec: Quebec
Department of Education.
Sansregret, M 1987. A rationale for assessing adults' prior learning. Information analysis.
Sansregret, M 1991. Recognition of practical knowledge through a prior learning
assessment program. Paper delivered at the 40th Annual Adult Education
Conference, 14±20 October 1991. Montreal, Quebec, Canada.
Stannard, L 1999. Recognition of prior learning. http://www.swtafe.vic.edu.au.info.rpl.htm.
(Accessed on 1999/09/20).
Steenholdt, P 1998. Recognition of prior learning (RPL). http://www.dvet.tas.gov.au/train/
trai7255.htm. (Accessed on 1999/09/20).

164
Toop, L & Burleigh, J 1993. Arrangements for the recognition of prior learning in Australia.
Canberra: Australian Department of Employment, Education and Training.
Universities and Colleges Admissions Service for the UK. 1999. Accreditation of prior
learning. http://search1.ucas.co.uk/higher/candq/apl/right.html. (Accessed on 1999/
09/20).
University of Ballarat TAFE Division. 1999. Recognition of prior learning.
http://swww.ballarat.edu.au/olp/olprpl.htm. (Accessed on 1999/09/20).
University of South Africa. 2000. Draft policy on assessment and accreditation of experiential
learning. Pretoria: Unisa.
Wagner, A P 1981. A research agenda for `RPL' programs. Paper delivered at the 5th
International Conference on Higher Education at the University of Lancaster. 1±4
September.
Windham, D M 1981. The economics of recognizing prior learning. Paper delivered at the
5th International Conference on Higher Education at the University of Lancaster.
1±4 September.
Wood, R 1990. Assessing occupational competence: key operational precepts gained from
work on the ground. Competence and Assessment Compendium no 1:37±38.

Die bepaling van 'n realistiese prestasievlak 165
Die bepaling van
'n realistiese
prestasievlak
GBester
Departement Opvoedkundestudies
Unisa
The aim of the investigation was to determine which variables can be used to account for
the largest proportion of the variance in achievement and which instruments can be used
to measure these variables. A sample of 124 grade 11-learners (61 boys and 63 girls)
was used in the investigation. General Intelligence, Aptitude, Self-concept, Motivation,
Interest (brain-preference) and Study-orientation were used as prediction variables.
Achievement was used as the criterion variable. In total 64% of the variance in
achievement could be accounted for by the prediction variables of which General
Intelligence, Study-orientation and Gender accounted for 50%. A further 10% was
accounted for by Brain-preference(A), Calculations and Short-term Memory. The
remaining variables accounted for an additional 4% of the variance in achievement.
Finally, the educational value of realistic achievement levels was discussed.
Die doel van die ondersoek was om te bepaal watter veranderlikes gebruik kan word om
die grootste proporsie van die variansie in prestasie te verklaar en watter instrumente kan
gebruik word om die veranderlikes te meet. 'n Steekproef van 124 graad 11-leerders (61
seuns en 63 dogters) is in die ondersoek gebruik. As voorspellingsveranderlikes is
Intelligensie, Aanleg, Selfkonsep, Motivering, Belangstelling (breinvoorkeur) en StudieorieÈntasie
gebruik. Die kriteriumveranderlike was prestasie. In totaal kon 64% van die
variansie in gemiddelde prestasie deur die voorspellingsveranderlikes verklaar word,
waarvan Algemene Intelligensie, StudieorieÈntasie en geslag 50% verklaar het. 'n Verdere

166
10% is verklaar deur Breinvoorkeur (A), Berekeninge en Korttermyngeheue. Die
oorblywende veranderlikes het 'n addisionele 4% van die variansie in prestasie verklaar.
Die opvoedkundige waarde van realistiese prestasievlakke word ten slotte bespreek.
1 INLEIDING
Die werklikheid moet nie van 'n kind weerhou word nie. Die kind moet
eerder met die werklikheid gekonfronteer word en uitgenooi word om
op 'n eerlike wyse daaroor te besin, sodat hy/sy tot 'n beter begrip kan
kom van wie en wat hy/sy is (Corey 1996:43). Die  opdrag le à op die pad
van die opvoeder aangesien dit die opvoeder is wat die kind van sy/
haar moontlikhede en beperkinge bewus moet maak sonder om die
kind af te kraak of wonderlike beloftes van onmoontlikhede aan hom/
haar voor te hou.
Akademiese prestasie is een terrein waar leerders, ouers en ook
onderwysers dikwels onrealistiese afleidings stel en maak. In die
meeste gevalle is dit omdat daar nie voldoende inligting oor die leerder
beskikbaar is nie. In gevalle waar 'n intelligensietelling byvoorbeeld
nie beskikbaar is nie, word verwagte prestasie rofweg geskat in stede
daarvan dat dit wetenskaplik bereken word. As 'n intelligensietelling
wel beskikbaar is, let baie onderwysers slegs op die telling as 'n
aanduiding van potensiaal sonder om affektiewe veranderlikes soos
selfbeeld en motivering in berekening te bring, faktore wat beslis ook
met prestasie verband hou. Dit is veral gedurende die hoe È rskooljare
dat laasgenoemde faktore 'n toenemend groter rol met betrekking tot
prestasie begin speel. Baie hoe È rskoolleerders raak met verloop van tyd
agter ten opsigte van hulle skoolwerk omdat hulle daardeur oorweldig
word. Dit gee aanleiding tot 'n lae selfbeeld en gebrekkige motivering,
aangesien die leerders van mening is dat hulle nooit die mas sal opkom
nie. Dit het tot gevolg dat hulle nie genoegsaam studeer nie en wanneer
hulle dan swak presteer, versterk dit hulle eie selfvernietigende
profesie (Ames 1992:261±271). Een geslaagde manier om uit hierdie
sirkel weg te breek is om realistiese prestasievlakke vir die leerder daar

Die bepaling van 'n realistiese prestasievlak 167
te stel wat hy/sy in alle waarskynlikheid sal bereik. Dit is om hierdie
rede vreemd dat dit nie 'n algemene praktyk by skole is om realistiese
prestasievlakke vir leerders in die vernaamste skoolvakke te bepaal
nie.
In 'n voorondersoek het die skrywer twaalf hoe È rskole in die Pretoriaomgewing
gekontak en nie een van hierdie skole bepaal realistiese
prestasievlakke op 'n wetenskaplike wyse nie. 'n Rowwe skatting word
in die meeste gevalle van oor- en onderprestasie gemaak. So 'n praktyk
is ongewens en onnodig aangesien rekenaarprogramme dit moontlik
maak om vir elke leerder in verskillende vakgebiede 'n redelik
akkurate en realistiese prestasiepunt te bereken.
In verskeie ondersoeke is daar reeds pogings aangewend om die
verband tussen verskillende faktore en akademiese prestasie te bepaal.
Hierdie ondersoeke lei egter nie tot praktykveranderinge nie omdat die
mees geskikte faktore nie in aanmerking geneem word nie. Sommige
ondersoeke betrek slegs een veranderlike of 'n klein aantal veranderlikes
wat voorspelling bemoeilik omdat die interaksie tussen verskeie
veranderlikes geõ È gnoreer word. Byvoorbeeld, in Brodnick en Ree
(1995:583±594) se ondersoek is slegs intelligensie en sosio-ekonomiese
status met prestasie in verband gebring. Intelligensie het 45% van die
variansie in prestasie verklaar maar sosio-ekonomiese status kon geen
verdere bydrae lewer nie. Belangrike affektiewe veranderlikes soos
selfkonsep en motivering wat wel tot die variansie sou kon bydra, was
egter nie in die ondersoek betrek nie. Die skrywers self het dit as 'n
leemte uitgewys. In ander ondersoeke soos die  van Monteith (1987)
word verskeie veranderlikes wel gebruik, maar nie die gewenste
veranderlikes nie. Gevolglik is die variansie in prestasie wat deur die
veranderlikes verklaar word, nie voldoende nie. In Monteith (1987:45)
se ondersoek byvoorbeeld, kon slegs 36% van die variansie in
wiskundeprestasie by seuns en 32% by dogters verklaar word. Aanleg
is nie as 'n veranderlike ingesluit nie terwyl veranderlikes soos
oplettendheid, mobiliteit, identiteitsekerheid en leesspoed, wat wel
ingesluit was, min tot die verklaring van die variansie in wiskundeprestasie
bygedra het.

168
Twee probleme kom na vore wanneer 'n poging aangewend word om
realistiese prestasievlakke te bepaal, naamlik die keuse van veranderlikes
en die keuse van instrumente om hierdie veranderlikes te meet.
Indien 'n groot getal veranderlikes betrek word wat die toepassing van
verskeie meetinstrumente impliseer, word dit 'n moeilik uitvoerbare
opdrag wat nie byval by voorligters en vakonderwysers sal vind nie.
Die minimum veranderlikes en meetinstrumente moet geselekteer
word waarmee die maksimum variansie in prestasie verklaar kan
word. Verder sou dit raadsaam wees om sover moontlik van meetinstrumente
gebruik te maak wat vir die onderwyser bekend is, soos
die JAT (Junior Aanlegtoets), SAT (Senior Aanlegtoets) of die OSGH
(Opname Studiegewoontes en -houdings). Nie alleen is die toetse
gestandaardiseer nie, maar dit is ook toetse wat vir ander doeleindes
(soos beroepskeuse) gebruik word wat die eenmalige afneem daarvan
'n ekonomiese en bruikbare oefening maak.
In die lig van die voorafgaande kan die probleem van die ondersoek
formeelasvolggestelword:Watter veranderlikes kan gebruik word om die
grootste proporsie van die variansie in prestasie te verklaar en watter
instrumente kan gebruik word om die veranderlikes te meet?
'n Bruikbare model om die leerhandeling te struktureer en veranderlikes
wat leer beõ È nvloed te identifiseer, is die  van Bloom (1976:11).
Bloom onderskei drie hoofveranderlikes wat met akademiese prestasie
verband hou, naamlik:
. Kognitiewe intreeveranderlikes: Dit is veranderlikes soos
intelligensie, aanleg en denke waarmee die leerder tot die
leertaak toetree.
. Affektiewe intreeveranderlikes: Dit is veranderlikes soos
belangstelling, motivering en selfkonsep waarmee die leerder
tot die leertaak toetree.
. Kwaliteit van onderrig: Dit sluit aspekte in soos goeie
verduideliking, deelname aan die leergebeure, toepassing
van leerinhoude en gereelde evaluering.

Die bepaling van 'n realistiese prestasievlak 169
Kognitiewe en affektiewe veranderlikes is intreeveranderlikes wat in
die leerder self gelee È is en die leerhandeling voorafgaan. Kwaliteit van
onderrig word deur die onderwyser bepaal en is daarom buite die
leerder gelee È . Verder wissel dit van onderwyser tot onderwyser.
In 'n hoe È rskoolsituasie waar verskillende vakke deur verskillende
onderwysers onderrig word, is dit moeilik om 'n veranderlike soos
kwaliteit van onderrig na te vors. Dit is om hierdie rede meer gewens
om te fokus op 'n eienskap van die leerder wat by die leerhandeling
betrokke is. In plaas van te let op die onderrig wat die leerder ontvang,
kan daar eerder op die leerder se studiegewoontes en studiehouding
(studieorie È ntasie) gefokus word.
'n Gewysigde model van Bloom sal skematies soos volg daar uitsien:
Intreekenmerke van Leerhandeling Leeruitkomste
die leerder
Kognitief
Affektief
"
"
Leerinhoud
~
"
Prestasie
Studieorie È ntasie
2 KOGNITIEWE INTREEKENMERKE VAN LEERDERS
2.1 Intelligensie
Die vernaamste kognitiewe veranderlike wat prestasie beõ È nvloed is
intelligensie. Algemene intelligensie is een van die vernaamste
voorspellers van akademiese prestasie aangesien dit die faktor is wat
op sigself die grootste proporsie van die variansie in prestasie verklaar.
Horn ea (1993:464±478) het bevind dat algemene intelligensie ongeveer
21% van die variansie in prestasie verklaar, terwyl Brodnick & Ree
(1995:583±594) aangetoon het dat algemene intelligensie tot soveel as
45% van die variansie in prestasie verklaar. Bennet ea (in Gustafsson &
Blake 1993:407±434) het 'n korrelasie van 0,53 tussen algemene

170
intelligensie en akademiese prestasie aangetoon, wat aandui dat
algemene intelligensie ongeveer 28% van die variansie in prestasie
verklaar. In laasgenoemde ondersoek is vakke soos Engels, Wiskunde,
Wetenskap, Sosiale studies en Handelsvakke as kriteriumveranderlikes
gebruik.
Gustafsson en Blake (1993:407±434) het 'n omvattende navorsingsprojek
geloods om die voorspellingswaarde van intelligensie met
betrekking tot skoolprestasie te bepaal. In totaal is 16 aanlegtoetse by
866 graad 6-leerders afgeneem en die aanlegtoetse is in verband
gebring met prestasies in 17 vakgebiede. Soos in die ondersoeke van
Brodnick en Ree asook Horn ea wat hierbo genoem is, is Gustafsson en
Blake se bevinding ook dat algemene intelligensie die belangrikste
voorspeller in die meeste vakgebiede was en ongeveer 30% van die
variansie in prestasie verklaar (die hoogste was 41% in Wiskunde). Ten
spyte van hulle bevindinge argumenteer die navorsers dat spesifieke
aanlegte nie buite rekening gelaat kan word wanneer prestasie
voorspel word nie. Die rede hiervoor is dat algemene intelligensie wel
die beste kognitiewe voorspeller in die meeste vakgebiede is, maar die
relatiewe belangrikheid van algemene intelligensie verskil van vakgebied
tot vakgebied. Waar algemene intelligensie 41% van die
variansie in wiskundeprestasie verklaar het, kon dit in die geval van
geskiedenisprestasie slegs 25% verklaar (alhoewel dit nog steeds die
beste voorspeller was). Die afleiding wat hieruit gemaak kan word, is
dat die gebruik van algemene intelligensie sowel as spesifieke aanlegte
die aangewese manier is om realistiese prestasievlakke te voorspel.
3 AFFEKTIEWE INTREEKENMERKE VAN LEERDERS
Naas kognitiewe intreekenmerke is affektiewe intreekenmerke die
vernaamste groep veranderlikes wat prestasie op skool beõ È nvloed. Die
affektiewe intreekenmerke wat meestal met prestasie op skool in
verband gebring word, is die selfkonsep, motivering en soms ook
belangstelling in die leerinhoud (Van der Lith 1991:74±81).
3.1 Selfkonsep
'n Sterker verband word tussen akademiese selfkonsep en prestasie

Die bepaling van 'n realistiese prestasievlak 171
aangetoon as die  tussen 'n algemene selfkonsep en prestasie. Die
korrelasie tussen algemene selfkonsep en prestasie blyk in die orde van
0,2 te wees terwyl die korrelasie tussen akademiese selfkonsep en
prestasie ongeveer 0,4 is (Byrne 1996:299±302). Ten einde prestasie te
voorspel, sou dit dus wensliker wees om 'n instrument te gebruik wat
die akademiese selfkonsep van die leerder meet.
Sowat 16% van die variansie in prestasie kan deur akademiese
selfkonsep verklaar word, wat dit een van die vernaamste affektiewe
faktore maak om prestasie te voorspel. Bloom (1976:95) het vroee È r
reeds akademiese selfkonsep uitgesonder as die sterkste affektiewe
faktor om prestasie te voorspel. Uit navorsingsresultate wat hy
aanhaal, kan akademiese selfkonsep sowat 25% van die variansie in
prestasie verklaar. Enige model wat poog om prestasie te voorspel
moet akademiese selfkonsep as veranderlike insluit. Om 'n realistiese
prestasie vir 'n leerder te bepaal is dit belangrik om te weet hoe
realisties hy/sy oor homself as leerder dink.
3.2 Motivering
Die wisselende aard van leerders se motivering hou verband met
wisselende prestasievlakke. Oor die algemeen word hoe È motivering
met hoe È prestasie in verband gebring. Wentzel (1991:196) het goeie en
swak presteerders op hoe È rskoolvlak vergelyk en gevind dat 84% van
die goeie presteerders doelstellings nagestreef het soos om take betyds
af te handel en om suksesvol, onafhanklik en verantwoordelik ten
opsigte van hulle studies te wees. Slegs 13% van die swak presteerders
het hierdie doelstellings nagestreef.
Pekrun (1993:166±175) onderskei tussen 'n verwagtingskomponent en
'n inspanningskomponent as deel van motivering. Wanneer 'n persoon
sekere uitkomste verwag, motiveer dit hom tot optrede (inspanning).
In 'n leersituasie toon Pekrun 'n korrelasie van 0,46 aan tussen die
verwagtingskomponent en inspanningskomponent van graad 8-leerders,
asook 'n korrelasie van 0,14 tussen die inspanningskomponent en
akademiese prestasie. 'n Ondersoek wat hierby aansluit, is die  van

172
Salili (1995:106±109) wat die verband tussen prestasiemotief, prestasiestrategie
en akademiese prestasie bepaal het. 'n Korrelasie van 0,47
is aangetoon tussen prestasiemotief en akademiese prestasie terwyl die
korrelasie tussen prestasiestrategie en akademiese prestasie 0,12 was.
Fortier, Vallerand en Guay (1995:257±274) het Deci en Ryan se
selfdetermineringsmodel gebruik om die verband tussen motivering en
prestasie te ondersoek. Prestasie in Geografie, Frans, Wiskunde en
Biologie is as kriteriumveranderlikes gebruik. Die korrelasie was in die
orde van 0,3 wat aandui dat sowat 9% van die variansie in prestasie
deur motivering verklaar kan word. Dit stem ooreen met 'n ondersoek
van Prus en Hatcher (1995:7±26) wat 'n korrelasie van 0,32 tussen
motivering en prestasie aangetoon het.
3.3 Belangstelling
Budhal (1993:94) toon 'n korrelasie van 0,35 (p

Die bepaling van 'n realistiese prestasievlak 173
4 STUDIEORIEÈ NTASIE
Thombs (1995:280±288) het eerstejaarstudente wat toelating gehad het,
vergelyk met die  wat as gevolg van akademiese redes voorwaardelik
toegelaat is. Benewens hoe È rskoolprestasie was studiemetodes die
vernaamstefaktorwatdietweegroepevanmekaaronderskeihet.
Wilhite (1990:696±700) het bevind dat studiemetodes 5% meer van die
variansie in prestasie verklaar wat nie alreeds deur geheue, lokus van
kontrole en selfkonsep verklaar is nie. In 'n soortgelyke ondersoek het
Elliott en Godshall (1990:203±207) bevind dat studiemetodes tussen 9%
en 11% van die variansie in prestasie verklaar wat nie alreeds deur
ander faktore soos geslag, aanleg en probleemoplossing verklaar is nie.
Prus en Hatcher (1995:7±26) het bevind dat studiemetodes op sigself
ongeveer 12% van die variansie in prestasie verklaar. Saam met ander
veranderlikes (onder andere intelligensie) kan dit slegs 5% meer van
die variansie in prestasie verklaar wat nie alreeds verklaar is nie. Uit
die ondersoek van Prus en ook die ander ondersoeke wat hier genoem
is, kan die afleiding gemaak word dat studieorie È ntasie 'n veranderlike
is wat prestasie kan beõ È nvloed alhoewel dit nie een van die vernaamste
veranderlikes blyk te wees nie. Dit kan egter nie geõ È gnoreer word nie
en behoort opgeneem te word as 'n veranderlike in 'n voorspellingsmodel.
Uit die voorafgaande kan afgelei word dat intelligensie, akademiese
selfkonsep, motivering, belangstelling en studieorie È ntasie belangrike
veranderlikes is wat met akademiese prestasie verband hou. Om vas te
stel watter proporsie van die variansie in prestasie deur die veranderlikes
verklaar word en watter instrumente gebruik kan word om
die veranderlikes mee te meet, is die volgende empiriese ondersoek
uitgevoer.

174
5 DIE NAVORSINGSONTWERP VAN DIE EMPIRIESE
ONDERSOEK
5.1 Steekproef
Daar is besluit om van graad 11-leerders gebruik te maak en wel om die
volgende redes:
. Gedurende graad 11 word prestasie vir die leerder toenemend
belangrik omdat hy/sy reeds in graad 11 begin
voorberei vir die matriekeindeksamen. Prestasie in graad 11
is ook belangrik omdat leerders reeds in graad 11 loopbaanbeplanning
begin doen. Punte wat in graad-11 behaal is,
word toenemend meer in aanmerking geneem vir toelating
tot tersie à re inrigtings, aansoeke vir beurse of vakatures.
. Sekere toetse wat vir beroepskeuse in graad 11 afgeneem
word (soos intelligensie- en aanlegtoetse), kan ook vir
prestasievoorspelling gebruik word wat die afneem daarvan
meer ekonomies maak.
. Graad 11 is die middelste van die drie senior sekonde à re
grade en deur graad 11-leerders te betrek kan met groter
sekerheid aanvaar word dat die leerders senior sekonde à re
status bereik het. Verder skep dit die moontlikheid om 'n
voorspellingsmodel vir die senior sekonde à re fase te ontwikkel.
'n Skool wat bereid was om aan die ondersoek deel te neem, is op
ewekansige wyse betrek. Hierdie skool bestaan uit leerders vanuit 'n
lae, 'n gemiddelde en 'n hoe È sosio-ekonomiese status. Die steekproef
het al die graad 11-leerders van die betrokke skool ingesluit. In totaal
was daar 124 leerders, 61 seuns en 63 dogters. Die gemiddelde
ouderdom was 16,9 met 'n standaardafwyking van 0,44.
5.2 Meetinstrumente
Intelligensie en aanleg
Die Senior Aanlegtoets (SAT) is gebruik om intelligensie en aanleg te
meet. Die toets is in 1978 hersien en word meestal gebruik om
intelligensie en aanleg in die senior sekonde à re fase te meet. In die

Die bepaling van 'n realistiese prestasievlak 175
ondersoek is die volgende tien subtoetse van die SAT gebruik (die
betroubaarheid van elk word in hakkies verskaf): Verbale begrip(0,71);
Berekeninge(0,91); Woordbou(0,76); Vergelyking(0,76); Patroonvoltooiing(0,81);
Figuurreekse(0,85); Ruimtelik 2±D(0,92); Ruimtelik 3±
D(0,85); Geheue vir paragrawe(0,76); Geheue vir simbole(0,84). Deur
middel van 'n kombinasie van subtoetse kan 'n Algemene Intelligensietelling
bereken word.
Selfkonsep en motivering
'n Toets wat deur Waetjen ontwikkel is genaamd ``Selfconcept as
learner scale'' is met toestemming van die outeur gebruik om
selfkonsep en motivering te meet. Die toets bestaan uit die volgende
vier afdelings, (vgl. Burns 1979:141): Motivering om te leer, Taakorie
È ntering, Probleemoplossing, Klaslidmaatskap en Selfkonsep in
geheel. Die betroubaarheid van elke afdeling is as volg: Motivering om
te leer(0,61); Taakorie È ntering(0,81); Probleemoplossing(0,73); Klaslidmaatskap(0,75)
en Selfkonsep in geheel(0,90).
Breinvoorkeur
Aangesien belangstelling op persoonlike voorkeur dui (Swanepoel
1986:20; Budhal 1993:11) is besluit om 'n breinvoorkeurtoets as 'n
belangstellingsindeks te gebruik. Hierdie toets is in 'n afsonderlike
ondersoek deur die navorser self ontwikkel. Vier breinkwadrante word
onderskei (Du Plessis 1994:214±228).
Kwadrant A:
Kwadrant B:
Kwadrant C:
Kwadrant D:
'n Persoon wat daaraan voorkeur gee om logies te
redeneer ± om korrekte afleidings uit gegewens te
maak.
'n Persoon wat daaraan voorkeur gee om by die
organisasie van mense of instansies betrokke te wees.
'n Persoon wat verkies om emosioneel by 'n saak
betrokke te raak.
'n Persoon wat graag sy verbeelding gebruik en
fantaseer.

176
Met die afneem van die toets word 'n telling vir elk van die kwadrante
verkry. Die toets is by 537 hoe È rskoolleerders afgeneem ten einde norme
en betroubaarhede te bereken. Die betroubaarheid van elke kwadrant
is as volg: A (0,83); B (0,78); C (0,91); D(0,83)
StudieorieÈntasie
Om 'n aanduiding van leerders se studieorie È ntasie te kry, is 'n
meetinstrument gebruik wat bekend staan as Opname van Studiegewoontes
en Houdings (OSGH). Vier subtoetse word in die toets
onderskei, naamlik:
Vermyding van uitstel:
Werkmetodes:
Onderwysergoedkeuring:
Aanvaarding van onderwys:
Dit dui aan in watter mate die leerder sy
take stiptelik afhandel en nie geneig is
tot onnodige tydverkwisting nie.
Dit gee 'n aanduiding van die leerder se
gebruik van doeltreffende studiemetodes.
Dit gee 'n aanduiding van die leerder se
houding teenoor die onderwyser.
Die subtoets meet 'n leerder se opvoedkundige
ideale en doelstellings
Studieorie È ntasie is die somtotaal van bogenoemde subtoetse.
Die betroubaarheid van elke subtoets is as volg: Vermyding van
uitstel(0,85); Werkmetodes(0,86); Onderwysergoedkeuring(0,87);
Aanvaarding van onderwys(0,86); Studieorie È ntasie(0,91).
Akademiese prestasie
Toetse om die voorspellingsveranderlikes te meet is gedurende Mei
afgeneem. Die gemiddelde prestasie wat in die Junie-eksamen behaal
is, is as kriteriumveranderlike gebruik.
5.3 Navorsingsprosedure
Die leerders het op een bepaalde dag al die toetse afgele à .Die

Die bepaling van 'n realistiese prestasievlak 177
aanlegtoets is vroegoggend afgeneem om moegheid te voorkom. Die
aanlegtoets (SAT) is streng volgens die voorgeskrewe prosedures
afgele à . Na 'n pouse van 20 minute is die Selfkonseptoets en die
Breinvoorkeurtoets afgeneem wat ongeveer 1 uur geduur het. Daarna
is 'n tweede pouse van 20 minute toegelaat. Na die tweede pouse is die
OSGH afgeneem.
Prestasietellings is na die Julie-vakansie (in Augustus) verkry. Al die
inligting van elke leerder is op kodeervelle aangebring waarna die
gegewens deur 'n rekenaar verwerk is.
6 RESULTATE VAN DIE EMPIRIESE ONDERSOEK
As nulhipotese is gestel dat daar geen beduidende korrelasie tussen die
gemete veranderlikes en akademiese prestasie bestaan nie. Ten einde die
gestelde nulhipotese te toets, is korrelasiekoe È ffisie È nte tussen die
voorspellingsveranderlikes en die gemiddelde prestasie van elke
leerder bereken. Hierdie korrelasiekoe È ffisie È nte verskyn in Tabel 1.
Behalwe vir die B- en C-kwadrant, kan die nulhipotese vir al die ander
veranderlikes verwerp word. Die veranderlike wat die sterkste
verbandmetprestasietoonisAlgemeneIntelligensie.Ditstrookmet
bevindinge van Brodnick en Ree (1995:583±594), Horn e.a (1993:464±
478) asook Gustafsson en Blake (1993:407±434). In die ondersoeke is
aangetoon dat Algemene Intelligensie die belangrikste voorspeller in
die meeste vakgebiede is en ongeveer 30% tot 33% van die variansie in
prestasie verklaar. In hierdie ondersoek verklaar Algemene Intelligensie
ongeveer 38% van die variansie in prestasie.
Naas Algemene Intelligensie toon Verbale begrip en Korttermyngeheue
ook 'n beduidende verband met prestasie. Die veranderlikes
verklaar onderskeidelik 31% en 25% van die variansie in prestasie.
Langtermyngeheue verklaar ongeveer 23% van die variansie in
prestasie.
Die affektiewe veranderlike wat die sterkste verband met prestasie
toon, is selfkonsep en dit verklaar ongeveer 20% van die variansie in
prestasie.

178
TABEL 1
Die verband tussen die voorspellingsveranderlikes en gemiddelde prestasie
Voorspellingsveranderlike
Korrelasie met prestasie en
gemiddelde prestasie
Intelligensie r = 0.62*
Verbale begrip r = 0,56*
Berekeninge r = 0,40*
Woordbou r = 0,46*
Vergelyking r = 0,26*
Patroonvoltooiing r = 0,46*
Figuurreekse r = 0,37*
Ruimtelik (2D) r = 0,36*
Ruimtelik (3D) r = 0,37*
Geheue (langtermyn) r = 0,48*
Geheue (korttermyn) r = 0,50*
A Kwadrant r = 0,37*
B Kwadrant r = 0,01
CKwadrant r = 70,11
DKwadrant r = 70,21**
Selfkonsep r = 0,45*
Studieorie È ntasie r = 0,40*
*p 5 0,01 **p 5 0,05
Om te bepaal hoe 'n kombinasie van veranderlikes saamgestel moet
word om die maksimum variansie in prestasie te verklaar, is 'n
regressie-analise uitgevoer. As voorspellingsveranderlikes is intelligensie,
aanleg, selfkonsep (waarby motivering ingesluit is), belangstelling
(breinvoorkeur), studieorie È ntasie en geslag (as biografiese
veranderlike) gebruik. Die kriteriumveranderlike was prestasie. In
totaal kon 64% van die variansie in gemiddelde prestasie verklaar
word waarvan Algemene Intelligensie, studieorie È ntasie en geslag 50%
verklaar het. 'n Verdere 10% is verklaar deur Breinvoorkeur (A),
Berekeninge en Korttermyngeheue. Die oorblywende veranderlikes het
'n addisionele 4% van die variansie in prestasie verklaar. (Sien tabel 2).

Die bepaling van 'n realistiese prestasievlak 179
TABEL 2
Verklaring vir die variansie in gemiddelde prestasie
Veranderlike R 2 F* gv
Algemene Intelligensie (IK) 0,38 68,12 (1,112)
Studieorie È ntasie (SO) 0,46 47,49 (2,111)
Geslag (G) 0,50 36,07 (3,110)
A-Kwadrant (A) 0,55 33,08 (4,109)
Berekeninge (R) 0,58 29,83 (5,108)
Korttermyngeheue (KG) 0,60 26,35 (6,107)
C-Kwadrant (C) 0,61 23,58 (7,106)
Patroonvoltooiing (P) 0,62 21,06 (8,105)
Selfkonsep (SK) 0,62 18,09 (9,104)
Vergelyking (V) 0,63 17,23 (10,103)
B-Kwadrant (B) 0,63 15,86 (11,102)
D-Kwadrant (D) 0,64 14,69 (12,101)
Ruimtelik ± 3D (RDDD) 0,64 13,62 (13,100)
Ruimtelik ± 2D (RDD) 0,64 12,61 (14,99)
* In al die gevalle is p 5 0,01
Die vernaamste twee veranderlikes wat 'n groot proporsie van die
variansie in prestasie verklaar, is Algemene Intelligensie en studieorie
È ntasie. Ander prominente veranderlikes is geslag en Breinvoorkeur-A.
Alhoewel akademiese selfkonsep as enkele faktor sterk met
prestasie verband gehou het, het dit in kombinasie met ander
veranderlikes nie 'n vername bydrae tot die verklaring van die
variansie in prestasie gelewer nie.

180
7 GEVOLGTREKKING EN AANBEVELINGS
Bloom (1976:171) noem dat kognitiewe en affektiewe faktore gesamentlik
ongeveer 64% van die variansie in prestasie kan verklaar. Dit is
inderdaad die persentasie wat in hierdie ondersoek aangetoon is.
Bloom (1976:169,174) beweer verder dat kwaliteit van onderrig (wat
nie in die ondersoek as veranderlike betrek is nie) 'n verdere 15% tot
25% van die variansie in prestasie kan verklaar wat nie alreeds deur
kognitiewe en affektiewe veranderlikes verklaar is nie. As dit in ag
geneem word, kan aanvaar word dat die veranderlikes wat in hierdie
ondersoek betrek is, saam met kwaliteit van onderrig, ten minste 80%
van die variansie in gemiddelde prestasie verklaar, wat dit 'n
aanvaarbare en bruikbare voorspellingsmodel maak.
'n Leerprobleem of enige ander probleem wat manifesteer as swak
prestasie, kan makliker geõ È dentifiseer en hanteer word indien 'n
realistiese, voorspelde punt tot die onderwyser se beskikking is. Indien
'n leerder byvoorbeeld 45% gemiddeld behaal, kan dit as laag (swak)
beskou word, maar indien sy voorspelde punt 50% is, word 'n punt van
45% anders beoordeel. Indien 'n leerder byvoorbeeld 55% gemiddeld
behaal terwyl sy voorspelde punt 72% is, is eersgenoemde punt
bepaald swak en moet daar na redes vir onderprestasie gesoek word.
Vanuit die literatuur en die empiriese gegewens het dit geblyk dat
swak prestasie met 'n swak selfbeeld en gebrekkige motivering
verband hou. Die een gee aanleiding tot die ander, wat 'n vernietigende
kringloop tot gevolg kan he à . 'n Realistiese voorspelde punt kan
die kringloop breek. 'n Leerder kan 'n swak selfbeeld ontwikkel omdat
hy/sy 53% in 'n vak behaal terwyl sy/haar eie verwagting, of die  van
die ouers of onderwysers 70% is. Indien 'n voorspelde punt van
byvoorbeeld 60% bereken word, is die werklike punt nog steeds laer,
maar die ideaal waarna gemik word is nou meer realisties en makliker
bereikbaar. Indien 'n gemiddelde punt van 60% wel bereik word, kan
dit positiewe affektiewe gevolge he à , wat nie daar sou wees indien 'n
onrealistiese punt van byvoorbeeld 70% aanhoudend, sonder welslae
nagestreef is nie.
Wat die voorspelling van punte betref, blyk dit dat Algemene

Die bepaling van 'n realistiese prestasievlak 181
Intelligensie, studieorie È ntasie en Breinvoorkeur-A van die vernaamste
veranderlikes is wat met prestasie verband hou. Die  bevindinge lig 'n
belangrike taak van die onderwyser uit. Daar kan op hoe È rskoolvlak
min gedoen word om 'n leerder se intelligensie en aanleg te verhoog,
maar heelwat kan gedoen word om studieorie È ntasie te verbeter. Die
onderwyser kan prestasie bevorder deur effektiewe studiemetodes aan
leerders oor te dra en studieprogramme vir individuele leerders te
ontwikkel.
Wat breinvoorkeur betref, moet aanvaar word dat nie alle persone
linkerbreingeorie È nteerd is nie, terwyl die meeste vakke op skool
linkerbreinaktiwiteite vereis. Om hierdie rede sal leerders wat
regterbreingeorie È nteerd is, baat vind by denkprogramme wat linkerbreinaktiwiteite
ontwikkel. Die ontwikkeling en aanbieding van sulke
programme word op grond van die resultate van hierdie ondersoek
sterk aanbeveel.
Ten slotte is dit belangrik om daarop te let dat probleme soos stres en
depressie by leerders ontstaan indien hoe È akademiese eise aan hulle
gestel word, hetsy deur hulleself of deur ouers en onderwysers. Sekere
leerders reageer aggressief op sulke eise wanneer hulle nie daaraan kan
voldoen nie. 'n Realistiese prestasievlak kan help om onrealistiese
oortuigings by leerders, ouers en onderwysers bloot te le à . In sekere
gevalle ontstaan gedragsprobleme wanneer leerders daarvan oortuig is
dat hulle no  o  it sukses sal behaal nie. Vir sulke leerders is sukses
dikwels 'n onrealistiese punt (soos 80%) wat hulle weliswaar nie kan
bereik nie en dit versterk hulle oortuiging. 'n Realistiese doelstelling
kan in die opsig help om 'n onrealistiese oortuiging te weerle à . Wanneer
'n realistiese voorspelde punt met 'n leerder bespreek word, is dit
belangrik om die leerder daarop te wys dat die  punt op grond van sy
spesifieke kognitiewe en affektiewe eienskappe bereken is en daarom
binne sy bereik is. Dieselfde boodskap moet ook waar nodig aan
vakonderwysers en ouers oorgedra word sodat hulle realistiese
verwagtings sal koester.
SUMMARY
The aim of education is to lead a person to self-actualisation or stated

182
differently, to help him to develop his/her full potential. This aim,
which is also applicable to a learning situation, is difficult to attain if a
learner is unaware or unrealistic about his/her potential. Such a
learner will benefit from an educational programme in which realistic
achievement levels are determined. In order to develop such a
programme a teacher should know which variables relate to academic
achievement and with which instruments these variables should be
measured.
From the literature study three possible categories of variables might
relate to academic achievement, namely:
cognitive variables such as intelligence and aptitude;
affective variables such as motivation, academic self-concept and interest
(brain preference) and
study orientation.
To determine which variables account for the largest proportion of the
variance in achievement, an empirical investigation was carried out. A
sample of 124 grade 11-learners (61 boys and 63 girls) was used in the
investigation. General Intelligence, Aptitude, Academic Self-concept,
Motivation, Interest (brain-preference) and Study-orientation were
used as prediction variables. Achievement was used as the criterion
variable. In total 64% of the variance in achievement could be
accounted for by the prediction variables of which General Intelligence,
Study-orientation and Gender accounted for 50%. A further 10%
was accounted for by Brain-preference (A), Calculations and Shortterm
Memory. The remaining variables accounted for an additional 4%
of the variance in achievement.
The most important educational implication of developing a model to
predict achievement lies in the identification of possible learning
problems. Once a realistic mark is available, a teacher is in a better
position to judge current achievement. If a learner obtains a mark of
55% while the predicted mark is 72%, the obtained mark is low and

Die bepaling van 'n realistiese prestasievlak 183
under achievement might be present. However, if a learner obtains a
mark of 45%, it can be considered a low mark, but if the predicted mark
is 50% a mark of 45% seems realistic and is therefore interpreted
differently. This different interpretation places less pressure on the
child to obtain a level of achievement far beyond his/her reach which
will cause less stress and the development of a low self-concept.
BIBLIOGRAFIE
Ames, C 1992. Classrooms: Goals, Structures, and Student Motivation. Journal of
Educational Psychology, 84:261±271.
Athanasou, J A 1994. Some Effects of Career Interests, Subject Preferences and Quality of
Teaching on the Educational Achievement of Australian Technical and Futher
Students. Journal of Vocational Educational Research, 19:23±38.
Bloom, B S 1976. Human characteristics and school learning. New York: McGraw-Hill.
Brodnick, RJ & Ree, MJ 1995. A structural model of academic performance, socioeconomic
status, and Spearman's g. Educational and Psychological Measurement, 55:583±594.
Brown, N W 1994. Cognitive, Interest, and Personality Variables Predicting First-
Semester GPA. Psychological Reports, 74:605±606.
Budhal, R S 1993. The development of interest in mathematics with reference to secondary school
pupils. Ongepubliseerde MEd-proefskrif. Pretoria: Universiteit van Suid-Afrika.
Burns, R B 1979. The Self Concept. Theory, measurement, development and behaviour. New
York: Longman.
Byrne, B M 1996. Academic Self-Concept: Its Structure, Measurement, and Relation to
Academic Achievement. (In Bracken, BA 1996. Handbook of self-concept: Development,
social and clinical considerations. New York: John Wiley.)
Corey, D 1996. Theory and Practice of Counseling and Psychotherapy. New York: Brooks/
Cole.
Du Plessis, Y L 1994. Brain Dominance of the Adolescent. Ongepubliseerde DEd-proefskrif.
Port Elizabeth: Universiteit van Port Elizabeth.
Elliott, T R; Godshall, F, ea 1990. Problem-solving Appraisal, Self-reported Study Habits,
and Performance of Academically At-risk College Students. Journal of Counseling
Psychology, 37:203±207.
Fortier, M S; Vallerand, R J & Guay, F 1995. Academic Motivation and School
Performance: Towards a Stuctural Model. Contemporary Educational Psychology,
20:257±274.
Gustafsson, J & Blake, G 1993. General and specific abilities as predictors of school
achievement. Multivariate Behavioral Research, 28:407±434.

184
Horn, C; Bruning, R, ea 1993. Paths to success in the college classroom. Contemporary
Educational Psychology, 18:464±478.
Monteith, J L de K 1987. Die Identifisering van Veranderlikes wat die Akademiese Prestasie van
Dogters Beõ È nvloed. Gepubliseerde verslag. Potchefstroom: Potchefstroomse Universiteit
vir Christelike Hoe È r Onderwys.
Pekrun, R H 1993. Facets of Adolescents' Academic Motivation: A Longitudinal Expectancy-
Value Approach. (In Maehr, ML & Pintrich, PR 1993. Advances in Motivation and
Achievement. London: JAI)
Prus, J & Hatcher, L 1995. The Learning and Study Strategies Inventory as a Predictor of
First-Year College Academic Success. Journal of the Freshman Year Experience, 7:7±
26.
Salili, F 1995. Explaining Chinese Students' Motivation and Achievement: A Sociocultural
Analysis. (In Maehr, ML & Pintrich, PR 1995. Advances in Motivation and
Achievement. London: JAI)
Schiefele, U & Csikszentmihalyi, M 1994. Interest and the Quality of Experience in
Classrooms. EuropeanJournalofPsychologyofEducation,9:251±270.
Swanepoel, C H 1986. Die aard en meting van standerd 7-leerlinge se belangstelling in die
natuurwetenskaplike studierigting. Ongepubliseerde DEd-proefskrif. Pretoria: Universiteit
van Suid-Afrika.
Thombs, D L 1995. Problem behavior and Academic Achievement among First-Semester
College Freshmen. Journal of College Student Development, 36:280±288.
Van der Lith, J M 1991. Die invloed van kognitiewe en affektiewe toetredingseienskappe
vanleerlingeophulleprestasiesindieskoolmilieu.Education Bulletin, 35:74±81.
Wilhite, S C 1990. Self-Efficacy, Locus of Control, Self-Assessment of Memory Ability,
and Study Activities as Predictors of College Course Achievement. Journal of
Educational Psychology 82:696±700.
Wentzel, K R 1991. Social and Academic Goals at School: Motivation and Achievement in
Context. (In Maehr, M L & Pintrich, P R 1991. Advances in Motivation and
Achievement. London: JAI).

Sportsielkunde as komponent in die opleidingsprogram van vakonderwysers 185
Sportsielkunde as
komponent in die
opleidingsprogram
van vakonderwysers
Prof JG le Roux
Dr GE Pienaar
Departement Opvoedkundestudies
Unisa
In the Republic of South Africa (RSA), most of the subject teachers in our schools are
involved with the coaching of sport, sometimes against their will. The training
programmes of these teachers do not really provide for the inclusion of sport psychology.
In fact, a survey at universities and teachers colleges all over the country revealed that
only two of these institutions offer sport psychology as a subject to their subject
teachers. Enquiries at schools in the RSA indicated that subject teachers, involved as
sport coaches, experience frustrations because of their lack of ability with regard to inter
alia the following:
. motivation of their athletes
. dealing with anxiety, conflicts and crises in sport
. the application of concentration and relaxation techniques.
These frustrations lead to a deterioration in relationships between coaches and athletes
and eventually affect sport achievements negatively. This investigation clearly indicates
that a very low percentage of subject teachers in the RSA know anything about sport
psychology, but the majority involved in the investigation are of the opinion that sport
psychology should be included in the training programme of subject teachers.

186
1 INLEIDING EN PROBLEEMSTELLING
Sportsielkunde het hoofsaaklik ontstaan uit organisasies, skrywes en
instellings wat na die Tweede We à reldoorlog gevestig is, en dit is
verder ontwikkel deur internasionale en nasionale organisasies wat
hulle oorsprong in die sestigerjare gehad het (Cratty 1983:23).
Sportsielkunde het noue bande met ander sub-areas van sport en
bewegingskunde. Dit sluit onder andere die volgende in (Gill 1986:4):
. bewegingsfisiologie ± hou verband met anatomie en fisiologie
. biomeganika ± pas die beginsels en kennis van fisika toe op
die meganika van menslike beweging
. sportsosiologie ± ondersoek die sosiologiese dimensies van
sport
Omdat sportsielkunde deel is van die multi-dissipline à re veld van sport
en oefening, deel dit in die teoriee È , konstrukte en metings van die
ander sportwetenskappe asook van sielkunde in die algemeen.
Nideffer (in Silva en Weinberg 1984:41) onderskei dan ook tussen die
kliniese sportsielkundige, die opvoedkundige sportsielkundige en die
navorsingsportsielkundige. Volgens Williams en Straub (in Williams
1993:9) is sportsielkunde ± as die jongste van die sportwetenskappe ±
gemoeid met die psigologiese faktore wat deelname aan sport en
oefening beõ È nvloed en met die psigologiese effekte wat voortvloei uit
hierdie sportdeelname. Silva en Weinberg (red) (1984:6) sluit mooi
hierby aan deur te beweer dat ``... audience effects, anxiety, motivation,
group dynamics, personality, confidence, and concentration are all psychological
factors affecting the performer, whereas participation in physical
activity can affect the performer in terms of anxiety reduction, personality
development, aggressive behavior, and the enhancement of well-being''. Daar
is dus 'n voortdurende, wederkerige proses tussen die deelnemer en sy
sportaktiwiteite aan die gang.
Volgens Gill (1986:3) is sportsielkunde 'n vertakking van sport ± en
bewegingskunde (exercise science) ``... that seeks to provide answers to
questions about human behavior in sport''. Sy praat ook van ``... the

Sportsielkunde as komponent in die opleidingsprogram van vakonderwysers 187
scientific study of human behavior in sport'' (p 6). Volgens haar sluit die
term sportsielkunde nie alle aspekte van sielkunde in nie (alhoewel die
term dit impliseer) en behoort slegs gekonsentreer te word op
persoonlikheids- en sosiale sielkunde (social psychology) (p 7). Soos
sosiale sielkunde, fokus sportsielkunde op betekenisvolle sosiale
gedrag, eerder as op afdelings van gedrag (portions of behavior). Dus,
die term sportsielkunde ``... should be interpreted as referring to the
influence of personality and social factors on meaningful behavior in a
variety of sport and exercise settings'' (Gill 1986:7). Sportsielkunde is
egter nie onverbiddelik beperk tot persoonlikheids- en sosiale sielkunde
nie, maar spreek ook ander aspekte van die sielkunde aan soos
ontwikkelingsielkunde, kognitiewe sielkunde en fisiologiese sielkunde.
Samevattend kan die terrein van die sportsielkunde soos volg omskryf
word:
. Sportsielkunde as wetenskap is gemoeid met die identifisering
en omskrywing van daardie aspekte wat die sportprestasies
sowel as die gedrag van atlete kan beõ È nvloed. Van
hierdie aspekte is motivering, persoonlikheid, toeskouergedrag,
aktivering (arousal), kompetisie en kompetisie-angs,
aggressie, teruvoering en nog vele meer. Dit sal veral op die
terrein van die navorsingsportsielkundige le à .
. Die invloed van bogenoemde aspekte op die prestasies van
atlete word deur die sportsielkundige ondersoek, sowel as
die invloed van sportdeelname op die gedrag van atlete,
byvoorbeeld angs kan veroorsaak dat die atleet gespanne
raak en swak presteer op sport- sowel as akademiese gebied,
maar sportdeelname of oefening kan weer tot verminderde
angs lei. Dit sal veral die sosiale sportsielkundige wees wat
hierin belangstel.
. Metodes en strategiee È moet gevind word om bogenoemde
aspekte met sukses toe te pas, met ander woorde die afrigter
moet weet, of bewus gemaak word hoe om sy/haar atlete

188
optimaal te motiveer, of hoe om hulle teenoor die intimidering
van opponente en toeskouers voor te berei. Dit sal
veral die toegepaste sportsielkunde se funksie wees om hier 'n
bydrae te lewer.
. Situasies kan ontstaan wat nie deur die afrigter hanteer kan
word nie, byvoorbeeld atlete raak buitengewoon depressief,
of ly aan die uitbrandingsindroom, of raak verslaaf aan
verdowingsmiddels en opkikkers ensovoorts. Dan moet die
atleet na 'n deskundige verwys word en sal dit veral die
opvoedkundige sportsielkundige en die kliniese sportsielkundige
se taak wees om in te gryp.
Sportsielkunde speel 'n al groterwordende rol in die we à reld van sport.
Dit geld veral in lande soos die Verenigde State van Amerika (VSA),
Europa en Australie È (Salmela 1991; Williams 1993; Kremer & Scully
1994). In Suid-Afrika geniet sport hoe È aansien. Vir sy relatief klein
populasie presteer Suid-Afrikaanse atlete we à reldwyd op verskeie
gebiede. Koerante verwys na Suid-Afrikaners as ``sportmal''. Ook in
ons skole word sport baie beklemtoon. Sportuitslae geniet soms meer
aandag as akademiese resultate, veral in sportsoorte soos rugby, netbal
en atletiek. Dis nie meer onbekend nie dat sportsterre deur skole gelok
word met spesiale aanbiedinge. Geld en moeite word nie ontsien om
sport in ons skole te bevorder nie (Le Roux 1999). Sportsielkunde kry
egter nog nie die erkenning in Suid-Afrika wat dit toekom nie. Daar
kleef nog 'n stigma aan die term ``sportsielkundige''. Afrigters en
spelers/atlete re en dat hulle `'normaal'' is en nie die hulp van 'n
sielkundige benodig nie. Gelukkig is die situasie besig om te verander
en hoor en lees 'n mens al meer van Suid-Afrikaanse sportspanne wat
van die bystand en ondersteuning van sportsielkundiges gebruik
maak.
Sportafrigting in Suid-Afrikaanse skole word oorwegend deur vakonderwysers
waargeneem. Enkele van die groter en meer gegoede skole
maak van die dienste van private of professionele afrigters gebruik,
maar dan ook net vir sekere sportsoorte. Die oorgrote meerderheid

Sportsielkunde as komponent in die opleidingsprogram van vakonderwysers 189
skole steun op hulle vakonderwysers om sportafrigting te behartig.
Sportafrigting is daarom gewoonlik een van die aanstellingsvoorwaardes
van vakonderwysers. Baie vakonderwysers raak dus by die
afrigting van sport betrokke, of hulle daarvan hou of nie.
Die opleidingsprogram van vakonderwysers in Suid-Afrika maak baie
min voorsiening vir sportsielkunde. 'n Steekproef by universiteite en
onderwyskolleges regoor die land het getoon dat slegs twee van
hierdie inrigtings wel sportsielkunde aan die vakonderwyser bied.
Meer van hierdie inrigtings bied wel 'n kursus of kursusse in
sportsielkunde vir ingeskrewe menslikebewegingskundestudente aan,
maar nie vir ingeskrewe vakonderwysers nie.
'n Besoek aan die VSA het ook getoon dat onderwysers daar nie
spesifiek opleiding in sportsielkunde ontvang nie. Die neiging is eerder
om kursusse in sportsielkunde by te woon en so hulself te bekwaam.
Navraag by skole in die RSA het getoon dat vakonderwysers soms
heelwat frustrasies as sportafrigters beleef, byvoorbeeld:
. Hulle weet nie altyd hoe om hulle atlete of spanne behoorlik
te motiveer nie. Hiervan getuig sportleerlinge self.
. Hulleweetniealtydhoeomhullesportleerlingeteaktiveer
(``psych up'') vir bepaalde byeenkomste nie. Sportleerlinge
bereik hul psigiese hoogtepunte te vroeg of te laat.
. Vakonderwysers beskik nie altyd oor die nodige kennis om
bepaalde fokus- en ontspanningstegnieke op hulle sportleerlingetoetepasnie.Hulleweetookniehoeomhulle
sportleerlinge voor te berei om die intimiderende gedrag van
toeskouers en opponente te hanteer nie.
. Aspekte soos aggressie in sport, krisis- en konflikhantering
binne sportverband, die uitbrandingsindroom binne sportverband,
angs (``choking'') in sport en vele ander sake wat
verband hou met die sportsielkunde en wat 'n dinamiese rol
speel in die sportdeelname van leerlinge, word deur onderwysers
as afrigters nagelaat, juis omdat hulle nie hierin enige
opleiding ontvang het nie.

190
Die gevolge van 'n sportonderwyser se gebrekkige opleiding in
sportsielkunde hou vele implikasies in:
. Verkeerde motiveringstegnieke versuur die verhouding
tussen afrigter en sportleerling. Leerlinge weier soms om aan
sport deel te neem, juis as gevolg van die kwetsende en
dreigende opmerkings wat deur onderwysers as
motiveringstegnieke ingespan word.
. Gebrekkige kennis in ontspannings- en fokustegnieke beteken
dat sportleerlinge nie optimaal presteer nie. Onvermoe È
deur sportleerlinge om angs (``choking'') en aggressie te
hanteer, het dieselfde gevolge.
. Waar sportleerlinge nie geleer word om die intimiderende
gedrag van toeskouers en opponente te hanteer nie, kan
spelpatrone en algemene deelname aan sport grootliks ontwrig
word.
Samevattend kan gese à word dat, indien die vakonderwyser wat as
sportafrigter optree, nie oor die nodige kennis beskik om bepaalde
aspekte van die sportsielkunde in sy afrigtingstegnieke toe te pas nie,
dit uiteindelik die sportleerling is wat daaronder gaan ly. Inderwaarheid
se à Evans ( in Morris & Summers 1995:520) dat afrigters wat nie in
hul afrigting aan die behoefte van kinders voldoen nie, ``... may well
deter children from further sport participation because of their lack of
knowledge and insensitivity to problems''. Dit noodsaak 'n ondersoek na
die moontlikheid en noodsaaklikheid om sportsielkunde ingesluit te
kry in die akademiese opleidingspakket van die vakonderwyser.
Uit die voorafgaande bespreking blyk dit duidelik dat 'n sportafrigter
nie sy/haar taak na behore kan verrig nie, tensy die persoon in staat is
om bepaalde aspekte van die sportsielkunde binne sy/haar afrigtingsprogram
te kan toepas. Opleiding in sportsielkunde blyk dus van
essensie È le belang te wees vir die persoon wat belangstel of verplig is
om as sportafrigter op te tree. Vakonderwysers wat as sportafrigters
moet of wil optree, ondergaan nie altyd die nodige opleiding in

Sportsielkunde as komponent in die opleidingsprogram van vakonderwysers 191
sportsielkunde nie, en daarom kan die probleem onder bespreking as
volg geformuleer word: Hoe groot is die noodsaaklikheid en wat is die
moontlikheid dat sportsielkunde ingesluit word in die opleidingspro-
gram van vakonderwysers?
2 EMPIRIESE ONDERSOEK
Die volgende stappe is geneem ten einde die empiriese ondersoek
suksesvol uit te voer:
. Die ontwerp en samestelling van 'n vraelys (Afrikaans en
Engels)
. Die seleksie van proefpersone
. Die toepassing van die vraelys op die gekose persone
. Die verwerking en bespreking van die resultate
3 DIE ONTWERP EN SAMESTELLING VAN DIE
VRAELYS
Die doel van die vraelys was:
. Om ondersoek in te stel na die huidige toedrag van sake in
die RSA met betrekking tot die opleiding van vakonderwysers
as sportafrigters, gesien in die lig van die feit dat die
meeste vakonderwysers by sportafrigting in ons skole
betrokke raak. Daar is spesifiek vasgestel hoeveel opleiding
vakonderwysers in sportsielkunde ontvang en op welke
wyse.
. Om vas te stel hoe belangrik vakonderwysers die insluiting
van sportsielkunde in die opleidingsprogram van onderwysers
ag.
. Om vas te stel watter aspekte van sportsielkunde ingesluit
behoort te word in die opleidingsprogram van vakonderwysers.
. Om vas te stel of vakonderwysers van mening is dat, indien
sportsielkunde deel uitmaak van die opleidingsprogram van
vakonderwysers, dit 'n driemaandelikse, halfjaarlikse of 'n
jaarkursus moet wees.

192
4 SELEKSIE VAN DIE PROEFPERSONE
Altesaam 7 hoe È r- en 3 laerskole is op ewekansige wyse uit die Pretoriaomgewing
(insluitende Mamelodi) geselekteer (Mulder 1989:57). Elke
skool is versoek dat alle vakonderwysers wat sport afrig, die vraelys
voltooi.
5 TOEPASSING VAN DIE VRAELYS
Die vraelys is na die geselekteerde skole geneem en met behulp van die
skoolhoofde is geree È l dat dit afgeneem word. Die sportorganiseerders
was gewoonlik uiters behulpsaam. Die vraelys is ingeneem en
gekontroleer vir enige weglatings of onleesbaarheid van die gegewens.
Besonderhede van die proefpersone verskyn in tabelle 1 en 2.
TABEL 1
Verdeling van ondersoekgroep volgens skooltipe en geslag
Skole
Mans
Vroue
Totaal
Hoe È rskool 38 55 93
Laerskool 13 28 41
Totaal 51 83 134
TABEL 2
Verdeling van ondersoekgroep volgens jare diens
Aantal jare diens
Skole
0±5 jr 6±10jr
11±15jr
16±20jr
21±30jr
430jr
Totaal
Hoe È r 16 30 25 15 6 1 933
Laer 3 14 12 3 7 2 41
Totaal 19 44 37 18 13 3 134

Sportsielkunde as komponent in die opleidingsprogram van vakonderwysers 193
6 DIE VERWERKING VAN DATA EN BESPREKING VAN
DIE RESULTATE
Die inligting van die vraelys is hierna statisties verwerk deur gebruik te
maak van die SAS-rekenaarpakket. Die volgende resultate is verkry:
6.1 Item 4 van die vraelys
Die proefpersone moes aandui of hulle opleiding in sportafrigting
ondergaan het of nie. Die resultate verskyn in tabel 3.
TABEL 3
Opleiding in sportafrigting
Geslag
Ja
Nee
Totaal
Mans 45 66 51
Vroue 65 18 83
Totaal 110 24 134
Volgens tabel 3 het 82,09% (110/134) van die vakonderwysers wat
sport afrig, opleiding in die afrigting van sport ontvang, met ander
woordehulleisgeleerhoeomdiespiesvastehouentewerp,of
byvoorbeeld hoe om die diskus te gooi of hoe om die korrekte
hoogspringtegniek toe te pas. Van die mans het 88,24% (45/51) en van
die vroue 78,36% (65/83) opleiding in sportafrigting ontvang.
6.2 Item 5 van die vraelys
Die respondente moes aandui waar hulle sportafrigting ontvang het
byvoorbeeld aan 'n kollege of universiteit of deur middel van kursusse
ensovoorts. Die resultate verskyn in tabel 4.

194
TABEL 4
Lokaliteit van sportafrigting
Instansie
Aantal %
Onderwyskollege 8 7.3%
Technikon 2 1.8%
Universiteit 13 11.8%
Kursusse 40 36.4%
Kombinasie van bogenoemde 42 38.2%
Ander 5 4.5%
Totaal 110 100.0%
Volgens tabel 4 is dit duidelik dat die meeste onderwysers hul
opleiding in sportafrigting deur middel van kursusse ontvang het, wat
'n verdere aanduiding is tot watter mate sportafrigting vir onderwysers
aan ons tersie à re inrigtings afgeskeep word.
6.3 Item 6 van die vraelys
Die proefpersone moes aandui of hulle opleiding in sportsielkunde
ontvang het. Die resultate verskyn in tabel 5.
TABEL 5
Opleiding in sportsielkunde
Geslag
Ja
Nee
Totaal
Mans 7 44 51
Vroue 15 68 83
Totaal 22 112 134
Volgens tabel 5 het 83,58% (112/134) van die vakonderwysers wat
sport afrig, geen opleiding in sportsielkunde ontvang nie. Van die
mans het 86,27% (44/51) en van die vroue het 81,93% (68/83) geen
opleiding in sportsielkunde ontvang nie.

Sportsielkunde as komponent in die opleidingsprogram van vakonderwysers 195
'n Verdere statistiese ontleding is gedoen om vas te stel hoeveel van die
proefpersone opleiding in sowel sportafrigting as sportsielkunde
ontvang het. Die resultate verskyn in tabel 6.
TABEL 6
Opleiding in sowel sportsielkunde as sportafrigting
Opleiding in sportsielkunde
Opleiding in sportafrigting
Ja
Nee
Totaal
Ja 20 90 110
Nee 2 22 24
Totaal 22 112 134
Volgens tabel 6 het slegs 14,93% (20/134) van die vakonderwysers
opleiding in sowel sportafrigting as sportsielkunde ontvang en 16,42%
(22/134) het nie opleiding in o  fsportafrigtingo  f sportsielkunde
ontvang nie. Slegs 2 persone (1,49%) het nie opleiding in sportafrigting
ontvang nie maar wel in sportsielkunde. Die meeste vakonderwysers
naamlik 67,16% (90/134) het opleiding in sportafrigting ontvang, maar
nie in sportsielkunde nie.
6.4 Item 7 van die vraelys
Die respondente moes aandui waar hulle opleiding in sportsielkunde
ontvang het. Die resultate verskyn in tabel 7.
TABEL 7
Lokaliteit van opleiding in sportsielkunde
Instituut
Aantal %
Universiteit 13 59.1%
Kursusse 4 18.2%
Kombinasie van bogenoemde 5 22.7%
Totaal 22 100.0%

196
Volgens tabel 7 het die meeste onderwysers hulle opleiding in
sportsielkunde aan 'n universiteit behaal.
6.5 Item 8 van die vraelys
Die proefpersone moes op 'n skaal van 1 tot 6 aandui tot watter mate
hulle hul sportafrigting geniet. Sleutel: 1 = geniet dit glad nie; 6 =
geniet dit baie. Die resultate verskyn in tabel 8.
TABEL 8
Belewenis van sportafrigting
N x}} s
133 4,92 1,32
x}} = Die gemiddelde telling wat uit 'n maksimum van 6 behaal is.
Volgens tabel 8 geniet onderwysers dit tot 'n groot mate om sport af te
rig. Van die belangrikste redes wat genoem is, is dat dit hulle nader aan
die atlete bring, dat hulle die atlete op 'n ander vlak leer ken en dat
hulle self lief is vir sport.
6.6 Item 9 van die vraelys
Die proefpersone moes op 'n skaal van 1 tot 10 aandui hoe belangrik ag
hulle bepaalde aspekte van sportsielkunde om ingesluit te word in die
opleidingspakket van vakonderwysers. Altesaam 34 veranderlikes is in
die vraelys ingesluit (Roberts 1992; Coakley 1994; Weinberg & Gould
1995; Butler 1996) (Kyk tabel 9).

Sportsielkunde as komponent in die opleidingsprogram van vakonderwysers 197
TABEL 9
Belangrikheid die verskillende aspekte van sportsielkunde
Veranderlikes
Gemid.(x}})
Standaard-
afw.(s)
V 9 = Hantering van konflik 8.87 1.67
V 10 = Motivering 9.44 1.28
V 11 = Doelwitstelling 9.10 1.60
V 12 = Konsentrasie 9.12 1.51
V 13 = Aggressie 7.60 2.37
V 14 = Angs 7.48 2.56
V 15 = Spanbou 9.09 1.42
V 16 = Kompetisie 8.22 2.00
V 17 = Toeskouergedrag 7.57 2.29
V 18 = Wen versus sukses 8.51 1.90
V 19 = Selfvertroue 9.35 1.35
V 20 = Onderprestasie 7.82 2.32
V 21 = Leierskap 8.53 1.88
V 22 = Uitbranding 7.60 2.17
V 23 = Aktivering (arousal) 7.57 2.18
V 24 = Perfeksionisme versus voortreflikheid
7.91 1.94
V 25 = Kognitief-geestelike taaiheid 8.83 1.62
V 26 = Kinders in sport 8.32 1.95
V 27 = Besluitneming in sport 8.50 1.70
V 28 = Kommunikasie 8.91 1.54
V 29 = Ontspanningstegnieke 8.53 1.83
V 30 = Visualisering (beelding) 8.01
V 31 = Persoonlikheid 8.17 2.14
V 32 = Selfkennis 8.69 2.06
V 33 = Krisishantering in sport 8.59 1.66
V 34 = Wen versus verloor 8.51 1.97
V = Veranderlike
x} = Die gemiddelde telling behaal uit 'n maksimum van 10
N=134

198
Volgens tabel 9 reken vakonderwysers wat sport afrig (mans en vroue)
dat die volgende aspekte die belangrikste is wat ingesluit behoort te
word in die akademiese opleidingsprogram van onderwysers
(x} 4 9,0): (LW: Die waarde 4 9,0 is as afsnypunt gekies omdat dit die
seleksie van belangrike aspekte vergemaklik. Indien bv 4 8,0 as
afsnypunt gekies word, sou daar doodeenvoudig te veel aspekte
ingesluit word om sinvolle afleidings te kan maak. Verder, die
belangrikheid van die verskillende aspekte word bepaal volgens
verskille in rekenkundige gemiddeldes, maar die verskille is nie
noodwendig statisties betekenisvol nie).
V 10 = Motivering; V 19 = Selfvertroue; V 12 = Konsentrasie;
V11=Doelwitstelling;V15=Spanbou
Dieenkelemeesbelangrikeaspekismotiveringmotivering (V 10; x} = 9,44). Die
aspek wat die mins belangrike geag word, is angs in sport (V 14;
x} = 7,48).
Vervolgens is vasgestel tot watter mate mans- en vroueonderwysers
afsonderlik die belangrikheid van sportsielkunde, as deel van die
opleidingsprogram van vakonderwysers, beoordeel (Tabelle is nie
ingesluit nie om ruimte te bespaar).
Mansonderwysers se beoordeling van die belangrikheid van sport-
sielkundige aspekte (N = 51):
Mansonderwysers beskou die volgende aspekte van sportsielkunde as
die mees belangrike om ingesluit te word in die opleidingsprogram
van vakonderwysers (x} 4 9,0):
V 10 = Motivering; V 19 = Selfvertroue; V 11 = Doelwitstelling;
V 12 = Konsentrasie; V 15 = Spanbou; V 25 = Kognitief-geestelike
taaiheid; V 28 = Kommunikasie in sport
Die enkele mees belangrike aspek om ingesluit te word (volgens
mansonderwysers) is motivering (V 10; x} =9,77)endieminsbelangrike
is angs in sport (V 14; x} = 7,19).

Sportsielkunde as komponent in die opleidingsprogram van vakonderwysers 199
Vroueonderwysers se beoordeling van die belangrikheid van sport-
sielkundige aspekte (N = 82):
Vroueonderwysers wat sport afrig, beskou die volgende aspekte van
sportsielkunde as die mees belangrike om ingesluit te word in die
opleidingspakket van vakonderwysers (x} 4 9,0):
V 10 = Motivering; V 19 = Selfvertroue
Weereens, die enkele mees belangrike aspek (volgens vroueonderwysers)
is motivering (V 10; x} = 9,24) en die mins belangrike aspek is
toeskouergedrag (V 17; x} = 7,43).
Daar is ook bepaal op welke wyse hoe È r- en laerskoolonderwysers
afsonderlik die belangrikheid van die verskillende sportsielkundige
aspekte, as deel van die opleidingspakket van vakonderwysers,
beoordeel. Die resultate verskil min en lyk soos volg (tabelle uitgelaat):
Hoe È rskoolonderwysers: Hulle beskou die volgende aspekte as die
mees belangrike (x} 4 9,0):
V 10 = Motivering; V 19 = Selfvertroue; V 11 = Doelwitstelling;
V 12 = Konsentrasie; V 15 = Spanbou
Die enkele aspek wat hulle die mees belangrike ag is motivering (V 10;
x} = 9,58) en die mins belangrike is toeskouergedrag (V 17; x} = 7,26).
Laerskoolonderwysers: Hulle beskou die volgende aspekte as die mees
belangrike
(x} 4 9,0):
V 19 = Selfvertroue; V 12 = Konsentrasie; V 15 = Spanbou;
V 10 = Motivering; V 28 = Kommunikasie
Die enkele aspekte wat hulle die mees belangrike ag is konsentrasie en
selfvertroue (V 12 en V 19; x} = 9,23) en die mins belangrike is
onderprestasie (V 20; x} = 6,71).

200
Ten slotte is ondersoek ingestel na die wyse waarop vakonderwysers
wat opleiding in sportafrigting ontvang het en die  wat nie opleiding
ontvang het nie, die verskillende aspekte van sportsielkunde beoordeel
as van belang om ingesluit te word in die opleidingsprogram van
vakonderwysers.
Vakonderwysers wat opleiding in sportafrigting ontvang het
(N = 110):
Hierdie onderwysers beskou die volgende aspekte as van essensie È le
belang om ingesluit te word in die opleidingspakket van vakonderwysers
(x} 4 9,0):
V 10 = Motivering; V 19 = Selfvertroue; V 11 = Doelwitstelling;
V 15 = Spanbou; V 12 = Konsentrasie
Die enkele mees belangrike aspek is motivering (V 10; x} = 9,50) en die
mins belangrike aspek is angs in sport (V 14; x} = 7,59).
Vakonderwysers wat nie opleiding in sportafrigting ontvang het nie
(N = 24):
Hierdie onderwysers beskou die volgende aspekte as van essensie È le
belang om ingesluit te word in die opleidingspakket van vakonderwysers
(x} 4 9,0):
V10 = Motivering; V 19 = Selfvertroue
Die mees belangrike aspekte is motivering en selfvertroue (V 10 en
V19; x} =9,17)endieminsbelangrikeaspekteisangsangs in sport en
aggressie in sport (V 13 en V 14; x} = 6,74).
6.7 Item 10 van die vraelys
Die respondente moes aandui of hulle sou belangstel om 'n sertifikaat/
diploma in sportsielkunde te verwerf. Die resultate verskyn in tabel 10.

Sportsielkunde as komponent in die opleidingsprogram van vakonderwysers 201
TABEL 10
Belangstelling om 'n diploma/sertifikaat in sportsielkunde te verwerf
Stel belang in diploma
Opleiding in
sportafrigting
Ja
Nee
Totaal
Ja 77 33 110
Nee 12 12 24
Totaal 89 44 134
Volgens tabel 10 stel 70% (77/110) van vakonderwysers wat opleiding in
sportafrigting ontvang het, daarin belang om 'n diploma of sertifikaat in
sportsielkunde te verwerf. Van die  wat nie opleiding in sportafrigting
ontvang het nie, stel 50% (12/24) daarin belang om 'n diploma of
sertifikaat in sportsielkunde te verwerf. Altesaam stel 66,42% (89/134)
van die vakonderwysers wat deelgeneem het aan die projek, daarin
belang om 'n diploma of sertifikaat in sportsielkunde te verwerf.
6.8 Item 11 van die vraelys
Die respondente moes aandui hoe lank hulle reken 'n opleidingsprogram
in sportsielkunde vir vakonderwysers moet duur. Die resultate
lyk soos volg:
'n Semester = 50 proefpersone
'n Halfjaar = 32 proefpersone
'n Jaar = 52 proefpersone
Totaal
= 134 proefpersone
Dit wil dus voorkom of die meerderheid proefpersone (vakonderwysers)
o  f'nsemestero  f 'n jaarlikse opleidingsprogram in sportsielkunde
vir vakonderwysers verkies. Instansies wat dit sou beoog om so 'n
program in te stel, behoort hiervan kennis te neem.

202
6.9 Samevatting van die vakonderwysers se
response
Volgens die gegewens verkry, het die vakonderwysers wat aan die
ondersoek deelgeneem het, soos volg gereageer:
. Altesaam 82,09% (110/134) van die vakonderwysers wat
sport afrig, het opleiding in sportafrigtingstegnieke ontvang,
maar slegs 16,42% (22/134) het opleiding in sportsielkunde
ontvang, terwyl 14,93% (20/134) opleiding in beide sportafrigting
en sportsielkunde ontvang het.
. Vakonderwysers wat sport afrig, ag die volgende aspekte
van sportsielkunde as die mees belangrike om ingesluit te
word in die opleidingspakket van vakonderwysers:
Motivering
Doelwitstelling
Konsentrasie
Spanbou
Selfvertroue
Kognitief-geestelike taaiheid
Kommunikasie in sport
Die aspekte wat die mins belangrike geag word, is die
volgende:
Angs in sport
Toeskouergedrag
Onderprestasie
Aggressie in sport
Die meeste vakonderwysers het motivering as die enkele
mees belangrike aspek uitgelig en angs in sport as die enkele
mins belangrike aspek.
. Altesaam 70% (77/110) van die vakonderwysers wat
opleiding in sportafrigting ontvang het, stel daarin belang

Sportsielkunde as komponent in die opleidingsprogram van vakonderwysers 203
om 'n diploma of sertifikaat in sportsielkunde te verwerf,
terwyl 76,12% (102/134) van die proefpersone (vakonderwysers)
o  f'nsemestero  f 'n jaarlikse opleidingsprogram in
sportsielkunde vir vakonderwysers verkies.
7 FINALE SAMEVATTING EN AANBEVELINGS
Die belangrikste gevolgtrekkings wat uit hierdie ondersoek gemaak
kan word, is die volgende:
. Baie min vakonderwysers in die RSA ondergaan enige
opleiding in sportsielkunde.
. Vakonderwysers wat sport afrig, is oorweldigend ten gunste
daarvan dat sportsielkunde ingesluit moet word in die
opleidingspakket van vakonderwysers.
Daar word dus ten sterkste aanbeveel dat alle tersie à re inrigtings wat
gemoeid is met die opleiding van vakonderwysers, aandag sal skenk
aan die moontlikheid om sportsielkunde in te sluit in die opleidingsprogramme
van hulle onderwysers. As vertrekpunt vir die opstel van
so 'n program word die verskillende aspekte van sportsielkunde van
meer belangrik na minder belangrik gerangskik, soos deur die
proefpersone bepaal. Die resultate verskyn in tabel 11.
Volgens tabel 11 word 'n aspek soos ``Krisishantering in sport ``wat as
sulks nie in die literatuur verskyn nie, as die 10de belangrikste geag
deur vakonderwysers om ingesluit te word in 'n opleidingsprogram vir
vakonderwysers. Dis ook insiggewend dat 'n oe È nskynlik belangrike
komponent soos ``Kinders in sport'' en ``Angs in sport'' so laag op die
lys verskyn. (LW: Daar moet net weer beklemtoon word dat hierdie
rangskikking van die aspekte volgens gemiddeldes, net as 'n riglyn
dien, aangesien die verskille tussen die gemiddeldes nie noodwendig
statisties betekenisvol is nie).

204
TABEL 11
Aspekte van sportsielkunde gerangskik volgens belangrikheid soos deur
vakonderwysers beoordeel
V x}} s
V 10 = Motivering 9.44 1.28
V 19 = Selfvertroue 9.35 1.35
V 12 = Konsentrasie 9.12 1.51
V 11 = Doelwitstelling 9.10 1.60
V 15 = Spanbou 9.09 1.43
V 28 = Kommunikasie 8.91 1.54
V 9 = Hantering van konflik 8.87 1.67
V 25 = Kognitief-geestelike taaiheid 8.83 1.62
V 32 = Selfkennis 8.69 1.66
V 33 = Krisishantering in sport 8.59 1.87
V 29 = Ontspanningstegnieke 8.53 1.83
V 21 = Leierskap 8.53 1.83
V 34 = Wen versus verloor 8.51 1.97
V 18 = Wen versus sukses 8.51 1.89
V 27 = Besluitneming in sport 8.50 1.70
V 26 = Kinders in sport 8.32 1.95
V 16 = Kompetisie 8.22 2.00
V 31 = Persoonlikheid 8.17 2.06
V 30 = Visualisering 8.01 2.14
V 24 = Perfeksionisme versus voortreflikheid
7.91 1.94
V 20 = Onderprestasie 7.82 2.32
V 22 = Uitbrandingsindroom 7.60 2.17
V 13 = Aggressie 7.60 2.37
V 17 = Toeskouergedrag 7.57 2.29
V 23 = Aktivering (arousal) 7.57 2.18
V 14 = Angs in sport 7.48 2.56
V = Veranderlikes
x} = Gemiddeldes
s = Standaardafwyking
N = 134

Sportsielkunde as komponent in die opleidingsprogram van vakonderwysers 205
Dit wil ook voorkom of aspekte soos aggressie in sport en angs in sport
nie so belangrik geag word deur vakonderwysers nie.
Tot dusver is hoofsaaklik oorweging geskenk aan daardie aspekte wat
in die vraelys aangespreek is. Daar is egter nog ander aspekte wat in
die teorie voorkom, byvoorbeeld geslag in sport, gesindheid teenoor
sport, die individu in die span, terugvoering en versterking, selfgesprek
ensovoorts, wat ook in gedagte gehou sal moet word by die
samestelling van 'n opleidingsprogram in sportsielkunde vir vakonderwysers.
Die finale samestelling van 'n opleidingsprogram in sportsielkunde vir
vakonderwysers sal berus by die bepaalde instansie wat so 'n program
wil instel. Daar sal onder andere gekyk moet word na faktore soos:
. Hoe lank gaan die kursus duur, met ander woorde gaan dit 'n
semester-, halfjaar- of jaarkursus wees?
. Hoeveel lesings of lesure gaan afgestaan word om die kursus
te onderrig?
. Hoe lyk die studente-samestelling? Mans- en vroueonderwysers
en hoe È r- en laerskoolonderwysers verskil byvoorbeeld
in hul beoordeling van die belangrikheid van
sportsielkundige aspekte.
8 SLOTWOORD
Vakonderwysers in die RSA wat sport afrig, beskik oor weinig
opleiding in sportsielkunde. Dit was die prime à re doel van hierdie
ondersoek om hierdie leemte uit te wys en om riglyne te probeer neerle Ã
waarvolgens 'n instansie dit kan oorweeg om 'n opleidingsprogram in
sportsielkunde vir sy vakonderwysers in te stel. Hopenlik sal die
bevindinge van hierdie ondersoek die leser, en meer spesifiek ons
onderwysowerhede, bewus maak van die noodsaaklikheid daarvan om
sportsielkunde ingesluit te kry as komponent in die opleidingsprogram
vir vakonderwysers.

206
SUMMARY
Sport psychology is becoming more and more important in the world
of sport, especially in countries like the USA, Europe and Australia. In
South Africa sport psychology is still regarded as ``unnecessary'' or of
little importance. Fortunately this attitude is changing.
In our schools in the RSA, most of the subject teachers are involved in
the coaching of sport, whether they like it or not. The training
programme of these subject teachers does not really provide for the
inclusion of sport psychology. In fact, a survey at universities and
teacher colleges all over the country indicated that only two of these
institutions offer sport psychology to their subject teachers (Note: For
students in Human Movement the picture looks different).
Enquiries at schools in the RSA revealed that subject teachers
experience frustrations as sport coaches for example:
1 They do not always know how to motivate their teams or
individual athletes.
2 They do not always know the difference between psyching up
athletes and motivating them. Furthermore, they battle to
psych their athletes up to optimum performance on the day/
moment of a big event Ð the athletes either peak too early or
too late.
3 Subject teachers do not always possess the necessary knowledge
to apply certain focus and relaxation techniques.
4 They battle to deal with aspects like aggression in sport, crisis
and conflict situations in sport, the burning out syndrome etc.
The result of subject teachers' inadequate training in sport psychology
leads to a number of implications, inter alia the deterioration of
relationships between coach and athlete and consequently poor sport
achievements. It therefore deemed necessary to launch an investigation
into the necessity and possibility of including sport psychology as a
component in the training programme of subject teachers.
The results of the investigation clearly indicate the following:

Sportsielkunde as komponent in die opleidingsprogram van vakonderwysers 207
. Approximately 84% of the subject teachers in the RSA who
are involved in the coaching of sport, did not receive any
training in sport psychology.
. Subject teachers who are involved in the coaching of sport
are overwhelmingly in favour of the inclusion of sport
psychology in their training programmes.
. The aspects of sport psychology subject teachers regard as
the most important to be included in their training programmes
are motivation, self-confidence, concentration,
setting goals and team building.
BIBLIOGRAFIE
Butler, R J 1996. Sports Psychology in action. London: Butterworth-Heinemann Ltd.
Coakley, J J 1994. Sport in society: Issues and controversies. 5th edition. London: Mosby-
Yearbook Inc.
Cratty, B J 1983. Psychology in contemporary sport: Guidelines for coaches and athletes. 2nd
edition. London: Prentice-Hall Inc., Englewood Cliffs.
Gill, D L 1986. Psychological dynamics of sport. Illinois: Human Kinetics Publishers, Inc.
Kremer, J & Scully, D 1994. Psychology in sport. London:Taylor&FrancisLtd.
Le Roux, J G 1999. Sportsielkunde as komponent in die opleidingsprogram van vakonderwysers.
'n Ongepubliseerde MEd-verhandeling. Pretoria: Unisa.
Morris, T & Summers, J (red) 1995. Sport Psychology: Theory, applications and issues. New
York: John Wiley & Sons.
Mulder, J C 1989. Statistiese tegnieke in opvoedkunde. Pretoria: Haum.
Roberts, G C (red) 1992. Motivation in sport and exercise. Illinois: Human Kinetics Books.
Salmela, J H 1991. The world sport psychology sourcebook. Leeds: Mouvement Publications.
Silva, J M & Weinberg, R S (red) 1984. Psychological foundations of sport. Illinois: Human
Kinetics Publishers, Inc.
Vernacchia, R V, McGuire, R & Cook, D 1996. Coaching mental excellence. Portola Valley,
California: Warde Publishers.
Weinberg, R S & Gould, D 1995. Foundations of sport and exercise psychology. Illinois:
Human Kinetics Books.
Williams, J M (red) 1993. Applied sport psychology: Personal growth to peak performance. 2nd
edition. Mountain View, California: Mayfield Publishing Company.

208
The Swiss missionaries'
educational endeavour
as a means for social
transformation in South
Africa (1873±1975)
BMC Masumbe
IA Coetzer
Department of Educational
Studies
Unisa
Social transformation is as old as humanity. It is the product of human thought and
action. People have always been striving to bring about change aimed at improving their
living conditions. Each generation has surpassed its predecessor in terms of the socioeconomic
and political changes it brought to bear on society. Before the advent of
colonialism and western education, home (informal) education was an important catalyst
for social development among African communities. The arrival of missionaries of
different denominations led to the introduction of formal education among the indigenous
populace as literacy was viewed as a means for evangelisation. In South Africa both
mission education and colonial education played a very significant role in the
acculturation, detribalisation and modernisation of the indigenous populations to the
level where they are today. Social transformation is a life-long process.
1 INTRODUCTION
The aim of this article is to survey the contributions of the Swiss
missionaries in bringing about social transformation in South Africa,

The Swiss missionaries' educational endeavour 209
with special reference to the north-eastern parts of the erstwhile
Transvaal. The discussion is based on the reality that social transformation
as spearheaded by the different missionary societies obviously
took place in a political environment that naturally tended to inform
the policies formulated by different churches during the period under
review. Churches either felt constrained to pursue social justice by
challenging policies formulated by colonial or local state authorities, or
they acted as agents, whether deliberately or by default, of the
prevailing political dispensation imposed by the local state authority
or an overseas colonial power.
Social transformation as pursued by the Swiss clerics was subject to the
condition that it had to occur without regard to race, creed, gender or
religious affiliation, but the Swiss Missionary Society's personnel
individually or collectively straddled both sectarianism and nonpartisanship.
The Swiss missionaries regarded themselves as important
role players in the quest to put the indigenous populace on the
road to national development, which in their view had to cover various
facets of life, for instance socio-economic and cultural development.
Missionaries across denominational boundaries saw their mandate as
spreading the Gospel of Jesus Christ, the Saviour of mankind. The
execution of this religious task had to be paralleled by the performance
of charitable deeds to benefit what were rightly perceived to be
disadvantaged communities. Missionaries established schools in the
African territories as they regarded formal education as a means to an
end, namely the conversion of the heathen masses so that they could
also partake of the Glory of God. Formal education provided the
indigenous populace with writing and reading skills that were
indispensable to the extension of the Kingdom of God. Missionaries
identified their mandate with Jesus Christ's exhortation to his
disciples: ``Go ye and teach all nations, baptizing them in the name of
the Father, and of the son, and of the Holy Ghost, teaching them to
observe all things whatsoever I have commanded you ... . (Cuendet,
1949:2).

210
2 THE GENESIS OF THE SWISS MISSIONARY
SOCIETY IN SOUTH AFRICA (1874)
The young ministers of the Swiss Missionary Society who were
seconded to work as missionaries under the Paris Evangelical Society
in Basutoland came from the French-speaking western part of
Switzerland known as the small Canton of Vaud. The religious fervour
of these young clerics was inspired by the Rev Louis Bridel who taught
them during their ministerial training at Lausanne. The Paris
Evangelical Missionary Society had been operative in Basutoland since
1833.
The Free Church of the Canton of Vaud was founded in 1847. It was
strongly opposed to setting up autonomous foreign missions to
evangelize pagans spread throughout the world because it lacked the
funds required to sustain such ventures. But the young clerics
graduating from the Academie de Lausanne pressured their church
leadership incessantly to establish an independent missionary society
that could dispatch them to remote territories such as Southern Africa,
Australasia, India and even China to evangelise the heathen masses.
The church finally bowed to this pressure by agreeing to lend the
young ministers to friendly churches (Phillips 1949:3, 14).
The first batch of volunteers from Switzerland who joined the Paris
Evangelical Missionary Society in the mountain kingdom of Basutoland
included the following: Paul Germond, Louis Duvoisin, Adolphe
Mabille and D.F. Ellenberger. These clerics arrived in Basutoland
between the years 1859 and 1861. One missionary, namely Rev Henri
Gonin, decided to join the Dutch Reformed Church and served among
the Tswana people of Saulspoort, near Rustenburg. This step was
surprising since the Dutch Reformed Church had never been classified
as an ally of the Free Church, but the Free Church never voiced any
qualms about it (Cuendet 1950:8±9).
Another church hailed as an ally of the Free Church was the Basel
Mission. This researcher knows very little about the Free Church,
except that it had mission fields elsewhere in Africa. The first recruits
to the Paris Evangelical Missionary Society appear to have been

The Swiss missionaries' educational endeavour 211
content with being welcomed as assistants to the Paris Mission, and to
have made no effort to persuade the Free Church to establish an
autonomous missionary society that would labour in Africa, the socalled
``Dark Continent''.
This task was left to the Reverends Paul Berthoud and Ernest Creux,
two close friends whose strongly worded letter to the Church Synod in
1869 made it hard for the leadership to ignore their petition. The letter
was discussed in depth and the feeling was that the church had a duty
to send ministers far and wide to proclaim the Gospel of Christ.
Indications were that the Reverends Creux and Berthoud would
eventually have their wish, but they had to go through the Paris
Mission in Basutoland before they could establish mission stations
under the Free Church. The church leadership was still raising the
difficulty of financial incapacity in response to requests to set up
independent mission stations for the Free Church. However, the
difficulties were overcome to the extent that Creux and his English wife
set off for the Cape in 1872, followed by Berthoud and his wife a year
later (Phillips 1949:14±15).
3 THE FOUNDING OF AN INDEPENDENT
MISSIONARY SOCIETY BY THE FREE CHURCH OF
THE SMALL CANTON OF VAUD, SWITZERLAND
The yearning of Reverends Ernest Creux and Paul Berthoud for the
establishment of an autonomous missionary society was soon fulfilled.
It seemed providential at the time that the Paris Evangelical
Missionary Society could not expand its enterprises to include
Sekhukhuniland in the Northern Province, from which its Morija
Pastoral School drew some of its students, because this created an
opportunity that would help the Reverends Creux and Berthoud as
well as the Shangaans. But before this happened, a succession battle
had to cross the missionaries' path. Sekhukhuni, paramount chief of
the Bapedi in the Northern Province, was involved in a bitter struggle
with his brother Mampuru for the seat of power vacated by their
deceased father Sekwati (1824±1860) (Davenport 1987:59).
The entry of Reverends Alexander Merensky and Albert Nachtigal into

212
the fray in support of the rival Mampuru infuriated Chief Sekhukhuni
to the point where he regarded missionaries with distaste. When the
Reverends Adolphe Mabille and Paul Berthoud arrived in Sekhukhuniland
in terms of an earlier agreement to open up the missions called
for by students from the territory, they found to their astonishment
that the chief had already adopted a very hostile attitude towards all
the messengers of God. He balked at allowing the missionaries to
proselytize among his subjects. Fortunately for Mabille and Berthoud,
the Rev Stephanus Hofmeyr of the Dutch Reformed Church advised
them to proceed further north to the Zoutpansberg District where the
Gwambas, or Shangaans (also known as Knobneusen) hadn't yet heard
of the Word of God. Chief Joao Albasini of Goedewensch, who was the
absolute ruler of the Shangaans, was consulted by the Swiss
missionaries, accompanied by a retinue of Basuto Eevangelists. Chief
Albasini duly granted the Swiss clerics permission to evangelise his
subjects. The missionaries then bought the farm Klipfontein from Mr
John Watt, a Scottish trader, in 1873. This area was earmarked as the
site for the first mission station for the Swiss. On 17 August 1873 Rev
Adolphe Mabille delivered his first sermon to a group of inquisitive
Shangaans before he and his colleague, Berthoud, returned to Basutoland
to report on the abortive bid to evangelise the Bapedi (EPCSA's
Programme for Jubilee Celebrations, 7±9th July 2000:8±9, Du Plessis;
1911:330±331).
4 THE BASUTO EVANGELISTS' TURN TO
EVANGELISE THE SHANGAANS OF VALDEZIA
Many historians who covered the ``scramble for the African mission
fields'' as well as clerics of different religious households or
denominations in the past tended to regard black evangelists as mere
porters with no skills to offer to the pagan communities. This is a
complete distortion of facts. Black evangelists were as good as their
missionary mentors in preaching the gospel to the heathen communities.
It is certainly no exaggeration to say that they were even better
than white missionnaries by virtue of their superior knowledge of the
rugged African conditions, language and culture. Various factors,
namely interstate trade and other ties, apparently made the transition
from primitivity to modernity a lot easier during the period under

The Swiss missionaries' educational endeavour 213
review. Thus the departure of the Reverends Adolphe Mabille and Paul
Berthoud for Morija, Basutoland (now Lesotho) created an opportunity
for Eliakim Matlanyane and Asser Segagabane, the two evangelists
who were left in charge of the Klipfontein farm, to demonstrate their
evangelistic skills. The two, assisted by their crew, started catechism
lessons and literacy classes, and also taught their proselytes some
hymnal songs. But Segagabane was not destined to stay for a long
period in Klipfontein, for he first returned to Basutoland in 1874 before
joining the Rev Francois Coillard's trek party who travelled through
the Banyayi territory, eventually reaching the Zivi ± Zimuto territories
along the Zambezi River, in Southern Rhodesia (now known as
Zimbabwe) in 1876 (Beach 1973:25±39).
The utility value of the African evangelists need not be emphasised by
this researcher, except to quote Beach (1973:27): ``A great deal of the
work was carried out by devoted and determined African evangelists,
and in many ways the establishment of Christianity was as much an
African achievement as a European one''. It is gratifying that the Swiss
Missionaries acknowledged this plain truth upon their return to
Valdezia (Klipfontein) in 1875 when they praised the Basuto evangelists
for their sterling efforts.
5 THE SOCIALISATION OF PEOPLE IN TRANSITION
FROM PRIMITIVITY TO MODERNITY
Mr George Kenrich du Plessis of Reiger Park (New Nation, 11 April
1990:17) spelt out the role of education as drawing ``out from the
individual of the very best of which he/she is capable''. This
description of education presupposes that without education an
individual will be unable to exercise his/her cultural mandate as he/
she should because his/her potential will remain untapped, with the
result that his/her skills will not be sufficiently developed. This is why
the skills possessed by the Shangaans of Valdezia were in a crude state
and needed refinement by the missionaries. A new form of education,
namely formal education, had to be phased in to build the necessary
capacity for modern needs. Such formal education was indeed
introduced in the Zoutpansberg District by the missionaries.

214
Truly formal education among the Shangaans was introduced for the
first time by the black evangelists who were left at Valdezia by the
Reverends Adolphe Mabille and Paul Berthoud after the exploratory
visit of 1873 which was designed to open up missions for the Free
Church in the now defunct Transvaal. It is therefore a pity that some
missionaries do not give due credit to the pioneering efforts of black
evangelists. Mathebula (1989:7) notes that some missionaries refused
to acknowledge the sterling efforts of African evangelists in that they
chronicled 1875 as the year in which Swiss missionary activities
commenced in Valdezia, while remaining silent about the preceding
two years during which African evangelists were predominantly active
in the area. The reason for this omission is presumably the perception
that black evangelists belonged to a ``dark continent'' that was
inhabited by ``barbarians'' who were thought to be less creative and
inventive than their white counterparts.
6 THE INTRANSIGENCE OF THE ZUID
AFRIKAANSCHE REPUBLIEK (ZAR) TOWARDS THE
FRENCH-SPEAKING SWISS IMMIGRANTS
(1875±1876)
Officials of the ZAR apparently had very different views from those of
the Dutch Reformed Church, who seem to have welcomed the new
arrivals as colleagues in the service of the Lord. The Swiss clerics were
given permission to set up their mission stations by the unsuspicious
General Piet Joubert, caretaker president of the ZAR during the
absence of President Thomas Francois Burgers, who was off to the
Netherlands (Holland) on a fundraising visit for the construction of a
railway line linking his landlocked republic with the sea. But when
President Burgers returned he revoked this right as he suspected that
the French-speaking missionaries were the ones who allegedly gave the
Free State Boers problems by covertly supporting King Moshoeshoe's
warriors in the gruelling wars that nearly wiped out the Boer Republic
of the Orange Free State. President Burgers ordered the arrest of the
Swiss missionaries in 1876 and they were locked up in Marabastad near
Pietersburg for six weeks, and thereafter released without formal
charges. Apparently, Magistrate Detlof Mare could see no cause for
their continued imprisonment (Mathebula 1989:3).

The Swiss missionaries' educational endeavour 215
Evidence surfacing after this debacle, suggested that President
Burgers's actions were motivated by worry over his dwindling image
after embarassing the finances of his republic and pursuing an
educational policy that was abominable to the inhabitants of the
erstwhile Transvaal Republic and its electorates. The annexation of the
Transvaal Republic by Sir Theophilus Shepstone and his British forces
in 1877 was the final nail in the coffin of President Burgers's term in
office.
During the so-called First War of Liberation (First Anglo Boer War,
1880±1881) the British were defeated at Majuba by the Transvaal
forces, and the Boers returned to power under President Paul Kruger.
According to Rev Ernest Creux, President Kruger was not hostile to the
advances of the Swiss missionaries. Thus from the moment the Swiss
Missionaries were released from the Marabastad holding cells in 1876,
the Swiss Missionary Society, which was founded in 1874, operated
with minimal hindrances. The only sources of worry were the Makhado
wars and the fear of what was to follow after the Bapedi of Sekhukhuni
had inflicted a humiliating defeat on the Transvaal Boers in 1876.
Another inhibiting factor was the shortage of manpower, which could
not be overcome without considerable expenditure of capital. The new
political climate led to a consistent increase in the number of Christian
converts. For instance, Lydia Shihlomulo became the first Tsonga
woman to be baptized on 1 October 1876. She had been ostracised and
divorced by her polygamous husband after having had the misfortune
of three abortive pregnancies in succession. Other Christian converts
were Makhabane, Masiya, and Sekhutu and his wife Navani. The 8th of
July 1877 was particularly eventful in this regard as the Reverends Paul
Berthoud and Ernest Creux baptized seven adults and ten children on
that date (Cuendet 1950:17±18).
7 EXPANSION OF EVANGELISM INTO AREAS THAT
WERE BASTIONS OF HEATHENISM (1876±1900)
The combined strength of the Basuto evangelists and the local
Christians in Valdezia (named after the Canton of Vaud, Switzerland,
from which most of the Swiss missionaries originated) led to a steady

216
increase in the number of Christians. This was followed by the
establishment of annexes at Barcelona, situated between Valdezia and
Elim; Barotta, between Valdezia and Tshakhuma; and the annex cum
mission station of Elim (1879), in Chief Njakanjaka's territory. Around
1877 Phillips (1949:6) estimated that 18 months' work at Valdezia had
produced around 40 Christian converts. It was therefore not surprising
that Chief Njakanjaka ultimately agreed to let missionaries establish
the second mission station of Elim (1879). Black evangelists had
softened his resistance to Christianity, which had been established for
more than four years at Valdezia Mission Station. Migrants who had
been to the Kimberley diamond mines and Pretoria, namely Yakobo
Mbizana Mabulele, and John Songele, a close friend of Timoteo
Mandlati, clearly intimated to their kinsmen that education was an
important catalyst in the transformation process (Cuendet 1950:16±18).
The combination (merging) of formal schooling with evangelisation
was especially helpful in the expansion of evangelism into the hitherto
heathen strongholds. Education, as Du Plessis (1990:17) correctly
stated, was indispensable for the social upliftment of Africans during
the missionary era since it was, and still remains, a means for the
transmission of cultural norms and values from one generation to
another. Yet, for formal education to be really effective as a moulding
tool, it needed to build on the strong foundation laid by home
educators, thereby reinforcing and consolidating the cultural values
that helped to form well-mannered individuals with a strong sense of
values even before the teaching-learning situation, otherwise known as
the classroom, was introduced.
The researchers strongly believe that the coalescence of traditional
cultural etiquette with that of the Western school system was mainly
responsible for the fact that black ministers managed to extend the
Kingdom of God far and wide. It is therefore highly unlikely that Josefa
Mhalamhala and Eliaxib, would have been accepted in 1882 as
missionaries at Magudu (Antioka) and Nondwane (Rikatla) respectively
if they had completely disowned their African values. The Chiefs
in whose territories these two missionaries introduced Christianity

The Swiss missionaries' educational endeavour 217
must have welcomed them with open arms because they displayed
their vumunhu (humaneness/ubuntu) in their interaction with their
kith and kin, while respectfully showing why social transformation
was desirable in those years.
Missionaries were regarded as hypocrites because of the double
standards that were often evident in their application of the mission
statutes they formulated, for example the one whereby religious rites
at gravesides were prohibited for Africans while whites maintained a
conspicuous presence at the graves of their loved ones on the pretext of
tending the graves. The realization that missionaries were inconsistent
in their application of rules made many converts and potential
converts stay away from church buildings, thus making it necessary for
church workers to pay home visits in order to win Christian converts
(Ntsan'wisi 1956:2).
The Swiss missionaries' hypocritical imposition of strictures had a
devastating effect on African cultures, for example in that converts
were expected to cease watching heathen dances (swigubu) and to stop
indulging in games classified as heathen. Boys and girls had to be
members of the Pathfinders and Wayfarers clubs respectively. These
social clubs had junior ranks, respectively known as the Trackers and
Sunbeams. The manner in which missionaries went about their task of
evangelizing the African masses was akin to stripping a person who is
not given to nudity of his/her clothes and then still expecting him/her
to walk nonchalantly through multitudes of people. This is why the
Xhosa chiefs of the Eastern Cape, amazed by the depth of this
hypocrisy, especially when it came to the slighting of indigenous
cultures, referred to ``Christianity as a religion for old women and
children, too childish to take seriously'' (Ashley 1980:36±37).
Comments such as these were made by African chiefs and their subjects
because of the erosion of traditional values, such as beer-brewing,
polygamy, initiation ceremonies and payment of lobola, to name but a
few of the customs that were unique to the premodern era.

218
8 THE IMPLANTATION OF FORMAL EDUCATION AND
ALLIED SERVICES WITHIN THE SWISS MISSION
FIELDS
From the moment Eliakim Matlanyane and his colleagues introduced
literacy classes in Valdezia there was no turning back. Formal
education grew steadily at this mission station and its annexes. By
1892, when Rev Maswingidzi Malale assumed his teaching duties at
Valdezia, the number of pupils stood at 50, rocketing to 126 in 1896 and
exceeding 300 by 1897. In 1896 the Rev Malale was a lone figure who
had to deal with the rampant demands of children endeavouring to
make the most of the education he was handing out to them. In 1897
Joshua Marule, Frank Hlaise and Cornel Marivate were appointed as
his assistants. During this period English was not allowed at schools,
apparently due to the rivalry between the British and the government
of President Paul Kruger, which culminated in the outbreak of the
Second Anglo-Boer War/South African War (1899±1902).
TheRevSMMalaledidnotallowhisplanstobederailedbystate
legislation. He taught English clandestinely, even though missionaries
were against it, fearing a recurrence of the official displeasure that
ended in 1876 with the missionaries' imprisonment and appearance
before Magistrate Detlof Mare at Marabastad near Pietersburg. The
Rev Malale's steadfastness instilled courage into the heart and mind of
the Rev Paul Rosset, who was the resident missionary at Valdezia. He
(Rosset) bought English books and negotiated with the Rev WEC
Clarke, Inspector of Native Schools, and later Secretary to the
Education Department, to have the Valdezia school officially registered
(Malale 1937:3±4). But this expansion of education was not only
confined to Valdezia. On the contrary, there was rapid development in
different parts of South Africa and beyond, where the seeds of
Christianity had been sown by the Swiss clerics and their black elite.
The number of converts concentrated in the mission stations, though
insignificant compared to the spate of conversions taking place in the
heathen villages, was very encouraging to the missionary authorities.
They therefore sought funds that would enable them to establish more
schools and colleges that would produce manpower that would

The Swiss missionaries' educational endeavour 219
minister to the church's needs. These efforts resulted in the establishment
of the Shiluvane Training College in 1899 under the directorship
of the Rev HA Junod, as part of a concerted effort to entrench
Christianity and to eliminate heathenism, which seemed to mock
missionary efforts through the ostracism of Christian converts. The
closure of Shiluvane Training College in 1905 necessitated the
founding of Lemana Training Institution in 1906 on the Rossbach farm
which was previously owned by Captain Adolf Schiel (Junod 1899:22±
23; Rademeyer 1943:18).
A separate college was founded at Rikatla for the Mozambicans
because the Portuguese were no longer keen to grant their colonial
subjects permission to study in South Africa (Cuendet 1950:61).
Lemana Training Institution produced eminent musicians and leaders
such as the late Rev DC Marivate (Mabunda, 1995:56; Maphophe 1956).
The realisation by African parents that education was a means to better
employment prospects resulted in an increasing number of students
being sent to Lemana Training Institution for their higher education.
These teacher-evangelists ventured into different corners of the
country, imparting knowledge that contributed in no small measure to
the socio-economic and political development of South Africa and her
neighbours. Lemana and her sister college of Rikatla in Mozambique
had very broad curricula, catering for all aspects of life, namely
spiritual matters as well as industrial and agricultural skills. Hygiene
was one of the subjects seriously taught at the two colleges, given the
superstitious nature of the indigenous populace during the pioneering
years. The superstition surrounding the causes of disease and death
had to be removed from the minds of proselytes and replaced by
rational thinking and knowledge of cause and effect that was
justifiable in terms of medical science (Egli & Krayer 1996:28±29).
Although the Swiss missionaries believed that the ``heads of natives''
could not cope with sophisticated technical and scientific education,
nursing training was eventually introduced at Elim hospital in 1932
when seven students were admitted to the nursing course. The
introduction of high-school education at Lemana in 1933 was therefore
aimed at giving female students an opportunity to diversify their

220
studies to include the nursing profession. Before 1932 the only course
open for girls was the Native Teachers Certificate. The secondary
classes established at Lemana Secondary School were intended to
qualify girls for nursing, which till then had been undertaken by
missionary nurses (Egli & Krayer 1996:28±29).
9 FURTHER ADVANCES IN THE PROVISION OF
MEDICAL AND NURSING CARE WITHIN THE SWISS
MISSION FIELDS
The medical and nursing services introduced at Elim hospital were
extended to other mission stations within South Africa and Mozambique
to make it possible for Christians to abandon their traditional
medicinal practices, including those related to midwifery. Masana and
Shiluvane Hospitals had reached a stage where it was no longer
possible for missionary doctors and nurses to cope with the demand for
advanced medical and nursing care. The introduction of nursing
training at Masana Hospital was pioneered by Violette Rosset (Egli &
Krayer 1996:47±50). During those years it was not uncommon for
nurses to invade the privacy of villagers in a bid to induce them to
relinquish their traditional medicinal and midwifery practices.
According to Gelfand (1984:132), alluding to developments in Shiluvane
Hospital: ``A school was started in 1950 to train African nurses for
the Transvaal Provincial Diploma and in 1962 the South African
Nursing Council recognised it as a nursing school for auxiliary
nurses''. Although the Swiss Mission in South Africa was making big
strides in the training of nurses, albeit belatedly, it was regrettable and
even deplorable to note that there seemed to be no encouragement for
African students to gain entry into the medical profession. Could it be
that Africans were still regarded as inherently lacking in the
intellectual capacity required for this and similar careers? Available
evidence in the national archives suggests that the Swiss clerics simply
could not rid themselves of racist rhetoric, a case in point being the
allusion to the ``heads of natives'' in the expression of the naõ È ve
misconception that blacks were incapable of coping with subject matter
requiring advanced thinking skills. It is utterances such as these that

The Swiss missionaries' educational endeavour 221
dented many a student's self-concept for many years, thus robbing
rural areas of a fair chance to catch up with urban centres as far as
socio-economic and political development was concerned (N'wandula
1988:45±46).
But despite the shortcomings outlined above we cannot ignore the fact
that missionaries did a lot of good to Africans in areas where
government intervention should have been forthcoming since the
advent of Western civilization on this continent. It goes without saying
that the principal task of missionaries is evangelization, and not
establishing schools, hospitals, clinics and health centres, which is
primarily the responsibility of government. This researcher would like
to concur with the observation of Staff Nurses V Mawila and C Mtebule
that missionaries should be thanked for providing evangelism and
education, and for eliminating heathenism in this country. As in the
rest of the world, problems will keep on arising in South Africa. This
means that vigilant awareness of the need for social transformation
will probably always be required, as will the need for sustained and
effectiveimplementationofsuchtransformation(Mawila&Mtebule
1956:2).
10 THE SWISS MISSIONARIES AND COLONIALISM:
WERE THEY USED AS AGENTS OF COLONISERS?
Missionaries' roles in Africa have been subjected to different interpretations.
There are analysts who view some of them as having played
a very significant role in the civilization of the native populace by
providing formal education and medical and nursing care, by teaching
the Word of God, and by fighting for social justice. Another group
believes that missionaries of different denominations served as agents
for colonisers. In this latter role, missionaries would explore territories,
establish mission stations and thereafter call on the colonial government
to send soldiers and police officers to protect their enterprises
against hostile heathens ± a transparent ploy to serve the purposes of
colonisation. The beneficiaries of Swiss Missionary education and
related services reject what they claim to be a baseless allegation made
by ``radical elements'' to the effect that ``Christianity was used as a

222
hunting dog by the colonisers''. They claim that the charge is baseless
with regard to their church since Switzerland (where the missionaries
of this church come from) was not a colonising country (EPCSA's
Programme for Jubilee Celebrations, Valdezia 7±9 July 2000:8).
However, the position of Switzerland as far as colonialism is concerned
is not at stake here. The Swiss government had no control over private
organizations such as the church, which freely sent out its personnel to
distant countries in terms of its policies or mission statutes. What is at
issueisthechurchanditsworkforceandthedegreeofautonomyit
enjoyed out in the field by virtue of its Synods or Mission Boards. And
what needs to be probed is the behaviour of individual missionaries or
groups of clerics in their relations with the ruling oligarchy, and in
doing so we need to guard against having our perceptions clouded by
sentiment.
The following observation by Mafeje (1952:7) implies that all missionaries
were guilty of acting as agents of colonialism: ``... if the ruling
minority can enslave the mind of the people, control their ideas and
their whole way of thinking, they have found an even more efficient
weapon for subjugating them than the use of force, the military and
police. For them the people themselves assist on their own enslavement.
If the rulers can make the people believe that they are inferior,
wipe out their past history or present it in such a way that they feel, not
pride but shame, then they create the conditions that make it easy to
dominate the people''.
Like Dr H A Junod, Dr Samuel Jaques was advocating instruction to
equip Africans for manual labour, with very little, if any academic
education. But the claim by Dr Jaques that European missionaries were
not aware of the circumstances of those for whom they advocated a
separate education system at a time when a uniform education system
had already been introduced elsewhere in the country is less than
candid. Indeed, in the light of the evidence it is hard to resist the
suspicion of collusion between missionaries and colonisers to disadvantage
Africans by subjecting them to differentiated education that

The Swiss missionaries' educational endeavour 223
would prepare them for the menial tasks that would be consistent with
their being drawers of water and hewers of wood, that is to say for the
destiny that the missionaries sought to implant in the minds of
Africans as an inevitable, divine dispensation.
It was the transparency of the aim alluded to by Mafeje, namely landgrabbing
and the assertion of White supremacy, that prompted Mr
Etienne A Tlakula, Co-Editor of The Valdezia Bulletin (July 1932
Vol II), and a resident of Elim, to make this clarion call: ``When shall
we own farms?''. Besides the Swiss missionaries, this call was
addressed to the colonists who owned vast tracts of fertile farming
lands at a time when only the Black elite owned some miniature plots.
The question was intended to shock readers into awareness of the
inequitable distribution of land which left the majority of blacks living
in grinding poverty. Missionaries pretended to be apolitical philanthropists,
but they connived at the pursuit of aims envisaged by the
Union Government, which actually consulted them for expert advice
on many an issue. They (missionaries) signaled a sense of natural
entitlement to authority and to intellectual superiority in their
pronouncements. For example, during the 1930s when the land
question was again a dominant theme in view of the Native Trust and
Land Act (1936), it was widely held among the ranks of Swiss
missionaries that the land which would be available upon the passing
of this Act should be occupied by whites who would utilise it
profitably. A Mr EA Rooth, Member of Parliament for Louis Trichardt,
was favourably disposed towards white farmers as opposed to blacks,
in earnest of which he advised white farmers (including Swiss clerics)
to implore the Union Government ``to place at their disposal land
which has been released for Native purchase because much of this
ground, even if it were occupied by Natives, would never be
beneficially used by them'' (Senator JD Rheinallt-Jones, SAIRR's Letter
to Rev Rene' Cuenod of Lemana Training Institute dated 29th March
1935).
Missionaries, state officials and the farming community appeared to
blame blacks for their ineptitude in tilling the land, oblivious of the
many factors that militated against better accomplishment in this area.

224
Firstly, the education system did not go deep enough to prepare
potential crop farmers or stock farmers to achieve success on the land.
Secondly, even if they did receive education in agriculture science at an
appropriate level, their lack of land ownership would render them
impotent as far as food production and the supply of raw materials
were concerned. It is a fact that one can only be motivated to the hilt
when conditions are conducive to activity aimed at self-improvement,
that is when sufficient resources in their varied forms are available. But
as matters stood it was difficult with the government and the
missionaries effecting land reforms in bad faith (City Press, 9
November 1998).
It would be wrong, of course, to suggest that Swiss missionaries were
not there when their proselytes needed them most. On the contrary,
they sided with their Christian converts in opposing the planned
relocation of the Valdezia-Elim communities and Elim Hospital to the
Malamulele District to make way for the BaVenda during the 1960s,
thus forcing the Nationalist Government to abandon the proposed
relocation of the said communities (Jaques 1970:5±7). Although this
gesture needs to be noted with approbation, the land hunger on the
part of blacks remained unsolved as the church owned more than its
converts and applied rules that were not dissimilar to those of the
Nationalist regime with regard to rentals, ``squatting'', numbers of
livestock to be kept, farm labour and cropping (Rheinallt-Jones
1935:20±45).
11 THE SWISS MISSIONARIES' FORMULATION AND
IMPLEMENTAION OF POLICIES WITHIN THEIR
MISSION FIELDS IN SOUTH AFRICA
Swiss missionary policies were sometimes based on racial prejudice
and paternalism. One of the Swiss clerics, the Rev Henri Gonin of the
Dutch Reformed Church at Saulspoort, was quite eloquent about
Africans' intellectual capacity when he said: ``The Natives definitely
do not have a systematic mind'' (Gonin 1882). This perspective
transcended denominational boundaries. Missionaries of the Swiss
Mission in South Africa also subscribed to this view as could be
discerned from the Rev HA Junod's statement quoted in N'wandula

The Swiss missionaries' educational endeavour 225
(1988:46) when he said that the blacks have `'not been accustomed for
generations to school attendance and to mental work, and would be apt
quickly to get headaches, nervous exhaustion arising from overstudy if
he has not as a diversion the bodily excercise of outdoor life. We feel
moreover that to accustom the Native teachers to work with their
hands is to give them ... a sense of dignity of labour''.
The above perspective tied up with the desire to prepare Africans for
life in the rural areas where they would exercise their socio-economic
and political rights in line with their mental capabilities, instead of
being thrown into the high lifestyles that were prevalent in the cities,
and that could only be maintained with high thinking skills to which
whites considered themselves to have an exclusive claim. Mission
education was aimed at producing a new black elite who would serve
asrolemodelstotheirkithandkininthereserves(bantustans/
homelands). Whatever form of education Africans received had to
prepare them for their franchise in a bantustan parliament and not in a
multiracial parliament. Black franchise in a multiracial parliament had
to be kept in abeyance until Africans attained the mental maturity to
think systematically and creatively. In Dr HA Junod's view it would
take Africans 100 years, commencing from 1907, to reach a level of
intellectual development that would make them sufficiently competitive.
The achievements of John Mavuma Nembula, who graduated as a
medical doctor in the United States of America in the 1880s and
subsequently became a District Surgeon in Zululand, were ignored for
reasons of religious-ideological expediency, as was Cecilia Makiwane's
success in the nursing examinations written by both blacks and whites
in 1907, even though she was registered with the Colonial Medical
Council in token of her achievement (Pienaar 1990:23±24; Gelfand
1984:44±75, 102±276).
12 FINAL COMMENTS
Education may be regarded as a catalyst for social change that
develops people's potentialities and equips them to meet the demands
of life. Indeed, education is the primary cause of profound social
change. This is what missionaries of different denominations realised
when they founded different categories of schools as they pursued

226
their activities in this country. The Swiss missionaries in particular
established different categories of schools, churches and hospitals to
bring about multifaceted change within their mission fields. Christian
converts were enjoined to shed their traditional customs and relocate
to mission villages situated next to mission stations or outstations.
Although the Swiss clerics were keen to provide formal education for
blacks, they were careful not to load curricula with advanced technical
and scientific education as, in Rev HA Junod's view: ``... the head of the
Native is not able to sustain the strain of mental study so well as the
heads of Whites'' (N'wandula 1988:46). This view and the obstructionist
tendencies of past political regimes that decided the destiny of
blacks are the underlying reason why few Africans are qualified to
practise medical and other professions in South Africa. The aim of the
approach adopted to the education of blacks was to enable white
entrepreneurs to exploit cheap black labour. This approach needs to be
changed, to which end the active support of the population at large
will have to be mobilized.
The Swiss Missionaries' transformation efforts at Lemana Training
Institution (1906) and Elim Hospital (1899) attracted Xhosas, Zulus,
Tswanas, Swazis, Ndebeles, Coloureds, Vendas, not to mention the
Shangaans from South Africa and the neighbouring Mozambique. The
Swiss Mission had offices in all the provinces, namely the Orange Free
State, Cape, Natal and the Transvaal to cater for the interests of its
Christians.
But as far as support for indigenous cultures was concerned, the Swiss
missionaries were given to condemning rather than retaining traditional
customs like lobola (bride-price). This is what prompted Maboko
to pose the following questions: ``What is lobola? Why is it there? Why
should you protest against it? Briefly I will answer these questions for
you. Lobola is a present claimed by the parents of the bride from the
bridegroom. This may be in the form of money or cattle. In days of old
we read from the Bible how Jacob got his wife. He paid lobola. The
same applies to those who came after him, they all paid lobola ... Why

The Swiss missionaries' educational endeavour 227
should we not give them (the parents) the present they claim for? This
is our custom which must not be rejected merely for the sake of copying
the White man'' (F Maboko, The Valdezia Bulletin, Vol V, No 57,
September 1935:1).
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Ashley, M J 1980. Universe in collision: Xhosa, missionaries and education in South
Africa. Journal of Theology for Southern Africa.
Beach, D N 1973. The initial impact of Christianity on the Shona: The Protestants and the
Southern Shona, in JA Dachs' Christianity South of the Zambezi. Gwelo: Mambo
Press.
City Press, 9 November 1998.
Cuendet, F A 1949. Editorial comment, The Tsonga Messenger April±June. Morija: Morija
Printing Works, Basutoland.
Cuendet, F A 1950. Rivoningo emunyameni: ntirho was evangeli xikarhi ka Vatsonga na
Varhonga (Light in darkness: evangelism among the Vatsonga and Varhonga
people). Johannesburg: Swiss Mission in South Africa.
Davenport, T R H 1987. South Africa: A Modern History (3rd edition), Johannesburg: Mac
Millan.
Du Plessis, G K 1990. Viewpoints: education is socialisation, New Nation, 5±11 April.
Johannesburg.
Du Plessis, J 1911. A History of Chistian Missions in South Africa. London: Longman, Green
&Co.
Egli, M & Krayer, D 1996. ``Mothers and daughters''. The training of African nurses by the
Swiss Mission in South Africa. University of Zu È rich, Switzerland.
EPCSA's Programme for Jubilee Celebrations at Valdezia 7±9 July 2000. Johannesburg:
Sasavona Publishers & Booksellers.
Gelfand, M 1984. Christian Doctor and Nurse: the history of medical missions in South Africa
1799±1976. Marianhill: Marianhill Printing Press.
Gonin, H 1882. Letter to missionaries of the Mission Suisse Romande dated 1882, Saulspoort,
Rustenburg.
Jaques, P H 1970. Elim Hospital annual report for the period 1969±1970.
Jaques, S 1951. Education: A good or bad thing? The Tsonga Messenger, January±March.
Morija Printing Works: Basutoland.
Junod, H A 1899. Shikolo sha Madzaha (Boys' School) Nanga ya ba-Thonga (The Tsonga
Trumpet). N Jaques Publisher, ZAR: Pretoria.
Maboko, F 1935. Lobola should not be entirely abolished. The Valdezia Bulletin no 57.

228
Mabunda, D C 1995. A historico-educational survey and evaluation of Swiss missionnary
education at Lemana, M.Ed. dissertation. University of South Africa, Pretoria.
Mafeje, N 1952. TheroleofmissionariesinConquest.Juta: Cape Town.
Maphophe, S J 1956. Jubilee ya Lemana (Lemana Jubilee), Mahlahle Welkom: Swiss Mission
in South Africa.
Masumbe, B M C 2000. Face to face interview with Mt & Mrs I Furumele at their Bungeni
Village Residence. Northern Province.
Mathebula, M I 1989. The relationship between some ecumenical bodies and the Evangelical
Presbyterian Church in South Africa ± Swiss Mission. (1905±1975): a historical study.
MTh Dissertation. University of South Africa, Pretoria.
Mawila, V & Mtebule, C 1956. Xibedlhele xa ka Shilubane (Shiluvane Hospital), Mahlahle
(Morning Star) Welkom: Swiss Mission in South Africa.
Ntsan'wisi, H E 1956. Muti wa ka Shiluvane Khale (The history of Shiluvane Village)
Mahlahle, June. Welkom: Swiss Mission in South Africa.
N'wandula, C 1988. ``The Head of the Native''. Swiss Mission Education at Lemana 1899±
1954 Perspectives in Education 1988, Vol 10, No 1, 43±52.
Phillips, L 1949. The beginning of the Swiss Mission II ± Their letter to the Synod, The
Tsonga Messenger July ± September. Morija: Morija Printing Works, Basutoland.
Pienaar, C L 1990. Missionary education in the north-eastern Transvaal: The Swiss Mission and
Lemana 1906±1948. University of Cape Town, Cape Town.
Rademeyer, J I 1943. Die oorlog teen Magato (M'pefu). Pretoria: University of Pretoria.
Rejoice/Dzunisani 1975. Morija: Morija Printing Works, Basutoland.
Rheinallt-Jones, J D 1935. Letter to Rev R Cuenod Lemana Training Institution dated 29th
March 1935 pertaining to land acquisition in the Zoutpansberg District Johannesburg:
South African Institute of Race Relations. cf. Rules and Regulations of the Swiss Mission
Farms and Regulations of the Swiss Mission in South Africa ±undated.
Shillito, E 1923/ Francois Coillard: A wayfaring Man. London: Student Christian Movement.
Swiss Mission students' letter dated 19 October 1881 to the Magwamba
Assembly about conditions at Morija Pastoral School, Basutoland.
Tlakula, A E 1932. When shall we own Farms? The Valdezia Bulletin, Vol II Alexandra
Township: The Spes Bona Printing Works.

Coping skills for street children 229
Coping skills for
street children
Dr H M Vogel
Secondary School Teacher
Education
Unisa
The phenomenon of street children is a growing problem in South Africa. Increased teen
homelessness may also have been stimulated by greater societal tolerance regarding the
homeless condition and way of life in major cities. Current social services are
uncoordinated and fragmented. This becomes a major impediment in efforts to help
children, who have multiple needs, as is characteristic of all homeless, runaway or
expelled-from-home children. Current research shows a trend toward long-term homelessness
for runaway adolescents. Furthermore, the majority of these children come from
dysfunctional families and are in a desperate need for positive social skills.
This article addresses a programme of life skill training for street children. Peer
facilitators were trained to model and facilitate new ideas on conflict management and
social skills to these children.
1 INTRODUCTION
Healthy societies are characterised by good family relationships and
personal happiness of its individual members. On this premise, many
theorists have studied misbehaviour in youth that results in unhappiness,
including the phenomenon of street children. Research shows
several reasons for young people leaving their homes for a life on the
streets of big cities. (Adams, Gullotta & Clancy 1985:720, Cemane
1990:3). These include: a lack of family support, a lack of parental

230
guidance and negative or the absence of role modelling by parents
(Packard 1983:54). These factors contribute to the fact that young
people do not have acceptable social skills or skills that could help
them live independently when they arrive in the city. They find it
difficult to cope without qualifications or skills and turn to street
drugs, prostitution and other forms of socially unaccepted behaviour
to make a living.
Although there are a variety of different views in different countries
concerning the street child phenomenon, all bear similarities. There is
consensus that the children feel they can no longer trust themselves in
the hands of society, and have undertaken to manage their lives and
futures on their own by taking total control of their lives. It is also
agreed that in this situation, the children are vulnerable to exploitation
in an anti-child culture (Raffaelli 1996, Aptekar 1988, Adams et al
1985). An anti-child culture can be defined as:
. an anti-child socio-educational milieu in which the child is
brought up
. an educational situation in which the child's development is
seriously inhibited by educational and social factors
. a society that the child increasingly experiences as a situation
in which he/she cannot be adequately accommodated (Le
Roux 1996:57).
UNICEF's category of ``children in especially difficult circumstances''
include refugees, children with disabilities, children affected by
organized violence, children in disasters as well as working and street
children. They are children from an anti-child culture and now without
family contact (UNICEF 1986:15).
Contrary to this, is the modern Western view of circumstances for a
proper childhood: ``a proper childhood is where a child has a carefree,
safe, secure and happy existence'' (Panter-Brick & Smith 2000:4).
Although South Africans frequently believe a lack of education to be

Coping skills for street children 231
the cause for the problems experienced by what is referred to as the
``lost generation'' they also see poverty, child abuse and neglect and
youths with behavioural problems as reasons for them becoming
runaways (Maphatane & Shurinck 1993:24).
The problem of street children is one of the four welfare priority areas
identified by the Independent Development Trust in South Africa.
Various initiatives in response to this problem are undertaken by
individuals, groups and non-governmental organizations (Schurink,
Maphatane & Rip 1993:67). The children who come into contact with
such organizations and programmes either report themselves or are
brought in by concerned people, friends, or outreach co-ordinators.
The aims of the different organizations include the return of the child
to his/her home, job skills training and the reintegration of the child
into the community of origin.
In South Africa, street children were often referred to as the ``lost
generation''. The increasing prevalence of disruption of the traditional
structures of authority that accompanied the political situation of the
1970's lead to a dysfunctional situation at home without sufficient
primary educational circumstances. The role of the father as authority
figure in the traditional extended family became less important. The
parents often both had to work far from the family home and the role of
the extended family became irrelevant. Without adequate authority or
loving care, many children left home. Running away is considered as
being a way for alienated young people to express themselves. They
feel alienated from homes characterised by violence and conflicts or
feelings of insignificance or inferiority (Holdaway & Ray 1992:94,
Bandura & Walters 1958:52±90).
Running away is also seen as an expression of rebellion against a form
of restrictive life and an oppressive society (Maphathane & Shurinck
1993:24). Research shows that the danger of becoming a criminal
increases in direct relation to the length of time the child lives a street

232
life (Smit in Schurick 1993:124). Research also shows that socially
rejected children, especially those who are aggressive and lack conflict
management skills, are in a great need of social skills training (Elliott &
Gresham 1993:288).
A child that enters street life is adopted by a group and there is some
measure of structure in street life. The groups have leaders who are
typically taller, stronger, more clever and more streetwise than their
six or seven mates. They learn the language and coping skills from the
older ones: they learn how to obtain money, food and clothes through
begging (Smit in Schurink 1993:112).
2 AIM OF RESEARCH
A programme designed to teach positive life skills seemed to be a
necessity in the prevention of a life style of crime. Street children has to
be motivated to change their poor skills in conflict management and
peer relationships, and learn new positive skills. The training of new
skills involves the modelling of skills by peer facilitators, followed by
an open and critical discussion (cognitive restructuring) amongst the
participants of what has been observed and imparted. Peer facilitators
facilitates others to think about themselves. They facilitate a group
discussion or activity by using skills that promote effective communication
and personal exploration (Myrick & Erney 1985:10). Street
children can be exposed to new life skills but has a choice to accept or
reject it.
It was the aim of this research to involve trained peer facilitators in the
understanding of the basic needs in street children as well as the
understanding of certain values such as regard for dignity, understanding
differences and empathy. The peer facilitators were to model
life skills to street children under controlled circumstances through a
facilitative process of cognitive restructuring and behaviour modification
techniques. Street children had to be motivated to change their
poor conflict management and relationship skills and learn new skills
by watching and taking part in role plays.

Coping skills for street children 233
3 THEORETICAL FRAMEWORK
According to Waghid (2000:27) the most important dimension of
critical theory is the fact that it is driven by emancipatory interest:
``that it's purpose is to contribute to change in people's understanding of
themselves and their practices and thus free them from constraints of society;
(it) aims to generate critical action in others and gives rise to conditions to
replace one distorted set of practices with another, hopefully less distorted set
of practices (Carr & Kemmis in Waghid 2000:27).
The rational emotive behaviour approach (REBT) tries to help people
achieve what it calls ``a profound philosophic or attitudinal change''
and not merely to modify their unrealistic attributions and inferences
(Walen, DiGuiseppi & Dryden 1992:23). Cognitive therapies used for
the training of coping skills are based on theories that describe the way
people think about, interpret and experience their world, their goals
and their behaviour. Cognitive therapists makes the assumption that
cognitive activity affects behaviour, but can be monitored and altered
to change to desired behaviour (Maag & Webber 1997:71). According to
the Social Learning Theory (Bandura 1958:22±75), children learn
appropriate responses through observation and subsequent consequences.
The behavioural modification approach in combination with
open discussions was used by Bandura to illustrate that a child who
believes that engaging in a behaviour will bring rewarding consequences
is more likely to perform that behaviour. Behaviour modification
is described by Martin and Pear (1992:71) as a changing
behaviour based on systematic use of rewards and punishment. Sundel
and Sundel (1983:36) expands on this viewpoint and writes that
behaviour modification is brought about by applying the principles of
the learning process.
BF Skinner's version of behaviourism (Skinner 1974:32) has had a significant
influence on the development of school curriculum and on educational
theory in general. According to him, by arranging the learning environment
in a certain way, and by including certain stimuli in the environment, it is

234
highly probable that learners will respond and display certain behaviour.
Behavioural modification does not subordinate people, but by supporting
them toward personal growth and understanding it can serve as a learning
theory for life skills (Frankel 1984:97).
The development of positive social skills is one of the most important
outcomes of the learning process (Van Wyk 1999:78). Many children
with social interaction difficulties who are not accepted by their
families, peers or the community are at risk for behaviour reflecting
poor self-image and poor academic performances. A programme for
social interaction skills and conflict management skills has to be part of
an intervention plan with street children.
In this research cognitive restructuring and behaviour modification were
incorporated by peer facilitators under supervision of the researcher (Martin
& Pear 1992:45, Maag & Webber 1997:71). Peer facilitators are learners who
receive training in interpersonal and communication skills in their schools
through aN initial training phase by the school guidance teacher. Later they
go to the field to practice these skills with other young people. Other terms
to identify them are peer helpers, peer leaders, peer mediators, peer pals, big
brothers and sisters and can also be peer tutors (Johnson, Johnson & Holubec
1994:102).
The group of peer facilitators, who played a pivotal role in this
research, had to demonstrate conflict management, communication
and relationship skills to a group street children through role plays
(Munichin 1974:22±35). The peer facilitators had to acquire skills such
as individualisation, empathy, communication skills and regard for
human dignity through their initial training phase. Although the peer
facilitators have to be well prepared for their task as role models in
conflict management and relationship skills training, they often have
initial anxiety to enter into intervention with peers. Having them
practice their skills in the classroom setting under the watchful eyes of
a teacher is different than the field experience. The training of peer
facilitators (from now Group A) and later training by Group A of the
street children (from now Group B) through role-play, observing and

Coping skills for street children 235
re-modelling entail knowledge about psychological needs and values of
the street child. It is important to keep in mind that when training is
effected through a group context the psychological needs of individuals
can never be underestimated.
Peer facilitators have to be trained in knowledge about psychological
needs and values of other children, such as street children. The
following learning objectives in the training of Group A, also formed
assessment criteria during role plays when repeated by Group B:
3.1 Needs
The need for belonging: fulfilled by loving, sharing, and cooperating
with others.
The need for power: fulfilled by achieving, accomplishing, and being
recognized and respected by others, assertiveness and cooperation
during conflict situations. Cooperation can be characterized by
behaviour such as helping others, sharing materials with peers and
complying with rules.
The need for freedom: fulfilled by making own responsible choices.
The need for fun: fulfilled by laughing and playing.
Iftheimportanceoftheseneedsweretobedisregardedbymembersof
Group A, and the needs were to be left unsatisfied in members of
Group B, there would be a strong likelihood of a continuing urge to
behave in a certain way and no motivation for behaviour change would
take place (Bodine & Crawford 1998:23).
3.2 Values
Specific values were developed in peer counsellors:
3.3 Orientation abilities
Ð
Orientation abilities such as fairness, trust, justice. tolerance,
empathy, self-respect, respect for others, celebration of
diversity and appreciation of controversy.

236
Ð
These abilities can be developed through teaching activities
that promote cooperation and reduction of prejudice.
3.4 Perception abilities
These include the ability to encompass the understanding that conflict
does not lie in objective reality but in how people perceive that reality:
Ð
Ð
Ð
Ð
empathising in order to see the situation as the other side sees
it
self-evaluating to recognize personal fears and assumptions
suspending judgement and blame to facilitate a free exchange
of views
reframing solutions to allow for face saving and to preserve
self-respect and self-image
These abilities enable peer facilitators to develop self-awareness and to
assess the limitations of their own perceptions and to understand
others' points of view.
3.5 Emotional abilities
Emotional abilities help to overcome or manage feelings of anger,
frustration and fear:
Ð
Ð
Ð
Learning the language and developing the courage to make
emotions explicit
Expressing emotions in non-aggressive, non-inflammatory
ways
Exercising self-control in order to control one's reaction to
others' emotional outbursts
These abilities lead to self-confidence and self-control needed to
confront and resolve conflict. This includes the acknowledgement of
emotions in conflict.

Coping skills for street children 237
3.6 Communication abilities
These include listening and speaking as way of exchanging feelings:
Ð
Ð
Ð
Listening to understand
Speaking to be understood
Reframing emotionally charged statements into neutral, less
emotional terms
The skills of listening will enable one to listen actively, which allows
for attentive listening to the other person's message, to summarize the
message, to check out what was heard, and to ask open-ended
questions.
The skills of speaking are aimed at one being understood, rather than
how well one is able to debate; to refrain from speaking about oneself
and the impact of a problem on one's own life, and to have a speaking
style that makes it easy for the other to understand. The skill of
reframing with acknowledging emotions, is highly useful.
3.7 Creative-thinking abilities
These abilities help people to use creative thoughts and be innovative
in problem definition and decision making:
Ð
Ð
Ð
To be able to see the problem from different sides
To approach the problem with different possibilities in mind
Brainstorming to enhance a variety of options
These skills help peer facilitators to understand why they want what
they want, flexibility in responding to situations and in accepting or
elaborating on a variety of choices and different solutions.
3.8 Critical-thinking abilities
These skills include the ability to analyse, hypothesise, predict,
compare and evaluate.
Ð
Recognising and formulating criteria

238
Ð
Ð
Applying criteria as the basis for choosing options
Planning future behaviors
These skills became practical in the program of life skills for the street
children.
The following principles for efficient peer facilitating were followed:
Ð
Ð
Ð
Ð
Ð
Ð
Ð
Ð
Understanding the conflict as it had to be a learning approach
Understanding the above-mentioned human needs
Acknowledging and appreciating differences in human beings
It had to lead to positive behavioural change
The programme had to build on each person's strengths
The atmosphere had to create opportunities for individual selfworth
development
The people involved had to be separated from the problem
Focus was on interests, not positions
4 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
There is a very close connection between thinking, self-talk and
feelings. The challenge here was to find irrational ideas in the lives of
these young people, and model rational interpretations of the
disturbing events. For example, a street child might be taught to tell
himself that although his situation may be annoying or inconvenient, it
is not catastrophic and there are usually things he can do to improve it.
They can be helped not only to overcome their emotional disturbances,
but also achieve healthy personal adjustment and new hopes for the
future, even under difficult circumstances.
Social skill interventions focus on positive behaviours and most often
use non-aversive methods (e.g. modeling and reinforcement) to
improve behaviour. It is believed that `'utilization of these methods
may enhance treatment acceptability and integrity'' (Elliott & Gresham
1993:289). Elliott and Gresham (1993:288) identified five major
responses of social skills that facilitate peer interaction: cooperation,
assertion, responsibility, empathy and self-control.

Coping skills for street children 239
For research purposes, six street children staying in a home of the
Child Welfare Society were selected by the class teacher of the school
situated on the premises of the shelter. They were chosen specifically
for their lack of conflict management skills and poor relationships.
Secondary aims were to assist the children in developing a positive
self-concept and communication skills'.
The following assumptions were made regarding the acquirement of
life skills for Group B:
1 Social skills are primarily acquired through learning that
involves observation, modelling, rehearsal and feedback.
2 Social skills comprise specific and discrete verbal and non
verbal behaviours
3 Social skills are interactive by nature and entail effective and
appropriate responsiveness.
The reason for the above-mentioned was that these assumptions
provided direction to the interaction process between the two groups
as well as to the intervention and assessment activities.
The researcher planned weekly two-hour training sessions for three
months for the peer facilitators and the street children to meet. Specific
topics regarding conflict management and social skills themes through
role plays by Group A were outlined. This was followed up by open
discussions (logical analysis and philosophical disputation) on the
effectiveness of the suggested behaviour and role plays by Group B on
similar situations. For the intervention and facilitation processes to be
successful opportunities for practicing of skills for each participant of
Group B was recorded on video and discussed by all participants after
the session.
The weekly sessions consisted of discussions on topics around conflict
management skills, self-empowerment, relationship building and
reinforcement of new behaviour. The learning process included role-

240
plays, video recordings of the role plays, and discussions by the two
groups. Validation and assessment of new skills as observed from the
video recordings were made by both groups. Each session was planned
in advance by the researcher. (One example will briefly be discussed):
Ð
Purpose:
To help all participants gain more accurate understanding of ``perceptions''
and help them to see themselves as others see them.
Ð
Materials:
Video camera
Ð Procedure:
1 One person volunteer to talk about three minutes on the
subject: Something I believe is true in life.
2 Others listen. After three minutes, another member takes over
and imitates the first speaker by expressing the same idea.
3 Everyone in the group watch the video recording and discuss
how accurate the person's potrayal was. Comments are made
on choice of words, tone of voice, body posture and other
observations.
Ð
Helpful hints:
1 They must be encouraged to be as much as the other person as
they can, same ideas, same choice of words
2 All must have an opportunity to comment on the resemblance
Ð Discussion
1 How accurate was the role reversal?
2 How did the person assuming the role feel afterwards?
3 Does the first person feel, after watching the role reversal that
he was accurately understood?
5 PERSONAL PARTICULARS OF PARTICIPANTS
The researcher interviewed six selected street children (Group B) in the
home.

Coping skills for street children 241
A group of six peer facilitators who ``had a proper childhood'' (see
``Introduction''), were selected by the school guidance teacher from a
school (Group A). They had just completed training in peer facilitating
and indicated to their teacher that they would like to become involved
in welfare work for homeless young people. They were willing to
undergo more training in order to understand the specific needs of the
street child. They were positive in taking part in weekly sessions with
the street children. A motivation for the small sample size is that a
common problem for street children is loneliness. In a large group most
children would not have the opportunity to share their feelings and
opinions, nor would time allow each one to take part acting out role
plays. In addition, there were also restrictions on the research design in
the form of the physical environment of the children's home: the
lounge of the home, where the sessions would have to be conducted,
could not accommodate more than twelve children.
The background investigation of each participant consisted of biographical
questionnaires that were completed during individual interviews
with the street children. Their freedom of choice regarding
participation on a weekly basis over a three month period was also
then confirmed. For clear observation and evaluation of the background
and situation of each participant, the following areas were
investigated:
Ð
Ð
Ð
Interpersonal and family relations
Personal development: self-image
Personal functioning: how they cope with frustration and
conflict
The six street children from Group B, were runaways from homes and
temporarily housed in the shelter run by the Child Welfare Organization,
where they slept, and were given three meals per day. During the
mornings they attended school on the premises, which was run by a
qualified teacher. In the afternoons they had to help with some
household tasks and maintain the vegetable garden.

242
Open-ended questions that were asked during the interviews describe
each street child's situation as follows:
Participant 1
Age: 14
School grade: 5
Family background: His parents were divorced. He stayed with his
mother and her male friend before he ran away from home. He was
physically and emotionally abused by his mother's friend. He left his
mother and a younger sister behind, and was still feeling guilty about
leaving his sister. This made him angry with everybody.
He told the teacher that he was interested in learning and making new
friends, but she saw him always alone during lunch breaks.
Participant 2
Age: 13
School grade: grade 5
Family background: He lived with both parents under poor economic
conditions before he left home. His father lost his job as part of the
employers' new policy to use more skilled workers. His mother had no
income as she was a housewife. He was one of six children. He and his
younger brother decided to leave the family home together without
telling the parents. They still did not know where they were. In the
shelter he indicated to the teacher that he was interested in making
friends.
During the interview he expressed a longing to be educated and to be
successful in life.
Participant 3
Age: 12
School grade: 3
Family background: His parents were separated. He stayed with his
mother before he left and last saw his father five years before when the
father left the family home. His mother had several live-in male
friends. He never had good relationships with these friends, and when

Coping skills for street children 243
the last one started to abuse him sexually, he decided to leave. He came
in one session later than the rest but had a positive attitude towards the
project. He had come to the shelter of his own volition as life on the
street was too difficult for him. He was hungry and cold.
Participant 4
Age: 15
School grade: 4
Family background: He had no contact with his biological parents as he
was left by them in the care of his grandmother. He seldom attended a
school and they lived in a typical shack in one of the many townships
in and around Johannesburg. He left home because they lived under
unbearably poor conditions and he was convinced that life would be
better on the streets.
He showed interest in learning new things and was noticed by the
teacher for having leadership potential, but his social skills were
poorly developed.
Participant 5
Age: 10
School grade: 5
Family background: He lived with both parents before he left. His
father abused his mother and the children when under the influence of
alcohol. The father was a good worker with a regular income but drank
heavily.Thefamilyquarrelsandhomeviolencebecameunbearablefor
him and he left home with an older friend.
He still loved his parents but was afraid of the violence at home. He
still had hope for his family but realised they were a family-in-need,
and he did not know how to handle conflict.
Participant 6
Age: 14
School grade: 6
Family background: He, his mother and two sisters lived with his

244
grandmother in a two-roomed hut on a farm where the mother was a
farm worker before he ran away. The children were all born out of
wedlock from different fathers. He loved his mother and grandmother,
but found life particularly hard being the only male and the eldest. He
left home with the intention of going back one day and taking money
for food with him. He became disillusioned on the streets and asked for
help at the shelter. He desired to be reconciled with his family and was
worried about them. He felt guilty towards them for leaving them on
their own. He wanted to become financially independent. He was eager
to study and be successful in life.
6 FINDINGS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
According to the above-mentioned principles for efficient peer
facilitating under: THEORETICAL FRAMEWORK, the following was
found:
Understanding the conflict as it had to be a learning approach
The street children talked about their reasons for leaving their homes
and why they would not go back. They had all left home between the
ages of 10±14. They described feelings of anger, physical abuse, neglect
by parents and extended family members, and poor school facilities as
reasons.
Acting out behavior such as aggression, stealing, drug taking and poor
socialisation were examples of negative behaviour amongst all six
participants of Group B. They all talked about deep feelings of
loneliness and abandonment. After role plays with Group A, they
discussed openly their lack of self-confidence and feelings of depression.
Group A gave attention not only to verbal responses but also
nonverbal expressions such as gestures, posture, and tone of voice in
facilitating these feelings within the context of genuineness and sincere
caring. According to their descriptions, it can be assumed that all the
street children came from dysfunctional families where neglect, sexual
molestation and family violence occurred on almost a daily basis.

Coping skills for street children 245
Duringtheroleplaysanddiscussionstheywereabletoseethe
problem from different sides, approach the problem with different
possibilities in mind and brainstorm to enhance a variety of options to
handle conflict or difficult social situations in the future.
Facilitating coping skills through role modeling, analysis and logical
discussions removed dysfunctional thinking patterns and replaced
them with more rational beliefs. After each session, street children
confirmed that they learnt new coping skills. According to the school
teacher, their behaviour in school changed from becoming less
involved in fighting and more willing to discuss their disputes with
other learners. Better language control developed following positive
self-talk and positive social skills. The programme was an effective
way to develop communication and relationships skills.
Acknowledging and appreciating differences in human beings
Peer facilitators and street children became friends: the atmosphere
when discussing each other's behaviour during role plays was relaxed
and open. There was emotional support between participants of both
groups. These factors made it easier for open discussions, and for
restructuring of negative thinking patterns. The atmosphere created
opportunities for individual self-worth development.
Positive behavioural change
Fairness, tolerance and empathy became realities in the interaction
between participants. They were able to listen to each other, speak to
be understood and were able to reframe emotionally charged
statements into neutral, less emotional terms. These changes indicated
changed communication skills and a fresh new way to look at old
problems.
The street children watched their appearances on the television (video
recordings) with amazement. They talked about feeling proud of
themselves to be able to control themselves during arguments by
commenting with ``feeling in better shape'', ``feeling in control'',
``feeling strong'', and `'not feeling shy anymore''. All participants of

246
Group B showed more positive feelings towards family situations and
agreed that they changed their ideas on and around family life. They
expressed hope to be reunited with their families in the future and
inspired each other in making plans to go home for Christmas.
For the street child with an impulsive nature, reward or reinforcement
should not be postponed, as is often suggested in Behaviour
Modification Therapy (Martin & Pear 1992:58). Street children find
security in being given immediate feedback on behaviour. This ensures
that the behaviour becomes effective and internalised. The greater the
reinforcement the more effective it will be. When new behaviour is
acquired it is essential to provide a reaction after each form of positive
behaviour. This leads to motivation to provide and sustain the desired
behaviour. Reinforcement by peer facilitators and reward through
acceptance for individuality, were important factors that encouraged
the street children. Peer facilitating supports positive behaviour in
street children where insensitive or ignorent parents or caregivers,
failed.
It was clear that children trying to survive on the streets of South
Africa do suffer extensive abuse at the hands of certain members of the
public, as they do appear to have become specific targets. The children
were initially scared to talk about incidents of sodomy, sexual
molestation and the overall anti-child culture on the streets. The
atmosphere of confidentiality opened the doors to trust between the
two groups of young people. For Group A it was also a learning
experience: They commented by confirming their willingness to be
there for the street children as buddies, by appreciating for the first
time their own families and a need to apply new knowledge on conflict
management and relations skills even more to their own lives.
This research confirmed that the family has an extremely important
moulding effect on the personality and identity of the each of its
members.Therefore,thestudywastobefollowedupincooperation
with social workers from the Child Welfare Society. It is recommended
that the social workers visit the homes of parents of the street children
where they could reach them. They should bring new knowledge on

Coping skills for street children 247
child rearing and conflict management styles to these parents or
caregivers. The formation of a positive identity needs two elements:
belonging and independence. These are the elements vital to the
establishment of a secure home environment.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adams, C R, Gullotta, T & Clancy, M A. 1985. Homeless adolescents: a descriptive study
of similarities and differences between runaways and throwaways. Adolescence
20(89):715±730.
Aptekar, L. 1988. Street children of Columbia. Journal of Early Adolescence 8(3):195±224.
Auerbach, S M & Stolberg, A L. 1986. Crisis intervention with children and families.
Washington: Hemisphere Publishing Corporation.
Bandura, A & Walters, R H. 1958. Adolescent aggression. A study of the influence of childtraining
practices and family interrelations. New York: The Ronald Press Company.
Bodine, R J & Crawford, D K. 1998. The handbook of conflict resolution education: A guide to
building quality programs in schools. San Franscisco: Jossey-Bass.
Breunlin, D C, Schwartz R C & MacKune-Karrer B. 1992. Metaframeworks: Transcending the
models of family therapy. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass Publishers.
Cemane, K B. 1990. The street child phenomenon. Social Work Practice 90 (1):2±5.
Drake, E. 1989. Street children in other countries. The Child Care Worker l 7(7):14±5.
Elliott, S N & Gresham, F M. 1993. Social skills intervention for children. Behavior
Modification 17(3):287±313.
Engel, G L. 1977. The Need for a New Medical Model. Science 196 (4286):129±136.
Frankel, A J. 1984. Four Therapies Integrated: A behavioral analysis of gestalt, T.A. and egopsychology.
New-Jersey: Prentice-Hall.
Goodland, S, & Hirst, B. 1989. Peer Tutoring. A guide to learning by teaching. London:
Kogan Page.
Higgs, P. 1995. Metatheories in Philosophy of Education. Isando: Heinemann Higher &
Further Education.
Holdaway, D M & Ray, J. 1992. Attitudes of street children towards foster care. Child and
Adolescent Social Work Journal (4):307±308.
Johnson, D W, Johnson, R T, & Holubec, E. 1994. The new circles of learning. Cooperation in
the classroom and school. Alexandria: Virginia ASCD.
Keeney, B. 1983. Aesthetics of Change. New York: Guilford Press.
Le Roux, J. 1996. Street children in South Africa. Findings from interviews on the
background of street children in Pretoria. Adolescence 31(122):423±431.

248
Maag, J W & Webber, J. 1997. Cognitive Therapies: Past trends, current practices and
future directions. Reclaiming Children and Youth 6(2):70±74.
Martin, G & Pear, J. 1992. Behavior modification: what it is and how to do it. New-Jersey:
Prentice-Hall, Inc.
Maphatane, M T & Schurink, W. 1993. Perceptions of people involved with street
children. Street Children: Pretoria. HSRC Publishers.
Minuchin, S. 1974. Families and Family Therapy. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University
Press.
Myrick, R D & Erney, T. 1985. Youth helping youth: a handbook for training peer facilitators.
Minnesota: Educational Media Corporation.
Packard, V. 1983. Our endangered children. Boston/Toronto: Little Brown.
Panter-Brick, C & Smith, MT. (Edited). 2000. Abandoned Children. United Kingdom:
Cambridge University Press.
Peacock, R. 1989. Die manlike swart straatkind: 'n verkennende psigokriminologiese
ondersoek. Ongepubliseerde verhandeling. Pretoria: Universiteit van Pretoria.
Raffaelli, M. 1994. Street Youth in Latin America: artful Dodger or Oliver Twist?
Counseling and human Development Newsletter. American Education Research Association
13(4).
Raffaelli, M. 1996. The family situation of street youth in Latin America: a cross-national
review. International Social Work 40:89±100.
Richter, L M. 1988. Street children: The nature and scope of the problem in Southern
Africa. The Child Care Worker 6(7):11±14.
Schurink, W. 1993. Street Children. A working document. Pretoria: HSRC Publishers.
Schurink, E. 1994. Street Children Quo Vadis? Pretoria. HSRC Publishers.
Skinner, B F. 1974. About Behaviorism. NewYork:Knopf.
Stein, D B. 1990. Controlling the difficult adolescent: The REST Program. Maryland:
University Press of America, Inc.
Steinmetz, S. 1977. The cycle of violence: assertive, aggressive and abusive family interaction.
New York: Praeger.
Sundel, M & Sundel S S. 1982. Behaviour Modification in the human Services. New York:
John Wiley.
UNICEF. 1986. Exploitation of working children and street children. E/ICEF/CRP.
Van Wyk, N 1999. Higher education in South Africa and the national qualifications
framework: an overview. Educare 28 (1&2).
Waghid, Y. 2000. Qualitative research in education and the critical use of rationality.
South African Journal of Education 20(1).
Walker, H M. 1979. The acting-out child: coping with classroom disruption. Boston: Library of
Congress Cataloguing in Publication Data.

Adolescent substance abuse: perspectives on club drugs 249
Adolescent substance
abuse: perspectives
on club drugs
S M Hoberg
Department of Educational
Studies
Unisa
This article contends that in drug abuse prevention is still better than cure. Substance
abuse trends in South Africa vary from region to region and from population group to
population group. Dagga (cannabis or marijuana) and dagga and Mandrax smoked
together in a pipe remain the drugs most favoured by school-going adolescents. The
adolescent rave scene contributed largely to the extensive increase in the use of the
designer club drug Ecstasy, while other club drugs are also becoming more popular.
Many adolescent substance abusers start with alcohol abuse and progress rapidly to the
abuse of other drugs. The qualitative research in this article examines the issues in the
adolescent substance abuser's life-world experiences and adolescent peer group
clusters' increased use of club drugs.
1 INTRODUCTION
In South Africa although the media often report on increased substance
abuse, there is a dearth of adequate or accurate quantitative estimates
or in-depth qualitative research analysis available. South Africans have
only a vague conception of the escalating extent of local drug abuse;
especially the alarming increase in the popularity of club drugs. In
recent years illicit substance abuse has increased tremendously on a
global scale. According to the United Nations Office for Drug Control

250
and Crime Prevention's World Drug Report (2001:29), the 1980s and
1990s saw an unprecedented increase in the illicit drug trade with the
most severe impact among vulnerable school-going adolescents and
the marginalised members of society. This trend is also clearly
noticeable in South Africa.
According to the South African Narcotics Bureau (Pretoria News 4
January 2001:2), currently one in three school-going adolescents
experiments with drugs and many appear in court for possession of or
dealing in drugs. Since the late 1990s there has been an alarming
increase in club drug abuse among school-going adolescents in South
Africa. While drug taking has become the ``in'' thing among schoolgoing
adolescents, few school principals will openly admit to such a
problem as the drug taking occurs after school hours and usually not
on the school premises.
The trends in drugs consumed in South Africa vary from region to
region and population group to population group, with so-called ``club
drugs'', namely Dagga (cannabis or marijuana), Dagga and Mandrax as
a mixture, Ecstasy and alcohol, being favoured most by the youth at
present. Ecstasy, the recreational, elite, designer club drug, is to the
young adolescents of the 1990s what LSD was to the hippies or ``flower
children'' of the 1960s. Adolescents take drugs like heroine and cocaine
to a lesser extent, probably because of the high purchase price.
However, even in this area an increase has been reported (Pretoria News
8 February 2001:6).
This article discusses the concept club drugs and the findings of a brief
qualitative study in 2000 on the use of club drugs by adolescent peer
group clusters. In conclusion, recommendations are made for further
research.
2 DEFINING ADOLESCENCE
There are various definitions of the period of growth and development
called adolescence. Most often it refers to the rather long period between
childhood and mature adulthood, characterised by quantitative and
qualitative changes.

Adolescent substance abuse: perspectives on club drugs 251
According to Krech, Crutchfield and Livson (1969:70), adolescence
``refers to the age between puberty and adulthood. Although the
beginning of adolescence can be set quite accurately (as it is defined by
the specific physiological criterion of sexual maturity), the terminal
point of adolescence can only be approximated, for there is no sharp
differentiation between adolescence and adulthood.'' For Botvin,
Schinke and Orlandi (1995:14), adolescence extends from approximately
11 to 20 years of age. Papalia and Olds (1975:27) state that the
physical, cognitive, normative and social development of adolescence
does not occur in isolation, but that each of these affects the other.
Muus (1970:35) cites Hall, who found that in adolescence ``energy
exaltation and supernatural activity are followed by indifference,
lethargy and loathing ... exuberant gaiety, laughter and euphoria
makes place for dysphoria, depressive gloom and melancholy ...
egotism, variety and conceit are just as characteristic of this period of
life as are abasement, humiliation and bashfulness ... there is a
yearning for idols and authority that does not exclude a revolutionary
radicalism directed against any kind of authority''.
McCoy, Metsch and Inciardi (1996:46) state that adolescent growth is
characterised by:
. the breaking of parental bonds
. the development of a unique identity which is related to
independent decision making, sexuality, attaining a personal
value structure, career orientation and peer relations
. establishing a position within a peer group and defining
social parameters.
With regard to adolescent attitudes, beliefs and behaviour, Ausubel,
Montemayor and Svajian (1977:48) point out that adolescence is a
distinct stage, characterised by sequential physical, psychological and
psycho-social growth, which is hormonally induced and which
manifests during early adolescence. For Hall (1904:14), Ofer and Ofer
(1969:36), Ofer, Ostrove and Howard (1981:59), Weiner (1970:40) and
Wenar (1990:40), the biological changes that occur during adolescence
result in turbulence and struggle. However, from an anthropological

252
point of view, Papalia and Olds (1975:541) found that the Western
experience of adolescence is not a universal phenomenon and in other
cultures it was ``often remarkably free from the storm and stress that
have impressed Hall and most other observers of adolescents''.
Thornburg (1975:29) refers to Margaret Mead, an anthropologist, who
studied adolescence in Samoa and New Guinea from 1920 to 1930. In
her qualitative study, Mead found that adolescents in these primitive
societies did not experience the same stressful development growth
pattern as adolescents in Western society and concluded that cultural
influences during adolescent development have much to do with
adolescent behaviour. When a culture advocates a slow transition to
adulthood which is characterised by equilibrium in development, the
change between adolescence and adulthood is not characterised by
times of storm and stress. Adolescent growth is then characterised by
an easy acceptance of the role and demands of adulthood.
Bandura (1964:230±231) also questioned why adolescence should
necessarily be a time of storm and stress and anti-authoritarian
behaviour. In 1959 he studied a group of well-adjusted high school
adolescents and found that they were emancipated and independent,
their parents trusted them, they selected friends with care, and were
capable of making responsible choices. From this Bandura concluded
that the negative expectation of a society may indeed result in negative
behaviour trends because ``in this way a false expectation may serve to
instigate and maintain certain role behaviours which in turn then
reinforce the originally false belief''.
Rice (1981:66) concurs with Bandura. He found that setting and
achieving realistic goals, gave adolescents a feeling of pride. This, in
turn, led to an ever-increasing tendency to act responsibly and make
careful choices.
3 ADOLESCENCE, PEER INFLUENCE AND
SUBSTANCE ABUSE
It is not known why substance abuse is so prevalent in adolescence.
Oetting and Beauvais (1990:17±22) found that school-going adolescents

Adolescent substance abuse: perspectives on club drugs 253
whousedrugshardlyeverdosoinisolation.Adolescentdrugabusers
are almost always influenced by their peers and usually act in peer
clusters. In this respect Carey and Knight (1990:27±29) conclude that
``underlying all chemical dependency is the issue of self-esteem: these
pupils do not like themselves and tend to feel `I am not worth it'.''
Hence, they constantly seek reassurance and acceptance by peers.
According to Erikson (1980:119±122), adolescence is mainly a time
when the most important aspect of development is the attainment of an
own identity and peer group opinion often carries the most weight
during adolescence. Warheit, Biafora, Zimmerman, Vega and Apospori
(1995:97 ) agree, stating that acceptance by peers is of the utmost
importance during adolescence. With regard to peer group pressure,
Papalia and Olds (1975:579) state that ``the herd instinct is strong in
adolescence, as is the desire to be accepted by the crowd''. Wenar
(1990:61) found that peer group influence is not exclusively negative
and that ``these groups serve as the adolescent's primary bridge to the
future Ð they provide a sense of belonging, which is especially
important during this period of transition between being a child and
being an adult ... they help adolescents master uncertainty by
prescribing behaviour down to what clothes to wear, what music to
listen to and what language to use ... they provide both provocation
and protection''.
McCoy, Metsch and Inciardi (1996:48) maintain that currently the
strong emphasis on individuality together with the breakdown of the
family has led to an adolescent period which is characterized by
reliance on peers as a source of reference and self-definition. There is a
need to understand how the world of the adolescent is influenced by
peers in terms of their socialization. In this respect, Hoberg (1993:161)
concludes that peer group pressure during adolescence is a major
factor to contend with within the framework of successful drug abuse
prevention among adolescents. According to Wenar (1990:61), ``peer
group pressure plays an important role in both juvenile delinquency
and drug abuse ... in fact, it is a potent force in drug abuse''.
Considering that Erikson (1980:122) emphasised the importance of

254
discovering one's own identity during adolescence, it stands to reason
that peer group relations are not only an important influence to
consider but also equally important in preventing substance abuse
among adolescents.
4 THE ROLE OF THE SCHOOL IN PREVENTING DRUG
ABUSE
Wenar (1990:61) maintains that positive family connections, the
implementation of serious drug abuse prevention strategies by the
school and the availability of school peer counsellors to drug-addicted
adolescents is still the best way to assure that an adolescent will have a
positive self concept with the aim of making realistic, responsible
choices for themselves.
Ianni (1990:637) contends that the problems of adolescence are the
school's problems too because ``the school's major function is to
perpetuate the values and traditions inherent in a democratic society
who have each other's interest in mind''. In this respect Hoberg
(1993:67±72) maintains that while the school is not responsible for the
medical rehabilitation of drug-addicted adolescents, drug addiction
prevention should certainly be an important aspect of education where
learners are empowered by means of knowledge. However, too many
adolescent drug abusers are being expelled from school rather than
being supported and receiving effective assistance. The efficacy of
school counsellors in schools are not appreciated while teachers and
principals are not knowledgeable about drug abuse assistance (Hoberg
2000:10). Naginey and Swisher (1990:84) maintain that ``student
willingness to turn to peer counsellors for drug-related problems could
be a critical variable if we are to decrease substance abuse during this
developmentally critical time ... we need to reach out to adolescents
more effectively and turn the self-perpetuating system of peer
influence into a positive aid''.
5 CLUBDRUGS:THEFACTS
The term ``club drugs'' refers to a wide variety of drugs used by
adolescents at raves and all-night parties. These drugs include Ecstasy

Adolescent substance abuse: perspectives on club drugs 255
or MDMA, GHB, Rohypnol, Ketamine, Methamphetamine and LSD. In
South Africa these drugs are normally taken as a cocktail together with
alcohol and Dagga or Dagga and Mandrax (Pretoria News 8February
2001:2). Many adolescents seem to think that club drugs are harmless
substances merely there to induce and to enhance energy, and
experiment with mutltiple drugs. These drugs are certainly not fun
drugs and by no means benign. Taking a combination of these drugs
together with alcohol can lead to adverse reactions and even death.
Many adolescents' primary problem is thus not the abuse of a single
drug, but of club drugs in combination with alcohol abuse.
Many club drugs are colourless, tasteless and odourless and can easily
be added unobtrusively to beverages by anyone who wants to induce a
state of sedation in others. Recently there has been an alarming
increase in the use of certain club drugs to commit sexual assault and
rape. According to the National Institute on Drug Abuse (Community
Drug Alert Bulletin 2001: 1±7), this alone is a serious reason to be alert
to the consequences of these drugs.
6 AN OVERVIEW OF THE MOST PREVALENT CLUB
DRUGS
The following is a broad overview of the major club drugs (De Miranda
1998:28±48 and World Drug Report 2001:40±87).
. ECSTASY: Ecstasy is also known as MDMA, which is an
abbreviation for methylenedioxyamphetamine
(MDA) and methylenedioxyethylamphetamine
(MDEA). It is a synthetic drug which was
developed and patented in the early 1990s. It is
similar to amphetamine and the hallucinogen
mescaline. Thus, MDMA can produce both
stimulant and psychedelic effects in the user.
This club drug is taken orally and produces a
significant increase in the user's heart rate and
blood pressure. The user experiences a sense of
alertness and exaltation together with a massive
rush of energy.

256
Some of the street names for Ecstasy are XC,
Disco biscuits, Scoobie snacks or Big E. Ecstasy
is psychoactive drug with hallucinogenic effects.
It is highly addictive and can cause serious side
effects such as high blood pressure, rapid heart
rate, dehydration, blood clotting, severe exhaustion
and in some cases even death. The
psychological side effects include severe anxiety
states, depression, suicidal tendencies and it can
lead to full blown psychotic mental illness.
. GHB This drug is Gamma-hydroxybutyrate.
It is commonly known on the street as G, Liquid
Ecstasy or the Georgia Home Boy. It is produced
in clear liquid form, white powder, tablet or
capsule form. This drug has been involved in
poisonings, overdoses and date rapes. It is used
predominantly by adolescents. It is usually used
for its intoxicating, sedative and euphoric
properties and for its growth hormone-releasing
effects which can lead to muscle building. GHB
is a central nervous system depressant that
usually relaxes or sedates the human body. At
higher doses it slows down the breathing and
heart rate to dangerous levels, depending on the
dosage.Thisdrugisverypopularatravescenes
in the United Kingdom and the United States of
America but has only recently been detected on
the South African scene.
. KETAMINE This drug is known as Special K or just as K. It
gained popularity in the 1980s mainly because
when taken in large doses it causes hallucinatory
effects much like LSD. Ketamine is produced in
liquid form or as a white powder and is often
snorted or even smoked with Dagga or tobacco
cigarettes. It is very popular in the United States

Adolescent substance abuse: perspectives on club drugs 257
of America where it has reportedly been injected.
Side effects are dangerous and severe and
include delirium, amnesia, impaired motor
function, a rapid rise in blood pressure, depression
and potentially fatal respiratory problems.
It affects the learning ability, memory and
results in impaired attention span.
. ROHYPNOL Rohypnol (flunitrazepam) belongs to the benzodiazepines
class of drugs such as Valium or
Halcion. In the United States of America this
drug is deemed so dangerous in date-related
rape cases that it has been removed from the
approved list for prescription usage. It is still
approved for use in Europe and South Africa. It
is generally used in severe cases for the treatment
of insomnia. The slang street names for this
drug are Roofies, Rophies, Roche or the Forget
Me Pill. The drug is tasteless and odourless and
mixes easily in carbonated beverages, wine or
beer. This drug can cause profound amnesia and
individuals may not remember the events they
experienced while under the effects of the drug.
Side effects such as a decrease in blood pressure,
severe drowsiness, visual disturbances, confusion,
gastrointestinal disturbance and urinary
retention have been reported. In South Africa
abuse of this drug is on the increase (Rapport 1
November 1998:4).
. METHAMPHETAMINE
This drug is a toxic, addictive stimulant that
affects the central nervous system. The drug is
often snorted, smoked, injected or orally ingested.Sideeffectsofthisdrughaveserious
health consequences, including memory loss,
aggression, violence, psychotic behaviour and

258
potential cardiac and neurological damage.
Drug abusers who use this drug display signs of
agitation, excited speech, decreased appetite and
a high increase of physical activity levels.
. LSD The street names for LSD (Lysergic Acid
Diethylamide) are Acid, Boomers, Yellow Sunshine,
Candy, Smarties, Green Goblins, White
Lightning and Strawberry Fields. This drug is a
hallucinogen. The effects of LSD are individual
and unpredictable, often depending on the
amount taken. LSD is taken orally in tablet,
capsule and liquid form and in pieces of blotter
paper that have absorbed the drug. The physical
effects of the drug include dilated pupils, higher
body temperature, increased heart rate and
blood pressure, excessive sweating, loss of
appetite, sleeplessness, dry mouth, tremors and
nausea. Two long-term disorders are associated
with LSD, namely persistent psychosis and
hallucinogen persisting perception disorder,
commonly known as flashbacks.
This is a so-called ``soul and mind expanding''
drug which is used to escape reality. Signs of
dependence are emotional swings, paranoia,
bizarre behaviour, flashbacks, visions and hallucinations,
disruptive mental activity, illusions
and pseudo hallucinations such as the distortion
of existing images. This is a dangerous drug due
to the neurological damage, depression and
intense paranoia that may occur when it is used.
7 DRUGS USED TOGETHER WITH CLUB DRUGS
Club drugs are seldom used in isolation. They are often consumed
together with other drugs, such as alcohol, Dagga, Mandrax and Dagga
and Crack, which enhance the effect of the club drug (De Miranda
1998:36).

Adolescent substance abuse: perspectives on club drugs 259
. Alcohol
Adolescents often refer to alcohol as juice, booze or dop.
According to The Star (1999:1±2), many adolescents experiment
with cocktails of different beverages together with the
club drug Ecstasy and are often ``caught up ... in a web of
peer pressure and the chance of earning extra pocket
money ...'' when they consume alcohol, smoke dagga and
influence their friends to use and sell Ecstasy. Alcohol abuse
leads to impaired functioning in a social and interpersonal
sphere and withdrawal symptoms can be severe. The danger
in the abuse of alcohol lies in the fact that it causes mental
disorientation and a lack of alertness. Consuming excessive
amounts can result in blackouts and convulsions. When
alcohol is taken together with other club drugs it enhances
the effect of the club drug to exceedingly dangerous levels.
. Dagga and Mandrax
The street name for Dagga is a joint, grass, zol, boom, skyf,
poison, hash and mojat. Dagga is a relatively cheap drug in
South Africa. It is very popular and is known for its ability to
create a feeling of well-being and euphoria to escape from
reality. Dagga is extremely emotionally addictive. Withdrawal
symptoms are often severe and include restlessness,
aggression, insomnia, mood swings, lack of self-control,
lethargy, irritability, nausea, decreased appetite and headaches.
The danger in using this drug is that it distorts the
user's perception and can lead to excessive aggression when
combined with alcohol. It can lead to toxic psychosis and
physical damage through bronchial irritation, increased risk
of throat and lung cancer, chromosome damage, interference
with ovulation hormones and sterility.
Mandrax is known on the street as Mandies, buttons or
whites. It is used together with dagga. The tablet is crushed
and smoked in a Dagga pipe, which is then called a white
pipe. It can cause aggressiveness, mental disorientation and
confusion and serious respiratory and circulatory collapse

260
and is characterised by severe physiological dependence in
users. It can lead to coma and death from an overdose,
especially if taken together with alcohol and other club
drugs, such as Ecstasy.
. Crack
Crack is also known as Rock. It is the smokable version of
cocaine and is often smoked together with dagga. It is
manufactured from Cocaine powder by cooking the Cocaine
powder. Crack may cause severe anger and aggression and is
recognised as a contributing factor in drug abuse-related
community crime and violence. The side effects of this drug
are severe, ranging from mental depression and lethargy to
high blood pressure, damage to tissue of the nasal passages if
it is sniffed, convulsions while death may occur from an
overdose.
8 ADOLESCENT SUBSTANCE ABUSE: QUALITATIVE
FIELD RESEARCH
The relationship between peer group pressure and drug addiction
among school-going adolescents is well known (Hoberg 1993:159). In
2000 the researcher undertook a qualitative field research project to
probe the life-world of the adolescent substance abuser of club drugs.
The researcher aimed to search for a correlation with existing research
in the literature and to probe corresponding problems experienced by
the research participants. Generalisation was not envisaged. In this
respect Schumacher and McMillan (1993:373) conclude that ``generalizability
is usually not the immediate purpose of qualitative research;
however, the understanding of people's experiences and the concepts
generated from a case study are often extended in subsequent case
studies or more structured designs''.
The case studies in the research project were based on a qualitative

Adolescent substance abuse: perspectives on club drugs 261
orientation in order to analyse and explore the complexities of the lifeworld
of the adolescent substance abuser. In this context Smith
(1987:174) contends that ``qualitative researchers study qualities or
entities and seek to understand them in a particular context''.
9 SELECTION OF THE RESPONDENTS
The six respondents who participated in the case study were all
selected purposefully. In this respect Schumacher and McMillan
(1993:375) maintain that ``qualitative researchers investigate small,
distinct groups''. The main criteria were that each respondent should
have been a drug abuser, should have used club drugs and should have
been rehabilitated. The reason rehabilitated respondents were selected
is that it is very difficult for a researcher to enter the subculture or
world of substance abusers as they are unwilling to divulge information
because they fear they will be taken into custody by the police or
that their drug supply will be cut off if it becomes known that they are
talking to a researcher. It is for this reason that the researcher selected
rehabilitated abusers.
The study was limited to a small group (N=6), which is typical of
qualitative research where the aim is not to generalise but to generate
rather than prove hypotheses. All the respondents who participated in
the case studies were between the ages of 15 and 19. Four of the
respondents used prostitution as a means to earn money to secure
drugs.
10 THE CASE STUDY DESIGN
Schumacher and McMillan (1993:373) argue that ``qualitative research
is concerned with understanding the social phenomenon from the
participants' perspective ... understanding is acquired by analyzing
the many contexts of the participants and by narrating participants'
meanings''. Schumacher and McMillan (1993:375) state that through
the flexibility and adaptability of the case study design, ``a range of
contexts, processes, people, and foci provides some of the most useful
methods available in educational research'' and that the case study
design means that ``data analysis focusses on the one phenomenon

262
which the researcher selects to understand in depth regardless of the
number of sites, participants or documents for a study''. The case study
design in this study was considered highly suitable as it focused on one
phenomenon, namely the use of club drugs by school-going adolescents.
Interviews and the personal document were used as data-collection
strategies in the case study design.
. Interviews
Structured and unstructured in-depth interviews were used to ``obtain
the desired data with maximum efficiency and minimum bias''
(Tuckman 1987:237). Unstructured in-depth interviews were conducted
with all the respondents, while the researcher assumed the role
of ``participant-observer'' (Schumacher & McMillan 1993:415). With
reference to participative-observation in qualitative research, Mouton,
Marais, Prinsloo and Rhoodie (1988:164) indicate that by means of
participative observation, the researcher is in a position to observe all
the phenomena personally and thus all spontaneous occurrences can be
noted. Moreover, the situation is characterised by ``openness'' so that
any unexpected occurrences can be registered.
. Personal document
The respondents were all asked to write a personal document. In this
study, the personal documents consisted of a short essay in which the
respondents were asked to reflect on the influence of their peers, the
useofclubdrugs,andwhyandhowtheywererehabilitated.Inthe
tradition of qualitative research, the personal document is used to
study the individuals' actions, experiences and their own personal
evaluation of their life-world situation. The personal document reveals
the individuals' own view of their experiences. It is ``a short
spontaneous, personal sketch'' which is a phenomenological descriptive
method in qualitative research that incorporates content analysis
so that the researcher is able to ``systematically decode messages, or
information in them into categories'' (Chadwick, Bahr & Albrecht
1984:23).

Adolescent substance abuse: perspectives on club drugs 263
11 DATA ANALYSIS
All the interviews were recorded by means of an audio tape and then
meticulously transcribed while a simple coding system was used to
identify topics or recurring themes. The analysis of the personal
documents of each of the respondents was based on Omery (1983:57±
58) and Giorgi's (1985:10±40) steps, namely to identify certain
recurrent themes or constituents in the documents. Finally the
constituents were integrated, cross-validated and compared with the
constituents that emerged from the interviews, after which they were
synthesised in a descriptive analysis.
12 FINDINGS OF THE STUDY
The following main constituents or themes recurred in the interviews
and the respondents' personal documents.
. Problems related to peer group influence and the use of club drugs
All the respondents admitted to problems regarding peer group
pressure to use club drugs. They expressed a certain amount of fear at
admitting these issues as they felt it could be interpreted that they were
weak or inadequate in their social life. Although they were still in the
rehabilitation programme and were not taking drugs or even attending
the same social raves anymore, they all expressed a yearning to be
acceptedbytheirpeers.Oneoftherespondentssaidthathefelt
``extremely lonely when my peers ignored me when I started with the
drug rehabilitation programme''. All the respondents reported feelings
of loneliness, isolation, helplessness and anger at the thought that they
were currently being rejected by their previous peer cluster. They all
admitted to experiencing high levels of stress related to the rejection by
their peers at the stage when they chose rehabilitation. They felt that at
some stages the responsibility to rehabilitate was almost unbearable
and it would have been easy for them to relapse had it not been for the
peer counselling they were still receiving. They all admitted that peer
influence is a very strong motivational factor in terms of drug abuse
and especially the use of club drugs. All the respondents agreed that
peer influence was the main reason they started using club drugs and
that it was important for them to be ``in with the crowd''.

264
. Thephysicaleffectsoftheuseofclubdrugs
All the respondents admitted that they initially started abusing
alcohol, then moved on to smoke Dagga after which they smoked
``white pipes'' (a mixture of Mandrax and Dagga) and that they were
``freaking out on E'' (Ecstasy) on a regular basis. Two of the
respondents used crack on a regular basis. All the respondents stated
that they tried to stay away from rave parties and to avoid their drug
abusing peer pushers but found it impossible to break the vicious circle
on their own while they were still attending the rave parties. One of the
respondents said in retrospection that it seemed ``as though drugs
followed me and that everywhere I went there were people on E''
(Ecstasy). All the respondents reported that initially they all started on
drugs because of the ``highs'' and ``kicks'' it gave them until eventually
their all-consuming thought was about drugs, how to get hold of them
and where to get money to buy the drugs. One of the respondents said
``I was robbed of my innocence and my childhood ... I started just to be
in and soon I was totally hooked ... I wasted so many of my young
years.''
The two adolescent respondents who reported that they had been
addicted to crack said that they experienced it as a severe addiction
and became seriously addicted after trying the drug two or three times.
They said this drug is also a club drug and the ``kick'' or ``high'' is
instantaneous. Unfortunately, the effect wears off rapidly with the
result that they always experienced depression after use. One of the
respondents said that ``it is worse to live without crack than to OD''
(overdose on Crack which will cause death). Both the respondents
reported that they became physically violent while they took Crack.
All the respondents reported that they abused alcohol on a regular
basis and that the effect of the cocktail of Dagga, Mandrax and Ecstasy
was greatly enhanced by alcohol. They all agreed that they always
consumed alcohol in large quantities before they used their club drugs.
All the respondents reported that soon they were not just using the
drugs at rave parties but yearned for the drugs on a daily basis and

Adolescent substance abuse: perspectives on club drugs 265
were soon consuming the drugs daily. One of the respondents said ``I
could think of nothing else ... nothing else mattered ... not my
schoolwork or my family, or anything ... I would sleep with anybody
to get drugs.''
All the respondents reported that at some stage of their young lives
they were introduced to the drug Rohypnol. Two of the respondents
reported that they were sexually abused while under the influence of
this drug. Four of the respondents reported that they suffered sexual
abuse after using large doses of Mandrax and Dagga because they fell
into a deep sleep only to wake up in an intoxicated state. All the
respondents reported that they suffered physical effects, such as
restlessness, headaches, impaired co-ordination, impaired concentration,
frequent bouts of vomiting and slurred speech, because of their
substance abuse habits. Two of the respondents had to be treated for
irregular heart rhythm while one of the respondents was taken to
hospital after excessive dehydration at a rave party when she had
consumed too much alcohol and Ecstasy. She reported that she was
comatose for 48 hours and that according to her doctor she is lucky to
be alive. After this incident she decided to start with a rehabilitation
programme.
All the respondents reported that their schoolwork suffered because of
their drug abusing habits. They admitted that they were out of control
and that they could never have beaten the habit on their own. All the
respondents agreed that family connections are very important to them
now but when they were using the club drugs their families did not
exist for them. Two of the respondents came from divorced families
and both respondents lived with their mothers. All the respondents
agreed that as far as they were concerned, school principals do not
initiate enough drug prevention programmes and that most of these
programmes lack depth and are not taken seriously enough by schoolgoing
adolescents.
All the respondents reported that during their substance abuse years
they suffered from severe physical and emotional dependence, they

266
abused alcohol and often became comatose, they experienced respiratory
complications, such as severe and prolonged coughing, that they
slurred their words, often had circulatory problems and suffered from
insomnia.
. The emotional effects of the use of club drugs
All the respondents reported that the emotional effects of the use of
club drugs was, in actual fact, more severe than their actual physical
addiction. They reported that once the physical addiction is broken, the
great temptation of emotional addiction remains. One of the respondents
reported that she felt ``incredibly powerful'' when she used club
drugs. All the respondents reported that although they had tried
desperately to kick their substance abusing habit on their own, they
could not succeed because they longed to ``feel good''. All the
respondents reported that they suffered from severe depression when
they did not use their drugs and that they could not last a single day
without ``a fix''.
Two of the respondents reported that they considered Mandrax a very
addictive drug because the psychological dependence and tolerance to
the drug develops rapidly, which means that the user has constantly to
increase the dose in order to experience the same emotional high as
before. When withdrawal is abrupt they experienced symptoms such as
major bouts of depression, severe headaches, stomach cramps,
hallucinations, insomnia and feelings of anger. All the respondents
reported that Mandrax dependence is a very difficult habit to break.
All the respondents reported that they experienced severe mood
changes, emotional instability, restlessness, that their personal hygiene
and appearance had suffered with the result that in the end they had a
very low self-concept and self-image. All the respondents agreed that
the mental and emotional problems were very difficult to cope with.
. The importance of the availability of peer counselling
The respondents were all of the opinion that it would have helped them
if peer counsellors had been available to them when they realised that
they were addicted and when they tried to break the habit on their

Adolescent substance abuse: perspectives on club drugs 267
own. They all agreed that it is easier to ``speak to a person who is
almostourownageandwhoisnottheretotellushowbadweare''.
The respondents reported that they found it difficult to talk to adults
about their substance abuse habits. One of the respondents said in this
respectthat``teachersshouldhavemoreknowledgeaboutdrug
abuse ... they should know what we are going through ... the school
should help us and give us peer councillors who can understand us''.
All the respondents stressed the importance of available peer
counselling and teachers who are knowledgeable about drug abuse.
Four of the respondents reported that they knew of many school-going
adolescents who wanted to rehabilitate but were too scared to consult
their parents or teachers because they feared their adverse reactions.
These respondents also reiterated that peer counselling could be the
first step to successful rehabilitation.
. The seriousness of drug abuse among school-going adolescents
Alltherespondentsstressedthatfewteachersorprincipalsreally
know the serious extent of the adolescent drug abuse picture. It was
expressed that they (school principals and teachers) lack the basic
knowledge of how to help and tackle the issue of drug abuse with the
result that drug abuse prevention strategy programmes at school are
generally not taken seriously. All the respondents reported that they
felt that if their teachers and school principals really knew what was
going on, they would be shocked at the serious extent of drug abuse.
Four of the respondents expressed feelings of anger because of this.
When confronted with the fact that it was still their own decision to use
club drugs, all the respondents said that they accept this but when they
wanted to rehabilitate and realised that they should seek help, they
were all too scared to approach teachers at their schools or the school
principal because they feared that they would be expelled from school
and that they would get their parents in trouble. All the respondents
stressed the fact that while many teenagers experiment with drugs not
all of them become addicted but that for those who do become
addicted, there should be adequate and available channels to help
them when they wish to become rehabilitated at this critical point in
their lives.

268
The respondents all reported that they knew that their peers who
attend rave parties experiment with Ecstasy. They were all of the
opinion that it is almost impossible to attend a rave party or dance
throughout the night and not use Ecstasy or some or other form of drug
that would enhance their energy levels. All the respondents reiterated
that drug abuse in South Africa is seriously on the increase, that
schools should be much more knowledgeable to be able to render
assistance in terms of rehabilitation and that prevention should be
taken more seriously. The respondents also felt that parents should
become enlightened about the problems that adolescents experience
and that the school and peer counsellors can play a major role in
practice.
13 RECOMMENDATIONS
There is a serious increase in the use of club drugs and at the most basic
level the school should play a far more concerted role in prevention
and rehabilitation. While it was not within the scope of this article to
report on the attitude of school teachers and principals, during the
interviews with the respondents and personal contact with schools the
researcher found it a problem that many school principals maintain
that rehabilitation is not their field but that prevention is. It is often
easier to expel problem drug-addicted adolescents than to render
effective assistance. This study concentrated mainly on probing the
life-world of school-going drug abusing adolescents by means of case
studies to ascertain the issues in terms of the use of club drugs.
While it is accepted that it is not the responsibility of the school to
render medical assistance to drug abusing school-going adolescents, it
is strongly recommended that the school should play a major role in
providing peer counsellors to assist students when they are in need at
such a critical point in their lives. To merely expel drug addicted
school-going adolescents is not the answer to this issue, but is rather a
successful effort to rid the school of the problem. It is further
recommended that peer counsellors be provided with every opportunity
to equip and empower themselves with the necessary knowledge
to be able to render assistance to their addicted peers.

Adolescent substance abuse: perspectives on club drugs 269
While it is accepted that there certainly is no easy solution to the issue
of substance abuse among school-going adolescents, it is maintained
that drug abuse prevention is still better than cure. In this respect it is
recommended that school prevention strategies should be emphasised
and regarded in a more serious light. Moreover, school principals,
teachers and parents should be empowered with knowledge on how to
render meaningful assistance when confronted by drug abusing
school-going adolescents. Workshops could well be the answer to
enlighten parents about the issues pertaining to substance abuse and,
in particular, the increasing use of club drugs. Such workshops could
be presented at the school by experts in the field while the content of
the programme should take cognisance of the contextual realities of the
life-world of the drug addicted adolescent.
Much more needs to be explored in terms of research into the
phenomenon of substance abuse with specific reference to the use of
club drugs. It is recommended that more in-depth research be
undertaken on a qualitative and quantitative basis and focus on issues
of peer influence and the use of club drugs.
14 SUMMARY
Club drugs are by no means fun drugs. These drug are here to stay. The
researcher agrees with Oetting and Beauvais (1990:22) who maintain
that when adolescents use drugs, ``it is almost always a direct
reflection of their peer society, for peers help to shape attitudes about
drugs, provide the social contexts for drug use and when people share
their ideas, they help form the rationales that the youth uses to explain
and excuse drug use''. School-going adolescent substance abuse is not
a static phenomenon but an issue that is escalating at an alarming rate.
The school, the principal, the teachers and peer counsellors still remain
the path of effective prevention and primarily the school as an
organization should contribute to some form of a solution in practice.
The education system unquestionably prepares the adolescent for life
and although there is still much to be learned and researched on drug
abuse prevention and rehabilitation, the school's important educative
role and influence in this field cannot be ignored.

270
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Ausubel, D P, Montemayor, R and Svajian, P N 1977. Theory and problems of adolescent
development. New York: Grune & Stratton.
Bandura, A 1964. The stormy decade: fact or fiction. New York: Ronald Press.
Botvin, G J, Schinke, S and Orlandi, A M 1995. Drug abuse prevention with multi-ethnic
youth. London: Sage.
Carey, J and Knight, A 1990. County collaboration creates a unique drug treatment
program for adolescents. Thrust for Education Leadership, 19(4):27±29.
Chadwick, B A, Bahr, M H and Albrecht, S L 1984. Social science research methods.
Englewood Cliffs, NJ: McGraw Hill.
Community Drug Alert Bulletin. 2001. (www.drugabuse.gov/published)
De Miranda, S 1998. The South African guide to drugs and drug abuse. Johannesburg:
Collins.
Erikson, E H 1980. Identity and life cycle. New York: Norton.
Giorgi, A 1985. Phenomenology and psychological research. Pittsburgh: Duquesne University
Press.
Hall, G S 1904. Adolescence: its psychology and its relations to physiology, anthropology,
sociology, crime, religion and education. New York: Appleton.
Hoberg, S M 2001. Paper presented at the International Conference for Drug Abuse
Prevention and Rehabilitation, 30 May 2001. Los Angeles.
Hoberg, S M 1993. In Critical issues in education edited by EI Dekker and EM Lemmer.
Durban: Butterworths.
Hoberg, S M. 1993. Verband tussen portuurgroepdruk en dwelmverslawing by
skoolgaande adolessente. SA Tydskrif vir Opvoedkunde, 13(4):159±165.
Ianni, F A J 1990. Providing a structure for adolescent development. PHI Delta Kappan (4):
673±681.
Krech, D, Crutchfield, R S and Livson, N 1969. Elements of psychology. Second edition.
NewYork:Knopf.
McCoy, C B, Metsch, L R and Inciardi, J A 1996. Intervening with drug-involved youth.
London: Sage.
Mouton, J, Marais, HC, Prinsloo, K P en Rhoodie, N J 1988. Metodologie van die
geesteswetenskappe: basiese begrippe. Pretoria: Raad vir Geesteswetenskaplike
Navorsing.
Muus, R E 1970. Adolescent development and the secular trend. Adolescent (5):267±284.
Naginey, J L and Swisher, J D 1990. To whom would adolescents turn with drug
problems? Implications for school professionals. High School Journal (2):80±85.

Adolescent substance abuse: perspectives on club drugs 271
Oetting, E R and Beauvais, F 1990. Adolescent drug use: findings of national and local
surveys. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology (58):385±394.
Ofer, D and Ofer, J 1969. The psychological world of the teenager: a study of normal adolescent
boys. New York: Basic Books.
Ofer, D, Ostrove, E and Howard, K I 1981. The adolescent: a psychological self-portrait. New
York: Basic Books.
Omery, A 1983. Phenomenology: a method for nursing research. Advances in Nursing
Science, 5(2):49±63.
Papalia, D E and Olds, S W 1975. A child's world. New York: McGraw Hill.
Rice, FP 1981. The adolescent, development, relationships and culture. Boston: Allyn & Bacon.
Schumacher, S and McMillan, J H 1993. Research in education: a conceptual introduction.
Glasgow: HarperCollins.
Smith, M L 1987. Publishing qualitative research. American Education Research Journal,
14(2):173±183.
Thornburg, H D 1975. Development in adolescence. Monterey: Brooks Cole.
Tuckman, W B 1987. Conducting educational research. New York: Harcourt Brace
Jovanovich.
Warheit, G J, Biafora, F A, Zimmerman, R S, Gil, A G, Vega, W A and Apospori, E 1995.
Self-rejection/derogation, peer factors, and alcohol, drug, and cigarette use among
a sample of Hispanic, African-American and white non-Hispanic adolescents.
International Journal of the Addictions (30)97±116.
Weiner, I 1970. Psychological disturbance in adolescence. New York: Wiley-Interscience.
Wenar, C 1990. Developmental psychopathology from infancy through adolescence. New York:
McGraw Hill.
World Drug Report 2001. United Nations Office for Drug Control and Crime Prevention
(www.un.org 2001)
Newspaper articles
Rapport, 1 November 1998.
Pretoria News, 8 February 2001.
Pretoria News, 4 January 2001.
The Star, 4 May 1999.

272
The issue of perception:
some educational
implications
Dr A Lewis
Department of Primary School
Teacher Education
Unisa
Differences in perception are central to both the practice and research in education. It is
thus necessary for educational practitioners to understand the reason for differences in
perception in order to practice and do authentic research. It is therefore the aim of this
article to touch on the complex nature of the perceptual process and influencing factors
as well as provide three examples of educational phenomena in order to highlight
differences in interpretation. In conclusion, a few practical guidelines will be provided in
order to understand different modes of thinking and behaviour.
1 INTRODUCTION
As perceptions are central to both the practice and research in
education (Johnson 1994:475), researchers, learners and practitioners of
education very often have problems understanding why a person
thought or behaved in a specific way (Lewis 1999:4±5). McGregor
(1993:17) gives a practical example to illustrate the case in point: When
fourteen-year-olds writing an experimental school exit test were asked
to trace the shortest distance between two towns, white children got
the answer ``right'' while black children got it ``wrong''. The reason
being that the black township of Crossroads (situated close to Cape
Town) is situated between the two towns in the example. Black

The issue of perception: some educational implications 273
children perceived the township as dangerous and thus travelled
around the settlement while ``unpoliticized'' white children, to whom
the name Crossroads meant little, if anything at all, took the ``correct''
straight line. McGregor (1993:17) ascribes these differences to the
``... many things in South Africa (which) are twisted by politics and
totally different perceptions''.
In a country like South Africa, these different perceptions are very
often simply attributed to differences between black people who
represent an holistic, interdependent society and white people, who
maintain a Western, independent cultural style (cf Markus & Kitayama
1991:224±253). Although this cultural generalisation is scientifically
valid (cf Scherer & Walbott 1994:310±328; Scherer 1997:902±922; Choi
& Nisbett 1998:949±960), the reasons for differences in perception are
far more varied than that of a cultural explanation, a factor solely
expounded by Bergen (1992:6±8).
Individuals or groups experience stimuli from the outside world to
which they ascribe meaning. Although, in many instances these stimuli
are experienced similarly, they may often be interpreted differently
(Kearney 1984:41) due to a host of factors and may even lead to
misunderstandings in some instances. Why is this so? Is it a case of
naive realism or that people do not know how to take another's point
of view into consideration? These questions can initiate an endless
debate, but a first step to understanding others would be to understand
the perceptual process.
In the light of the above, it is the aim of this article to firstly touch on the complex
nature of the perceptual process and influencing factors, and secondly to propose
certain guidelines as to a better understanding of others.
2 DEFINITION AND ETYMOLOGICAL ROOTS OF THE
TERM ``PERCEPTION''
2.1 Definition
The study of human perception is a complex field (Cantril 1968:5;
Matlin & Foley 1992:2) with definitions and theories of the term being
highly interdisciplinary (McBurney & Collings 1984:1) and inconclusive
(Johnson 1994:476,492).

274
However, what has come to light from a study of literature is that it is
in the fields of Philosophy and Psychology that these definitions and
theories have their stronghold and are not without their theoretical
debates (Lewis 1999:30). In view of these observations a general
definition of the term ``perception'' will be provided and will be
viewed in this article as an understanding of the world constructed
from information obtained by means of the senses (Shaver in Johnson
1994:476).
2.2 Etymological foundations
Etymologically, the term ``perception'' is derived from the Old French
language term percepcõ È on and literally referred to the collecting of rents
by feudal landlords (Barnhart 1988, sv ``perception''). Cutting
(1987:62) observes that the present definition of the term has
maintained a degree of this prior usage in that it refers to the collecting
of information about the world by means of the senses (cf Simpson &
Weiner 1989, sv ``perception''). In a similar vane, the Latin terms
perceptH w o, percH w pH w o and perceptio}nem mean ``to take possession of or to
seize'', be it physically grasping something or mentally seizing
something with one's senses (Lewis & Short 1975, sv ``perceptG w o'',
``percG w pG w o''). The latter explanation refers to the focus of this article.
3 FUNDAMENTAL ASPECTS OF, AND CONDITIONS
FOR PERCEPTION
The act of perceiving consists of certain conditions and fundamental
elements (Jordaan & Jordaan 1996:329±332). These conditions and
fundamental aspects transcend the scholarly debates surrounding the
perceptual process (Lewis 1999:34). As these debates will not be
discussedinthisarticleduetotheircomplexandlengthynature,
suffice is to say that they have contributed to a better understanding of
the act of human perception (Shaver & Tarpy 1993:16±17).
3.1 Fundamental elements of perception
Fundamental to perception is that there is an experiencing person or
perceiver; secondly, that something is being perceived (either an

The issue of perception: some educational implications 275
object, person, situation or relationship); thirdly, there is the context of
the situation in which objects, events or persons are perceived and
finally, there is the process nature of perception starting with the
experiencing of multiple stimuli by the senses and ending with the
formation of percepts. Although it may appear from the abovementioned
to be a separated and slow process, cognisance must be
taken that the formation of percepts takes milliseconds to complete and
are not fragmented (Jordaan & Jordaan 1996:332).
3.2 Conditions for perception
Certain conditions have to be met before any act of perceiving can take
place. To Jordaan and Jordaan (1994:329±332) the first condition is that
there must be a sensory system that functions normally (cf Tibbetts
1969:1); secondly, that the sensory system be subjected to basic sensory
stimulation and thirdly, that the stimulation be in a constant state of
flux, both physiologically and psychologically.
4 THE PERCEPTUAL PROCESS AND INFLUENCING
FACTORS
In order to understand how humans give meaning to their world, one
has to understand the perceptual process as well as the various
influencing factors. With regard to the latter, Cantril (1968:5) sees any
perception as ``an awareness that emerges as a result of a most
complicated weighing process ... tak[ing] into account a whole host of
factors or cues''.
What follows is a conceptualisation of the perceptual process, a mere
understanding of the process, and not the conceptualisation Ð a
finality cast in stone. Several authors (cf Griffin & Moorhead 1986;
Randolph & Blackburn 1989; Jordaan & Jordaan 1996) see the process
of perception as following a pattern and conceptualise the perceptual
process by means of a model. Although McBurney and Collings
(1984:5) disagree with the use of a model portraying the perceptual
process for certain reasons, Randolph and Blackburn's (1989:83±95)
model is presented to show the process so as to gain a clearer
understanding.

276
4.1 Senses
As the definition of perception implies, the first step in the perceptual
process is the experiencing of multiple stimuli by means of the five
senses (Matlin & Foley 1992:2). Already one notes that physiological
differences and deficiencies in individuals may cause them to perceive
differently. In this instance, Coren, Ward and Enns (1999:2) note that
``... your world is what your senses tell you. The limitations of your
senses set the boundaries of your conscious existence''.
4.2 Observation and selection of focus
The sheer amount of information observed by the human senses places
restrictions on the human's ability to process everything at once (Baron
& Byrne 2000:80,136). The continual bombardment of the senses by
phenomena implies that humans will select those which they want to
notice due to a range of factors. Randolph and Blackburn (1989:85±89)
conceptualise this aspect of the perceptual process as the ``observation
and selection of focus''. To them, after stimuli are observed, humans
choose their point of focus due to a range of factors within the
perceiver, the perceived target and the situational context in which the
perception is made (cf Robbins 1991:125±126). The following include
some factors within the perceiver, the target and context which affect
perception:
. The Perceiver
Various researchers identify and emphasise certain characteristics of
the perceiver which can modify perception. Randolph and Blackburn
(1989:87) identify three such factors, namely that which the individual
has previously learnt, as well as the motivation and the personality of
the perceiver, while Coren et al (1999:532±550) see physiological,
gender as well as personality and cognitive differences as contributing
to differences in perception. Robbins (1991:129) sees the attitudes,
interests, motives, experience and expectations of the perceiver as
having an influence on that which is perceived while Johnson
(1994:479) argues in favour of Forgus and Melamed's (1976) categorisation.
These latter authors include firstly, the influence of social
experience and cultural background (cf Choi & Nisbett 1998:949±960);

The issue of perception: some educational implications 277
secondly, the impact of the perceiver's values (cf Postman, Bruner and
McGinnies 1948:142±154), attitudes and personality; thirdly, the
dynamics of person perception and lastly the perceptions of causality
in social events as having an influence on that which affects the
perceiver's perception.
. The perceived object/subject
If one looks at an object or subject, you form perceptions of what you
see due to it having certain characteristics. Randolph and Blackburn
(1989:85±86) categorise these characteristics as physical and/or
dynamic.
Physical elements may be size or physical appearance (cf The Sunday
Independent, 7 January 1996:15), intensity (an object's brilliance or a
person's resonance), contrast (objects or persons which stand out
against their background) and novelty (unfamiliarity).
Dynamic elements may include motion (moving objects or people are
more likely to be focussed on), repetition (stimuli that are repeated
often receive more attention) and the arrangement of the target.
. The situational context
The context or situation in which objects or events are perceived
influences subsequent thoughts and behaviour (Randolph and Blackburn
1989:87). Aspects such as the cultural context (Scherer & Walbott
1994:310±328; Scherer 1997:902±922), the social situation as well as the
location and time of an incident (Randolph & Blackburn 1989:87;
Robbins 1991:129) all have a profound influence on that which is being
perceived.
4.3 Frame of reference filter
After stimuli of a person or object have been experienced by the senses
within a specific situation or context, they are processed through what
Randolph and Blackburn (1989:89±92) term a ``frame of reference
filter''. To these authors, this is the initial phase of the attribution of
meaning to the experienced phenomena.

278
In this frame of reference process, the characteristics of the perceiver
become dominant with past and present experiences rendering a major
role. Past experiences are associated with particular emotions and
cognitions and when similar present experiences are encountered,
humans tend to rely on past feelings and thoughts to interpret the
perceived phenomena (Lewis 1999:42). Present experiences also play
an important role in the perceptual process and may even modify and
influence past thoughts and feelings ``except where [humans] consciously
resist their prejudicial influence'' (Johnson 1994:481).
4.4 Allocation of meaning
To Randolph and Blackburn (1989:92±94), the final step in the
perceptual process is the assignment of meaning to the perceived
phenomena that have been selected and processed through the
previously mentioned frame of reference filter. In order to understand
others' and our own behaviour, the process of attribution comes into
operation.
With reference to a social context, while observing other humans in
specific situations, humans make judgements about others and
attribute meaning based on observed behaviour (Cushner et al. 1992:32;
Finchilescu 1992:210; Baron & Byrne 2000:49). Several theories have
been proposed to explain the attribution process (Baron & Byrne
2000:49±57), and although they invariably differ, they all depart from
the premise that a person's behaviour was either caused internally (eg
motives and intentions), externally (some aspect of the social or
physical world) or due to a combination of the two (Tyson 1987:328±
329; Robbins 1991:129±130; Finchilescu 1992:210; Baron & Byrne
2000:49±57). Cognisance must be taken of the fact that although
attribution models are generally valid, Tyson's (1987:331) caution must
be observed where he notes that ``... there are systematic biases which
exist and which can lead to serious errors in the judgements we make''.
Cushner, McClelland and Safford (1992:61) agree and note that in
many instances certain attributions may be incorrect as not all the
information is considered when attributing a cause to a specific
behaviour. Tyson (1987:332) offers a possible answer to this problem
by noting that much research in this field has been conducted in

The issue of perception: some educational implications 279
Western cultures, with little being done in non-western settings.
Westerners, to Tyson, may approach behaviour in a more individualistic
and independent manner, while non-western cultures may or
may not be more interdependent, holistic and collective in their
approach (cf Markus & Kitayama 1991:224±253).
However, errors in attribution can and do occur. Common errors in
attribution may be the fundamental attribution error (also known as
the correspondence bias) and the self-serving bias. The fundamental
attribution error is the tendency to overestimate the influence of
internal factors and underestimate the influence of external factors
when judging others' behaviour, while the self-serving bias is when
individuals attribute internal factors to their own successes, while
blaming their failures on external factors. To Baron and Byrne (2000:60)
the strength of both these errors tends to be stronger in independent or
individualistic cultures than in interdependent or holistic cultures.
Errors in the perceptual process may also occur due to an information
overload (cf Baron & Byrne 2000:86). In this instance, strategies are
applied by humans in making sense of so much information, as
accurately as possible. These strategies or shortcuts are referred to as
heuristics.
5 HEURISTICS: MENTAL SHORTCUTS
Humans develop strategies or shortcuts, referred to as heuristics, when
perceiving. Heuristics are used as the exposure to information is
tremendous and strategies are needed to simplify the process. In many
instances these heuristics are valuable, but may very often lead to
perceptual errors (Baron & Byrne 2000:80). Although authors differ in
their categorization of these strategies (cf Sears et al 1985:54; Johnson
1994:482; Baron & Byrne 2000;86±89), only three such strategies and
their potential to digress will be discussed in this article.

280
5.1 Stereotypes
Stereotyping is a generalised assumption attributing identical characteristics
(real and imagined) to all members of group or class to
which individuals belong (Reber 1985, sv ``stereotype''; Tyson
1987:341; Johnson 1994:482).
Stereotypes can be either positive or negative (Botha et al. 1993:60). In
the case of the former, stereotyping facilitates easier assimilation of
large amounts of information, while in the latter sense generalisations
can become so common, despite them having no bases and credibility,
leading to inaccurate perceptions (Lewis 1999:46±47) and prejudice
(Baron and Byrne 2000:229±230). Prejudices and negative stereotypes
can therefore hamper intergroup relations (Tyson 1987:341±343),
especially in a country like South Africa.
5.2 Projection
Projection occurs when the perceivers' own characteristics, traits,
emotions and dispositions are attributed to those of other people. This
implies that people's perception of others is influenced more by what
the observer is like, than by what the person being observed is like
(Robbins 1991:133).
5.3 Selective perceptions
Selective perceptions takes place when people selectively interpret
what they perceive based on their own interests, background,
experience and attitudes (Griffin & Moorhead 1986:77). This implies a
failing to take the whole picture into account when drawing inferences.
As the perceiver sees what he or she wants to see, due to their bases of
interpretation, unwarranted conclusions from an ambiguous situation
can be drawn (Robbins 1991:132).
6 THE INTERSUBJECTIVE NATURE OF PERCEPTION
What has transpired from this cursory overview of the perceptual
process is that, due to the uniqueness of each human being, there
should be as many ``subjective realities'' as there are people in this

The issue of perception: some educational implications 281
world (cf Rock 1975:5; Jordaan & Jordaan 1996:397±404). Common
sense however refutes this claim, as there are instances where different
groups and individuals perceive similarly, for example, perceptual
agreement amongst cultural groups (cf Bergen 1992:6).
When different people or groups have (more or less) reached consensus
about a certain perception, they have reached what Jordaan and
Jordaan (1996:397) term ``intersubjective agreement''. To these authors:
``Intersubjectivity ... ensures that our perceptions of reality and the
appropriateness of our behaviour can be verified through consensual
validation (italics in text)'' (Jordaan & Jordaan 1996:400). However, not
all people within a certain cultural group agree with each other and
there is even a degree of consensus amongst people with totally
different cultural backgrounds, an example being agreement amongst
academics with regard to a certain topic.
Contributing factors to this phenomenon are legion and include
amongst other things, the influence of media (Wiehahn 1987:12), as
well as cultural norms (cf Bergen 1992:6) and learning (Lewis 1999:53).
The importance of the intersubjective nature of perception is that it it
gives one an idea what perceptions prevail in society as well as a means
of understanding and taking such perceptions into account. As Jordaan
and Jordaan (1996:401±402) point out regarding its importance to
conflict resolution:
If we knew what sort of intersubjective categories govern the behaviour of
a particular person or group of people, we would better understand the
reality they perceive. We would, for instance, argue less about what a
particular matter means because we would know that we probably see it
differently.
In the light of the aforesaid, three examples will be discussed briefly in
an attempt to highlight the reality of perceptual differences within
education in South Africa.

282
7 EXAMPLES OF EDUCATIONAL PERCEPTIONS IN
SOUTH AFRICA
Given the dynamic and developmental nature of the perceptual process
and influencing factors, one can expect varied perceptions of certain
educational aspects. Very often, perceptions are used to create negative
and misleading images of South African education and educational
policies thus creating a warped image of the educational reality (De
Vries 1992:36±37). One such example being South Africa's perceived
education crisis.
7.1 The perception of an education crisis
ThewordcrisisisderivedfromtheGreekwordkriasiB meaning
``turning point'' (Fowler & Fowler 1976, sv ``crisis''). The Chinese word
for crisis is wei-chi, wei meaning danger and chi meaning an
opportunity (Cushner et al 1992:17). Both the Chinese and Greek thus
perceive the concept as not only posing a threat, but also creating an
opportunity of improvement from this threat.
As a result of perceptual differences, people view the handling of a
crisis differently. One perception is that it is experienced negatively,
others view it as a challenge. This is especially so in the education
system of the country.
South African society has been characterised over the past decade by
accelerated changes. These changes have not been without problems
and uncertainties. These problems and uncertainties in turn create the
idea or perception that South African society is facing an irreversible
breakdown or crisis. Cushner et al. (1992:17) note that many Americans
often think of the term ``crisis'' in a negative sense Ð implying an
upset. This perception is also very evident in South Africa, especially
when referring to the education system.
Reasons why South Africans perceive education in a negative sense are
legion. Possible contributing factors are the role of the media (Wiehahn
1989:12) with newspaper journalists using the concept mainly negatively
in newspaper headings when referring to a perceived problem in

The issue of perception: some educational implications 283
the educational situation (Die Burger, 17 Mei 1993:18). Political parties
also use the term in election rhetoric and propaganda in national
newspapers to canvass votes with promises of addressing this so-called
problem (Sunday Times, 30 May 1993:14; Rapport, 31 Desember 1995:2).
However, to state that all South Africans perceive the concept in a
negative sense would be a blatant generalization. Archbishop Desmond
Tutu (1995:26) creates what appears to be a balanced impression
when stating that ``as South Africa enters the second year of ...
liberation ... we have inherited a mess: an educational crisis''.
However, he does present a case for opportunity by stating that South
Africans should become responsible for their own destiny by putting
``their shoulders to the wheel''. How and when remain unanswered
questions, but to perceive the education system as an irreversible
situation only creates negative thoughts and behaviour. The answer
lies in perceiving it not only as chaos, but also as a challenge and
opportunity.
Another concept that has and is subject to diverse interpretations is the
notion of democracy.
7.2 A varied perception of democracy
Since the 1994 democratic elections, all aspects of South African society
have reflected the idea of a democracy, with education being no
exception.
However, this term has been subjected to varying perceptions with
individuals and groups giving their own specific interpretation to the
term due to a host of factors. Hartshorne (1992:19) agrees and notes
that ``democracy means different things to different people, and in
recent years the word has been used by those who have little
understanding of it or desire to practise it''.
Not only does the concept of democracy lack a universally accepted
definition, but attempts to define the term are generally ``resisted from
all sides'' (Nguru 1995:59) giving rise to various perceptions of the
concept. According to Nguru (1995:60):

284
Many definitions of democracy tend to be tailor-made to fit specific types
of regimes or systems. They are often little more than exercises in political
marketing to sell those particular regimes or systems.
Even in South Africa, the term has been subjected to many interpretations,
possibly because the undemocratic ideology of Apartheid
in South Africa prevented certain groups' access to democratic
structures (Hartshorne 1992:94). Another reason noted by Retief
(1994:39) is that those in the Liberation Movements exiled in
Communist-Socialist countries were led to believe that those societies
reflected and upheld democratic principles.
In the last example a prevalent perception regarding freedom and
authority will briefly be discussed:
7.3 The perception of freedom and authority
To many observers, the authority in many South African education
institutions has fallen into a state of disarray. Tutu (1995:26) sees the
reason as being that ``too many people still mistake freedom for
licence'' thus ignoring the role and significance of authority and of
importance, the need to strike a magical balance between the two
concepts.
Charney (1995:55) and Pityana (1994:22) cite various reasons for this
lack of discipline: students being too politicised, lack of respect for
teachers, lack of disciplined behaviour by teachers and a lack of morals
and values by teachers and learners alike, all leading to a culture of
intolerance, violence and disregard for authority.
Given these contributing factors, one cannot forget that freedom
cannot exist without authority and although they exist as polarities,
they imply one another. To Venter (1992:37±39), freedom derives its
true content from authority, while authority, on the other hand, is only
true if it promotes and protects freedom. One factor contributing
largely to this magical balance is that of the development of selfdiscipline.
Venter (1992:38) views this as follows:

The issue of perception: some educational implications 285
If the individual submits himself [/or herself] to inner authority, he [/she]
becomes his [/her] true self, gains the good life and acquires spiritual
freedom and true happiness.
8 CONCLUDING REMARKS
The aim of this article was to show, in a reasonably elementary fashion,
how human beings make sense of their world. What has transpired is a
complex, dynamic and developmental process which acknowledges
that humans will and very often do differ in their interpretation of that
which is perceived.
It is in the light of the above that certain guidelines and recommendations
will be made in order for educational practitioners and
researchers to be more aware of others' thoughts and actions. These
being that:
. By keeping in mind the complexities of the perceptual
process, as well as taking cognisance of influencing factors,
perceptual errors may be minimised through an increased
openness to more information.
. Perceptual errors can be minimised and differences resolved
by communicating with people of different cultures, backgrounds
and training.
. Educational stakeholders should be understanding and
sensitive to others' points of view.
. Perceptual errors may be overcome if there is a willingness to
change one's perceptions when encountering new and
relevant information.
. Because perceptions are dynamic, people should realise that
previously held and current perceptions that were seen as
correct, may be changed due to the emergence of new and
valid information.
. Several factors are responsible for differences in perception
and an understanding and sensitivity to these factors should
be borne in mind when interpreting others' thinking and
behaviour.

286
. Although cultural factors play a large role in the difference in
perception, all their members will not necessarily think and
behave in a certain uniform way.
In conclusion, it is maybe fitting to note Johnson's (1994:487)
observation regarding the importance of knowledge of perceptual
theory in the educational context:
Educators and others may utilize their knowledge of perception theory
more personally to improve their perceptual skills and interactive
behaviour in order to approach their daily tasks and social interaction
more fully and more accurately informed.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Barnhart, R K (ed) 1988. The Barnhart Dictionary of Etymology. Sv ``perception''. Bronx,
NY: HW Wilson Company.
Botha, J H; Botha, T R & Engelbrecht, C S 1993. Verandering van stereotipes by
onderwysstudente. Suid-Afrikaanse Tydskrif vir Opvoedkunde, 13(2):60±64.
Baron, R A & Byrne, D 2000. Social Psychology: understanding human interaction. Ninth
edition. Needham Heights, MA: Allyn & Bacon.
Bergen, T J 1992. The cultural determination of perception. Education Journal, 101:6±8.
Cantril, H 1968. The nature of social perception. In Social perception: the development of
interpersonal impressions edited by H Toch & HC Smith. Princeton, NJ: D Van
Nostrand.
Charney, C 1995. Voices of a new democracy: African expectations in the new South Africa.
Research Report no. 38, January. Johannesburg: Centre for Policy Studies.
Choi, I & Nisbett, R E 1998. Situational salience and cultural differences in the
correspondence bias and actor-observer bias. Personality and Social Psychology
Bulletin, 24:949±960.
Coren, S; Ward, L M & Enns, J T 1999. Sensation and Perception. Fifth edition. Orlando,
Fla: Harcourt Brace.
Cushner, K; McClelland, A & Safford, P L 1992. Human diversity in education: an integrative
approach. New York: Mcgraw.
Cutting, J E 1987. Perception and information. Annual Review of Psychology, 38:61±90.
De Vries, C G 1992. Aspekte van die Filosofie van Skoolonderwys. Ongepubliseerde
MEd-notas. Universiteit van Stellenbosch, Stellenbosch.
Die Burger 1993. Krisis in swart skole al erger. 17 Mei: 1.

The issue of perception: some educational implications 287
Finchilescu, G 1991. Social cognition and attributions. In Social Psychology in South Africa
edited by D Foster and J Louw-Potgieter. Johannesburg: Lexicon.
Forgus, R H & Melamed, L E 1976. Perception: A cognitive-stage approach. Second edition.
New York: McGraw-Hill.
Fowler, F G & Fowler, H W 1976. The Pocket Oxford Dictionary of Current English. Sv
``crisis''. Great Britain: Oxford University Press.
Griffin, R W & Moorhead, G 1986. Organizational behavior. Boston,MA:HoughtonMifflin.
Hartshorne, K 1992. Crisis and challenge: Black education 1910±1990. Cape Town: Oxford
University Press.
Johnson, N A 1994. The pervasive, persuasive power of perceptions. The Alberta Journal of
Educational Research, XL(4):475±497.
Jordaan, W & Jordaan, J 1996. Man in context. Second edition. Isando: Lexicon.
Kearney, M 1984. World view. Novato, Calif: Chandler & Sharp.
Lewis, A 1992. Individual and community needs as aspects of the education crisis in
South Africa: A historical educational overview. MEd thesis, University of
Stellenbosch, Stellenbosch.
Lewis, A 1999. Past and present perceptions surrounding mission education: A historicalmetabletical
overview. DEd dissertation, University of Stellenbosch, Stellenbosch.
Lewis, C T & Short, C 1975. A Latin Dictionary. Sv``perceptHo'', ``percHpHo''. Oxford: Oxford
University Press.
Markus, H & Kitayama, S 1991. Culture and the self: Implications for cognition, emotion
and motivation. Psychological Review, 98:224±253.
Matlin, M W & Foley, H J 1992. Sensation and perception. Third edition. Needham Heights,
MA: Allyn & Bacon.
McBurney, D H & Collings, V B 1984. Introduction to sensation/perception. Second edition.
Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
McGregor, K 1993. Clash of classroom cultures. Weekend Argus, 2/3 October: 17.
Nguru, GM 1995. Education and democracy. South African Journal of Education, 15(2):59±
62.
Pityana, S 1994. Restore order in schools. Sunday Times, 22 May: 22.
Postman, L; Bruner, J S & McGinnies, E 1948. Personal values as selective values in
perception. Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology, 43:142±154.
Rock, I 1975. An introduction to perception. NewYork:Macmillan.
Randolph, W A & Blackburn, R S 1989. Managing Organizational Behavior. Boston,MA:
Irwin.
Reber, A S 1985. The Penguin Dictionary of Psychology. Sv ``cultural relativism'', ``halo
effect'', ``motivation'', ``perception'', ``projection'', ``stereotype''. London: Penguin
Books.

288
Retief, F P 1994. Die demokratisering van die Onderwys. Tydskrif vir Geesteswetenskappe,
34(2): 138±148.
Robbins, S P 1991. Organizational Behavior. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
Scherer, K R 1997. The role of culture in emotion-antecedent behaviour. Journal of
Personality and Social Psychology, 73:902±922.
Scherer, K R & Walbott, H G 1994. Evidence for universality and cultural variation of
differential emotion response patterning. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology,
66:310±328.
Sears, D O; Freedman, J L & Peplau, L A 1985. Social Psychology. Fifth edition. Englewood
Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
Shaver, K G & Tarpy, R M 1993. Psychology. New York: Macmillan.
Simpson,JA&Weiner,ESC1989. The Oxford English Dictionary. Vol.XI. Second edition.
Sv ``perception''. Oxford: Clarendon Press.
Sunday Times 1993. Black Education Crisis. A teacher's point of view. 30 May: 14.
The Sunday Independent 1996. Everywhere, little guys end up getting the short end of the
stick. 7 January: 15.
Tibbetts, P 1969. Introduction. In Perception: selected readings in Science and Phenomenology
edited by P Tibbetts. Chicago: Quadrangle Books.
Tutu, D 1995. We must not expect manna from heaven. Sunday Times. 23April:26.
Tyson, G A 1987. Social Psychology. In Introduction to Psychology: A South African
Perspective edited by GA Tyson. Johannesburg: Westro Educational Books.
Venter, I S J 1992. Freedom and authority in education. In Education Ð Past, Present and
Future, edited by E G Kruger. Pretoria: Euro Publications.
Wiehahn, N 1987. Moet hulle nie verwar met die feite nie. Rapport, 4 Januarie: 12.

Educational change: is it possible? 289
Educational change:
is it possible?
Johannes A Slabbert
Faculty of Education
University of Pretoria
Educational change is always a serious matter. When educators and/or learners do not
live up to the expectations of the change, the change is reconsidered. The most recent
mammoth educational change in South Africa with the implementation of OBE in 1997
has failed to deliver expected results. The most recent recommendations towards an
attempt to rescue the situation continue to indicate fundamental ignorance towards what
paradigmatic educational change requires. This article will reveal what research
suggests as the requirements for fundamental educational change. It will also discuss
how these principles were implemented in an in-service workshop for educators, how it
was responsible for the school with the best implementation of OBE in Gauteng since its
inception, and how it maintained this reputation through a persistent longitudinal effect of
eight years.
1 INTRODUCTION
When educational change fails to live up to its expectations, the change
should be reconsidered ± that is the correct thing to do. However, what
is done is of crucial importance. And we cannot allow this to be an
ideological or political consideration like in the past. Whether it is
change that needs to be re-considered or whether we need to start from
scratch, the question remains the same: What kind of educational
change is required?

290
2 WHAT KIND OF EDUCATIONAL CHANGE IS
REQUIRED?
There is no doubt that we have entered a new world that we find
extremely difficult to cope with (Glasser 1972:17). Not only is change
taking place extremely rapidly, its intensity and scope is simply
baffling. Change itself has become the only certainty that governs life.
The uncertainty principle has become our foundation for living (Zukav
1979; Zohar & Marshall 2000). Capra (1988:xviii) expresses the
implication of this as follows:
[We need] a new paradigm ± a new vision of reality, a fundamental
change in our thoughts, perceptions, and values.
If education wants to be relevant in this new world and if it wants to
claim that it prepares learners for life, then a new paradigm is also
what education needs (Land & Jarman 1992:68; Slattery 1995). But a
new paradigm in education changes everything about education
especially the perception of what education actually is! And it retains
nothing of what education formerly was perceived to be. This is the
non-negotiable point of departure if a new paradigm in education is to
be achieved and the challenge for those who pursue such a venture.
3 A NEW PARADIGM IN EDUCATION EVOLVED
In the beginning of 1994, research on a new paradigm in education was
conceptualised and eventually reported in 1997 (Slabbert 1997). The
brief formulation of this new paradigm also contains a new aim of
education: Maximising human potential through facilitating lifelong
learning towards a safe, sustained and prosperous universe for all. The
human being created with incalculable potential already present by
birth, is central to this paradigm. This potential can only be maximised
by the learners themselves through a process of lifelong learning when
they are continually challenged with real life problems above their
ability, which they have to solve themselves. Since no one can learn for
or on behalf of the learner, this lifelong learning process can only be
facilitated Ð something completely new to education! (Although some

Educational change: is it possible? 291
even claim that they know what it is). This new ``inside-out'' paradigm
(potential inside the learner has to come out) is the complete opposite
of the old ``outside-in'' paradigm (knowledge outside is imparted into
the learner).
As soon as this new paradigm became known in the beginning of 1994
by a parent of a particular school, its appeal was recognised by the
principal of that school who requested education of his teachers in this
new paradigm without hesitation. It was decided to develop a
workshop for this purpose and the consequent research for its
development led to the basic foundation of a workshop to achieve
paradigmatic change.
4 THE JOURNEY INWARD
Paradigmatic change requires first and foremost an inherent change in
the human being. No new systems or structures and even intensive
training to implement the  m, can and will result in paradigmatic
change.
Since human potential is the pivotal force of our existence, and because
it is the source for becoming who we should be, becoming conscious of
this vital powerhouse is undoubtedly a prerequisite for maximising it.
Learning as the way to maximise human potential, explores the
discovery of the ultimate nature of reality. However, it has been
discovered that the traditional positivist assumptions of obtaining data
through the physical senses, which makes it ultimately quantifiable
through technology, do not supply us with conclusive answers to all
our questions. It has become clear that the ultimate nature of reality
cannot become known (be learned) through the physical senses alone,
as if the observer is completely detached from the observed. The
observer is ineluctably involved in the observation and the concept of
the self and its consciousness inevitably comes into play. This means
that reality also becomes known through an ``inner exploration'' or an
``inner knowing'' (Harman 1992:1±12). Consequently, a more holistic
approach towards establishing the ultimate nature of reality is
required. Man as learner is then not only an observer, but also and
much more so, an ``inner explorer'' (through its consciousness) as well

292
as someone who not only has the willingness to, but has an imperative
to be transformed and changed as an integral part of his/her learning
endeavour. This can however only be obtained if the self is consciously
involved. It is through consciousness that one's disposition in the
world can truly be established and a meaningful direction and level of
action can be taken, which implies an incessant desire for learning and
knowing as a way of life to acquire the highest level of development,
maximising human potential.
In this regard Csikszentmihalyi (1991:24) says:
The function of consciousness is to represent information about what is
happening outside and inside the organism in such a way that it can be
evaluated and acted upon by the body. In this sense, it functions as a
clearinghouse for sensations, perceptions, feelings, and ideas, establishing
priorities among all the diverse information. Without consciousness
we would still ``know'' what is going on, but we would have to react to it
in a reflexive, instinctive way. With consciousness, we can deliberately
weigh what the senses tell us, and respond accordingly. And we can also
invent information that did not exist before: it is because we have
consciousness that we can daydream, make up lies, and write beautiful
poems and scientific theories.
It is this function of consciousness that determines our lives ±
especially the quality of our lives. What is of utmost importance, is that
it is consciousness which allows us not to become victims of
circumstances, but that we are able to determine the quality of our lives
in spite of circumstances. We are never victims of circumstances
because we always have a choice how to react to circumstances.
Csikszentmihalyi (1991:24) describes this faculty of man as follows:
A person can make himself happy, or miserable, regardless of what is
actually happening ``outside'', just by changing the contents of
consciousness. We all know individuals who can transform hopeless
situations into challenges to be overcome, just through the force of their

Educational change: is it possible? 293
personalities. The ability to persevere despite obstacles and setbacks is the
quality people most admire in others, and justly so; it is probably the most
important trait not only for succeeding in life, but for enjoying it as well.
The question is of course how to achieve this kind of mastery in one's
life:
To develop this trait, one must find ways to order consciousness so as to
be in control of feelings and thoughts ... . As suggested before, the way is
through control over consciousness, which in turn leads to control over
the quality of experience. Any small gain in this direction will make life
more rich, more enjoyable, more meaningful (Csikszentmihalyi
1991:22,24).
Control over consciousness is therefore the answer to achieve and
consequently maximises one's potential. The fact that control over
consciousness is an integrated part of consciousness itself, is explicated
by Shanon (1990:138±140) when he describes consciousness operating
on three levels.
The first and most basic level is that of the sensed being. This level of
consciousness distinguishes a living organism from the non-living. It is
the consciousness that is characterized by perceiving and interacting
with the environment, but it is all pervasive and non-focal; it is the
sensed being in the world.
The second level is that of mental awareness. This level pertains to
awareness of the content (what) but not of processes (how) of
cognition.
The third and highest level of consciousness is that of reflection.
Reflection comprises:
a
b
meta-observation in which the cognizer reflects on his/her
mental states, thoughts feelings and processes;
monitoring which consists of checking or evaluating one's
mentations;

294
c
control which consists of conscious mentations that guide or
govern thought.
Theaimofconsciousreflectionisthereforetopenetratetheunconscious
mentations, which has far reaching consequences for education.
Harman (1988:85) describes what has been found in research in this
regard:
Of all the findings of modern psychology, one of the most firmly
established, and the one with the most pervasive implications, is that only
a small part of our total mental activity is conscious. The more vast
portion is out of conscious awareness ± in the unconscious. Ordinary
conscious awareness may be thought of as a narrow ``visible spectrum''
between the subconscious (for example, instinctual drives, repressed
memories, automatic functioning) and the supraconscious (for example,
creative imagination, intuitive judgement, aesthetic sense, spiritual
sensibility).
If potential is therefore to be maximised, it is the learner's obligation in
maximising his/her potential to penetrate into the supra-conscious in
order to release the untapped dormant wisdom located there. It is a
journey inward, and, as someone has said, the longest and most
difficult journey. This journey inevitably results in a new order of
consciousness ± a transformed and changed human being, maximising
his/her potential, fulfilling his/her purpose.
Our new world demands a new kind of human being: One with an
incessant desire to learn as a lifestyle. One who is always a step ahead,
changing problems into opportunities. One who does not wait for the
future to suddenly dawn upon him/her, but perpetually creates abetter
and brighter future. Education inevitably needs to have this as a result.
But for education to have this as a result, the educators themselves
need to construct a new order of consciousness as human beings,
becoming fundamentally conscious of their own potential and their
responsibility to maximise it. They need to take the first steps in
becoming fundamentally transformed into a new human being, with a
new personal vision and purpose. Only this transformation will ensure

Educational change: is it possible? 295
their proper perception as facilitators of learning to achieve the new
educational aim. Without such personal development as essential part
and parcel of the education of our educators, failure will haunt all our
noble attempts for paradigmatic change.
This requires a renaissance in education. But if we believe in such a
rebirth
... then clearly this renaissance must begin in the chambers of our own
hearts. ... We cannot wait for society to change or for institutions and
organizations to be renewed. We, as individuals, must assume responsibility
for our own personal transformation (Feuerstein 1990:89).
The individual human being is therefore critical and pivotal in the
emergence of a new paradigm. It is the individual and not an
institution or organization that initiates, implements and sustains it,
although the system cannot be neglected and systems thinking has to
be fundamental if one is to succeed in our complex society (Senge,
Roberts, Ross, Smith & Kleiner 1994:87±192).
But it remains
... the individual becoming acutely aware of his own separate reality visa-vis
the community; his claim to express his personality by thinking and
doing for himself ± exploring new lands, new realisms of thought, new
ways of looking for truth, new means of expressing it; it is the
individual's firm claim to live his own life (Acland 1963:64).
Living his own life remains living a life where man is ``a nodal point of
relationships'' (Wielemans 1993:171±224): All relationships include
man, emanates from man, and ultimately returns to man. It is a life
where interconnectedness of all phenomena is recognised and where
interdependentness is the highest human value (Covey 1992:46±52).
It dissipates the symptoms of our time. It conquers the devastating
effects of abuse (in all forms accompanied by destructive violence)
addiction (of all kinds) and depression (which eventually results in
suicide), because the human becomes fulfilled with extraordinary inner

296
power and possibilities which renders the need for external forms of
power resulting in abuse, redundant, it eliminates the desire to be
fulfilled from the outside through addiction, and it replaces depression
with authentic self-fulfilment, happiness and joy. It manifests in
psychological (Barron, 1990) and physical health (Torrance 1995:190±
214) and a human being who is maximising his/her potential, fulfilling
his/her ultimate purpose (Slabbert 1997).
Only when the journey inward (personal transformation) is well
established as the first principle in paradigmatic change, can the
journey outward commence.
5 THE JOURNEY OUTWARD
The journey inward ensures a new vision, purpose and perspective
from which can be departed to effect the educational environment.
That is why the second principle for achieving paradigmatic change is
a journey outward. It is a journey where the educational environment
has to be completely transformed! To be able to achieve paradigmatic
change, three design elements for the intended change are necessary
which relate closely to Fullen's (1993) ideas and the key aspects
suggested by Senge, Roberts, Ross, Smith and Kleiner (1994:36±37) for
implementing change. They are discussed in the following paragraphs.
5.1 Guiding ideas
Quick fixes have been, and still are implemented to remedy education
from its ailments. But unfortunately it has been proven over and over
again that quick fixes will not and cannot provide the paradigmatic
change needed, especially in education. Many years of experience has
lead Leonard and Murphy (1995:8) to the following conclusion:
In a culture intoxicated with promises of the quick fix, instant
enlightenment, and easy learning, it was hard to accept one of the most
important lessons that came to us out of those powerful but short-term
experiences: Any significant long-term change requires long-term
practice, whether that change has to do with learning to play the violin or
learning to be a more open, loving person. We all know people who say
they have been permanently changed by experiences of a moment or a day

Educational change: is it possible? 297
or a weekend. But when you check it out you'll generally discover that
those who ended up permanently changed had spent considerable time
preparing for their life-changing experience or had continued diligently
practicing the new behaviour afterward.
A set of guiding ideas is the first element in the design of change. A
guiding idea fundamentally supplies the purpose and vision, which
transcends the present through overarching values and a sense of
ultimate direction to which one is compelled to stay committed. This is
well stated by Bowers (1993:217) in the following way:
Reform does not require a master plan before it begins; but it needs to be
guided by a clear sense of direction in which we must move, and a full
awareness of the consequences if we fail.
The latter part of this statement is of crucial importance because failure
should not even be considered. Hammer and Stanton (1995:15)
explicitly say: ``Don't fail!'' Deming (1993:111) provides us with
valuable criteria to assess our guiding ideas to ensure success.
The first criterion for a guiding idea is concerned with consistency of
purpose. A guiding idea has therefore to contain a very definite, clear
purpose and since it has to be fundamental in terms of thinking about
education it has to bear consistency. The second criterion for a guiding
idea concerns the recognition of variation in human beings. The
paradigm has therefore to recognise individuality and restore professionalism
in education. The last criterion concerns the fact that all
human beings are born with inherent creative potential that is
characterised by an inner drive to learn, to take pride in their work, to
experiment, innovate and to improve.
This new paradigm as guiding idea has to adhere to all these criteria. It
serves as the new structure, scaffolding or schemata within which its
substance can be generated.
5.2 Theory, methods and tools
With the new paradigm as guiding idea and suprastructure in place, it

298
is now ready to be elaborated into a substantial theory, methods and
tools. Without these the executors of the new paradigm will not be able
to acquire the competencies to implement the paradigm and its birth
will be, for all practical purposes, futile. However, it must be stated
clearly that the theory, methods and tools are not simply there for the
taking, they are developed and refined as the implementation of the
new paradigm progresses.
5.3 Innovations in infrastructure
A guiding idea ± as element in the design of change ± even though
supported by substantial theory, methods and tools, will speedily die if
the existing infrastructure is not innovated to provide the uninhibited
implementation of the paradigm.
5.4 Reengineering
The development of theory methods and tools as well as the
innovations in infrastructure requires a process of reengineering.
Reengineering is concerned with the redesign of work so that it can be
performed in a far superior way. Therefore reengineering is relevant for
any organization in which work takes place: large or small, manufacturing
or service, profit or nonprofit, private or public sector (Hammer &
Stanton 1995:274).
Hammer and Stanton (1995:14±33) supply the top ten mistakes that
cause paradigmatic change (reengineering) to fail. These are especially
important when innovations in infrastructure are considered because it
is this design element which manifests the execution of change. To
prevent failure the following mistakes have to be avoided:
a
b
Do not say or pretend you are reengineering without really
doing it. Ad hoc tinkering within existing schemata, no matter
how profound the changes may seem to be, is simply not
reengineering.
Do not try to reengineer a structure, like a faculty or
department or the race course, representing the wrong concep-

Educational change: is it possible? 299
c
d
tion of what the curriculum is. Only processes, actions or
activities can be reengineered ± running the race in curriculum
sense.
Do not waste time on analysing the process to be reengineered
so as to not become entangled in detail that will prevent
escaping existing schemata. Rather take some time to understand
the process fundamentally and get on with the job.
Do not be timid in redesign. In the words of Hammer and
Stanton (1995:25):
Reengineering requires radical, breakthrough ideas about process
design. Reengineering leaders must encourage people to stretch
goals and to think out of the box; to this end leadership must
reward creative thinking and be willing to consider any new idea.
e
Do not even try and preserve even the tiniest bit of existing
schemata. Hammer and Stanton (1995:31) states it as follows:
Any attempt to set limits, to preserve a piece of the old system, will
doom your efforts to failure.
f
Do not get caught up in the misconception that reengineering
is a slow process. Hammer and Stanton (1995:30) say:
Reengineer quickly. If you can't show some tangible results within
a year, you will lose the support and momentum necessary to make
the effort successful. To this end, ``scope creep'' must be avoided at
all costs. Stay focused and narrow the scope if necessary in order
to get results fast.
g
Do not ignore the concerns of your people.
The new process must offer some benefit to the people who are,
after all, being asked to embrace enormous change, and the
transition from the old process to the new one must be made with
great sensitivity to their feelings (Hammer & Stanton, 1995:32).
h
Do not adopt a conventional implementation style. The
mistake is that such organisations and institutions ±

300
... try to ensure that everyone in the organization is solidly behind
the effort. These companies are doomed to failure. They are
pursuing an illusionary dream and applying a style of implementation
where it does not belong ... Reengineering is a venture
into the (at least partially) unknown. Attempting to achieve a high
degree of precision and completeness before beginning is at best a
waste of time and at worst disastrous. The cost-benefit analyses
can only be estimates; the milestones are, in fact, guesses; the
plans must be written in pencil. Nor will everyone get on board
before the effort gets under way; some will never get on board.
Companies that do not recognize this will spend forever getting
ready for reengineering and will never get around doing it. The
way to reengineer is to do it, not think about it, plan it or discuss it
(Hammer & Stanton 1995:31).
i
Do not go directly from conceptual design into full implementation:
Before implementing a process in the real world, create a
laboratory version in order to test whether your idea works
(Hammer & Stanton 1995:28).
j
Do not proceed without strong executive leadership. Hammer
and Stanton (1995:22) say:
Strong, committed, executive leadership is the absolute sine qua
non for reengineering. Only a senior executive who deeply
believes in the reengineering cause can actually make it happen.
A complete reengineered educational environment is the second
principle for achieving paradigmatic educational change.
6 THE WORKSHOP
An in-service workshop for educators to implement the new paradigm
in education has been developed through action research over a period
of eight years. The workshop has been presented to educators of all
phases in GET band in affluent urban, peri-urban, rural, deep rural and
township communities. It was also presented to lecturers at colleges,

Educational change: is it possible? 301
technikons and universities, and trainers in the corporate world. Data
has been collected in the form of assessment by participants and other
observers as well as independent international assessors from the Iowa
State University in the USA (Donaldson, 1998) and The University of
Twente in The Netherlands (Ter Braak & Janssens 1995). In addition,
data obtained from observation and assessment of each session was
reviewed every day by the facilitators for restructuring the programme
for the next day towards the needs to be addressed, and for redesigning
the entire workshop where necessary for its next implementation.
6.1 The programme
To adhere to the requirements of the two fundamental principles for
paradigmatic change, the following conditions had to be maintained:
Workshop facilitation has to be done by experts ± the two facilitators
are experienced facilitators, one being qualified, carrying a certificate
in Advanced Facilitation from the Creative Education Foundation in
the USA. Since a critical, face-to-face, personal, intensive, focused, indepth,
independent and interdependent human interaction is required,
a maximum of 16 participants per workshop is accommodated. The
requirement of an extensive isolation (where participants are not
surrounded by and cannot come into contact with their work
environment) is fulfilled by a five consecutive full day (08:00±17:00)
programme at the University of Pretoria (De Kock 2000:209). The first 3
days mainly follows the first principle of the journey inward, and the
next 2 days, the journey outward. This resulted eventually in 2001 in a
workshop programme with the following main features:
Day 1: Educators going through an intensive individual self-discovery,
of who they really are, what they are actually capable of
and what their ultimate purpose is. This is followed by an indepth
discovery of what the new paradigm in education will
expect from them. This also becomes a shared venture to enable
participants to also learn from one another.
Day 2: They need to consider what personal changes are needed to
achieve success in the requirements of the new paradigm. They
draft their own personal mission statement regarding the
changes they will need to make in their human make-up to

302
achieve success in the requirements of the new paradigm.
Accompanying this they need to draft an action plan that is to
be executed during the remainder of the workshop to achieve
the changes. Progress regarding this transformation during the
remainder of the workshop is carefully monitored.
Day 3: The primary function of the facilitator of learning is to initiate
learning through confronting the learners with a challenging real
life problem they need to solve themselves. They discover what a
real life problem actually is and what the demanding criteria for
designing such learning task entails, since this is the only thing a
facilitator of learning can plan or design. This represents the
transfer from the journey inward to the journey outward.
Participants are also required to consider what actions of theirs
will ensure that the learners will maintain their learning.
Day 4: The second part of the workshop is designed for reengineering
the educational environment in practice. The educators discover
what reengineering is necessary to implement the new
paradigm and they design a learning task where they have to
reengineer the educational environment in practice. They pay a
short visit to their institutions and one of their learner groups
where they present their learning tasks to that group who has
to execute it. This effort is videotaped, assessed by the
educators individually and through peer assessment before
they return the next day.
Day 5: Participants return to the workshop to receive intensive feedback
on their implementation of the new paradigm the previous
day. This feedback is also used as the point of departure to
establish the immediate further needs of the participants in
facilitating the maintenance of learning: A highly demanding
and professional task ± the epitome of facilitating learning.
They complete an action plan to maintain a dynamic progression
in maximising their potential as facilitators of learning.
What has to be emphasised is that this workshop essentially only
achieves the paradigm shift. A regular follow up is necessary to
support the dynamic progression towards a fully fledged new theory,
methods and tools.

Educational change: is it possible? 303
6.2 The success of the workshop
The principal that started out requesting the workshop in 1994, was so
impressed with the changes he experienced in his educators and
learners that he eventually had his entire staff attend the workshop
over time. He also continually sent his newly appointed educators to
attend the workshop in the years that follow. When OBE arrived in
1997, some of these educators were trained by the authorities and even
been appointed as facilitators to train teachers in OBE. But only after
attending this workshop could they exclaim: ``Is this what OBE is all
about?'' Soon after the inception of OBE, this school was identified as
the best implementer of OBE in Gauteng. After an interruption of
attending the workshop for two years, this principal again requested
the educators that have not attended this workshop previously to do so
in spite of comprehensive OBE training of these educators by the
authorities, because he experiences that this workshop provides
educators with ``the edge'' needed that all the other workshops could
not. This is a testimony of a consistent longitudinal success over a
period of eight years.
Perhaps the epitome of the success with which the two fundamental
principles are manifested in this workshop is expressed by the
assessment of one of the participants in the second workshop
presentation still in 1994. Participants were asked: How do you feel
about the workshop? The a) part of the response of the participant
refers to the journey outward and the b) part to the journey inward:
a
b
I have always believed in pupil activity and participation, but I
really feel that this course changed my perceptions of teaching. I will
never be able to use the same methods as previously and I see my role
in the classroom in a different way. In fact, I never imagined that I
could think so differently about teaching as I am now! The course
also made me feel very excited about the future. I can't wait to apply
it in my classes.
One wonderful aspect of the course is that I did a lot of
introspection, and I really came in touch with my own feelings. It
really helped me personally to get a little more perspective on my
personal life ± Thank you!!

304
7 CONCLUSION
Educational change: Is it possible? This article has indicated that even
the desperately needed paradigmatic educational change is possible.
But there are at least two fundamental requirements for this to happen.
The first one (which is a prerequisite for the second one) is that a
complete personal transformation of the educator is necessary: an
inevitable journey inward. Only then will the second requirement be
possible because the newly transformed educator with a new vision,
purpose and perspective will reengineer the entire educational
environment to achieve a new educational aim. It is possible to
maximise our human potential through facilitating lifelong learning
towards a safe sustainable and prosperous universe for all!
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Acland, R 1963. We teach them wrong. London:VictorGollanz.
Barron, F 1990. Creativity and psychological health. Buffalo, New York: Creative Education
Foundation Press.
Bowers, C A 1993. Education, cultural myths and the ecological crisis: Toward deep changes.
New York: State University of New York Press.
Capra, F 1988. The turning point: Science, society and the rising culture. London: Fontana
Paperbooks.
Covey, S R 1992. The seven habits of highly effective people. London: Simon and Schuster.
Csikszentmihalyi, M 1991. Flow: The psychology of optimal experience. New York: Harper.
De Kock, D M 2000. Innovative teacher education and interactive technology support.
South African Journal of Higher Education. 14(3):204±214.
Deming, W E 1993. The new economics: For education government and industry. Cambridge:
MIT Centre for Advanced Study.
Donaldson, K B 1998. Maximising human potential through facilitating lifelong learning.
Unpublished Project Assessment.
Feuerstein, G 1990. Encyclopedic Dictionary of Yoga. New York: Paragon.
Fullen M G 1993. Change forces: Probing the depths of educational reform. London:Falmer
Press.
Glasser, W 1972. The identity society. New York: Harper and Row.
Hammar, M & Stanton, SA 1995. The reengineering revolution: The handbook. London:
Harper Collins Publishers.
Harman, W 1988. Global mind change. Indianapolis: Knowledge Systems.

Educational change: is it possible? 305
ÐÐ 1992. Reconciling the experience of consciousness with the scientific world view. Paper
read at the Science and Vision Conference, HSRC, Pretoria, pp 1±12.
Land, G & Jarman B 1992. Breakpoint and beyond Mastering the future today. California:
Harper Business.
Leonard, C & Murphy, M 1995b. The life we are given. New York: Tarcher Putnam Books.
Senge, P M, Roberts, C, Ross, R B, Smith, B J & Kleiner, A 1994. The fifth discipline fieldbook:
Strategies and tools for building a learning organization. London: Nicolas Bearly
Publishing.
Shanon, B 1990. Consciousness. JournalofMindandBehaviour11(2), pp 137±152.
Slabbert, J A 1997. Maximising human potential through facilitating lifelong learning.
Unpublished Research Report.
Slattery, P 1995. Curriculum development in the postmodern era. NewYork:Garland
Publishing.
Ter Braak, A & Janssens, N 1995. Teacher education project. Unpublished assessment
report.
Torrance, E P 1994. Creativity: Just wanting to know. Pretoria: Benedic Books.
Wielemans, W 1993. Voorbij het individu: Mensbeelden in wetenschappen. (Beyond the
individual: Images of man in the sciences). Leuven: Garant.
Zohar, D & Marshall I 2000. Spiritual intelligence. London: Falmer Press
Zukav, G 1979. The dancing Wu Li masters ± An overview of the new Physics. London: Rider.

306
The Internet as an
important instrument in
training and learning in
distance education ±
a cursory overview
Dr FJ Pretorius
Department of Secondary
School Teachers Education
Unisa
This article addresses some of the problems and implications regarding the Internet
such as the importance of the Internet for education and learning with reference to
distance education. It is clear that the Internet as part of the communications network is
getting more global and popular as more information becomes available every day. This
increase in the using and application of the Internet has started to change the face of
commerce, teaching, education and learning. Educators, inter alia, will have to shift their
paradigms and to start thinking anew about technology, teaching and learning and what
the Internet can do for them.
1 INTRODUCTION
A fact that very few people can ignore, according to Reisman (1998:4),
is that the using and application of the Internet and the Web (WWW)
are growing at a very fast tempo and is starting to influence all aspects
of our lives. Maybe the reason is that every few years something new
like the Internet comes along and changes equations in business and
institutions all over the world. Graham (1999:37±38) classifies the

The Internet as an important instrument in training and learning in distance education 307
Internet as a ``transforming technology'' and puts it on the same level
as the development of, for example, the motorcar and television
because of their major impact upon the form of social and political life.
The reason for this ``classification'' is because of the greater ability to
serve certain needs of different people and leads to an increase in
information and therefore to more power: ``With a transforming
technology we can do more than previously, and with this increase in
power (knowledge) comes an increase in choice'' (Graham 1999:37).
Wiggens (1995:557) on his part, stated that the 1990's have seen a
confluence of Internet-related trends, namely dramatic growth in the
size of the Internet for example more information becomes available
and there are more people visiting the various web sites; the
deployment of protocols such as Gopher and the WWW (World Wide
Web) that represents a change in how a user looks for and retrieves
documents over the Internet; and thirdly, an explosion of interest in the
``information highway'' concept that is promising new ways of
information delivery.
Bearing this in mind, Johnson, finance manager of the company
Verbatim, regards the Internet as being the future in communications
and commerce and what his company is looking for, is ``products
savings and to give our customers better response'' (1999:19). The aim
ofthiscompanyistotransformitsbusinessandtechnologymodelsto
reflect the reality of the Internet, and establish a big target audience.
This can be done by having better and immediate knowledge available
to make the right decisions at the right time. By doing this the Internet
will form a core part of the company's overall business strategy. The
reason for this strategy lies in the advantages the Internet can provide
to business (and institutions), for example the fact that data can pass
seamlessly between companies and clients. The same database
information is shared, eliminating inefficiencies and possible errors
and therefore giving the company the edge over his rivals (Johnson
1999:19).
According to Berendt (1998:81) there are three trends emerging in the

308
world today regarding communications in general: 1. There is an
increase in mobility; 2. a rise in the Internet use and 3. a growing
interest in the use of voice over the Internet. The question remains
what has all this to do with education and teaching?
2 PURPOSE OF THIS ARTICLE
The purpose of this article is to indicate some critical viewpoints
regarding the Internet, and the importance and effectiveness of the
Internet for higher and distant education specifically. Some of the
questions that will be addressed are inter alia: How effective can the
Internet and all its accessories be applied in the teaching and learning
process? Because the Internet is something that has already started to
change the face of commerce, teaching, education and learning in the
world,thequestionremains:shouldwechangeourteachertraining
practices and courses as well? What implications does the Internet
have for higher distance education?
It is also hoped that this article will help some academics and other
trainers and teachers to shift their paradigms and to start thinking
anew about technology, teaching and learning and what the Internet
can do for them and their students.
3 WHAT IS THE INTERNET AND THE WORLD WIDE
WEB (WWW)?
3.1 The internet vs WWW
While this article is mainly based on the Internet one must note that
there is a difference between the Internet and the World Wide Web. The
difference is mainly due to the fact that the Internet's aim is to connect
all computer and various other networks around the world, together in
one big network using certain protocols such as the Internet Protocol
(IP) to send data and information on the Internet. The Internet is a
``... method of interconnecting physical networks and a set of conventions
for using networks that allow the computers they reach to
interact'' (Comer 1995:17).
As new users connecting to the Internet and new applications appear,

The Internet as an important instrument in training and learning in distance education 309
traffic patterns change and as the Internet become more popular and
users begin to browse information, they start making use of services
liketheWorldWideWebandGopher.TheWorldWideWebcan
together with Gopher and other ``search engines'', be regarded as
services to help users of the Internet to get information faster and
easier (Comer 1995:12).
3.2 The Internet Society
The Internet is a very decentralised organisation but is also in need of
mechanisms for coordination and oversight regarding key issues. One
of the most important organisations playing a coordinating role, is the
``Internet Society''. This organisation provides a means for global
cooperation and coordination for the Internet and its internetworking
technologies and applications. Its specific goals and purposes include
the following:
1 To develop and maintain certain standards for the Internet
2 Growth and evolution of the Internet architecture
3 Maintenance and evolution of effective administrative processes
needed for operating the global Internet
4 Education and research related to the Internet and the
collection and dissemination of relevant information
5 Harmonising of actions and activities and to facilitate development
of the Internet (National Research Council of the
USA1994:250)
3.3SomefeaturesoftheInternet
3.3.1 The internationalism (globalization) and populism of the
Internet
According to Graham (1999: 86) the Internet has two striking features,
namely its internationalism and populism (or popularity). The using of
the Internet is indifferent to international boundaries. People are
linked together by common interest. These features, however, can
according to Graham (1999:86±7), also create some problems because it

310
can lead to a form of subversiveness and together with its popularity
will contribute that censorship over moral and ethical issues is going to
be very difficult. The Internet and all it has to offer, has to be handled
carefully and with some responsibility.
On the other hand, it is also very important to realise that on the
Internet class, race, disability and even ability are no longer under
consideration. ``Socially induced prejudices, such as appearances,
gender and race, and behaviour can fade away, because students learn
that they are judged solely on what they say and how they say it''
(Ellsworth 1994:7).
3.3.2 Some statistics regarding the Internet
According to Waterman (1999:5) business on the Internet alone will
grow from less than $2 billion to more than $4 billion, and the business
between businesses themselves, is expected to grow over $300 billion
in the next few years. Everyone who has a stake or interest in the
Internet should be prepared for the change that technology of the
Internet will bring.
In 1998 about 1,5 million private homes in the USA alone, had access to
the Internet and this figure is growing every day (Telecommunications
1998:8). According to the Tegno-Beeld (30 March 1999:4) between 25 and
30 million people are already connected to the Internet in 140 different
countries and at the end of 1999 the figure is expected to be more than
200 million people. However, The European Society for Opinion and
Marketing Research (ESOMAR) puts this figure already in 1998 at 150
million people (Vin 1998:16).
According to Steyl (1999:2) from VISA South Africa, it is expected that
about 2 million people in South Africa alone, will be involved in the
Internet and it's applications by the year 2002. Taking these figures
into consideration one can hardly visualise how broad and enormous
the potential base of students for distance education institutions like

The Internet as an important instrument in training and learning in distance education 311
UNISA is going to be world wide. This is a fact that cannot be ignored
and aspects such as better and more computer hard and software and a
greater marketing effort to reach a world market, therefore, needs
serious attention.
4 WORKING OF THE INTERNET REGARDING
KNOWLEDGE, INFORMATION AND LEARNING
4.1 Knowledge and information
When dealing with the Internet, one should bear in mind the words of
Vin (1998:78) of the University of Texas: ``While information retrieval
applications dominate the Internet today, the next-generation Internet
will likely offer applications that can process massive amounts of data
for visualization and support real-time user interactivity''. However,
one must be careful not to ignore the possibility that, in spite of all the
advantages of the Internet, the Internet could be an instrument in
deception and misinformation. So called ``reliable knowledge and
information'' will have to be treated in the same way as any other
information and must be checked and substantiated.
4.2 Learning and the Internet
In answering a question about what is good about the Internet,
Ellsworth (1994:5) stated that the Internet is a ``powerful releaser of
emotion, motivation, and engagement for students''. This implies that
the Net can be regarded as a completely `'new'' way of learning and
studying. She went on saying that as soon as the students realise that
their rewards on the Net will be in proportion to their investment in
learning Net skills, they will want to learn more of it (Ellsworth
1994:5). Benhamou (1999:47), also states that in education, converged
technology will, by network converging, enable distance learning to
deliver real time video, voice and instructional text from a classroom to
a remote student, and even allow collaboration on a virtual white
board.
Ellsworth (1994:5) also compares the Internet to a sports exercising
program because the Internet ``fitness'' will stay with the students for
life due to the fact that these skills are intellectual and not physical.

312
Students learn on the Internet ``to ask better questions, to make better
arguments, and to present them more positively over the Net
(Internet)'' (Ellsworth 1994:5). The Internet will also increase their
knowledge of the world and the Internet will lessen the constrains of
time and space because e-mail takes only minutes and big files can be
downloaded in seconds.
It could be argued that one of the most important aspects or features of
distance education and learning is that one can study on your own,
while working and earning an income to pay for the studies. The
Internet falls into this criteria and encourages, according to Ellsworth,
students, teachers, lectures and even parents to find and use new
information on the Internet. ``Internet tools enable anyone to find and
retrieve almost instantly new information data, images, and even
software that is personally interesting. Students can also learn on the
Internet educational independence and intellectual autonomy''
(1994:7).
Steyl (1999:2) is confident that apart from business, education will be
the second largest group that will make use of the Internet and what it
can provide. Therefore, what applies to businesses regarding the
Internet, surely also applies to any distance education institution such
as Unisa.
4.3 Managing available information
The way to combine experience with information regarding organisational
effectiveness, is also called the management of knowledge
(Technet 1999:30). This would mean that business strategies like
product feedback, product design, project and issue tracking, planning,
analysis, employee management and education and training
become part of the knowledge-management loop. ``Re-engineering the
way information moves within your company and how it is stored can
allow you to leverage existing knowledge into future success'' (ibit).
Most knowledge is stored in documents but this knowledge is more or
less useless unless it can be used and distributed in such a way that it is

The Internet as an important instrument in training and learning in distance education 313
easy for other people to find. The ability to save such information onto
the Web, breaks down the barriers of publishing and the distribution of
knowledge via conventional ways (ibit). Using the Internet can make
feedback, storing, tracking and student progress much easier.
5 APPLICATIONS OF THE INTERNET IN EDUCATION
5.1 Training of staff and an increase of productivity
Before any application can be made one should have trained staff in
place. Training of staff in the use and application(s) of the Internet is of
theutmostimportanceandshouldhaveahighpriorityinpersonal
development and training programs. Internet training should form an
important part of every institution's in-service-training program. It
may initially mean high costs but in the end it will be cost effective
because less personnel will be needed and personnel (administrative
and academics alike) can work from a home environment ± less
transport costs, less office space and less salaries will have to be paid.
This also means that academic staff should be trained how to prepare,
develop and apply existing study material (or new material) on the
Internet. Because it is not possible for every academic to be able to
develop web pages or have basic knowledge of programming, there
should be support services available to provide help with these
technical matters. Separate technical support should be available to
help lecturers and teachers to use the Internet and it's capabilities
effectively so that they will be able to teach and create a better learning
environment and culture. This implies that the teacher or lecturer will
have to think and operate wider than the traditional classroom. The
Internet and its environment are busy bringing about a complete new
paradigm shift regarding teaching and learning.
It is also interesting to know that Microsoft SA started with a program
``Train the Trainer'' (www.microsoft.com/southafrica/community/)
to meet the goal of developing and delivering computer literacy to
previously disadvantaged communities. So-called Digital Villages to
be used in this program, have been established at Soweto, the Western
Cape and Kimberley. So far Microsoft successfully provided over 5 000

314
South African teachers with computer literacy skills (Technet 1999:30).
The base of computer literacy and the multiple learning effect it creates
increases and will have a greater impact on higher education and
education in general in the near future.
In this regard, distance education institutions such as UNISA should
start and train their students and academic staff not only in the
theoretical aspects of computer literacy but also in a practical way. If
not, potential students will tend to go to those universities where they
will get the necessary practical training in the application of
computers.
Research undertaken in a few South African schools indicates that
computers are mainly used for getting information and playing of
games (Tegno-Beeld 30 March 1999:19). This is mainly due to the fact
teachers are not trained well enough to handle and use a computer to
its full potential. This implies that all teachers should be trained to
become computer literate so that they can teach pupils different
techniques on how to use the computer. This has serious staff and
training implications for higher education institutions as well.
Once study materials are being prepared and adapted to be put on the
Internet productivity could be increased. The reason is that initially
staff (specifically academic staff) must be trained and helped to
prepare most of their study material for the Internet. After the initial
stage of putting a subject onto the Internet, it is much easier to keep
abreast with the latest information and data available and to update
any study material. That will leave much more time available for
research and other community involvement projects as determined by
the university. Less staff will be needed to do the same amount of
work.
5.2 Ongoing research and development regarding
the Internet
According to Beck (1999:45) one has to realise that the core business of

The Internet as an important instrument in training and learning in distance education 315
the Internet is Information to help one in all aspects of life to make
certain strategic and tactical decisions. Beck (ibid) went on saying that
we in South Africa (business and higher institutions alike) need a new
approach, specially regarding information retrieval.
Most competitors in all fields of higher education have access to the
same information and data but people (ie students) need to be trained
to make correct decisions based on relevant information. By using the
WWW and the Internet students are exposed to more information than
currently contained in their study guides. This does not imply
necessarily more work but rather new techniques and methods in
ordering and sifting information by using the computer and appropriate
software.
The University of Texas is also heavily involved in research regarding
Information Technology (IT) and specifically the Internet and distance
learning. One of their research projects is the InfoWeave research
program which is of some importance for education and teacher
training. The InfoWeave is a visual environment for creating and
disseminating digital educational material over the Internet. Info-
Weave, according to Vin (1998:83) designs and integrates, and builds
on a large body of research on hypermedia authoring systems, distance
education systems, network protocols and techniques for streaming
video and multimedia file system design techniques. This implies inter
alia the use of searchable indexed video as the primary medium for
delivering education; the ability to cross-reference and switch between
different presentation media (such as audio, video and text); the use of
collaborative learning tools for enchanting distance learning and selfpaced
education.
5.3 Future trends and multimedia integration
How difficult it may be for an uninformed person to try and figure out
what the future holds for the IT and the computer, there are a few
trends that one has to look at, especially in higher education and
teachers training. One such aspect regarding education and training
that is already in use worldwide, is the use of the radio on the Internet
(IEEE Network Nov/Des 1998:9). There is also the Video Handling

316
with music and speech detection that one has to look at, as well as
distance learning using digital video and the Internet. IBM, according
to Computerweek (22 Feb 1999:17) unveiled the latest addition to the
Internet, namely the ``INTERNET 2 high speed IP backbone'' project
aimed at storing and caching advanced applications such as real-time
broadcast and video so that they can be accessed faster by users.
This whole concept of the WWW and the Internet will have a major
impact on education and teaching in the future. For example it is
already possible via the Internet (together with the right hardware) to
speak eye to eye. This ``personal'' feature of the Internet completely
eliminate the ``distance'' and brings, so to speak, the learner right into
the lecture room or office. In due course the only limitation, as far as
teaching and learning on the Internet is concerned, will be one's own
mind. The teacher/lecturer's isolation in distance education will soon
be something of the past due to the Internet (Ellsworth 1994:5).
According to Brackett of the Boston University, the preferred distance
learning environment of the future ``... would integrate computers, the
Internet, and digital video'' (1998:72). The Boston University College of
Engineering in Distance Learning Initiative (DLI), is already making
use of an integrated system of computers, digital video and the Internet
to deliver graduate degrees to students in distant companies. The key
objective of the DLI is to ``... support learning wherever it is most
convenient, whether by groups in a classroom, at the workplace, or at
home'' (Brackett 1998:73). This technology enables students to take
courses wherever a computer and network connection exists. Distributing
classes to a student's computer opens the door to modern
teaching techniques like:
. course materials on a WWW site during class,
. executing software during a class, and
. enabling collaborative work on design where both the
instructor and student share an electronic whiteboard
(Brackett 1998:73).

The Internet as an important instrument in training and learning in distance education 317
Before selecting any technology system to replace the outdated
television system and after a careful study the DLI used the following
criteria in selecting the digital satellite broadcast system:
. only flexible and upgradable commercially supported technology
should be used,
. it should facilitate convenient and cost-effective learning,
. it must provide the potential for creating courses with
significantly higher educational quality than was possible
with the preceding distance learning technology
. the ability to transmit live video classes as an essential part of
the required distance learning technology and must support
live video with at least audio feedback. (Brackett 1998:73).
Taking the above mentioned in consideration, one can visualise the
following scenario: Imagine a lecturer in distance education, sitting in
his/her office talking to individual students via the computer and
using a digital camera so that they can see each other. Practical lessons
can also be ``attended'' via the computer and feedback can personally
be given direct after the class, regardless the fact that the student and
the lecturer could be in two different countries. The same way
assessment can take place in writing and orally. This applications are
already available and can be done today.
Therefore one should take notice of the words of Vin of the University
of Texas, when he stated: ``while information retrieval applications
dominate the Internet today, the next generation Internet will likely
offer applications that can process massive amounts of data for
visualization and support real-time user interactivity'' (1998:78).
5.4 A Multimedia Micro-University?
In a very interesting article Chang (1998:60) of the University of
Pittsburgh describes what is happening at this university's Knowledge
Systems Institute (KSI) and how they incorporated a multimedia
micro-university into the education programs and management
operations at the KSI. Several components make up this multimedia
micro-university such as a virtual library, an information distance

318
learning system, and visualisation and planning tools for the school
management operation. These components are already available on the
Web for students, faculty members and administrators of that
university (Chang 1998:60).
A higher learning institution such as Unisa, will have to stay abreast of
its competitors regarding IT. Higher learning and distance institutions
like most businesses have customers with needs that needs to be
satisfied with the products being offered. Therefore higher education
institutions such as Unisa must be prepared for the changes that digital
technology will bring. Courses being offered must be relevant and to
the point. With the policy of students being able to write examinations
twice a year, for example at Unisa, implies that students needs reliable
and relevant information and data in a very short period to complete
their assignments and research. To put courses and other subjects on
the Internet is essential and in this modern age of technology
institutions should not merely respond to students' needs, but must
anticipate them as well. Benhamou (1999:47) echo's this by stating
``Many traditional sectors such as retail, education and finance will
identify new uses and efficiencies from the application of converged
technology''.
As the technology develops and the need for trained computer
(literate) persons increases in all sphere's of life, the contents of school
subjects as well as those in higher education should also change
according to the needs. This means that there will be a greater demand
for better re-trained teachers and teachers training courses should be
adapted accordingly. Unisa and other distance education institutions
can only gain by increasing its potential student base and in this regard
the Internet provides a golden opportunity. The more students, the
more funds will be available and the greater recognition will bring
more sponsors.
6 SOME ADVANTAGES AND DISADVANTAGES OF
THE INTERNET REGARDING EDUCATION
6.1 Cost effectiveness
Regarding cost effectiveness, Brackett of the Boston University who is

The Internet as an important instrument in training and learning in distance education 319
doing satellite broadcast via the Internet, argues that the Internet is
already cost effective (1998:72). It is general knowledge that the faster
and bigger a market for a product develops the cheaper the product
becomes. For example, today computers cost less than a few years
back. There will be initial costs involved for all role players if an
institute like UNISA decide to go on the Internet, but in the end it will
be more cost effective. Whether one agrees or not, higher education
institutions will have to meet the needs of all its students, now and in
the future.
6.2 High volume information and faster accessibility
The technology era and the new millennium brings about changes such
as new job creations, needs, products and learning contents. To enable
anyone to make the right decisions regarding these new changes, one
has to have the correct information immediately available. Students
need information and data to complete assignments of a high standard.
Lecturers need information to keep abreast and they must continuously
do research in/on their subject(s). The ability of the Internet to
make available a vast amount of data and information at high speed
meets all the above mentioned needs. We must understand that the
technology that exists today is very powerful and improving all the
time but what will make the difference is the ability to use and apply
technology and information in a practical way. Bill Gates, chairman of
Microsoft, makes the following statement: ``Virtually everything in
business today is an undifferentiated commodity except how a
company manages its information. How you manage information
determines whether you win or lose'' (1999:6).
It is interesting to note that the operating speed of the Internet is
becoming faster and faster every day due to new technology. Opperman
(2001:5) from the Computer Sciences Corporation points out that
the possibility of the Internet II (the future Internet), already exsists.
Today the Internet is working at a speed of about 1±2 gigabytes per
second and in the near future it is being estimated that the Internet will
be running at a speed of about 50±100 gigabytes per second (ibit).
Information will become more easily available and faster.

320
By eliminating inefficiencies and possible errors the Internet can
become more effective than traditional written information and data.
The reason lies in the faster speed and accessibility of information via
the Net. Protocols such as the TCP/IT and companies like IBM make it
possible to eliminate inefficiencies and possible errors or at least keep
them to the minimum. It becomes more and more safe to send
confidential information via the Internet.
According to Comer (1995:2) if one wants to appreciate the Internet
technology and how it effects for example a professional group for
example teachers, one should consider the exchanging of data resulting
from an experiment with other scientists, and also the fact that
computer services and programs available at one location, can be used
by scientists and professionals at other locations. This can result in that
the speed of exchanging data increases dramatically and more accurate
and immediate decisions can be made on all levels of an organisation.
Greater amounts of research output of the most recent information and
methods can, therefore, be made available (ibit). The compiling and
sending of assignments on the Internet is very viable and could be time
saving. The possibility also exists that (oral and practical) examinations
can be done via the Internet by making use of digital technology.
6.3 Immobility vs mobility
According to Castelein (1998:41) many people see the web as becoming
absolute central to the way people work, live, study and play. The
ability to have access to the WWW and the Internet at all times and at
any place will become critical in the nearby future. It is therefore
important that one should look at more ways to be mobile and still be
able to have access to the WWW and the Internet. This means that
``mobile'' data must be easily available, simple, affordable and reliable
and that the Internet must perform more effectively (Castelein
1998:41). This aspect has implications for higher education and also for
Unisa as well as for teacher training programs.

The Internet as an important instrument in training and learning in distance education 321
6.4 Dumping and ``too much useless information'' on
the Internet
One of the biggest problems regarding the Internet is the big amount of
useless information being put onto the Internet and the difficulty of
getting exactly what you are looking for. A current survey of useless
information on the WWW revealed that there are more than 20 jillion
(not million) ``Web site pages'' currently accessible on the WWW
(Reisman 1998:4). Reisman (1998:5) concluded that there are ``... too
many people, using far too many Web development tools, are
generating far too many Web site pages''. This is a problem that needs
a solution, but if you know where to look for information on the
Internet, it will help a lot to spare time and effort. We cannot agree
more with Reisman when he propose that what we need is legislation
or standards that will unclutter the Internet (Reisman 1998:5). The first
steps to find a solution for the chaos on the Web, have already been
taken by the establishing of the Silicon Valley World Internet Centre in
California USA to ``.... bring some clarity to the chaos of the Internet
revolution'' (Talking Business Nov 1998:14).
6.5 The Internet and software
One aspect of the Internet which is very important is the software.
Without software to organise and transcripts data and information it
would not be possible for anyone to make use of the Internet and what
it presents. In this regard the CD-ROM technology plays a significant
part. Most software today are available on a CD ROM. In using a CD
writeable driver, a vast lot of information can be stored on a CD
instead of a hard disk. This is also less expensive. There are lots of
software programs available on the market that can help to make
access to the Internet easier.
6.6 Availability of hardware
Information technology is developing at a tremendous speed and it
willbedifficultforanyonetotryandkeepupwiththelatest
technology all the time. Initially there could be a shortage of computers
available for some students (in distance education) especially in South
Africa and in the rest of Africa as well. However, one must understand

322
that big companies (such as Microsoft), and the government such as the
Education Department, are also increasing computer literacy and most
companies are also making more and more computers available to their
employees. In using the Internet, one should look past the fact that
students will only study from their homes and that they must have a
computer at home. Students are also using the office, or any place
where a laptop and cell-phone can make contact with the Internet! This
will broaden the base of potential students of a university because of
greater accessibility and availability.
The workplace will become more and more the place where information
via the Internet will become available. More and more students
will have access to computers in the near future. A survey (conducted
by the author) in 1998 of students in the course Subject Didactics
Economics, indicated that more than 81% of the students had free
access to a computer, while 72% had access to the Internet. These
figures make it possible and worthwhile to put the above mentioned
course on the Internet.
7 CONCLUSION AND SOME SUGGESTIONS
When looking at the above mentioned scenario, distance higher
education in South Africa and to be more specifically to Unisa, (as a
leader in distance education), could not afford to be trailing too far
behind the rest of the world, regarding the use and application of
Internet technology in teaching and education because it could lose
students that will study at other institutions that can meet their needs
thebest.InspiteofsomenegativeviewpointsregardingtheInternet
and its features, the only reasonable conclusion one can make is that
the Internet is here to stay and that it is going to play a major role in
future in education, learning and research. More and more applications
for the Internet are invented every few weeks.
What needs to be done is that:
. All role players in education, including the private sector,
should come together and formulate a policy regarding the
Internet and its application for teaching and learning.

The Internet as an important instrument in training and learning in distance education 323
. Research should also be undertaken to set up a blueprint for
future planning and strategy regarding the Internet as a core
part of distance learning and teaching. A ``master plan''
needs to be developed with 1, 2, 5 and 10 year aims/targets
as to where higher education wants to be regarding IT
technology. As Anecke (1999:9) of Microsoft South Africa,
puts it: ``Anyone can sell goods over the Internet. Many are
doing so. The question is how do you use this facility better
than anyone else to delight your customer and bind her to
you. How well does the process integrate with your other
systems ± and how well do you use your experience to
improve continuously.''
. Academic staff should be trained in the use and application
of the Internet regarding education and learning.
. We cannot but agree with Day (2001:35) when he argues what
we need is to minimise text and to maximise our multimedia
content to enable us to deliver a `'new, multi model
pedagogics''.
For some role players in higher distance education this means a
complete change of mind. A new way of thinking and looking at
teaching and learning, and the development and adapting of existing
and new study material is going to be needed. The Internet and the
ways and means that is opening up for education in particular, is here
to stay. In some ways, it is really a matter of ``adapt or die'' for those
involved in higher and distance education.
Higher education in general and Unisa in particular, will have to give
serious attention to the aspect of how to train academic staff to enable
them to prepare appropriate study material for the Internet and to be
able to update the material all the time. There is still a wide gap
between technical support staff and some academic staff that needs to
be addressed. It does not matter how you are looking at the Internet
and computing, one must agree with Jain (1998:1) on the following
statement: ``One thing is clear ± your grandchildren will wonder how
anyone could read something as boring as a document (that) contains
only text.''

324
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Alink, H. ``Painting from life'' in Technet Magazine, Summer 98/99, SA:43±45.
Annecke, T in: ``Roadmap to the digital future'' in Technet Magazine, Summer 98/99:6±11.
Beck, J. ``Technology Determining Winners'' in Intelligence Special Edition ± 1999 Guide to
the Internet:44±45.
Berendt, A. ``Turning Mobile Internet into a Reality'' in Telecommunications, International
Ed. October 1998, 32(10):81±84.
Benhamou, E. ``The Emergence of Convergence'' in Intelligence Special Edition ± 1999
Guide to the Internet:46±48.
Brackett, J W. ``Multimedia at work'' in: IEEE Multimedia, Jul±Sept 1998, 5(3):72±76.
Castelein, T. ``Mobilising the Net'' in Telecommunications (International Ed), September
`98:41.
Comerford, C. ``State of the Internet: Roundtable 4.0'' in IEEE Spectrum, Oct 1998:69±79.
http://www.spectrum.ieee.org
Chang, S. ``A Multimedia Micro-University'' in IEEE Multimedia, Jul±Sept 1998, 5(3):60±68
(http://computer.org/multimedia).
Comer, D E. 1995. Internet working with TCP/IP Vol 1. Principles, Protocols and Architecture
3 rd ed. (Prentice Hall International, London).
Day, B & Steyn, P. Presentation at a Unisa Council Strategic Planning Workshop, 3 May
2001.
Ellsworth, J. 1994. Education on the Internet (1 st Ed) (Sams Publishing, Indianapolis).
Gates, Bill. in: ``Roadmap to the Digital Future'' in Microsoft TECHNET Magazine,
Summer 98/99:6±11.
Graham, G. 1999. The Internet: a philosophy inquiry. (Routledge, London).
M Handley & J Crowcroft 1995. The World Wide Web: Beneath the surf. (UCL Press Limited,
London).
Jain, R. ``Multimedia Documents'' in IEEE Multimedia, Jul±Sept 1998, (3):1
(http://computer.org/multimedia).
Johnson, P. ``Verbatim ± Success Story'' in ACCPAC Chronicle, Summer 1999:19.
Meyer, B. in ``Die Internet groei uit sy nate'' in Tegno-Beeld, 25 May 1999:4.
Microsoft Web page: www.microsoft.com/southafrica/community/
National Research Council (USA) Computer Science and Telecommunication Board.
1996. Realizing the Information Future: The Internet and Beyond. (National Academy
Press. Washington DC).
Opperman, P. in ``So lyk die Interent van die Toekoms'' in Sake-Beeld, 16 Jan 2001:5.

The Internet as an important instrument in training and learning in distance education 325
Pretorius, F J, 1999. A survey regarding the availability of computers to students of the
Subject Didactics Economics. (Unpublished).
Reisman, S. ``Uncluttering the Web Maze'' in IEEE Multimedia, Jul±Sept 1998, 5(3):4±5
(http://computer.org/multimedia).
Staff reporter, ``Mobile computing gets more freedom'' in Computerweek, 22(5):22
Feb1999:3
Steyl, T. in ``E-Handel kan in vyf jaar met 66% groei'' in Tegno-Beeld, 30 March 1999.
Shin, K G. ``Fast low-cost failure recovery for reliable real-time multimedia communications''
in IEEE Network, Nov/Dec 1998, 12(6):56±63. (www.comsoc.org).
Vin, H. ``Supporting Next-Generation Distributed Applications'' in IEEE Multimedia, Jul/
Sept 1998, (http://computer.org).
Waterman, J. ``ACCPAC ± Software Superior by Design ± Editorial'' in ACCPAC
Chronicle, Summer 1999:5.
Wiggins, R W. 1995. The Internet for Everyone: A guide for users and providers. McGraw-Hill
(New York).

326
Professional portfolio
building ± alternative
assessment strategy in
teacher education
Dr Pieter H du Toit
Department of Teaching and
Training Studies
University of Pretoria
This article is a report based on the notion that the Faculty of Education at the University
of Pretoria has already adapted its practices to the OBE context. The numerous policy
documents on education and training in general, and higher education in particular, and
especially regarding teacher education gave impetus to different initiatives by the
Faculty. These initiatives focused on programme design, modes of delivery, and
alternative assessment opportunities.
The focus is placed on the changes specifically made to the assessment practice of the
module on Didactics, as part of the post-graduate Higher Education Diploma. The
introduction of portfolio assessment, as alternative, in the module is a means of having
students to experience OBE in function. The development of a professional portfolio
provides students the opportunity to become independent, self-regulated and reflective
learners. By means of action research they have to give proof of their ability to investigate
their own practices and professional development in a scientific way. Furthermore,
portfolio assessment makes provision for developing flexibility in terms of learning styles
± flexibility all teachers need in their practices to match teaching and learning.
The outcome of the implementation of portfolio assessment, as affirmed by feedback
from students, peers, critical friends and the external examiner, is reported. From the

Professional portfolio building 327
feedback and experience of the lecturer involved, based on action research, the general
conclusion can be made that portfolio development by education students indeed
facilitates their process of learning how to learn.
1 INTRODUCTION
If you keep doing what you've always done, you'll keep getting what
you've always got.
Peter Francisco
I was urged by this spot-on quotation to act differently in my practice,
especially over the past five years. The purpose of this article is to focus
on my assessment practice regarding the module of the teacher
education programme at the University of Pretoria I am responsible
for. The focus is placed on portfolio assessment as developmental
process conducive to professional development.
The outcomes-based approach to teaching and learning that has
recently been introduced as blueprint for education and training in
South Africa, offers many challenges to all educators. One of these is to
cater for professional development within the context of life-long
learning. Professional development includes, inter alia, becoming a
self-regulated, flexible, reflective practitioner, who can monitor one's
own learning in accordance with the demands of the teaching
profession.
In this article the focus is placed on the intrinsic-driven responsibility
the practitioner should take regarding professional development. It
implies those skills a learner deploys as independent learner. Such a
practitioner is able to monitor aspects pertaining to the self, such as:
Ð
Ð
Ð
Self-regulated learning in terms of planning, monitoring and
assessing one's own education practice.
One's learning style preferences to shape one's own teaching
style.
Learning flexibility to become a flexible educator, and to
promote flexible learning within learners.

328
Ð
Ð
Ð
Ð
Ð
Reflective learning at a scientific level, for the purpose of
investigating one's practice, and improving it.
Action learning by means of action research.
Intrinsic motivation for self-empowerment and improving
one's practice.
Creative, critical and productive thinking about applying
innovative ideas into practice.
Self-assessment by means of gathering feedback and other
data regarding one's practice.
During the course of the module students are introduced to different
theories on learning styles. As integral part of the module, students are
offered the opportunity to identify their own learning style preferences.
Kolb's Learning Style Inventory (Ellis 1997) and Ned Herrmann's
Brain Dominance Instrument (Herrmann 1996) are used for
formal diagnostic assessment of learning style preferences.
When the seven roles for educators, as outlined in the National
Education Policy Act (Republic of South Africa 2000) are scrutinized
carefully, the importance of catering for different learning styles as
part of an outcomes-based approach to education is evident. Students
had to determine through reflection to what extent their ``practices''
during the school practice session of the first semester would differ
from their own past experiences. They also had to illustrate their own
improvement towards authentic outcomes-based teaching and learning.
It serves as a useful opportunity for critical reflection of what
evidence could be included in the final portfolio they have to submit.
Reflective learning including self and peer assessment, as indicated by
Kimeldorf (1996:11), make portfolios a powerful learning tool.
Different authors' work on portfolio assessment (see Lustig 1996);
Danielson and Abrutyn (1997) and Kimeldorf (1996)) has been adapted
to the teacher education context. Therefore I opted for a professional
development portfolio, which gives proof of one's development as an
expert in a specific field/area (Kimeldorf 1996:7).

Professional portfolio building 329
2 PROBLEM STATEMENT
Traditionally, the teacher education programme at the University, like
most university studies, focused on the mastering of knowledge.
Therefore it was expected from learners to give proof of what they
knew and comprehended in written tests and examinations. In some
instances, though, learners did get the opportunity to apply theory ±
but in an abstract way and in non-authentic case studies!
The answering of questions served as end product. Not much attention
was given to the learning process as such and professional development
was not taken into account. The imperative to provide for the
foregoing aspects is stressed by De Fina (1992:102): ``Optimal learning
is best achieved when students are examined in a variety of contexts as
well as by determining not only what a learner has learned but how a
learner is learning.''
The overarching problem, therefore, was to find an alternative to the
written examination students used to write that will complement an
outcomes-based approach to teacher education.
3 AIM AND OBJECTIVES
The aim of the research reported in this article, namely the replacement
of the traditional assessment strategies with portfolio assessment vests
within the critical outcomes. These were selected and contextualized
for the semester module on Didactics (Du Toit 200) for the postgraduate
Higher Education Diploma programme as follows:
Ð
Ð
Ð
Ð
Reflect on your professional development as education
practitioner and use a variety of strategies to learn more
effectively.
Solve problems regarding the teaching practice and make
accountable decisions using critical and creative thinking.
Work with other education practitioners as a member of a
team.
Collect, analyze, organize and critically evaluate information
regarding the teaching practice.

330
Ð
Communicate effectively using visual and verbal language
skills in curriculum documentation, learning material and
research documentation.
Linked to these outcomes, the following specific outcomes (Du Toit
2000), among others, have been formulated:
Ð
Ð
Design an action research plan for your own professional
development.
Execute your action research plan and document the outcomes
by means of a professional development portfolio.
To assess these specific outcomes, the traditional written semester
examination was replaced by a portfolio examination assignment
(Appendix A). In doing so, the lecturer responsible intentionally
provided for an alternative assessment opportunity that complements
an outcomes-based practice and its focus on professional developmental
aspects. In voicing the importance of a focus on professional
development for effective teaching and learning, which are to be found
in an outcomes-based approach, the lecturer is very much aware of the
imperative of acting as role-model for student teachers.
Complementary to the overarching aim of the research the following
objectives have been set:
Ð
Ð
Ð
To establish to what extent the building of a professional
portfolio provided learners the opportunity of developing as
flexible learners.
Closely linked to the latter the research study was executed to
establish to what extent the building of a portfolio provided
students the opportunity of becoming independent learners
who can monitor their own professional growth in a scientific
way, which include reflective learning, creative and critical
thinking, competence in action research, self-regulated learning
and language.
Developing students' research capacity.
During the introductory part to the module students are given the

Professional portfolio building 331
opportunity to reflect on past experiences regarding teaching and
learning. They usually come to the conclusion that there has been too
little emphasis on the learning process as experienced previously. To
help them, as prospective practitioners and to adapt to an outcomesbased
approach, which provides for both the process and outcome
(product), the focus in the module under discussion has been shifted to
providing opportunities for professional development, as well as
mastering competence in monitoring one's own learning process.
The process approach proposed by Costantino and Lorenzo (1998:7-8)
has been adapted to include the following phases, and to complement
the action research-driven process that forms the essence of the
portfolio:
Ð
Ð
Ð
Ð
Ð
Identification of an educational problem/weakness in one's
professional competence.
Identification of goals for improving one's education practice
and exploration of options that will facilitate achieving those
goals.
Selection of appropriate options for improvement and designing
an action plan to achieve these goals.
Implementation of the plan of action.
Documenting the outcome, which includes an action research
report; examples of work done; reflection on professional
growth and learning.
Portfolio assessment has been implemented as part of the teacher
education programme for the very same reasons as Costantino and
Lorenzo (1998:2) stipulate (adapted to the teacher education context):
Ð
Ð
Ð
It facilitates critical reflective thinking at a scientific level ± a
skill students do not have.
It presents a complete picture of achieving set outcomes of the
module.
``A come alive resume'' of the student's professional development
as prospective practitioner is presented.

332
Ð
Ð
It helps individuals to be responsible for their own professional
growth.
It correlates with national trends in assessment, such as
formative assessment.
4 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
A synchronic action research model is used. It is synchronic in the
sense that the lecturer as well as the students plan for improvement
and professional growth, execute the plans and compile professional
development portfolios in tandem during the course of the semester.
The following model for action research has been developed and is
being used by the lecturer. It is introduced to students to help them
comprehend the cyclic and continuous nature of action research, which
is totally new to them. The model is based on the work of specialists
referred to in the work of Hodgkinson and Maree (1998). Instead of
planning for change, the author prefers to use planning for improvement.
Since the steps to be followed in this sequential, cyclic model are quite
obvious, they will not be discussed as such. Rather, their application in
the specific practice will be outlined as exemplar.
An in-depth study of relevant literature serves as basis for the action
research undertaken. Qualitative feedback obtained from students,
feedback from colleagues, and self-assessment are used for triangulation
purposes.
Phase 1: Planning for improvement
Over the past five years, the lecturer deliberately changed the written
examination papers from being knowledge-based to being outcomesbased.
The inclusion of questions, complementing the outcomes-based
approach, though, did not satisfy the need for reflective and flexible
learning. The curriculum also did not provide for developing students'
research competence and proof of professional development.

Professional portfolio building 333
FIGURE 1
Action research model
Planning for improvement
. Innovative and accountable curriculum development
3
!
Acting to improve
. Innovative and accountable teaching practice
. Innovative and accountable assessment practice
!
Observing the effects of new actions
. Personal observations?
. Diagnostic assessment
!
Reflecting on the change process and improvements
. Self-assessment
!
Innovative and accountable new actions
With the introduction of outcomes-based education, the idea of
portfolio assessment and professional development were new concepts
that students had to grasp and apply. Therefore specific outcomes
related to portfolio assessment and professional growth were for-

334
mulated. Relevant learning and assessment opportunities complemented
curriculum initiatives. For the purpose of this article the
radical change to the format of the examination forms the core of the
discussion.
The portfolio assignment as such was developed over a period of four
years. It was formulated and scrutinized by colleagues and tested with
students enrolled for the Diploma in Higher Education and Training
Practice during 1997±2000, and students enrolled for the Higher
Education Diploma during 1999 and 2000. The portfolio assignment
was formulated in such a way that provision is made for covering the
core of the curriculum, and to demonstrate the competence to integrate
different educational aspects. It also provides for developing intrinsicbased
assets such as flexible learning. Measured against the expected
learning outcomes, the portfolio examination satisfies the requirement
of content validity.
In the view of the collaborative nature of action research, students
were allowed to work in pairs ± another innovative idea that
challenged the examination system that allows individual work only.
Phase 2: Implementation
The written semester examination was replaced by the portfolio
assignment. Because of the research-driven nature of the portfolio, the
groups of students were surprised on receiving the ``exam paper'' at
the commencement of the programme in February 2000. The due date
for submission was June.
Hand in hand with the students' on-going development of their
professional portfolios, formative assessment opportunities and
learning opportunities conducive to the execution of students' action
research were planned and implemented. As first developmental phase
students had to write a research proposal. Proof of peer assessment had
to be included, as well as evidence of their improvement based on the
feedback from peers. Students were also encouraged to discuss
proposals with the tutor and to use the lecturer's feedback for
improvement purposes. They were also encouraged to test their ideas

Professional portfolio building 335
with the lecturer and to adapt their proposals accordingly. The lecturer
then assessed the proposals. A mark, as part of the final semester mark,
was allocated. A diagnostic assessment rubric was designed for the
purpose of self, peer and lecturer assessment.
Phase 3: Observation
For the purpose of observation, different partners involved in the
lecturer's practice were asked for comments/feedback on the implementation
of the portfolio assessment. Cohen and Manion's (Zuber-
Skerritt 1992:139) idea of multiple method triangulation was used to
get a more holistic perspective on the portfolio assessment as an
educational outcome. Triangulation can schematically be represented
as in figure 2.
Feedback from students has been obtained by means of different
questionnaires. Among others, one questionnaire was designed to get
feedback from students about their experience of professional portfolio
development. The other questionnaire was used for the purpose of
student feedback on the module as a whole.
Specialists include the following partners:
Ð
Ð
Ð
The external examiner
Colleagues at national and international level
Post-graduate students who acted as co-researchers
An external examiner from the University of South Africa was
appointed. She was provided with a copy of the portfolio examination
as well as a study manual that included the module outcomes. After
assessing and verification of the examination assignment, it was
returned without any amendments, and with the single comment that
``It is an innovative idea''. At the end of the semester, a sample of 10 of
the final portfolios assessed by the lecturer was submitted for external
moderation. A full report was written and submitted to the Faculty
secretary.

336
FIGURE 2
Multiple method triangulation regarding assessment practice
Practitioner
~
± Portfolios as outcomes
6
!
6
Assessment practice
± Portfolio assessment
6
~
~
6
Students
± Questionnaires
3
6
6
"
Specialists
. External examiner
± Report
. Colleagues/critical friends
(National and international)
± Interviews
± Informal feedback
. Post-graduate students
± Research report
Informal feedback was obtained from colleagues at the University as
well as critical friends at universities from abroad, inter alia the
University of Maryland, Iowa State University, University of Oklahoma,
in the United States of America, as well as the University of
Queensland, Australia. The whole idea was well received by colleagues
as innovative and the way to go. ``Critical friends'' (external assessors)
from abroad also assessed the practice as one of high standard. One
external assessor from the Australian university, though, thought it to
be too comprehensive and difficult.
Postgraduate students enrolled for the Bachelor of Education (BEd)

Professional portfolio building 337
programme who were not active practitioners at the time of their
studies, were encouraged to act as co-researchers for the lecturer's
practice. The dual purpose of doing that was to have research support
for one's own research, and to make the students' professional
portfolios more authentic.
The lecturer as practitioner's observation is multifaceted. He is in the
prime position to observe students' growth at first hand. Monitoring
curriculum development activities during contact sessions, and
assessment opportunities provide him with an array of observation
possibilities. This article reports on the lecturer's observation of how
students opted for implementing principles of flexible learning in the
process of developing their professional portfolios, and demonstrating
active participation in monitoring their learning processes, professional
growth, as well as on the final portfolios as outcome.
Phase 4: Reflection
Reflection is an integrated part of self-regulated learning ± a necessity
for professional portfolio development and monitoring one's learning
style flexibility. It demands specific skills. Skills of reflection,
according to Senge (in McGill & Beaty 1996:195) ``... concern slowing
down our own thinking processes so that we can become more aware of
howweformourmentalmodelsandthewaystheyinfluenceour
actions''. It also implies being aware of and taking responsibility for
one's professional development.
Intentional reflection was done by interpreting the outcome of the
different partners' observations. It also included taking a retrospective
view of the attitude and experience of previous groups in an informal,
comparative manner.
The lecturer was very much aware of the fact that the students were
challenged by the outcomes-based practice, and the demanding task of
undertaking action research as novice practitioners. The execution of
their action research was further complicated by the programme as a
whole being more academic, with only four weeks of authentic
teaching experience during school practice.

338
Phase 5: Evaluation
Evaluation of the whole process of portfolio building was done to make
sure that the necessary adjustments could be made. The evaluation
phase consists of two dimensions, namely the structural and affective.
These two dimensions fit the concept of metalearning as described by
Biggs (1985:204).
The structural dimension includes aspects like administrative and
organizational ability, as academic and scientific accountability. The
latter includes the criteria for accountable assessment. The affective
dimension focuses on the psychological and emotional effect of the
assessment practice on the practitioner. By introducing students to the
concept of action research and challenging them to execute their
individual action research projects in the same way as discussed above,
the third objective of building students' research capacity was met.
5 COLLECTING OF DATA
Several instruments are used in the process of portfolio development to
help promote a culture of reflective learning among students as well as
the lecturer as partners. Therefore the aim of the different instruments
used to collect data is two-fold. On the one hand items are focused on
the lecturer's actions or documentation. On the other, students are
deliberately given the opportunity to reflect on their own learning
processes. Making use of triangulation, the different sets of data can be
interpreted meaningfully, validated, and acted upon.
For the purpose of this article only the data collected by means of a
feedback questionnaire on portfolio assessment will be reported, which
serve as exemplar. A four-point scale is used, with 1 as indicative of
total disagreement and 4 total agreement. The feedback on portfolio
assessment is summarized in the table below:

Professional portfolio building 339
TABLE 1
Feedback on portfolio assessment
Section B: Experience regarding portfolio assess-
ment
Average score
N = 45
1 The execution of the examination assignment
(portfolio compilation) has more worth than a
written exam. 3.6
2 Critical thinking is stimulated. 3.6
3 Research skills are developed. 3.7
4 Creativity is promoted. 3.4
5 Self-regulated learning is promoted. 3.4
6 Reflective learning can be practiced. 3.5
7 Action research is useful for my own professional
development as teacher. 3.2
8 Portfolio assessment is a handy strategy for
promoting lifelong learning. 3.2
9 The assignment caters for learning style
flexibility/whole brain learning. 3.4
10 The assignment is complementary to the
lecturer's assessment practice as a whole. 3.5
11 Deep learning is promoted. 3.9
12 Productive learning occurred. 3.6
A separate section on the responsibility of the learner was added to
help learners reflect on managing their own learning processes. The
feedback on this section is summarized in table 2.

340
TABLE 2
Reflection on own learning process
Section C: Completion of assignment
Average score
1 I studied the examination assignment thoroughly
and ensured that I understand what is
expected of me. 3.5
2 I ensured that I am knowledgeable regarding
portfolio assessment and action research. 3.2
3 I ensured that my portfolio adheres to all the
set criteria (as indicated in the exam assignment).
3.7
4 The assignment challenged me to develop my
full potential. 3.4
5 The execution of the assignment encouraged
me to explore possibilities for portfolio assessment
in my own subject field. 3.6
6 I worked continuously on the assignment
since the commencement of the semester. 2.7
7 I ensured that my documentation is furnished
professionally and technically. 3.5
8 I ensured that the language used in my
documentation is of a high standard. 3.4
9 I spent sufficient time on doing the assignment.
3.3
It can be deducted from the above information that all aspects
regarding portfolio assessment have been experienced as very positive.
The single low score of 2.7 (item 7) reflects the lack of students'
commitment to continuously work on their portfolio development. In
future the lecturer ought to intentionally plan for guiding students in
managing their progress on a continuous basis. It could be hypothe-

Professional portfolio building 341
sized that students are not able to do self-management of learning over
a period of time, because they are used to written tests and
examinations that are long-term goals towards which they work on in a
once-off fashion (by cramming just before they have to produce the end
product). The process of continuous professional development,
though, asks for setting and mastering of continual short-term goals.
6 PROMOTING FLEXIBLE LEARNING
The metaphoric whole brain model of Herrmann (1995) is introduced to
students as an example of catering for diversity and promoting flexible
learning. Portfolio assessment therefore has been introduced to
demonstrate how flexible learning could be applied in practice. The
portfolio examination is structured to incorporate the expectations of
learners in all four quadrants (see figure 3). The process of developing
the portfolio facilitates the development of the full potential of learners
± thus, learning in all four quadrants. By doing so, learners' thinking
preferences are accommodated and areas of lesser preference and
avoidance are activated.
In summary, the portfolio provides the opportunity to, amongst others,
develop:
Ð
Ð
Ð
Ð
A quadrant learning, which has as focus the rational self,
because it is research-based.
B quadrant learning, which has as focus the safekeeping self,
because the learner has to plan thoroughly and has to monitor
the action research process.
C quadrant learning, which has as focus the feeling self,
because the emphasis is on personal development.
D quadrant learning, which has as focus the experimental self,
because the learner has to think holistically and experiment
with innovative ideas.

342
FIGURE 3
Expectations of learners with thinking preferences in the four quadrants
The learner with an A quadrant
thinking preference expects:
. Precise, to the point information
. Theory and logical rationales
. Proof of validity
. Research references
. Textbook readings
. Numbers, data
The learner with a B quadrant
thinking preference expects:
. Organised, consistent approaches
. Staying on track, on time
. Complete subject chunks
. A beginning, middle and end
. Practise and evaluate
. Practical application
. Examples
. Clear instructions/expectations
The learner with a Dquadrant
thinking preference expects:
. Fun and spontaneity
. Playful approaches
. Pictures, metaphors, overviews
. Discovering and exploration
. Quick pace and variety in
format
. Opportunity to experiment
The learner with a C quadrant
thinking preference expects:
. Group discussion
. Sharing, expressing ideas
. Feeling based
. Hands on learning
. Personal connection
. Emotional involvement
. User-friendly learning
. Use of all senses
7 OUTCOMES OF THE RESEARCH
By introducing portfolio assessment in the module under investigation,
the set objectives of the research have been achieved. In addition,
the following aspects added value to the practice:
Ð
Ð
Ð
In-depth, productive learning has taken place.
Portfolio assessment promotes and enhances formative assessment.
The curriculum has been enriched.

Professional portfolio building 343
Ð
Ð
Ð
Ð
Creativity is stimulated because students are not inhibited by
one single format; and they select their own focus of study.
The lecturer learns much from students.
Diversity in terms of learning styles/whole brain learning is
catered for.
The next step for improving the practice could be planned for.
8 CONCLUSION
Introducing portfolio assessment to student teachers is a major
challenge for everyone involved. The practice under discussion could
metaphorically be described by means of the following poem by a
French philosopher (Slabbert 1997:32):
Come to the edge, he said.
They said: We are afraid.
Come to the edge, he said.
They came.
He pushed them ... and they flew.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Biggs, J B 1985. The role of metalearning in study processes. British journal of educational
psychology, 55:185-212.
Centra, J A 1993. Reflective faculty evaluation. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.
Costantino, M & Lorenzo, M N 1998. Developing a professional teaching portfolio: A guide for
educators. College of Education, University of Maryland.
Danielson, C & Abrutyn, L 1997. An introduction to using portfolios in the classroom.
Virginia: Association for Supervision and Curriculum Development.
Du Toit, P H 2000. Study manual for Pedagogics 412. Faculty of Education, University of
Pretoria.
Ellis, D 1997. Becoming a master student. Massachusetts: Houghton Mifflin Company.
Herrmann, N 1995. The creative brain. Lake Lure: The Ned Herrmann Group.
Hodgkinson, C A & Maree, J G 1998. Action research: Some guidelines for first-time
researchers in education. Journal of education and training, 19 (2):51-65.
Kimeldorf, M 1996. Creating portfolios for success in school, work and life. Free Style
Publishing.

344
Lustig, K 1996. Portfolio assessment: A handbook for middle level teachers. Columbus:
National Middle School Association.
McGill, I & Beaty, L 1996. Action learning: A guide for professional, management and
educational development. London: Kogan Page.
Republic of South Africa 2000. Government gazette. No 20844. Pretoria: Government
Printer.
Slabbert, J A 1997. A quantum leap to excellence: The challenge for education. (Manuscript)
Zuber-Skerritt, O 1992. Action research in higher education: Examples and reflections.
London: Kogan Page.

Appendix A 345
Appendix A
University of Pretoria
Department of Teaching and Training Studies
Examination Portfolio
Internal examiner: Author
External examiner: Unisa staff member
Assignment:
June 2000
At your specific school, you are undergoing external evaluation. Your
head of department requests that you do a proposal regarding your
professional development as teacher. Compile a complete portfolio,
based on action research on your competence in facilitating learning,
linked to the professional training you are currently enrolled for.
Criteria:
. Be creative in compiling your portfolio.
. Provide evidence of your ability to think holistically and that you
areabletoworkinanintegratedfashion.
. Indicate how you made provision for:
Ð Outcomes-based education
Ð Co-operative learning
Ð Learning style differentiated teaching-learning
Ð Metalearning and -teaching
. Give proof of continuous peer assessment and self-reflection.
Ð Your literature study should include at least the following:
Relevant educational aspects
Ð Professional self-development
Ð Preferred model for teaching and learning
ÐResearch
Ð Portfolio assessment
Ð Outcomes-based education

346
Ð Learning styles/whole brain learning
Ð Metalearning
. Documentation of your research should comply to the following
general requirements for academic publications:
Ð A creative title
ÐName of author(s)
Ð Table of contents
Ð Introduction
Ð Problem statement
Ð Hypothesis (if applicable)
Ð Aim/objectives/questions
Ð Discussion of research methodology
Ð Discussion of investigation (different sections/focuses)
Ð Findings/recommendations
Ð Bibliography (according to the condensed Harvard method)
. Length: 20-30 pages (excluding samples, annexures)
. The research report forms part of the portfolio
. Marks:
Technical: 10
Language: 10
Content: 80
Total: 100%
. Date of submission: June
Enjoy the challenge!

347